Vibpro

Pelton Company, Inc.
VIB PRO
06Feb03
The information contained herein is proprietary to

Pelton Company, Inc. The issuance of this sheet
does not constitute a right to copy or distribute
this material or construct the equipment described
herein.
C:\V6MAN\VIBPRO\COVERSHT.DOC
Headquarters:
Shipping
Pelton Company Inc.
1500 N. Waverly
P.O. Box 1415
Ponca City, Ok 74602
Technical support
Email: pelton@peltonco.com
Access and download the latest Pelton information and upgrades:
Product information
Firmware releases
Software programs
Training schedule
Manuals and documentation in PDF format
From our World Wide Web site by entering our URL into your Internet
browser:
http://www.peltonco.com
Phone and Fax:
USA phone (580) 762-6341

fax (580) 762-0023
England
Input/Output, Inc.
Fax: 44.1603.411403
Phone: 44.1603.411400
Russia
Igor Skobelev
Phone: 7.095.279.1559
C:\V6MAN\VIBPRO\COVERSHT.DOC
ADVANCE III VIB PRO
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION......................................... 1.1.1
FIRMWARE REVISION SUMMARY.................................. 1.2.1
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS & CONNECTIONS...................... 1.3.1
PARAMETER ENTRY MENUS...................................... 1.4.1
BASIC SYSTEM OPERATION

VIB PRO ENCODER............................................ 2.1.1
VIB PRO DECODER............................................ 2.2.1
DECODER CALIBRATION........................................ 2.3.1
SHOT PRO CONTROL........................................... 2.4.1
POLARITY AND PHASE INFORMATION.................................. 3.1.1
SWEEP GENERATION & CONTROL

KEYBOARD SWEEPS.............................................. 4.1.1
STORED VALUE SWEEPS.......................................... 4.2.1
RANDOM SWEEPS............................................... 4.3.1
AMPLITUDE & PHASE............................................ 4.4.1
RADIO TELEMETRY (PSS AND START CODES)............................. 5.1.1

VIB PRO ENCODER RECORDER COMMAND SEQUENCE MODE.............. 5.2.1
GPS OPERATIONS
VIB PRO WITH GPS............................................. 6.1.1
PELTON SUB-METER SYSTEM..................................... 6.2.1
RADIO COMMUNICATIONS CARD (RCC)............................. 6.3.1
NOVATEL OEM4 GPS RECEIVER SETUP............................. 6.4.1
COMPUTER PROGRAMS
COM4ALL...................................................... 7.1.1
ENCODER SETUP PROGRAM......................................... 7.2.1
ENCODER COMPUTER PROGRAM..................................... 7.3.1
SWEEP PROGRAM................................................ 7.4.1
VIBPRO STORED VALUES.......................................... 7.5.1
VPKOP COMPUTER PROGRAM....................................... 7.6.1
VIBRA*SIG FOR WINDOWS........................................ 7.7.1
VIBQC VIBRATOR QC-SIMILARITY ANALYSIS........................ 7.8.1
GPSMAP (DOS) PROGRAM......................................... 7.9.1
06Feb03
C:\My Documents\V6MAN\Vibpro2\vptoc.doc
SYSTEM INSTALLATION
ENCODER...................................................... 8.1.1
DECODER...................................................... 8.2.1
START TIME ADJUSTMENT......................................... 8.3.1
SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
MODULE DESCRIPTION - BLOCK DIAGRAMS.......................... 9.1.1
RADIO TIMING DIAGRAM......................................... 9.2.1
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS.......................................... 9.3.1
OPTIONS
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY SYSTEM (DSS)......................... 10.1.1
VIBRATOR SIGNATURE SYSTEM (VSS)............................. 11.1.1
VIBRATOR NETWORK (VIB NET).................................. 11.2.1
APPENDIXES
A - BACKPLANE SIGNAL ABBREVIATIONS.......................... 12.1.1
B BACKPLANE SIGNAL CROSS-REFERENCE......................... 12.2.1
C GLOSSARY OF TERMS........................................ 12.3.1
D PELTON COMPUTER PROGRAM ABBREVIATIONS................... 12.4.1
E SEG-P1 FILE FORMAT...................................... 12.5.1
DOCUMENTATION.................................................... 13.1.1
06Feb03
C:\My Documents\V6MAN\Vibpro2\vptoc.doc
Introduction Page 1.1.1
PELTON VIB PRO
INTRODUCTION
The Advance III Vib Pro servo hydraulic vibrator control system typically
consists of one Encoder unit and multiple Decoder units. A software
selection in the Vib Pro setup allows any Vib Pro unit to be configured
as either an Encoder or Decoder. The Encoder is typically connected to a
seismic recording system and the Decoders are each installed in a servo-
hydraulic vibrator. The main function of the Advance III Vib Pro system
is to control the servo-hydraulic vibrator units and generate vibratory
signals and synchronize the output of several vibrator units with the
recording system. Start synchronization is accomplished via a set of
radio telemetry messages between the Encoder and Decoders known as Start
Codes.
After receipt of the start code the Decoders begin controlling the servo-
hydraulic vibrators in an oscillatory fashion to vibrate the ground.
This is known as a sweep signal, which has been predefined in the Encoder
and Decoders. There are a variety of different sweep selections
available in the Vib Pro system, which allow customization of the sweep
signal for varying earth conditions. Typically sweeps operate at
frequencies between 5 and 120 Hz with a duration of 3 to 32 seconds.
During the sweep the Vib Pro Decoder controls both the phase and
amplitude of the vibrator output in an attempt to match the desired sweep
as closely as possible.
Typically there is a pair of accelerometers mounted on the vibrators

Reaction Mass and another pair on the baseplate assembly. These
accelerometers are used to measure the vibrators output. The Weighted
Sum, defined as the acceleration of the Reaction Mass multiplied by its
weight plus the acceleration of the baseplate multiplied by its weight,
is the most commonly used output measurement. The Weighted Sum is also
known as the estimated Ground Force and is generally accepted as the best
output measurement to use in the control of the vibrator. However, users
are free to select the Weighted Sum or any other motion signal available
on the vibrator for output control.
In each pair of accelerometers one is used for the feedback control

system (known as the Loop accelerometer) and the second is used for the
similarity performance system (known as the Sim accelerometers).
Similarity checks are performed to verify that all vibrators are
performing similarly and within specified limits. At the initiation of a
sweep, a radio similarity may be requested from one vibrator.
09Oct01
C:\My Documents\V6MAN\Vibpro2\Ch01-1-1.doc
The output from that vibrator is modulated over the radio by the Decoder
unit and demodulated by the Encoder unit to produce an analog output
signal at the recording truck known as the Radio Vibrator signal. This
Radio Vibrator output signal is compared to the Encoder's Radio Reference
Signal to judge the quality of the vibrator performance. Wireline
similarities may also be performed to test all vibrators simultaneously.
During the execution of a sweep, the Decoders perform a variety of tests
and measurements. The results of these measurements are reported to the
Encoder at the completion of the sweep. This report is known as PSS,
which is an acronym for Post Sweep Service. The PSS report is made
available to the operator immediately after the completion of the sweep
on the Encoder's computer screen. PSS results are compared to the
operators entered acceptable limits and errors are flagged so as to
catch the operators attention. Because of the comprehensive tests
performed by the PSS system similarities are a redundant test generally
done only at the beginning of each recording day.
All parameters for both Encoder and Decoder operation are stored in the
Vib Pro memory. Some parameters, such as the sweep definitions, are used
in both Decoder and Encoder modes. Other parameters, such as those for
phase and force control, are mode specific and used only in the
appropriate mode.
A separate IBM compatible computer is connected to the Encoder for
control and operation. This computer is used to load parameters into all
Vib Pro units, record and display PSS information and analyze radio
similarities. An optional computer may be added to the Decoders for GPS
optional navigation, the Vibrator Source Signature System (VSS), and the
Vib Net System.
The Pelton GPS option consists of an integral GPS receiver mounted inside
the Vib Pro unit, a GPS antenna and a second radio and modem system to
receive differential GPS correction information from a reference station.
The GPS option allows vibrator position recording and provides a very
accurate clock, which is used to automatically adjust the internal
oscillator in the Vib Pro units.
The Pelton Vibrator Source Signature (VSS) System acquires, condition and
performs QC checks of the raw accelerometer data. The system records the
raw Reaction Mass, Baseplate and Ground Force accelerometer signals, and
the True Reference signal to a standard PCMCIA Flash Disk Card. VSS
system Operational status reports can be sent as part of the PSS Data to
the central recording system and displayed in its own window of the
Windows Vibra * Sig program. The optional VGA display can added for
Vibrator operator navigation to pre-loaded source points.
09Oct01
The Vib Net System is designed to provide navigation and Source Driven
Acquisition functionality to a Vibroseis crew. The Navigation feature
allows the vibrator operators to navigate to a given Flag position or any
locations, either by a displayed position or by Voice Commands from the
computer. The Center Of Gravity (COG) feature allows the Master Vibrator
to collect the position of each vibrator in the Vib Net Network, after
all the vibrators are in position and their Baseplates are down. Vib Net
calculates the (COG) of the Energy Source (Vibs). The information is
transmitted, through the Vib Pro Decoder (VPD) in the Master Vibrator,
back to the Recording Truck in a PSS Data format. The data is then
displayed on the Pelton Windows Map32 program, prior to Data
Acquisition.
The Pelton Shot Pro dynamite firing system is also compatible with the
Advance III Vib Pro system since it can be configured to send and receive
Advance III messaging. A simple selection at the Vib Pro Encoder allows
the operator to choose between Shot Pro and Vib Pro starting. The
WVSig32 computer program automatically switches modes to display the
returning PSS data appropriately. This feature simplifies operations by
allowing both energy sources to be controlled from a single Encoder.
09Oct01
Firmware Summary Page 1.2.1
Firmware Revision Summary
Version 2 September 15, 1998

Changed Main H8S and Sharc Firmware.
Sharc was changed to the ADSP-21060.
Changed lift timing back.
Fixed problem with sensing of External Down.
Version 3 September 15, 1998

Changed Modem Firmware.
Version 3-B November 9, 1998

Changed Sharc Firmware.
Version 3-C November 10, 1998

Changed Modem H8S and Sharc Firmware.
Corrected possible 4 millisecond Start Time Error.
Version 4 October 02, 1998

Added GPS HDOP to main screen.
GPS status display between sweeps
Display a P when GPS PPS Pulse is present.
PPS is no longer required to get GPS.
Save System Clock adjust value in PSS for next Power ON time.
RE-XMIT missed PSS is now working.
Improvements to VSS (but not completed)
Added PSS Types 4, 5, 14 and 15 for VSS.
Fixed display of Phase Control ON/OFF.
Clear correlation data and sweep checksum on and aborted
sweep.
Version 5 November 9, 1998

Upgrade of Main H8S and Sharc Firmware.
Signature Header is sent at reception of Start from Modem.
For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Version 6 November 10, 1998
Upgrade of Main H8S, Modem and Sharc Firmware.
KOP Load and Down-load to Local Box in Radio Mode if the local
Box VIB ID is selected.
Improved Display of internal errors.
PSS record is not saved on manual sweeps in the Vib, ESG PSS
records are still always saved.
The total number of PSS records saved is 999.
Enabled Limits for Error Display in the electronics.
Three channels Vib Signature (VSS) are now working (Reference,
Reaction Mass and Baseplate)
Sweep Type 101 in decoder allows a Remote Start to act like a
Radio Start. The PSS data will always be sent in the first PSS
time slot.
Accelerometer comparison plots added to VDISPLAY.
Com 5/UARTD serial warning has been removed, was falsely set by
internal noise.
Corrected possible 4 millisecond Start Time Error.
Version 7 February 19, 1999

Three different operation screens to choose from in Decoder
mode.
Advance Control Menu added.
Simplified keyboard entry of parameters.
Remote Down and Auto Up works like Advance II.
Raised the Interrupt Priority level for serial data from the
Sharc to the Main H8S.
The Display of warnings are under the control of the
operator.
Corrected a set lock-up caused by error in GPS data.
Corrected a set lock-up caused by a hardware error with the
UART.
Sweep ID of 0000 is not allowed. (Sweep ID range 1 - 65535)
Recorder Start Active in Encoder Mode is used as hardware Ready
that goes Low at Time Break and goes High at the end of ESG
Listen time.
If the lift comes up during a Sweep, a Sweep Aborted warning is
indicated.
Preliminary Sharc Peek/Poke.
Fixed non linear sweeps generation.
Changed Force Presets.

Version 7A March 1, 1999
Sharc Version 9.08 and H8S Version 19
Changed Reset UARTD after each Sweep. Clears error in PSS
data.
Version 7A-2 April 20, 1999

Sharc Version 9.10
Changed Force Preset algorithm.
Version 7A-3 May 18, 1999

Signature data change by 180 degrees phase.
Version 7B April 28, 1999

Sharc Version 9.00
Disabled time control when in random sweep.
Main H8S Version 20

Single Radio GPS RTCM Correction Option.
Added New Menu Selection Hardware Setup. Selections under the
Hardware Setup menu:
Time Break Active - High or Low

Selects Active High or Active Low Time Break Signal. Firmware
prior to April 1999 was set in firmware to Active High.
Recorder Start Active - High or Low

Selects Active High or Active Low for Recorder Start Signal.
Firmware prior to April 1999 was not enabled.
GPS PPS Active - High or Low

Selects input polarity of GPS PPS pulse. Either Active high or
Active Low. Firmware prior to April 1999 was set in firmware
to Active Low.
Version 7C May 11, 1999

Ready message comes faster at the end of the sweep.

Version 7C-3 June 15, 1999
Sharc Version 9.15
Inverted VSS data by 180 degrees.
H8S Version 23
PSS Delayed with optional current GPS position after the Sweep.
New Job profile and Hardware menu with KOP Support.
Version 7C-4 June 29, 1999

H8S Version 24
Delayed PSS
Current GPS
Fixed retransmit of not found PSS
Job profile and hardware menu with KOP Support
Modem Version 0004
Radio Polarity selections by keyboard entry
Test Mode
Serial communication with H8S with Version # display
Sharc Version 10.03
Re-organized code
Changed VSS filter from 37pF to 61pF.
Force preset time entry.
Sharc Version 10.04
Corrected TM and Valve offset measurements made during
calibration.
Force preset time entry changed to control the time when the
fixed drive is disabled and the force control is enabled.
Reduced reference amplitude by 2% to avoid clipping in VSS
data.
Sharc Version 10.05
Predictive Phase gain reduced above 50Hz.
Sharc Version 10.06
Predictive Force gain reduced above 50Hz.
Fixed problem with negative initial advance looking up unit.
Sharc Version 10.07
Added new mass and valve LVDT alignment procedure.
Sharc Version 10.09
Automatic TM polarity reversal fixed.
Calibration works faster, delays for moving mass have been
decreased.

Sharc Version 10.10
DC offset removed from VSS accelerometer data.
Analog Filter Amplitude correction removed from VSS data, but
is still used for force control.
Sharc Version 10.12
Force target level averaged over one cycle, improves force
preset during tapers.
Fixed Force level computation problem with all Ver 10 Sharc.
Previous Force error was about 2% on VS2.
Sharc Version 10.13
Corrected overflow problem with predictive force control
memory.
Sharc Version 10.14
Special Firmware with Force Preset Time forced equal to zero.
This version is to be used with crews using old H8S firmware.
Version 8 August 30, 1999

H8S Version 25
The firmware will run on either the H8S/2655 processor (one
time programmable) or the H8S/2357 processor (re-programmable
flash).
Start Delay has been added to the Encoder. (Range 1 second to
65.535 seconds)
LVDT Adjustment Test has been added to the calibration menu
Menus and Sub-menus have been numbered for easier reference
Delayed PSS is allowed if RE-XMIT PSS is off.
The problem has been fixed that when a similarity was requested
with Delayed PSS mode of operation, the GPS position that was
reported after the sweep, was always from the last vibrator
groups position that swept before the similarity was requested.
When running multiple groups of vibrators, all vibrators must
have the same Crew Number and Start Code as the controlling Vib
Pro Encoder.
The Vib Pro Encoder will now not respond to a Start Code
received on the radio.
If Password is enabled, Radio Starts are allowed while in the
process of entering the password to get access to the sub-menus.
Fixed the problem of the Vib Pro Encoder not running Stored
Values Sweeps

Sharc Version 10.15

New mode of initial settings correction. Phase Preset Auto = 3
or Initial Advance Auto = 3 - automatic mode for phase and time
presets with slower update than normal automatic mode (1).
Sweep End Message time has increased from 10 msec to 30 msec.
This allows the Vib Pro Decoder enough time to receive the VSS
status information from the VSS computer before it is time to
send the PSS data back to the Vib Pro Encoder.
The changes that were made to the reference amplitude in
version 10.04 now do not affect the force level on SERQC graphs.
Sharc Version 10.16

Fixed the problem that in Stored Values mode, the last 50 mSec
of the sweep was missed.
DC removal was slowed down to reduce the effect on the force
meter phase plot.
Version 8A September 24, 1999

H8S Version 26
The Lift is restored to the position it was in at last power
down when the set is first turned on.
The check of the status of the Lift at power on, has been
delayed to prevent a Lift Error. The Lift Error is caused by a
positive voltage being read on both the UP and DOWN lift coils.
The checking of the Lift is not done when the Vib Pro is in
Encoder Mode. This prevents a Lift Error in the Vib Pro Encoder
if the Lift Card is not installed.
Sharc Version 10.17

Limits for slow initial settings correction (Version 10.15):
time - 1 mSec max, phase - 5 degrees max.
In cycle-time mode time correction are made every 0.5 seconds
(was every cycle). This gives more stability on frequencies >
150 Hz. (This change was changed back in Version 10.18)
Sweep length of more than 64 seconds is now working.
Sharc Version 10.18

Cycle-time mode has been changed back to every cycle correction
(like Version 10.17)
The Sharc can work with either the Feedback Detector / Servo
card or the new Hydraulic Interface Card.

Sharc Version 10.19
The problem has been fixed that the parameters of the second
sweep segment were not read correctly when predictive phase was
on. The Vib Pro displayed KOP ERROR.
Modem Version 0005

The firmware will run on either the H8S/2655 processor (one
time programmable) or the H8S/2357 processor (re-programmable
flash).
Version 9 March 27, 2000

MAIN H8S Version 28:
Further improvements to start code immunity. Both the Encoder
and Decoder now completely ignore start codes with another crew
number. Previously, sweeps were not initiated if the crew number
did not match but the sweep number was loaded into the buffer.
Buffer wrap around in UART D (Com Port 5) has been corrected.
In the Decoder, this caused an occasional missed VSS status
message. In the Encoder, an RTI message would be missed. The
frequency of this was on the order of once or twice a day in
continuous operation.
A timeout has been added to the Vib Pro Encoder which allows it
to go ahead and prepare to sweep in the event the Ready To
Sweep message is not received from the Sharc. Without the
timeout an occasional missed message from the Sharc at power up
would cause the system to hang up.
In Decoder mode with the lift in the UP position pressing the
EXIT button and selecting Calibration from the Pressure Up
Vibrator, vibrator screen would cause the system to hang up with
a blank screen forever. In this condition, the Decoder now
prompts the operator with the following message:
LIFT IS UP
PUT LIFT DOWN
TO DO CALIBRATION
This message will remain on the screen for 5 seconds and then the
system will return to the Pressure Up Vibrator screen.
Clock adjustment now only responds to the first serial start
message.
Prevention of a possible oscillating state was added to the
automatic clock adjustment.
Decoders now force the Start Code Sub type to 01 when a manual
sweep is started.

Master/Slave/Monitor modes of operation are now available.
Refer to a full description of this functionality in Pelton Vib
Pro Manual Chapter 5.1.1.
VSSTST sweep type has been added to the sweep menu. Selecting
this specialized sweep type will force the length to 10 seconds.
Version number message added to KOP protocol. Refer to KOP
feature number 14 for a description of this function.
Recorder Command Sequence Mode has been added to address RTI
race conditions with some recording systems. Refer to Pelton Vib
Pro Manual Chapter 5.2.1 for a full description of this
functionality.
Stored Values sweep selection has been improved. When a Stored
Values sweep type is selected the table of sweep lengths received
from the Sharc is now read and the length is forced into that
entry. Item 11 of Sweep Menu now changes from Constant to
StrValSwp# to help the user understand where to make the sweep
number selection.
Improved Encoder Main Screen: Operating modes indicated as -
Normal, Master, Slave, or Monitor. Vibrator requested for radio
similarities is displayed. Start Source - Recorder, Pelton
Program, or Keyboard is now indicated.
Modem H8S Version 0006
With some Radio systems, transmitted data will cross feed to
the audio circuitry. This caused some confusion in Encoders with
an RCC card, which was transmitting RTCM corrections. The modem
now recognizes messages originating at its location and does not
assert some hardware control flags accordingly.
SHARC Version 10.25 - 10.33
Sharc now supports ATA flash disks as well as linear flash
memory cards
Missing End of Sweep message When trying to execute a
stored values sweep with no memory card installed, the system
would hang up. The Sharc now issues an end of sweep message to
the main H8S in this situation.
ShotPro sweep type was shifted 250 microseconds to match the
timing in version 9.
Random sweep drive attenuation The drive attenuation level
was not being stored in memory for random sweeps. This caused a
fluctuation in the Ground Force output on alternating sweeps.
Vdisplay dropouts Some sweeps starting at frequencies less
than 10 Hz exhibited a data dropout in the force plots of the
VpKop Vdisplay function. This was caused by incomplete cycles
within the sample period of the display.

Added Digital Adaptive control mode.
Sample correction mode: In the sample correction mode there was
a "kick" in the reaction mass at the end of some sweeps that was
caused by a fast centering of the mass. The mass is now slowly
ramped to the center position upon completion of the sweep.
ATA Flash Disk support The Sharc now supports ATA flash disks
as well as linear flash memory cards. All brands of ATA PC cards
should work. Version 1.14 of Stored32 is needed to program the
ATA PC cards.
ShotPro sweep type length The ShotPro sweep type originally
had a length of 3 seconds. This value may now be selected by the
user. The minimum length is set at 2.05 seconds. Entries less
than that will be defaulted to the minimum by the Sharc.
Keyboard random sweep spectrum improvement: The number of
coefficients in the FIR filter that form spectrum of the random
sweep have been increased. This increases the slope of the
spectrum and improves the attenuation in the stop band from -40dB
to -75dB.
New LMS(Digital Adaptive) control mode Phase Control Type 3
stores the LMS (Adapt) coefficients at the end of the first
second of the sweep for use at the beginning of the next sweep.
Mode 2 stores the coefficients present at the end of the sweep.
VSSTST sweep type In keyboard mode there is now a VSSTST
sweep type available. This produces a canned multi-segment sweep
for the purpose of performing daily tests of the Vibrator Source
Signature system. The sweep consists of 5 segments each 2
seconds in length. The first segment is a single pulse. Segment
2 is a 40.818 Hz mono frequency at full scale. Segment 3 is the
same 40.818 Hz at 60 dB down from full scale. Segment 4 is a
high frequency noise sweep from 510 to 950 Hz. Segment 5 is a
pause type. This sweep should be used with the non-attenuated
positions 7 and 8 on the VSS test box. Executing this sweep at
position 7 and 8 of the test box will provide all of the data
necessary to analyze the impulse response, signal-to-noise,
dynamic range, crossfeed and anti-alias performance of the
VibPro.

Version 9A August 03, 2000
Main H8S Version 0030
Direct KOP load of Hardware Parameters only has been fixed.
Corrected UART C lockup if a received radio message was cut off
(not completely received).
Job Profile Menu, item 6 is now AUX SWP #. This entry selects
the sweep number that the Auxiliary Reference (True Reference 2)
will run in the encoder.
The Main H8s automatically sends a ready message that contains
the current GPS position to COMPORT 3 to be used by the Vibrator
Network System.
Auto Ready Delay, item 4, has been added to the Report Menu.
This entry controls when the auto ready message is sent on
COMPORT 3. Range of entry is 000 100, where 100 = 10.0 seconds.
An entry of 000 = automatic mode.
In automatic mode, the auto ready message is sent 1 second after
both the lift is down and external down sensor indicates
sufficient hold-down weight. If a shorting plug is used for the
external down sensor, then the auto ready message will be sent
after the fixed delay for the lift to go down.
Any nonzero value will be the time that the auto ready message is
sent after the Lift Down Command has been issued. This entry is
in 100 milliseconds steps. Example: an entry of 35 = 3.5
seconds. This entry will allow the auto ready message to be sent
to the local vibrator network before the vibrator is actually
ready to shake.
The VPD will send the Group Ready Message over the radio when
it is received from the Master Vib Net computer.
The VPD sends a Not Ready Message to the local vibrator network
anytime the Lift comes up from the down position.
GGK GPS has been added only for the Trimble GPS system. The
$PTNL, GGK message is unique to the Trimble GPS system. When
doing GGK, the Pelton Single Radio option cannot be used for
correction information. An independent system like Pacific Crest
is required to send the correction information from the reference
station.
Version 9B August 03, 2000
Added Message Type 83, which allows direct connect request of
the Lift Status from the Vib Network.
A3 protocol Messages with message types 41 hex 4F hex are
passed to the radio when received on COMPORT 3.

Version 9C October 10, 2000
Sharc Version 10.40
Changes made in 10.38 did not work right for FDSC. VFBK in
calibration was always set to 200.
VSSTest sweep did not produce similarity signal.
New status bits added to indicate accelerometer polarity
warning, mass centering error and flash card error.
Fixed problem centering mass with HIC.

If a serial error occurred with UART A (GPS), the status bits
for UART A were not being cleared properly.
At the start of a sweep all of the DOPS are cleared and the Age
is set to FF hex.
When a $PTNL, GGK message is received the HDOP and VDOP are
cleared and the Age is set to FF hex. The PDOP is not cleared as
BNC uses this for the quality indicator.
The BNC Florida GPS position is forced into the current GPS
position if GPS positions are not received for 10 seconds. Also
all of the DOPS are cleared and the Age is set to FF hex.
If $PTNL, GGK messages stop and $GPGGA start, the firmware
requires 20 $GPGGA and or $GPGSA messages and a sweep not in
progress before the $GPGGA and $GPGSA messages are allowed.
In the JOBPROFILE MENU, Sweep Source is always selected to
Keyboard.
Added text messages for Status bits from the Sharc. Added
messages are for Accelerometer Reversed or Dead, Sharc Mass
Centering error, and Flash Card error.

Version 10 February 6, 2002
1. Added status display:

Display was added to bring functionality back equivalent to Advance II
level with the addition of the software versions on the display. For the
decoder mode voltage measurements were added to allow the operator to
verify internal operating voltage along with required vibrator interface
voltages.
For encoder mode the display does not include +/-30VDC and the interface
voltages.
Internal operating voltages: +5VDC, +15VDC, -15VDC, +30VDC, -30VDC
Vibrator interface voltages:

Battery, Mass and Valve LVDT primary, Base plate accel - loop and sim,
Mass accel - loop and sim
Software version displayed:

H8S Card (H8S), Sharc Card (DSP), Modem Card (MDM)
NOTE: Also fix intermittent voltage false failure due to rounding voltage
readings.
2. Eliminated false sweep starts:

Handshaking was added so that noise would not cause false sweep starts.
After the Sharc receives the pre-start from H8S it looks for a start
confirmation message.
3. Added second radio select for ready button.

To support slip sweep, when the ready button (Unit Ready from a VPD) is
pushed on the main display the second radio is selected for ready message
to be sent. This was required to support slip sweep configuration. For
normal operation there is no effect since there is no radio selector box
wired in.
4. WEIGHTS menu:
Fixed both 'Hold Down Weight' and 'Max Peak Force' so the actual values
that will be entered will be shown at the bottom of the display while the
entry is being made. The keystrokes will still be off by a factor of 10,
e.g. if one enters 6,000, the number displayed at the bottom of the
screen and the value actually entered will be 60,000.

5. RADIO menu:
Item '14. Sub-Carrier' added with 115, 125, 150, 175, 200, and 400msec
values selectable. This menu item defines the sub-carrier length in
milliseconds required for each message and now is selectable to reduce
the time required to send each message.
To be compatible with Vib Pro versions prior to 10, 400msec must be

selected. Since this affects radio communication it is only selectable
via the front panel.
6. Auto Lift Message:

'AUTOLIFT=ON!!' added to the main display and the sweep display to
indicate auto lift is selected. This is a redundancy to the AUTO LIFT
button LED.
7. Version identification changed:

Version identification for the firmware in the Vib Pro has changed to a
three point system. This was done to both make it easier to identify
types of changes in firmware and to allow in the future automated
hardware and software compatibility checks.
example:
<H8S 33.00.00-xxxx>
| | | |- Check Sum
| | |
| | |- Lowest level to indicate bug fixes which only
| | | effects software and none of the interfaces
| |
| |- Middle level indicates feature addition or new
| | hardware support, but does not effect interface
| to unit
|
|- Highest level to indicate major feature addition or
requires other firmware to be updated
8. Improved high frequency sweeps:
Sharc algorithm changed to improve sweeping to high frequency. With this

algorithm update, Phase Control Type: PHASE TRACK is not functional. It
has been removed from the menu system. To be compatible with older
versions of VPKop, when this selection is sent to Vib Pro the phase
control mode is forced to CYCLE. The recommended Phase and Force Loop
gains are the those recommended in the manual. Those are 80 for Phase
Loop Gain and force loop gain.
9. New CCC firmware - simplifies data exchange between computer and CCC
and makes it more reliable. This version will not work with Advance II
equipment. Requires VibQC32 program version 1.00.46, dated 10/22/2001
with ; Dll Version 2.066 or later.
Description of Controls Page 1.3.1
PELTON VIB PRO
DESCRIPTION OF CONTROLS: (Refer to page 1.3.3 unless otherwise stated.)
A) JF Connector - Main wiring connector wired the same as Advance II
Version 6 Vibrator electronics, and can be connected to the same
Connector Panel plug PF.
B) JE Connector - Auxiliary connector used in Vibrator electronics for
remote down cable, and the interface to the Radio Control Box.
Other Signals required for Encoder operation which are not on the JF
connector are located here.
C) Power and Fuse - Switches power to lift and control system of unit.
A 8 amp fuse protects system against a power line fault.
D) Reset Button - Allows a reset of the Vib Pro Unit. Can be used as
an emergency Stop.
E) D-Sub Panel - Consists of 7 D-sub connectors, each individually
numbered 1 - 7, descriptions are as follows: (Refer to page 1.3.4)
1) 25 pin test connector. This connector allows access to
internal analog and digital signals.
2) 9 pin Modem serial connector. This connector is connected to
the internal modem of the Vib Pro. This connector allows
monitoring of the internal modems performance. With the
internal modem removed an external modem system can be
connected to this port.
3) 9 pin H8S serial connector. This connects directly to the main
H8S system control board. This connector is used when
communicating directly to the Vib Pro Unit. The VibNet, VKOP,
WVSIG, MAP32 and Encoder Software programs use this connector
for communication.
4) 9 pin CCC serial connector. This connects to the optional CCC
board in the Vib Pro Unit. The VibQC Software program uses
this connector for radio and wireline similarities.
5) 9 pin serial connector. This port connects to UART D on the
Interface card and is controlled by the main H8S processor.
The GPSMap program running the Vibrator Signature program uses
this connector. This port is also used to communicate with
recording systems, allowing the recording system to select the
sweep profile to be executed.
08May02
Description of Controls Page 1.3.2
6) 9 pin GPS serial connector. This serial port is connected
directly to the GPS receiver. This port is used by the main
H8S to receive the GGA position message from the receiver, or
the RTCM correction data from the base station. Also the
internal GPS receiver uses this port to receive or transmit the
RTCM correction on an external radio modem System.
When using an external GPS receiver the internal GPS receiver
must be removed. The serial position output of the receiver is
wired to this connector and the PPS pulse is wired to pin 9 of
this connector. On early Vib Pros Pin 10 of Test connector.
7) 9 pin GPS serial control connector. This Serial port connects

directly to the GPS receiver. It is used to set-up and run
diagnostic testing of the GPS receiver. (Not for external
Receivers).
F) Lift Buttons - Used to control the lift system of the Vibrator. Up,
Down and Auto are the selections. The Full/Half selection are found
in the job profile menu.
G) Soft Keys - 8 soft keys are software programmable. The key

functions depend on the software for each menu.
H) Main Keypad - Used to enter parameters.
I) Start / Stop - Start button allows to manually start a sweep. The

Stop button allows user to manually stop a sweep.
J) GPS Antenna - Used to connect an external GPS antenna to the

internal GPS card.
08May02
Parameter Entry Menus Page 1.4.1
Parameter Entries
STATUS: To get to the Status Menu, from the "Ready to Sweep Menu" (see
section 2.2.4, Decoder Operation), press "A" and the following screen
will appear:
STATUS: OK /
Vib01 :CONT
K HI
: OK
\
A
-----
/ M
Swp: 07 : E
ID#: 21130 : N
CHK: S=FE16 V=FBB1 : U
\____ B
PHZ: 000 -001 /
: CLR
FRC: 093 098 104 :AUTO
THD: 008 023 :
\
----- C
(ERROR MESSAGES) /
: CLR
: MAN
Aut:0768 Man:0014 :
__________
/-CONTRAST+\ D
Pressing "A" will take you back to the "Ready to Sweep Menu".
Pressing "B" will take you to the Main Menu (see Page 1.4.3)
Pressing "C" will clear the Auto Sweeps, and return to the "Ready to
Sweep Menu".
Pressing "D" will clear the Manual Sweeps, and return to the "Ready to
Sweep Menu".
STATUS:
Vib#:- Vibrator ID#.
K HI:- HI indicates that it was a high Force sweep and LO indicates it
was a low force sweep.
Swp: - Identifies the last sweep ran.
ID#: - Unique ID# for the Sweep.
CHK: - Checksums "S" is for Sweep, and "V" is for Vibrator.
PHZ: - Displays phase error from last sweep. First column is average,
and second column is peak.
FRC: - Displays minimum, average and peak force during last sweep.
THD: - Displays average and peak Total Harmonic Distortion.
Aut: - Displays Auto sweep count.
Man: - Displays Manual sweep count.
Note: The area after THD will display any Error Messages.
10Apr02
The following entries are used to compute the Vib Checksum:
Phase Lock Enable

Phase Lock Signal Code
Phase Control Type
High Force Out

Low Force Out
Test Drive Attenuation
Max TM Current Limit

Max Valve Displacement Limit
Max Mass Displacement Limit
Peak Force Limit
Reaction Mass Force Limit
Mass Offset
Accelerometer Sensitivity
Reaction Mass Weight

Base Plate Weight
Hold Down Weight
Max Peak Force
Encoder Delay
Decoder Delay
Radio Sim Delay
PSS Type
Phase Preset Auto
Initial Advance Auto
Accelerometer Select
Harmonic Cut Frequency
Accelerometer Force Difference
Accelerometer Phase Difference
10Apr02
Main Menu Use the "" and "" arrow keys in the main menu to highlight
selections. To select the highlighted entry, press the Ent key on the
keypad. The main menu display includes the following selections and are
explained in further detail on following pages:
MAIN MENU: Ent

1. JOB PROFILE
2. STATUS A
3. SWEEPS
4. PHASE CONTROL
5. FORCE CONTROL
6. CONTROL LIMITS
7. ERR INDICATION B
8. VIB CONTROL
9. WEIGHTS
10. RADIO
11. REPORT
12. RESET MENU
C
13. CALIBRATION
---- MORE ----
EXIT>
D
Main Menu 2:
MAIN 2: Ent
14. ADVANCE CONTROL
15. HARDWARE SETUP A
---- MORE ----
EXIT>
D
Press D to exit to the Ready to Sweep Menu.
10Apr02
MENU 1: JOB PROFILE - All entries in the Job Profile Menu are not loaded
by the computer. These selections must be entered via the Vib Pros
keyboard. In this menu, use "" and "" to select different entries.
Press the ENT key to accept selection.
1. JOB PROFILE:
1. Swp Number: 00 A
2. Swp Source: KBD
3. AutoPadUp : HALF
4. Man PadUp : FULL
5. QcDataDisp: OFF
6. Aux Swp # :
7. VibratorID:
04
01
B
8. PasswordKy: 0000
9. Password : OFF
10.Decoder : ON
11.RcdrCmdSEQ: OFF
12.MstRenCode: OFF C
13.MON Encode: OFF
14.SlAVencode: OFF
EXIT>
D
Press D to exit to main menu.
ENTRY 1- Swp Number: - Sweep Number selects the Sweep Number, which will
run when a Manual Sweep is requested. This is a Manual Keyboard
entry only.
ENTRY 2- Swp Source: - This entry displays KBD on the system display,
and is currently not used.
ENTRY 3- AutoPadUp: - Auto Pad Up selects Half or Full Pad up when the
Auto Pad-up feature is used.
ENTRY 4- ManPadUp: - Man Pad Up selects Half or Full Pad up when the
Manual up on the Front Panel is pressed.
ENTRY 5- QcDataDisp: - Quality Control Data Display. On or Off This

entry is currently not used.
ENTRY 6- Aux Swp #: - Selects the Sweep Number for True Ref 2 in the Vib
Pro Encoder. (Not used in the Decoder.)
ENTRY 7- VibratorID: - Vibrator Identity. Select Vibrator Number 1-32.

This number is used to identify the Box in the Start Codes, PSS
and Radio Similarities. This is a Manual Keyboard entry only.
10Apr02
ENTRY 8- PasswordKy: - Password Key. Enter a unique Password. When the
Password feature has been enabled, this password must be entered
before parameters can be changed at the keyboard. The default
is 1907.
ENTRY 9- Password: - On/Off When set to ON the password must be

entered before parameters can be changed on the keyboard.
ENTRY 10- Decoder: - On/Off When ON the unit is configured as a

Decoder. Automatically forcing ALL Encoder Modes to there OFF
positions. When OFF the unit is set to an Encoder, a reset
must be performed to complete the change. For normal Encode
Mode of operation, entries 12, 13, and 14 must be set to there
OFF positions. This is a Manual Keyboard entry only.
ENTRY 11- RcdrCmdSEQ: - On/Off - When ON allows the Vib Pro Encoder to
get the Sequence information directly from the Recording
System. This feature only supports the Generic RS and I/O
System 2 SCM serial RTI protocols. This entry can only be set
to ON if the Encoder is in the Normal or Master Encoder
Modes, otherwise this entry will always be forced to OFF.
This is a Manual Keyboard entry only.
ENTRY 12- MstRenCode: - On/Off - When ON sets Vib Pro Encoder as a

Master for Master Slave Operation. This is a Manual Keyboard
entry only.
ENTRY 13- MonEncode: - On/Off - When ON sets Vib Pro Encoder as a

Monitor Encoder. This is a Manual Keyboard entry only.
ENTRY 14- SLAVEncode: - On/Off - When ON sets Vib Pro Encoder as a

Slave for Master Slave Operation. This is a Manual Keyboard
entry only.
Note 1: When changing modes to Master, Monitor or Slave, the Firmware

will only allow one to be ON at a time.
10Apr02
MENU 2: SYSTEM STATUS- This status screen displays system voltages.
+5v-reading A
+15v-reading -15v-reading
+30v-reading -30v-reading
BAT-reading
MCL-reading VCL-reading B
BPL-reading BPS-reading
MSL-reading MSS-reading
DSP 11.00.00-029F C
H8S 33.00.00-08F4
MDM 07.00.00-BD91
OK> D
The labels such as +5v, +15v, etc. indicate the power supply the reading
following each label is taken from.
BAT shows the voltage supplied to the Vib Pro.
MCL shows the excitation voltage going to the Mass LVDT.
VCL shows the excitation voltage going to the Valve LVDT.
BPL is the bias voltage for the baseplate loop accelerometer.
BPS is the bias voltage for the baseplate similarity accelerometer.
MSL is the bias voltage for the mass loop accelerometer.
MSS is the bias voltage for the mass similarity accelerometer.
Following the labels DSP, H8S, and MDM are the firmware release levels
and then the checksums for the DSP (the SHARC), the Main H8S, and the
Modem, respectively.
Press D to exit to the main menu.
10Apr02
MENU 3: SWEEPS: - Keyboard Sweep Parameter Menu. 16 different Sweeps
each with 16 different Segments are shown. In Normal Menu of VPKOP
Program Segment #2 length for all sweeps is set to 0. These entries are
used in both Encoder and Decoder Modes.
1. SWEEP : 00 A
2. SEGMENT: 00
3. Swp Type :LINEAR
4. StartFrq. : 000.0
5. End Freq. : 000.0 B
6. Swp Length:00.000
7. Taper Type: 0
8. StartTaper:00.000
9. End Taper:00.000 C
10.Swp Phase : 000
11.Constant : 00000
OK> D

ENTRY 1: SWEEP - Selects the Sweep Number to be displayed for Keyboard
entries.
ENTRY 2: SEGMENT - Selects the Segment Number to be displayed for
Keyboard entries.
Note: The following Sweep Parameters must be entered for each Sweep
Number and Segment Number.
ENTRY 3: Swp Type Select Sweep Type.
Linear Sweep Selects Linear Sweep equation.
dB/Hz Selects a dB/Hz boost after correlation equation. A dB/Hz
constant is used with an available range of 0.001 to 0.500 is used.
dB/Oct Selects a dB/Octave boost after correlation equation., A
dB/Octave constant is used with an available range of plus or minus
(+/-) 0.01 to 10 is used.
T Power Selects a Time Power equation. A T-Power constant is used
with an available range of 0.3 to 3 is used.
Random Selects a Pseudo Random equation A Seed constant is used
with an available range of 1 to 1000.
10Apr02
Pulse Selects a positive going Pulse (The Reaction Mass is pulsed
up). All other parameters except length are ignored.
Spec. - Selects either a Shot Pro or a Special canned sweep. In
the Encoder mode, it outputs a sweep with pulses a 1, 1.5 and 2
seconds for use with the Shot Pro Decoder. In the Decoder mode, it
outputs a special 0.5-msec pulse sweep to test the Pelton Vibrator
Source Signature (VSS) recorder.
Pause Selects a Null Sweep. All parameters except length are
ignored.
VssTst Selects a canned multi-segment sweep for performing daily
tests of the Vibrator Source Signature (VSS) system.
The sweep consists of 5 segments each 2 seconds in length. The
first segment is a single pulse. The second segment is a 40.818 Hz
mono frequency at full scale. The third segment is the same 40.818
Hz at 60 dB down from full scale. The forth segment is a high
frequency noise sweep from 510 to 950 Hz. In addition, the fifth
segment is a Pause (Null sweep).
This sweep should be used with the non-attenuated positions 7 and 8
on the VSS test box. Executing this sweep at position 7 and 8 of
the test box will provide all of the data necessary to analyze the
impulse response, signal-to-noise, dynamic range, cross feed and
anti-alias performance of the VibPro.
Stored Selects a Stored Value Sweep, from the sweep data stored on
the PCMCIA memory card. This memory card is installed on the SHARC
card.
Notes: The constant entry selects which sweep number of the PCMCIA
stored data is to be used and the phase entry can add a phase offset
to the stored value sweep. The start frequency, end frequency and
taper entries are ignored. The sweep length will automatically be
computed from the stored sweep table (The sweep length can not be
zero).
Example: 2 64 Hz, 8 second and 0 degrees phase Sweep is loaded in sweep
table # 7 in the PCMCIA card.
Sweep 1 Segment 1 Sweep 1 Segment 2

Sweep Type Stored Sweep Type Stored
Constant 7 Constant 7
Phase 0 degrees Phase 90 degrees
Length 8.000 Seconds Length 8.000 Seconds
10Apr02
Sweep 1 Segment 3
Length 0.000 Seconds
Keyboard sweep #1 will be a two-segment 16-second sweep. The first
segment will be an 8-second sweep with 0 degrees Phase and the second
segment will be an 8-second sweep with 90 degrees phase.
ENTRY 4: StartFrq. Start Frequency selects Starting Frequency in Hertz.
The range is 0 to 500 Hertz.
ENTRY 5: End Freq. End Frequency selects ending Frequency in Hertz. The
range is 0 to 500 Hertz.
ENTRY 6: Swp Length Sweep Length. Selects Sweep length in Seconds.
The range for Sweep Length is 0 65.535 Seconds.
In the Advanced Sweep Configuration when using segmented sweeps,
entering a segment sweep length of zero indicates the previous
segment was the last segment for sweep.
ENTRY 7: Taper Type - 0 is Blackman Equation 1 is Cosine Equation. The
Blackman is a little more aggressive than Cosine. It comes up
to full level slightly quicker than the Cosine on up tapers and
shuts down slightly later on down tapers.
ENTRY 8: StartTaper - Selects Taper length in seconds.
ENTRY 9: End Taper - Selects Taper length in seconds.
ENTRY 10: Swp Phase Sweep Phase. Selects Initial Phase in degrees.
When running a segmented sweep in Advance Mode a continuous
phase can be selected by entering a sweep phase of 360 in the
second segment.
ENTRY 11: Constant - Select the proper Constant Value XXX for the
Sweep Type selected in entry #3.
dB/Hz A constant is used with an available range of 0.001 to
0.500.
dB/Oct A constant is used with an available range of (+/-)
0.01 to 10.
T- Power A constant is used with an available range of 0.3 to
3.
Random A constant is used with an available range of 1 to
1000.
Stored Select a Stored Value sweep number, from the sweep
data stored on the PCMCIA memory card. Use numbers from 1 to
16. Leaving the value at 0 will cause an error condition.
10Apr02
MENU 4: PHASE CONTROL - Entries used only in Decoder Mode.
4. -- PHASE CONTROL --
1. PhLockEnbl: ON A
2. PhLockSig : GF
3. PhLoopGain: 080%
4. Predict.Gn: 000%
5. ControlTyp: 000 B
6. SimSigCode: GF
OK> D
ENTRY 1: PhLockEnbl Phase Lock Enable. ON enables phase control and

OFF disables phase control. Uses stored Phase preset when
disabled.
The default is ON.
ENTRY 2: PhLockSig Phase Lock Signal. Select signal to use for phase
locking.
GF Selects Ground Force Signal.

BP Selects Baseplate Acceleration.
RM Selects Reaction Mass Acceleration.
BPVel Selects Baseplate Velocity Signal.
Ref Selects Reference. Use to test phase lock system.
The default is Ground Force (GF).
ENTRY 3: PhLoopGain Phase Loop Gain selects sensitivity of Vibrators

phase lock control. 000 is open loop (no phase control). 200
percent is the maximum. Set to number which results in lowest
possible phase error. The Range is 000-200 percent.
The default is 80 percent.
10Apr02
ENTRY 4: Predict.Gn Predictive Gain sets gain of predictive phase
control. The predictive control loop uses phase error data from
previous sweeps to improve phase correction of next sweep.
Larger entries update the memory faster, while smaller entries
update the memory slower.
An entry of 000 disables this feature.
The Range is 000-200.
The default is 000.
ENTRY 5: ControlTyp Control Type. Selects Phase Control Algorithm

0 CYCLE Corrects phase every cycle.
1 PHASE TRACK Tracks phase every sample (0.25 milliseconds).
Disabled in Version 10 Firmware.
2 ADAPT Digital Adaptive controls both Phase and Amplitude
corrections.
3 (Not used)
4 CYCLE TIME Corrections every cycle.
Cycle correction is automatically enabled when the Predictive
Phase control gain is not set to Zero.
Digital Adaptive control is automatically enabled when a Random
sweep type is used. Phase error and fundamental force are not
computed in the Digital Adaptive mode.
The default is 000.
ENTRY 6: SimSigCode Similarity Signal Code selects signal to use for

similarities.
None No similarity signal.
GF Selects Ground Force Signal.
BP Selects Baseplate Acceleration.
RM Selects Reaction Mass Acceleration.
BPvel Selects Baseplate Velocity Signal.
Ref Selects Reference. Use to test similarity system.
This is normally set the same as the PHASE-LOCK SIGNAL (Entry #
2), to show phase-locking performance.
The default is Ground Force (GF).
10Apr02
MENU 5: FORCE CONTROL - Entries used only in Decoder Mode.
5. -- FORCE CONTROL --
1. ForceLpGn : 080% A
2. HiForceOut : 070%
3. LowForce : 035%
5. TestDrvAtn: 000
6. Predict.Gn: 000% B
OK> D
ENTRY 1: ForceLpGn Force Loop Gain. This entry controls the gain of
the Force Amplitude feedback system. For a given error in the
force amplitude, the torque motor current will change to correct
the error. How fast the system responds to an error in force
amplitude, is determined by this entry. A Entry of Zero (0)
percent is open loop, and 255% is maximum loop sensitivity. If
the performance is sluggish, try a higher setting. If amplitude
is oscillating, try a lower setting. Set to a number, that
results in the best performance possible.
The Range is 000-255 percent. The default is 80 percent.
Notes: This entry should be set to zero when using any setting
other than zero for Test Drive Attenuation (Entry # 5).
This entry is not used when Digital Adaptive Phase control is
used.
ENTRY 2: HiForceOut High Force Out. Set this entry to the desired High
Target force output, as a percentage of maximum Vibrator Output.
The maximum Vibrator Output is defined as the smaller of either
the Holddown weight or the Maximum Theatrical Peak Force entries
in the Weights menu.
Example: Hold-down weight = 40,000 lbs., Maximum Peak Force =
50,000 lbs. and High Force Out = 090%, then the Target Force is
36,000 lbs.
This entry is used when high force output is selected.
The Range is 0-100 percent. The default is 70 percent.
10Apr02
ENTRY 3: LowForce Low Force Out. Set this entry to the desired Low
Target force output, as a percentage of maximum Vibrator Output.
The maximum Vibrator Output is defined as the smaller of either
the Holddown weight or the Maximum Theatrical Peak Force entries
in the Weights menu.
This entry is used when Low Force Output is selected.
ENTRY 4: No Entry.
ENTRY 5: TestDrvAttn Test Drive Attenuation, a 000 in this entry

enables automatic Force and Limits Control. Any other entry
results in fixed drive to the Vibrator and disables automatic
force and limits control. A setting of 001 is minimum
attenuation (10v p-p) and 255 is the maximum attenuation (0v p-
p). When using fixed, drive 080 is a typical entry.
Notes: Force Loop Gain (Entry # 1) should be set to zero when

using any setting other than zero for Test Drive Attenuation.
The Range is 000255.

The default is 000.
ENTRY 6: Predict.Gn Predictive Gain sets gain of predictive force

control. The predictive control loop uses force control error
data from previous sweeps to improve the force control
performance on the next sweep. Larger entries update the memory
faster while smaller entries update the memory slower.
An entry of 000 disables this feature.
The range is 0-100 percent.

The default is 000.
10Apr02
MENU 6: CONTROL LIMITS Entries used only in Decoder Mode.
6. -- CONTROL LIMITS --
1. TM CURRENT: 080 A
2. VALVE DISP: 090%
3. MASS DISP.: 080%
4. PEAK FORCE: 090%
5. R.M. FORCE: 100% B
OK>
D
An entry of 000 in any of the control limits will disable that limit.
ENTRY 1: TM CURRENT: - Torque Motor Current sets the allowable limits for
maximum torque motor current.
An entry of 0 disables this limit.
The default is 080 mA.
Notes: This setting should normally match the Torque Motor

Manufacture specification for Torque-motor current.
The Active range for the Torque-motor Limit is 0 120 mA p-p.
For entries greater than 120 mA (up to 200 mA), the current
limiting protection diodes on either the Hydraulic I/F Card (DS3
and DS4) or the Feedback Detector / Servo Card (DS1 and DS2)
must be removed.
ENTRY 2: VALVE DISP - Valve Displacement sets the allowable limit for
maximum valve spool displacement.

10Apr02
ENTRY 3: MASS DISP.: - Mass Displacement sets the allowable limit for
maximum Reaction Mass displacement. An entry of 50% should keep
the Reaction Mass well within its linear range. However, if the
Mass drifts up and down during the sweep, this limit maybe
reached, and the drive will be automatically reduced which maybe
undesirable. If this happens, enter a larger value for this
entry.

The default is 80 percent
ENTRY 4: PEAK FORCE: - Peak Force sets the allowable limit for maximum
Absolute Peak Ground Force. This entry uses maximum Vibrator
output as 100%.

ENTRY 5: R.M. FORCE: - Reaction Mass Force sets the allowable limit for
maximum Reaction Mass Force. This entry uses maximum Vibrator
output as 100%.

10Apr02
MENU 7: ERR INDICATION Entries used only in Decoder Mode.
7. - ERROR INDICATIONS -
1. TM CURRENT: OFF A
2. VALVE DISP: OFF
3. MASS DISP.: OFF
4. MASS FORCE: OFF
5. PEAK FORCE: OFF B
6. MaxFundFrc: 000%
7. AvgFundFrc: 000%
8. MaxPhaseEr: 000
9. AvgPhaseEr: 000 C
10.MaxTHD Lmt: 000%
11.AvgTHD Lmt: 000%
OK>
D
The following entries enable, disable or set error limits at the Decoder.
These entries only enable error indication. They are not control
parameters. Typically these errors are disabled at the Decoder, but are
enabled in the WVSIG program at the Recording Truck.
ENTRY 1: TM CURRENT Torque Motor Current. OFF, no error indication.

When set to ON error is indicated if control limit is reached.
The default is OFF.
ENTRY 2: VALVE DISP. Valve Displacement. OFF, no error indication.

The default is OFF.
ENTRY 3: MASS DISP. - Mass Displacement. OFF, no error indication.

The default is OFF.
ENTRY 4: MASS FORCE - OFF, no error indication. When set to ON error

is indicated if control limit is reached.
The default is OFF.
ENTRY 5: PEAK FORCE - OFF, no error indication. When set to ON error

is indicated if control limit is reached.
The default is OFF.
10Apr02
ENTRY 6: MaxFundFrc Maximum Fundamental Force. 0 disables error
indication. Sets minimum level of the calculated maximum
fundamental force, which is acceptable before an error
indication is reported. Entry is scaled in percent of maximum
Vibrator output. Example: An entry of 70% requires that the
maximum Fundamental force exceeds 70%, or else an error will be
reported.
ENTRY 7: AvgFundFrc Average Fundamental Force. 0 disables error
indication. Sets minimum level of the calculated average
fundamental force, which is acceptable before an error
indication is reported. Entry is scaled in percent of maximum
Vibrator output. Example: An entry of 70% requires that the
average Fundamental force exceeds 70%, or else an error will be
reported.
ENTRY 8: MaxPhaseEr Maximum Phase Error. 0 disables error
indication. Sets maximum allowable peak phase error in degrees,
which is acceptable before an error indication is reported.
The range is 0-180 degrees.
The default is 0 degrees.
ENTRY 9: AvgPhaseEr Average Phase Error. 0 disables error
indication. Sets maximum allowable average phase error in
degrees, which is acceptable before an error indication is
reported.
The range is 0-180 degrees.
ENTRY 10: MaxTHD Lmt Maximum Total Harmonic Distortion Limit.
0 disables error indication. Sets maximum allowable peak
Total Harmonic Distortion, which is acceptable before an error
indication is reported.
ENTRY 11: AvgTHD Lmt Average Total Harmonic Distortion Limit.
0 disables error indication. Sets maximum allowable average
Total Harmonic Distortion, which is acceptable before an error
indication is reported.
The range is 0-100 percent. The default is 0 percent.
10Apr02
MENU 8: VIB CONTROL Entries used only in Decoder Mode.
8. - VIBRATOR CONTROL -
1. MassOffset : 050% A
2. MassStroke : 100
3. TstMassFdbk: 000
4. TstValvFdbk: 000
5. AccSENSITIV: 0025 B
6. B.P. AREA : 029
OK>
D

ENTRY 1: MassOffset: - Used to set center position of Reaction Mass. 50
is the center position. 0 is down, 100 is up. The range is 0-
100 percent. The default is 50 percent.
ENTRY 2: MassStroke: - Not Used
ENTRY 3: TstMassFdbk: - Test Mass Feedback set to 000 to use MFB level
derived in calibration. 001 is open loop. 255 is maximum
feedback. 000 is recommended setting. Settings of 180 to 210
are usually acceptable. The range is 0-255. The default is 0.
ENTRY 4: TstValvFdbk: - Test Valve Feedback set to 000 to use VFB derived
in calibration. 001 is open loop. 255 is maximum feedback.
000 is recommended setting. Settings of 200 to 220 are usually
acceptable.
The range is 0-255. The default is 0.
ENTRY 5: AccSENSITIV: - Accelerometer Sensitivity sets sensitivity of
Accelerometers. All M5 Accelerometers = 25mV/g. The range is
0-1000mV/g.
The default is 25mV/g.
ENTRY 6: B.P. AREA: - Baseplate Area - Enter area of Baseplate in meter2

or feet2. This entry is used in calculation of stiffness and
viscosity.
The default is 29 sq.ft.
10Apr02
MENU 9: WEIGHTS:
9. --- WEIGHTS ---

1. UnitSys.: ENGL A
2. RMWeight: 06700 LBS
3. BPWeight: 03000 LBS
4. HoldDown: 050000 LBS
5. MaxPkFrc: 050000 LBS B
OK>
D
ENTRY 1: UnitSys. Unit System selects English or Metric system for

parameter entry. English uses pounds or feet. Metric use
kilograms, Newtons or meters.
ENTRY 2: RM Weight Reaction Mass. Enter weight of Reaction Mass

Assembly. Units are in pounds, English system or kilograms,
metric system.
The range is 0-65,000.
The default is 6,700 lbs.
ENTRY 3: BP Weight Base Plate. Enter weight of Baseplate Assembly.

Units are in pounds, English system or kilograms, metric system.
The range is 0-65,000.
ENTRY 4: Holddown - Enter Hold Down weight of Vibrator. Units are in

pounds, English system or kilograms, metric system. This entry
is used to complete Maximum Vibrator Output. The range is 0-
650,000.
10Apr02
ENTRY 5: MaxPkFrc Maximum Peak Force. Enter maximum rated peak force
output of the Vibrator. Units are in pounds, English system or
Newtons, metric system. (This entry is used to complete
Maximum Vibrator output.
Notes: The maximum Vibrator Output is defined as the smaller of either

the Hold-down weight or the Maximum Peak Force entries in the Weights
menu.
Example 1: Hold-down weight = 40,000 lbs. and Maximum Peak Force = 50,000
lbs., then the Maximum Vibrator Output = 40,000 lbs.
Example 2: Hold-down Weight = 18,000 kg and Peak Force = 166,000

Newtons; then Maximum Vibrator Output = 166,000 Newtons or
approximately 16,900 kg.1 Kilogram = 2.2046 Pounds
1 Kilogram = 9.807 Newtons

1 Pound = 0.4536 Kilograms
1 Pound = 4.448 Newtons
10Apr02
MENU 10: RADIO CONTROL
10. -- RADIO CONTROL --

1. START CODE: 001
2. NotReadyPSS: ON A
3. CrewNumber : 015
4. Encoder Dly: 02900
5. Decoder Dly: 00000
6. RadSimDly : 03900
7. RE-XMIT PSS: ON B
8. MicPolarity: NRML
9. SpkPolarity: NRML
10.Radio Test : OFF
11.StartDelay : 01000 C
12.MstrEncDly : 02900
13.MstStrtDly : 01000
OK>
D
ENTRY 1: START CODE - Start Code entry used in both Encoder and Decoder
modes. Start Code in Encoder must match Decoder for the unit to
start.
The range is 0-3. The default is 1.
ENTRY 2: NotReadyPSS - Decoders will not start on receiving a radio start

command if certain criteria are not met. Things like lift
command being UP, sensing no hold down pressure, being in a data
entry menu, etc. will inhibit a sweep start. If this entry is
ON, the decoder will send a PSS report at the appropriate
time, even if it did not start. If OFF no PSS will be sent.
The default is ON.
ENTRY 3: CrewNumber - Crew number entry used in both Encoder and Decoder
modes. Crew number in Encoder must match crew number in Decoder
for the unit to start.
The range is 0-255.

The default is 15.
ENTRY 4: Encoder Dly Encoder Radio Delay. Entry used only in Encoder
Mode. Used to set one way radio delay. Units are in
microseconds. This entry is used to delay the Encoders time
break and true reference when compared with the Decoders.
The default is 2900 microseconds.
10Apr02
ENTRY 5: Decoder Dly Decoder Delay. Entry used only in Decoder Mode.
Used to adjust small errors in start time due to Radio
differences in each Vibrator. Units are in microseconds.
The default is 0.
ENTRY 6: RadSimDly Radio Similarity Delay. Entry used only in Encoder
Mode. Used to set Radio Reference Delay to match the radio
modulation delay of the similarity signal. Units are in
microseconds.
ENTRY 7: RE-XMIT PSS - Retransmit PSS. If a decoders PSS data is not

received, the encoder may ask that decoder to re-transmit the
data during a subsequent sweep. Entering ON allows the decoder
to respond to this request. OFF causes the decoder to not
respond. Sweep length must be 3 seconds or more to enable this
feature. Decoders can re-transmit data during sweeps that they
do not sweep on. The crew code must match but the start code
does not and the start command does not have to include this
decoder.
The default is ON.
ENTRY 8: MicPolarity Microphone Polarity. Normal or Reverse, allows

software selection of the radio's microphone polarity. Firmware
prior to April 1999 set the Microphone polarity to Normal. To
match the Advance II System's microphone polarity set this entry
to reverse.
The default is Normal.
ENTRY 9: SpkPolarity Speaker Polarity. Normal or Reverse, allows

software selection of the radio's speaker polarity. Firmware
prior to April 1999 set the speaker polarity to normal. To
match the Advance II System's speaker polarity set this entry to
Normal.
The default is Normal.

ENTRY 10: Radio Test - On or Off, normally selected to off. When "On" is
selected the radio will key up and transmit a steady 3.1 kHz
sine wave for 30 seconds. This test is used to set the
modulation level of the radio. Selection is automatically set
to "Off" when test is completed.
10Apr02
ENTRY 11: StartDelay Start Delay is defined as the time between remote
start (Start command from recording system) and time break.
The range is 1000-65535 microseconds.

ENTRY 12: MstrEncDly Only used in Master Encoder Mode. Sets one way
radio delay between the Master and the Slave Encoders so that
the Slave Encoder will start at the correct time.
ENTRY 13: MstStrtDly Master Start Delay is defined as the time between
remote start of the Master (Start command from recording system)
and the start of the Slave Encoder.
The range is 1000-65535 microseconds.

10Apr02
MENU 11: REPORT Entries used only in Decoder Mode
11. -- REPORT --
1. PSS TYPE: 015 A
2. PadUpAfter: 001
3. PadUpDelay: 00000
4. AutoRdyDly: 00000
B
OK>
D
ENTRY 1: PSS TYPE - Selects different PSS messages from Decoders. All
Decoders must be set to the same PSS type for proper operation.
0. Automatically used when set to Encoder Mode.

1. Status Data only.
2. Status Data and Correlation.
3. Shot Pro status.
4. - Status Data and Source Signature Status
5. - Status Data, Cross Correlation, Source Signature Status
10. GPS Position only.
11. Status Data with GPS.
12. Status Data, GPS and Correlation.
13. Shot Pro with GPS
14. - Status Data, GPS Position and Source Signature Status
15. - Status Data, Cross Correlation, GPS Position and Source
Signature Status.
See timing issues in Chapter 8.2.1.
Status Data includes the following:

Index number - Sweep ID
Vibrator number
Crew number
Sweep number
Mode - Sweep Mode, High or Low Force, Start Code
Phase error - Maximum and Average.
Fundamental Force - Minimum, Average, Maximum
Total Harmonic Distortion - Average, Maximum
Stiffness - Minimum, Average, Maximum
Viscosity - Minimum, Average, Maximum
10Apr02
Sweep Checksum
Vibrator Parameter Checksum
Error Bits
Target Force
Start Time
Clock Adjust
The default is 15.
ENTRY 2: PadUpAfter - Enter number of sweeps to run before automatic pad-

up. Example: Every 8 sweeps the Vibrators should move to new
location. Set this entry to 8 then enable auto-up.
Notes: If a zero is entered, the lift will always remain in the

Up position.
The range is 0-100 sweeps.

The default is 1 sweep.
ENTRY 3: PadUpDelay - Delay after sweep is over before auto pad-up is

enabled. Units are in milliseconds.
The range is 0-65,000 milliseconds.

The default is 0.
ENTRY 4: AutoRdyDly Time delay from when the lift is ready to the time
that the ready message is sent to the Vib Net computer.
The range is 0-10 seconds.

The default is 0.
10Apr02
MENU 12: RESET MENU Used only in Decoder Mode.
12. --- RESET MENU ---

1.PredictFrce: SWP-02 A
2.PredictFrce: ALL !
3.PredictPhz : SWP-02
4.PredictPhz : ALL !
5.Calibration: B
6.DigitalCoef: ALL !
7.InitPh/Frce: SWP-02
8.InitPh/Frce: ALL !
9.Total Reset: ALL ! C
SELECT ITEM AND
PRESS ENTER TO RESET!
EXIT> D

Allows reset of the force or phase control algorithms. Select one of the
following with or keys. Press enter to reset control parameters.
1: PredictFrce: SWP-02 - Predictive Force

2: PredictFrce: ALL ! - Predictive Force
3: PredictPhz : SWP-02 - Predictive Phase
4: PredictPhz : ALL ! - Predictive Phase
5: CALIBRATION :
6: DigitalCoef: ALL ! - Digital Coefficient
7: InitPh/Frce: SWP-02 - Initial Phase Force
8: InitPh/Frce: ALL ! - Initial Phase Force
9: TOTAL RESET: ALL ! - Resets all phase and force control parameters.
It does not reset Calibration.
Notes: 1) When resetting values for a single sweep, the sweep number is
set in the Sweep Selection area in the Main Menu.
2) Digital Coefficient (Entry 6) is used with phase control type Digital

Adaptive. Digital Adaptive control is automatically enabled when a Random
sweep type is used. Phase error and fundamental force are not computed in
the Digital Adaptive mode.
3) A Total Reset ALL does not reset the Calibration settings.
4) The Calibration Reset resets the Mass, Valve and Torque Motor offsets
to zero. The Mass Feedback is set to 200 and Valve Feedback is set to
205.
10Apr02
MENU 13: CALIBRATION Decoder Mode only. Shows results of calibration.
CALIBRATION RESULTS:
MASS FEEDBACK 196
VALVE FEEDBACK 220 A
MASS OFFSET 00%
VALVE OFFSET 00%
T.M. OFFSET 00%
B
ACC. TEST: 2211
LOOP RM OK
SIM RM OK
LOOP BP OK C
SIM BP OK
ACCEL. TEST - PRESS A
LVDT ADJUST PRESS B
CALLIBRATION- PRESS C
EXIT - PRESS D D
Description of Calibration Menu results:
1: MASS FEEDBACK - The Mass Feedback is set to 196 for a Hydraulic

Interface Card and to 180 for the Feedback/Servo Card.2: VALVE
FEEDBACK Is the value feedback determined by calibration. It is
usually between 200 to 230.
2: VALVE FEEDBACK Feedback value determined by calibration.

3: MASS LVDT OFFSET - Mass LVDT offset error in percent determined by
calibration.
4: VALVE LVDT OFFSET - Valve LVDT offset error in percent determined by
calibration.
5: T.M. OFFSET - Torque Motor offset error in percent determined by

calibration.
6: ACC. TEST Accelerometer Test - 2211 is expected result, 0 indicates

no break detected, 1 indicates a negative first break and a 2
indicates a positive first break.
7: LOOP RM Loop Reaction Mass shows results of polarity test of

accelerometers. OK indicates a positive first break was detected.
8: SIM RM Similarity Reaction Mass shows results of polarity test of

accelerometers. OK indicates a positive first break was detected.
10Apr02
9: LOOP BP Loop Baseplate shows results of polarity test of
accelerometers. OK indicates a negative first break was detected.
10: SIM BP Similarity Baseplate shows results of polarity test of

accelerometers. OK indicates a negative first break was detected.
Note: If the results of 7, 8, 9, and/or 10 are other than OK. A

reversed reading will be indicated by REV, and if no first break
is detected, it will be indicated buy a Reading of BAD.
Description of Calibration Menu functions:
1. ACCEL. TEST PRESS A - For an Accelerometer Pulse Test only Press

A. Can be used to do a static check of accelerometers and cables.
2. LVDT ADJUST PRESS B - To enter the Mass and Valve LVDT adjustment
routines. This provides a way to adjust the Valve and Mass LVDTs with
the vibrator pressured down. See the CALIBRATION section for an
explanation of this routine.
3. CALIBRATION PRESS C To run calibration and a polarity test of the

entire system.
10Apr02
MENU 14: ADVANCE CONTROL:
14.-- ADVANCE CONTROL --

1. PhzPsetAuto: 001 A
2. PhasePreset: 220
3. InitAdvAuto: 001
4. InitAdvance: 011
5. BPphz+RM En:OFF B
6. BPphz+RMFrq: 005
7. Acc SELECT :LOOP
8. HarmonicCut: 500
9. AccFrcDiff : 010 C
10.AccPhzDiff : 010
11.FrcPsetTim : 000
OK>
D
These parameters are advanced entries used by the Control System:
ENTRY 1: PhzPsetAuto - Phase Preset Auto, Manual or Freeze selections.

- "0" selects Manual phase preset
- "1" selects Automatic phase preset
- "2" selects Freeze to use previously computed automatic
setting. Does not update. This entry should be set to Auto
(1) to learn the phase preset, then set to Freeze (2).
The default is 1 (Auto).
ENTRY 2: PhasePreset - When Menu 14 Entry 1 is set to "0" this entry is

used to select the Manual Phase Preset. The range is 0-359
degrees.
ENTRY 3: InitAdvAuto Initial Advance Auto, Manual or Freeze Selection.

- "0" selects Manual time advance
- "1" selects Automatic time advance
- "2" selects Freeze to use previously computed automatic
setting. Does not update.
This entry should be set to "0" to learn Initial Advance preset
then set to "Freeze" (2).
The default is 0 (Manual).
10Apr02
ENTRY 4: InitAdvance Initial Advance - When Menu 14 Entry 3 is set to
"0" this entry is used to select the manual Initial time advance
for the sweep. Used in conjunction with entry # 3.
The range is 0-999 milliseconds.

The default is 11 milliseconds.
ENTRY 5: BPphz+RM En Baseplate Phase Plus Reaction Mass Enable -

Enables or disables the use of Reaction Mass Acceleration at low
frequencies when Baseplate phase Locked
"OFF" - Disables (Recommended)
"ON" Enables
The default is OFF.
ENTRY 6: BPphz+RMFrq Baseplate Phase Plus Reaction Mass Frequency.

When Baseplate Phase Locking is used, Reaction Mass Acceleration
is added to the baseplate signal when the sweep frequency is
lower than this entry. Used in conjunction with entry # 5.
The default is 5 Hertz.
ENTRY 7: Acc Select - Accelerometer Selection selects the Loop (0) or Sim
(1) accelerometers to control, the systems hydraulics operation.
Sim Accelerometers are always selected for Radio similarities

and are always used for the cross-correlation wavelet in WVSIG.
This entry should always be set at "0".
The default is 0.
ENTRY 8: HarmonicCut - High frequency cut off frequency for Harmonic

Distortion Computation. Any Harmonic Distortion above this
frequency will be ignored. Normally set the same as the high
frequency cut off frequency of recording system.
The default is 200 Hertz.
ENTRY 9: AccFrcDiff - Accelerometer Force Difference sets the allowable

error between the Ground Force Amplitude of the Loop and Sim
Accelerometers.
10Apr02
ENTRY 10: AccPhzDiff - Accelerometer Phase Difference sets the maximum
allowable phase difference between the Loop and Sim Signal
selected for Phase Locking.
ENTRY 11: FrcPsetTim - An entry of zero (0) enables the Automatic Force
Preset feature. (Recommended). Set this entry for the desired
time at the Start of the sweep, before the automatic Force
Control is enabled.
Notes: Values of 100 to 800 milliseconds may be tried to

improve the force, at the beginning of a sweep. CAUTION: To
large of an entree will disable Force Control for the entire
sweep.
The range for the Automatic Force Preset is 0 65,000

Milliseconds.
The default is 0.
10Apr02
MENU 15: HARDWARE SETUP
15. HARDWARE SETUP

1. TimeBrk Act: HIGH A
2. RecStartAct: HIGH
3. GPS PPS Act: HIGH
OK>
D
Press "D" to exit to the Main Menu 2.
ENTRY 1: TimeBrk Act Time Break Active Signal. High or Low

Selects either an Active High or Active Low Time Break Signal.
Of about 10 milliseconds in duration. Firmware prior to April
1999 set Time Break Active to Active High.
The default is Low.
ENTRY 2: RecStartAct Recorder Start Active Signal. High or Low

Selects either a Active High or Active Low for Recorder Start
Signal of about 10 milliseconds in duration. Firmware prior to
April 1999 the Recorder Start Active was not enabled.
The default is Low.
ENTRY 3: GPS PPS Act GPS PPS Active. High or Low

Selects input polarity of GPS PPS pulse. Either Active
high/positive going or Active Low/negative going. Firmware
prior to April 1999 set the GPS PPS in firmware to Active Low.
The default is High.
10Apr02
ACCELEROMETER: Decoder Mode only. Located under Main Menu, Menu 13:
Calibration. Displays results of Accelerometer test briefly just after
an accelerometer test has been completed either at the end of calibration
routine or after the accelerometer test only has been executed.
ACCELEROMETER TEST:
ACC. DIFFERENCE: A
RM: BP:
PEAK 00% 00%
POS 00% 00%
NEG 00% 00% B
CONNECTION CODE:XXXX
LOOP RM OK
SIM RM OK
LOOP BP OK C
SIM BP OK
ACC. DIFFERENCE:
RM: BP:
PEAK 00% 00%
POS 00% 00%
NEG 00% 00%
CONNECTION CODE:XXXX
LOOP RM ??
SIM RM ??
LOOP BP ??
SIM BP ??
The accelerometer difference listings indicate comparisons between the

loop and similarity accelerometers (Loop RM v/s Sim RM and Loop BP v/s
Sim BP). The readings show the difference in the highest reading sensed,
the integral of all the positive values, and the integral of all the
negative values.
CONNECTION CODE indicates polarities of first breaks detected in the

pulse test. The digits are in the order of the accelerometer listing
below the connection code in this menu, which is, Loop RM, Sim RM, Loop
BP, and Sim BP. A value of 2 indicated a positive first break was
detected, 1 indicates a negative first break, and 0 means no first break
was detected. A Connection Code of 2211 is the expected result.
Rendering an OK message by each accelerometer.
Note: If the readings are other than OK. A reversed reading will be
indicated by REV, and if no first break is detected, it will be
indicated buy a Reading of BAD.
08May02
Encoder Operation Page 2.1.1
ENCODER OPERATION
Set-Up:
JF connector to Recording System connects;

True Reference, to Analog Auxiliary input of recording system.
Power to Vib Pro Unit of Vib Pro
Radio connection
True Reference (Pilot) Signal
Wireline Reference
JE connector connects;
Time Break in recording system select isolated or Non-isolated
on Interface Card.
Remote Start from recording system to Vib Pro Unit
Radio Reference Analog Signal
Connector 3 on D-sub panel connects to Comport on Vib Pro

Computer. This port is used for VP_KOP, WVSIG, GPSMap and the
Encoder Software program. Recommend connecting TX and RX to Com1
on Computer. Connect TX from Vib Pro to RX on Com2 on Computer.
Connector 4 on D-sub panel connects to Com Port on Vib Pro

Computer. This port is used by VIBQC and uses the CCC Card
inside Vib Pro Unit. Recommend connecting this to Com3 on
Computer.
02May00
C:\V6MAN\Vibpro2\Ch02-1-1.doc
OPERATION
The Encoder Software program is essential for proper operation of the
Encoder. This Encoder program allows selections of the following:
Active Vibrator Numbers

Sweep Number
Start Code and Crew Number
High or Low Force
Keyboard or Stored Value
Vibrator number for Similarity
Automatic Sequence Operation
Automatic Similarity Operation
The Vib Pro Encoder Unit will continue to request the same start code
until the Encoder program changes it. A different Sweep number can be
selected by using the "" and "" keys and then pressing the enter on
the front panel. All other selections must be done via the Encoder
program.
Setup
Turn Vib Pro Unit Power On.

Adjust contrast with the "" or "" key if required.
Select Encoder Mode if not selected. If in Decoder Mode go to
Menu, then job profile, then turn Decoder Mode to "OFF".
Start Encoder Software Program.
Start WVSIG Program.
Set display and configuration of programs. Select Com port on
Computer, which is connected to D-sub connector 3 on Vib Pro
Unit.
WVSIG, Encoder and VPKOP share data from a single Com Port. The
PelCoMos Program allows these programs to share the same Com
Port.
GPSMap should be connected to a different Com Port for best
operation. Only the receive line of the Computer should be
connected. Connecting two transmits together on two different
Com Ports will damage computer.
On new set-ups the VPKOP must be run to set up parameters on the
Encoder and Decoders.
After verifying the parameters, use the Encoder program to start
operation.
02May00
Single Sweep Operation
Select Sequence 1 on Encoder Program.

Edit Sequence 1 and select:
Sweep #
Vibrator Group
Start Codes and Crew #
Keyboard or Stored Value Sweep
High or Low Force
Edit Group
Select Active Vibrator numbers for the Group selected in
Sequence 1.
Close Edit Menu
Start Sweep with Start button on Encoder Program.
Verify the Vib Pro units start. The display on the Encoder
program will display which Vibrator numbers reported PSS.
Radio Similarity Operation
Uses Encoder and VibQC programs.

Set up VibQC for Vib Pro ESG mode, and select proper sweep length.
Verify VibQC is set up to Com3 on computer and that Com3 on
computer is connected to connector 4 on D-sub panel of Vib Pro
Unit. (Note: other Com ports can be used on computer.)
Select Acquire on VibQC program. Acquire will not start until
commanded by Encoder program.
On Encoder program select Vibrator number for radio similarity.
Start Encoder with Start button on Encoder program.
After Sweep is over, VibQC should begin plotting similarity.
Select different plots, print or save data with VibQC program.
When the Vib Pro mode is selected, the triggering of the VibQC is
automatically selected to Time Break. This allows accurate,
reliable and repeatable triggering regardless of sweep phases or
taper lengths.
02May00
Vib Pro Normal/Master/Slave/Monitor Operation
Vib Pro Encoders may be operated in one of the following four modes:
Normal Mode:
In this mode of operation, the VPE operates the same as previous versions
of firmware. The VPE is set in this mode by going to the JOB PROFILE
menu and selecting MSTRencode: = OFF, MON encode: = OFF, and SLAVencode:
= OFF. The VPE will be used as the GPS reference station if the Single
Radio Option is being used.
Master Encoder Mode:

This mode sets the VPE as the Master Encoder for Master Slave operation.
In this mode, the Master Encoder sends the Master Start Code over the
radio to start the Slave Encoder. The Master Start Code contains all of
the information that will be sent in the Vibrator Start Code. The only
difference is the Start Code Sub Type. The Start Code Sub Type contains
the information for which PSS mode (PSS after the Sweep or Delayed PSS),
and which Encoder will send the Vibrator Start codes (the Master or the
Slave). The Vib Pro Encoder computer program determines the
configuration of the Master Start Code from selections in the Auto
Functions, Sweep Profile, and other parameter in the Vib Pro Encoder
computer program. The Master Encoder will issue a RECORDER START PULSE
on the REC ST A (pin E is active and pin F is return) line of the JE
external connector at 1 second (plus the Start Delay that is over 1
second) before Time Break. If the Master is to send the Vibrator Start
Codes, the Vibrator Start Codes will be sent at the appropriate time that
can be adjusted by the Encoder Delay entry that is found in the RADIO
CONTROL MENU of the Master VPE. The Master Encoder receives the PSS
information from the Vibrators as well as RADIO SIMILARITIES. The Vib
Pro Encoder computer program connected to the Master VPE controls Radio
Similarities. The VPE is set to Master by going to the JOB PROFILE menu
and selecting MSTRencode: = ON, MON encode: = OFF, and SLAVencode: = OFF.
The firmware only allows one of these modes to be ON. For example, if
SLAVencode was ON, SLAVencode will automatically switch to OFF when the
MSTRencode is set to ON. The MASTER VPE MUST BE THE GPS REFERENCE
STATION IF THE SINGLE RADIO OPTION IS BEING USED!
02May00
Slave Encoder Mode:
This mode sets the VPE as a Slave Encoder for Master Slave operation. In
this mode, the Slave encoder is started by receiving a Master Start Code
on the radio. The Slave encoder MUST BE SET TO THE SAME CREW NUMBER AS
THE MASTER START CODE. The Crew number match determines if the Slave
Encoder will start, not the list of Vibrators in the Master Start Code.
In response to the Master Start Code, the Slave Encoder will issue a
RECORDER START PULSE on the REC ST A (pin E is active and pin F is
return) line of the JE external connector at 1 second (plus the Start
Delay that is over 1 second) before Time Break. The Slave Encoder looks
at the Master Start Code Sub Type to determine if it should send the
Vibrator Start Code. If it is selected to send the Vibrator Start codes,
the Vibrator Start Codes will be sent at the appropriate time that can be
adjusted by the Encoder Delay entry that is found in the RADIO CONTROL
MENU of the Slave VPE. The Slave Encoder receives the PSS information
from the Vibrators as well as RADIO SIMILARITIES. Radio Similarities can
only be done on the Slave Encoder if the Master Encoder has requested a
similarity. The VPE is set to Slave mode by setting the SLAVencode = ON.
MSTRencode and MON encode will automatically switch to OFF if either one
was selected as ON. THE SLAVE VPE CANNOT BE THE GPS REFERENCE STATION IF
THE SINGLE RADIO OPTION IS BEING USED!
Monitor Encoder Mode:

This mode sets the VPE as a Monitor Encoder that will start in response
to the reception of a Vibrator Start Code that has the same CREW NUMBER
and START CODE as the Monitor Encoder. The Monitor Encoder can be used
to monitor operations in crews that use Normal Encoder Mode or Master
Slave Mode. In response to a valid Vibrator Start Code, the Monitor
Encoder will issue a RECORDER START PULSE on the REC ST A (pin E is
active and pin F is return) line of the JE external connector at 96 mSec
before Time Break. The Monitor Encoder receives the PSS information from
the Vibrators as well as RADIO SIMILARITIES. Radio Similarities can only
be done on the Monitor Encoder if the Controlling Encoder has requested
a similarity. The VPE is set to Monitor mode by setting MON encode: ON.
MSTRencode and SLAVencode will automatically switch to OFF if either one
was selected as ON. THE MONITOR VPE CANNOT BE THE GPS REFERENCE STATION
IF THE SINGLE RADIO OPTION IS BEING USED!
02May00
MASTER / SLAVE SETUP:
1. Set the Master VPE as a Normal Encoder
2. Setup the zero time between the Normal Encoder and the Vibrators
(True Reference and Radio Similarities).
3. Set the Slave VPE as a Normal Encoder
4. Setup the zero time between this Encoder and the Vibrators (True
Reference and Radio Similarities).
5. Set the Encoder that is to be the Master as a Master Encoder
6. Set the Encoder that is to be the Slave as a Slave Encoder
7. In the Radio Control Menu, set the Master Start Delay (MstStrtDly)
to the correct setting. (Typically the minimum of 1000 mSec.)
8. Setup the zero time between the Master VPE and the Slave VPE. In
the Radio Control Menu, this is the Master Encoder Delay
(MstrEncDly). If the same radios are used all the way around, this
entry setting should be very close to if not the same as the Encoder
Delay setting. With the Vib Pro Encoder Computer Program, select
the Master to start the Vibrators.
9. The Start Delay Entry (Radio Control Menu Item 11) should be set to
the same value in both the Master VPE and the Slave VPE.
10. With an oscilloscope or a Notebook VCA, compare the Time Breaks
between the Master VPE and the Slave VPE. (Should be 1 to 2 uSec
best case).
11. With an oscilloscope or Notebook VCA, compare the Time Breaks
between the Master VPE and the VPDs (Vibrators). (Should be 1 to 2
uSec best case).
between the Slave VPE and the VPDs. (Should be 1 to 2 uSec best
case).
13. With an oscilloscope or Notebook VCA, compare the True References
between the Master VPE and the Slave VPE
14. With an oscilloscope or Notebook VCA, compare the True Reference
between the Master VPE and the VPDs.
15. With an oscilloscope or Notebook VCA, compare the True Reference
between the Slave VPE and the VPDs.
16. With an oscilloscope or Notebook VCA, check that the Recorder Start
Pulse in the Slave occurs at 1 second before Time Break. If Start
Delay is more than 1 second, the additional time over 1 second will
be added to this time period.
Pulse in the Master VPE occurs within + or 2 uSec of the Recorder
Start Pulse in the Slave VPE.
18. With the Encoder Computer Program at the Master VPE, request a
Radio Similarity and check Radio Reference versus Radio Vibrator at
the Master VPE.
the Slave Encoder.
20. In the Vib Pro Encoder Computer program, select the Slave to start
the Vibrators.
02May00
21. Repeat Steps 10 through 19.
22. Add a Monitor VPE to the Master / Slave operation.
23. With an oscilloscope or a Notebook VCA, compare the Time Breaks
between the Master VPE and the Monitor VPE. (Should be 1 to 2 uSec
best case).
between the Master VPE and the Monitor VPE.
the Monitor VPE.
Pulse in the Monitor VPE occurs at 96 mSec before Time Break.
Monitor Encoder Test:

1. Setup a crew working with a VPE setup in Normal Encoder Mode. Be
sure that the zero time is set correctly.
between the Normal VPE and the Monitor VPE. (Should be 1 to 2 uSec
best case).
between the Normal VPE and the Monitor VPE.
4. With the Encoder Computer Program at the Normal VPE, request a
Radio Similarity and check the Radio Reference versus the Radio
Vibrator at the Monitor VPE.
With an oscilloscope or Notebook VCA, check that the Recorder Start Pulse
in the Monitor VPE occurs at 96 mSec before Time Break.
02May00
Decoder Operation Page 2.2.1
Vib Pro Decoder Operation
POWER - To turn the Vib Pro unit "on", toggle the switch located on the
side of the enclosure. The unit will show a System test on the display
then a new menu will be displayed:
A
PRESSURE UP
VIBRATOR !
B

PRESS TO OPERATE> C
PRESS TO CALIBRATE>
D
Wait for the pressure up vibrator message before applying pressure to

shaker assembly. The vibrator must be pressured up before continuing.
Press D to Calibrate. Calibration must be performed anytime a
hydraulic or electronic component (Valve LVDT, Mass LVDT, or Torque
Motor) is changed or adjusted.
Press C or Start Button to operate. Pressing C will bring the
following to the display:
CENTERING MASS...
B
PLEASE WAIT
After the mass has been centered, one of three Ready to Sweep menus
will be displayed.
06Oct99
MENU A
READY TO SWEEP SWEEPING
/ SWEEP RUNNING
:STAT
SWEEP : 01 K HI SWEEP : 01 K SEGM 01
STATUS: OK
:MENU
\ A A
----- PHE: | +000
AUTO CNT:0000 / THD:| 000
:
MAN. CNT:0000 :SCRN
VIB 03 PKF:||||||||||||| 080
:SEL
\____
B GFG:||||||||||| 070 B
/
: RDY
: MSG
TMD:| 004
HD1.6 : VLD:| 000
\ C MSD:| 000 C
----- AUT: 0000 MAN: 0000
/
17 29 00 GPS :HI-LO _____________
SWEEP\-/CONTRAST\+/SWEEP :FRC /- CONTRAST + \
\
D D
A - Status Menu A - N/A

B - Changes between the three Ready B - Changes between the three
to Sweep Menus. Sweeping Menus.
C - Causes the Decoder to send a C - N/A
ready message. This message will
include the Vibrator ID and may D - N/A
contain the GPS position of the
unit.
Use and arrows to adjust
the contrast of display.
D - Changes between Hi-Lo Force.
The or keys are N/A.
Use and arrows to adjust
The Sweep Number which will run

when a manual sweep is executed is
shown on the Top line. To change
the Sweep Number press the or
keys. Press "Enter" to accept
the change.
06Oct99
MENU B
STATUS: OK / STATUS: OK
:STAT
VIB3 RUN VIB3
SWP01: K HI
:MENU
\ A SWP01: SEG 01 K HI A
ID#:33688 ----- ID#:33688
/
CHK: S=FF01 V=FB5B :
CHK: S=FF01 V=FB5B SCRN
PHZ: 002 +016 :SCRN PHZ: 002 +016 SEL
FRC: 065 069 077 :SEL B FRC: 065 069 077 B
THD: 001 008 \____ THD: 001 008
/
: RDY
: MSG
:
\ C C
AUT: 0000 MAN:0000 -----
AUT: 0000 MAN:0000 INC
/
17 29 00 GPS : INC MAN
CLR AUTO\-/CONTRAST\+/CLR MAN : MAN CLR AUTO\-/CONTRAST\+/CLR MAN
\
D D

include the Vibrator ID and may D - Increases the Manual count by
contain the GPS position of the one.
unit.
The clears the Auto count
D - Increases the Manual count by back to 0000.
one.
The clears the Auto count back Use and arrows to adjust
to 0000. the contrast of display.
Use and arrows to adjust The clears the Manual count

the contrast of display. back to 0000.
The clears the Manual count

back to 0000.
06Oct99
MENU C
/ SWEEP RUNNING
:STAT
SWEEP : 01 K HI SWEEP : SEG01 K HI
STATUS: OK
:MENU
\ A STATUS: OK A
-----
AUTO CNT:0000 / AUTO CNT:0000 SCRN
:
MAN. CNT:0000 :SCRN MAN. CNT:0000 SEL
VIB 03 :SEL B VIB 03 B
\____
/
: RDY
: MSG
:
\ C C
-----
/ INC
17 29 00 GPS : INC MAN
CLR AUTO\-/CONTRAST\+/CLR MAN : MAN CLR AUTO\-/CONTRAST\+/CLR MAN
\
D D

include the Vibrator ID and may D - Increases the Manual count by
contain the GPS position of the one.
unit.
The clears the Auto count back
D - Increases the Manual count by to 0000.
one.
Use and arrows to adjust the
The clears the Auto count back contrast of display.
to 0000.
Use and arrows to adjust back to 0000.

back to 0000.
06Oct99
Calibration Page 2.3.1
DECODER CALIBRATION
The Automatic Calibration procedure establishes system normalization

factors and gains, and checks for many system errors. Calibration is not
needed unless a component of the Vibrator or the Vibrator Electronics has
been replaced or adjusted, or some error condition is suspected.
The following steps describe what the operator needs to do, and what
Display message to expect after each step. Any other Display message
means that an error has occurred, or that an adjustment is required.
Calibration should be done when the hydraulic fluid is at normal

operating temperature.
******************************* CAUTION! ******************************

*** KEEP THE LIFT SWITCH IN THE DOWN POSITION WHILE THE CALIBRATION ***
****** PROCEDURE IS IN PROGRESS. CALIBRATION WILL NOT TERMINATE ******
***** IF THE BASEPLATE IS RAISED AND EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY OCCUR! *****
***********************************************************************
1. See Vib Pro Decoder Operation.
2. Press the "D" Button to enter Calibration Menu. Then press "C"
Button twice to start calibration. If an error message occurs any
time during calibration, the calibration process can either be
continued by pressing the "C" Button, or terminated by pressing the
"D" Button.
The display should now show "Pressure Up Done". Press "C" to

continue.
3. The Display should now show the message "IS MASS DOWN".
Look at the position of the reaction mass. If it is all the way
down, press the "C" button go to step 4. If the reaction mass is
all the way up, press the "D" button.
If using a shear wave vibrator, the sides of accelerometers with the
connector for the cable is defined as the up direction for mass
motion. If the accelerometers are mounted so what would be the top
on a p-wave vibrator is towards the left side of the vibrator, then
if the mass is moved toward the left, it is considered to be up.
If the "D" button was pressed, the Display should now show the
message "POLARITY ERROR, PRESSURE DOWN".
06Oct99
Calibration Page 2.3.2
Pressure down the Vibrator, then press the "C" button. This inverts
the polarity of the Torque Motor.
The Display should now show the message: "PRESSURE UP".
Pressure up the Vibrator, then press the "C" button. Repeat Step
#3.
4. The system now reads and stores the maximum down Valve and Mass LVDT
readings. Pilot stage adjustment and Valve LVDT adjustment tests
are then performed.
5. The system now moves the Reaction Mass to the top. The Mass and
Valve LVDT limits are read and stored. The Mass LVDT alignment test
is also performed.
6. The system now centers the Mass and performs an accelerometer pulse
test.
7. The system now measures and stores Pilot Stage and VLVDT alignment
accuracy.
8. At the end of calibration, the Calibration Menu will be displayed.

This menu shows the results of calibration. From this menu the
accelerometer pulse test, calibration, or the main menu can be
selected.
The calibration process may be repeated by pressing the "C" button.

This may be done without reducing the hydraulic pressure of the
vibrator.
9. Press the "D" button to return to Main Menu.
06Oct99
Shot Pro Operation Page 2.4.1
ADVANCE III VIB PRO ENCODER OPERATION WITH SHOT PRO DECODER
The Advance III Encoder can be used to control both vibroseis and
dynamite operation. This section explains the requirements for using the
Advance III Encoder with the Shot Pro System.
REQUIREMENTS:
Shot Pro Version 3.0 Firmware or later
Encoder Set Up for Shot Pro

# Disable Radio Similarity.
# Select ID number to match Shot Pro unit ID number.
# Select the special S.P. sweep type 6 (SHOTP) if timing marks
are desired.
# Set crew number and start code number in Encoder to match Shot
Pro Unit. An entry of 15 in crew number at Decoder enables
starts with all selected crew numbers.
Start Time Test:

The Shot Pro radio interface in the VPRO Mode is identical to the Advance
III vibrator electronics. If the Shot Pro is using the same radio and
connection as the Vibrator Electronics then the start time should be
identical.
To adjust start time compare the time break of the ESG to the high
voltage output of the Shot Pro. Use Encoder delay entry in the Encoder
to align the time break signals.
RADIO REF DELAY

The Radio Reference in the Encoder can be used to provide timing marks
for the following signals on the Radio Vib line (See Fig. 1 page 2.4.5):
# Decoded Clock Time Break (1.0 sec.)
# Conformation Time Break (1.5 sec.)
# Uphole Signal (2.0 sec.)
After setting up Encoder delay with the Start Time Test, then adjust
Radio Reference Delay to delay the Radio Reference pulse at one second to
align with the Decoded Clock Time Break signal on the Radio Vib line.
06Oct99
ANALOG CONFIRMATION AND UPHOLE SIGNALS
The Advance III Encoder and the Shot Pro Encoder both output an analog
signal to the Recording System for Confirmation of proper Decoder
operation. Three signals Decoded Clock Time Break, Confirmation Time
Break and the Uphole Signal are time multiplexed on this one analog line.
(See Fig. 1 page 2.4.5)
DECODED CLOCK TIME BREAK
This signal appears on the analog line at about 1 second. It corresponds
to the Application of voltage to the cap terminals at the decoder. This
signal is decoded from the returning PFS (Post Fire Service) data from
the Decoder. If the Decoder fires late this signal will be delayed, if
the Decoder fires early this signal will be early. Confirmation Time
Break and Uphole Signal are delayed by 0.5 and 1 sec after Decoded Clock
Time Break as a reference, respectively.
CONFIRMATION TIME BREAK
The Confirmation Time Break pulse occurs exactly 0.5 sec plus
Confirmation Time Break delay after the Decoded Clock Time Break. The
Confirmation Time Break Delay is defined as the amount of time the
current flow to the cap was greater than 4 amps. If current never flows,
then this pulse will not occur. If the current is still flowing at the
end of the fire time (4 mSec), then this pulse will not occur. In either
case the Decoder assumes the cap did not fire.
UPHOLE SIGNAL
The analog Uphole Signal recorded by the Decoder is reproduced exactly
1.0 second after the Decoded Clock Time Break Signal.
ALTERNATING VIBRATOR/DYNAMITE OPERATION
Set all Vib Pro Units and Shot Pro Units to unique ID numbers. By
placing only the desired ID numbers in the active Vib group any
combination of Vibrator only, Shot Pro only or both can be selected. In
addition the start code or crew number can be used to identify unique
boxes.
For example Sequence 1 is used for vibrator operation. It selects start
code O, a sweep #1, crew #15 and Group A. Sweep #1 has the Vibrator
Production sweep.
Sequence 2 is used for dynamite. It selects start code 1 and sweep #2,
crew #1 and Group B. Sweep number 2 is used for dynamite shooting.
Sweep #2 uses sweep type = SHOTP. In this example the selected Shot Pro
ID# is only in Group B. Several sequence numbers can be used to address
individual Decoder Units.
06Oct99
Wire Line Communications
Communications between an Advance III Encoder or Shot Pro Encoder and
Shot Pro Decoder(s) may be accomplished by wire rather than by radio. To
do this, connect pins A and B of the five pin radio connector together
and connect them to one wire in the cable to be used for communication.
Connect pins C and E of the five pin radio connector together and connect
them to another wire in the communication cable. Wire line
communications should be satisfactory over several miles of cable. There
are no provisions for voice communications through the Shot Pros, but
using the paralleling intercom units on the same wire pair should not
cause a problem.
06Oct99
Polarity and Phase Page 3.1.1
POLARITY AND PHASE CONSIDERATION
In 1951 Continental Oil Company (Conoco) developed the Vibroseis
technique. The first Vibrators used as energy sources did not use any
phase locking. They tried to maintain less then 90 of phase error
between the Vibrators. Since they were using Velocity geophones
connected to the Seismic Recording System, the geophysicist at Conoco
used the baseplate velocity motion to determine if the Vibrators were in
phase or out of phase. The Vibrators were polarized so that a velocity
geophone mounted on the baseplate would be in phase with the pilot signal
used for correlation. It was soon observed that when multiple Vibrators
were used and they were not synchronized, the energy that they produced
was greatly reduced. Conoco estab1ished a polarity standard that an
upward motion would cause a positive voltage on all of the geophones on
their crew. Accelerometers were found to be more robust and reliable
than velocity geophones for measuring the baseplate motion. Since
acceleration leads velocity by 90 the engineers at Conoco would require
the baseplate acceleration signal to lead the pilot by 90.
In the 1960's other companies began using the Vibroseis technique. Some
companies would control the Vibrators for acceleration to be in phase
with the pilot. Other companies polarized their seismic velocity
geophones for downward motion to produce positive voltage. This caused
the vibrator data, which was recorded by different companies, to have
different polarities.
In 1975 the SEG Technical Standards Committee published a polarity

convention for system polarity. In short it stated that any vibrator
polarity was OK as long as it was documented. The report also stated
that it preferred that motion down be positive and that the acceleration
of the baseplate should be in phase with the pilot signal. At that time,
Pelton Company and most major oil companies continued to record data with
the same phase relationship as they had in the past.
In the early 1980's two papers were written which would further change
the phase response of Vibroseis data.
Lerwill, W.E., 1981, "The Amplitude and Phase Response of a

Seismic Vibrator": Geophys. Prosp., 29, p503-528
Sallas, J.J., 1984, "Seismic Vibrator Control and the Down Going
P-wave"; Geophysics, 49, p732-740
09Oct01
Lerwill suggested using the Reaction Mass motion to control the phase of
Vibrator and Sallas suggested using the estimated Ground Force (weighted
sum) signal to control the phase of the Vibrator. Sallas defined the
estimated ground force by summing the Reaction Mass Force (Reaction Mass
weight * Reaction Mass Acceleration) and the Baseplate Force (Baseplate
weight * Baseplate Acceleration).
The phase of the Reaction Mass, Baseplate and Ground Force are typically
similar at low frequency, but at high frequencies they are quite
different. It has been measured on soft ground that Reaction Mass leads
Ground Force by more that 80 at 100Hz and Ground Force leads the
baseplate by more than 80. But on hard ground the Reaction Mass, Ground
Force, and Baseplate may have less than 10 phase error at 100Hz.
By the early 1990's most crews had switched from baseplate phase locking
to Ground Force phase locking. Some crews were using 0 between Ground
Force and the pilot, other crews used 90, 180 and 270. The 1975 SEG
Polarity Convention did not cover Ground Force phase locking, so in 1994
the SEG Technical Standard Committee published an updated Polarity
Convention for Vibratory Source / Recording Systems. The 1994 report
added a convention for phase locking to estimated Ground Force and
Reaction Mass. The report also covered testing of the phase of the total
recording system and not just isolated parts, also a section on
polarizing a Shear Wave Vibrator was added.
The following is extracted from the 1994 SEG Polarity Convention for
Vibrator Source/Recording Systems.
Ralph A. Landram, Robert A. Brook and John J. Sallas, 1994,
"Polarity Convention for Vibratory Source/Recording Systems":
Geophysics, Vol. 59, No. 2, p 315-322.
UPDATED CONVENTION FOR P-WAVE VIBRATORS
We recommend a P-wave vibrator polarity (phase) convention that is a

simple extension of the previous one:
Configure all recording channels (data and auxiliary) to have identical

seismic filters;
Polarize the display system so that a positive- (negative)-increasing

sequence of numbers on tape results in a positive- (negative)-going
break (for time increasing to the right, the signal axis is 90 degrees
counter clockwise from the time axis) on a read-after-write record.
This holds for all channels including auxiliaries;
09Oct01
Connect spread geophones to the recorder so that downward impulsive
case motion results in a positive break on a read-after-write display
system and positive increasing sequence of numbers on tape;
Connect to the recorder an independent vibrator motion sensor(s)

located next to the sensor(s) used by the vibrator electronics for
phase compensation. Connect the circuit to have the same impulsive
polarity as the spread geophones. Use a tape playback of this
independent monitor signal as a guide for connecting the pilot signal:
For reaction mass phase-lock, connect the pilot signal so that it is in

phase with the monitored reaction mass acceleration signal when the
vibrator is phase-locked to a sweep;
For Weighted Sum phase-lock, connect the pilot signal so that it is in-
phase with the monitored weighted-sum signal when the vibrator is
phase-locked to a sweep;
For baseplate motion phase-lock, when the vibrator is phase-locked
to a sweep, connect the pilot signal so that it:
Is in phase with the monitored baseplate acceleration signal, or
Leads the monitored baseplate velocity signal by 90, or
Leads the monitored baseplate displacement signal by 180.
All Pelton Vibrator Electronics polarize the accelerometers such that

positive voltage is upward acceleration. This is opposite from the SEG
convention. With the Pelton Electronics, the radio similarity should
have the following polarity to conform to the SEG convention:
Pilot 180 with Pelton's baseplate acceleration signal, when Baseplate

phase locked.
Pilot 180 with Pelton's Reaction Mass acceleration signal, when

Reaction Mass Phase locked.
Pilot 180 with Pelton's Ground Force signal, when Ground Force phase
locked.
09Oct01
To conform to the above standard the following sweep phase must be
entered into the Encoder's sweep phase.
Advance II ESG Ver 1-5 Keyboard Sweep

ESG Sweep Phase = Vib Sweep Phase + 90
Advance II ESG Stored Values

ESG Sweep Phase = Vib Sweep Phase
Advance II ESG Version 6

ESG Sweep Phase = Vib Sweep Phase
Advance III Vib Pro

ESG Phase Init = Decoder Phase Init
The above sweep phases are only valid if the other parts of the recording
system conform to SEG Polarity Standard.
After carefully following the stated SEG's polarity convention, and

carefully processing the seismic data, the seismic data from impulse
sources will have opposite polarity than Seismic data from the Vibrator
sources. This was shown by:
R. A. Brook and L. J. Meister, 1987, "Experimental Analysis of

Vibrator Data Polarity", 57th meeting, SEG Expanded Abstract.
Because of this polarity reversal, some Oil companies require that

Vibroseis data be recorded with reversed polarity than the SEG's polarity
convention. This is usually done by reversing the pilot signal's
polarity from the Encoder to the Recording System.
Pelton Vibrator Electronics filtering and delay of the Pilot/True

Reference sweep.
The TRUE REFERENCE (Pilot) Sweep is filter the same as the Similarity
Vibrator Output Signals (Reaction Mass and Baseplate Accelerometer
signals, Ground Force, etc.). At both the Encoder and Decoder. The
resulting Signal is called WIRELINE REFERENCE. It is made available
for direct comparison to the Wireline Vibrator signals.
The TRUE REFERENCE (pilot) Sweep at the Encoder is also delayed and
filtered to match the delay and filtering of the Radio similarity
signals from the Decoder. This resulting signal is called RADIO
REFERENCE. It is made available for direct comparison to the Radio
Vibrator signals.
09Oct01
Keyboard Sweeps Page 4.1.1
Vib Pro Keyboard Sweeps
Keyboard sweeps may be defined by direct keyboard entry or through the
VPKop computer program.
To program keyboard sweeps directly:
1. Enter the Sweep Menu.
2. Select the sweep number to be programmed.
3. Select the segment to be programmed.
4. Select the seep parameters for the segment to be programmed.
Note: When defining sweeps, the last segment to be used is defined by
having entering a length of zero for the NEXT segment. e.g. to have a
one segment sweep, segment #2 must have a length of 000 entered.
To program keyboard sweeps using VPKop:
1. Start the VPKop program.
2. Select SWEEPS.
3. Program the sweep parameters using the spread sheet table on the
computer display. There are help items near the bottom of the
display.
4. When finished, press the Send button at the bottom of the window.
5. Select ComPort or Radio
6. If using Radio, Select the units the data should be sent to.
Selecting the Encoder's Unit Number will cause the data to be sent
to it even though it is directly connected to the computer.
To program segmented keyboard sweeps using VPKop, open the User window,
then the Settings window, then the Mode window, then select Advanced.
Selecting Normal will cause the program to automatically (after asking
for permission) set the length of segment 2 for all sweeps to 000.
Crew Number in the Sending Parameters window must equal the value set
into Crew Number in the Vib Pro boxes.
Linear, dB/Hz, dB/Oct, T-Power, Random, Pulse, Shot Pro, and Pause sweeps
types may be generated in keyboard mode. The Pulse type causes the
actuator to generate a pulse. The Shot Pro type is used in Shot Pro
Encoders to produce timing lines when firing Shot Pro Decoders. Pause
allows the user to insert dead time in segmented sweeps.
The start and end frequencies are adjustable in 0.1 Hz increments. The
minimum and maximum settings are 0.1 to 999.9 Hz.
The sweep length is adjustable in 1 millisecond increments. The minimum
and maximum settings are 1 Sec to 65.35 Sec.
06Oct99
Keyboard Sweeps Page 4.1.2
Start and end tapers may be cosine or Blackman, variable in 1 millisecond
steps. The minimum and maximum settings are 0 to length of segment or
sweep.
The phase of Stored Sweeps may be defined in 1 degree increments.
Keyboard sweeps may have one segment or be made up of up to sixteen
segments.
Stored sweep segments may included in keyboard sweeps.
06Oct99
Stored Sweeps Page 4.2.1
Vib Pro Stored Sweeps
Vib Pros may use sweeps that may not easily or may not be defined by
keyboard sweep definition. These sweeps must be defined by a computer
program. They must then be loaded into PCMCIA Flash Ram card(s). These
programmed cards must then be installed in slots provided on the back
side of the SHARC cards in Vib Pro Encoders and Decoders. This slot is
accessible by removing the cover on the end of the Vib Pro opposite the
front panel. Please use caution to prevent mechanical and electrostatic
damage to Vib Pros when the cover is removed.
Stored sweeps may be reproduced by selecting STORED as the sweep type in

either Sweep Profile or as a Sweep Segment in Keyboard Sweep definition.
The Stored 32 program provides the capabilities to:
1. Program sweeps
2. Import sweep data generated by other programs
3. Convert Advance II importable sweeps to Advance III sample rate
(.488 ms per sample to .25 ms per sample).
4. Preview the sweep
5. Check the contents, Erase, and program PCMCIA cards.
Sweep data generated by other programs, such as MatLab or Pelton's SWEEP

for Windows program may be imported for use by Sweep 32.
The maximum sweep lengths are:
30 seconds per sweep.
About 8 minutes total sweep time, varies with number of sweeps. The Last
Sweep (Highest Numbered Sweep) can be longer than 30 seconds- up to
length that will fill card.
06Oct99
Random Page 4.3.1
Pseudo-Random Sweep Generation/Control/Analysis
Introduction
In seismic operations servo-hydraulic vibrators normally employ sine wave

sweeps of continuously varying frequencies. These sweeps may have either
a linear or non-linear rate of change of frequency with time and may also
have an amplitude ramp applied to control the desired amplitude spectrum
and power output of the vibrator. Another type of sweep that may be
employed is the Pseudo-random sweep. These sweeps are frequency band
limited white noise sources and are sometimes referred to as "Chaos"
sweeps. One advantage to this type of sweep is that the start and end
tapers do not greatly affect the frequency spectrum. Of even greater
importance is the fact that random sweeps do not excite the resonance
frequencies as much as linear sweeps. Tests have shown that pseudo-
random sweeps generate much smaller particle velocities than a linear
sweep of the same frequency band set at the same drive level. This
reduction in particle velocity greatly reduces the damaging effects on
buildings and roads and may allow vibration on points previously omitted
for danger of damage to existing structures.
The pseudo-random sweep, however, requires a much different approach than

that of sinusoidal sweeps. The sweep generation, sweep control and
analysis all require special consideration. Many of the algorithms used
for control and analysis of sinusoidal sweeps do not have validity with
random sweeps.
Sweep Generation
Pseudo-random sweep sequences may be generated either by the Sharc

itself, through keyboard entries, or with the use of the Pelton Stored32
program. Stored32 is the VibPro Stored Values program used to generate
stored values sweeps and store them in the Sharc flash memory cards. For
more information on Stored32 please refer to section 7.6 of this manual.
Bandwidth, sweep length and tapers are entered just as with any other
sweep type. The Start Phase entry is not used in the calculation of
the pseudo-random sequence. Every execution of the random sequence
algorithm will generate the same sequence and the Constant entry is
used as a time delay into that sequence to create different sweeps.
Valid entries here are all integer values from 0 to 4,294,967,296. Users
should note that while the program code used in the Sharc and Stored32
program to generate the pseudo-random sequence are identical the
generated sequences will not match since they are running on two
different processors. Consequently, the two modes should not be mixed in
field operations.
06Oct99
Random Page 4.3.2
Due to the relatively correlation high side lobe energy mentioned
earlier, multiple pseudo-random sweeps, each employing a different
constant, should be stacked together to reduce this problem. Changing
the constant value provides a means of changing the pseudo-random
sequence while still maintaining the desired bandwidth. It may also
possible to change the side lobe energy through slight variations in the
bandwidth specification. In either case each sweep must be entered as a
different number and stored for later use.
Control
In the VibPro system the Sharc automatically detects that a pseudo-random
sweep is being performed and selects Phase Control Type 2. This is the
Digital Adaptive Control mode which employs the LMS (Least Mean Square)
algorithm controlling the phase of the vibrator signal. In this mode the
phase loop gain entry controls the speed at which the adaptive filter
updates its coefficients. Lower phase loop gains will provide more
stability to the control loop while the higher phase loop gains may be
required in situations where the earth conditions are changing rapidly.
Analysis
Most algorithms generally used for analyzing sinusoidal sweeps do not
provide correct results when analyzing pseudo-random sweeps. The user
should be aware of this and take care when selecting analysis tools. PSS
and Vibra*Sig data also require different interpretations with pseudo-
random sweeps. When performing a pseudo-random sweep the Sharc does not
compute or report phase in PSS. The best indication of vibrator
performance is the phase and amplitude derived from the cross-correlation
wavelet which may be selected in the VIBQC program. The correlation
envelope provides a look at side lobe energy. A comparison of the
optimum correlation side lobes (Reference auto-correlation) and actual
side lobes (Reference/vibrator cross-correlation) gives a good indication
of vibrator distortion level. The Vibra*Sig program also derives phase
and amplitude information from the correlation wavelet for its plots.
The algorithm employed in Vibra*Chek mode in the VIBQC program does not
produce valid phase and fundamental force results for a pseudo-random
sweep. Frequency Vs Time plots also do not have much meaning with
pseudo-random sweeps. Consequently, harmonic distortion and any
selections using frequency on the X-axis should be avoided with a pseudo-
random sweep.
All other VIBQC selections may be used to analyze the pseudo-random
sweep. The time domain comparisons of the reference and vibrator output
may be done with the signal trace selection. Vibra*Chek selections for
compression/non-compression, RMS, and AbsPeak provide the peak or RMS
vibrator force output. The amplitude spectrum may be generated for the
reference and vibrator outputs.
06Oct99
Random Page 4.3.3
Conclusion
The Advance III system provides the capability of generating,

controlling, and analyzing pseudo-random sweeps. However, special care
must be taken to assure that proper sweep generation and control are
performed. Several sweeps, each generated with a different constant,
should be summed together allow for the reduction of the correlation side
lobe energy. Many of the algorithms used for analysis of conventional
sinusoidal sweeps are not valid for the pseudo-random sweep. Analysis of
various aspects of the correlation wavelet in both Vibra*Sig and VIBQC
programs will provide the best vibrator performance information.
06Oct99
Amplitude and Phase Page 4.4.1
AMPLITUDE AND PHASE CONTROL
The Advance III Vib Pro Unit can use a separate Phase Control Loop and an
Amplitude Control Loop. We call this system our Standard Control System
(see page 4.4.2). A Digital Adaptive Control System for Phase and
Amplitude Control (see page 4.4.2) can be selected by entering 2 (LMS) in
the Phase Control type selection.
With the Standard Control System, the Sharc Card measures and controls
the phase and the amplitude of the vibrator. The Sharc measures and
controls the amplitude of the fundamental force every 0.25 mSec. The two
control loops work independently from each other, and the gain of each
feedback control loop can be set differently.
06Oct99
Standard Amplitude and Limits Control
The Advance III Vib Pro uses the weighted sum of the Reaction Mass and
Baseplate accelerometers to estimate the Ground Force of the vibrator.
With standard Amplitude and Limits Control, the Sharc Card monitors the
Ground Force Amplitude, Reaction Mass position, Reaction Mass Force,
Valve position and Torque Motor current and automatically adjusts the
drive level to maintain a constant Ground Force signal and prevent the
other vibrator limits from being exceeded.
Fundamental Force Control is always selected. The Sharc Card tries to
maintain the requested Ground Force level unless a limit is reached. The
vibrator limits, which are being monitored, are Torque Motor Current,
Main Spool Valve Displacement, Reaction Mass Displacement, Reaction Mass
Force and Peak Force.
The maximum allowable PEAK Torque Motor Current is usually specified by
torque motor manufacturers. The MAXIMUM TORQUE MOTOR CURRENT entry is in
terms of PEAK-TO-PEAK current. If the pilot stage of the servo valve is
adjusted properly the PEAK-TO-PEAK value for Torque Motor Current will
equal to PEAK Torque Motor Current multiplied by 2. Therefore, the
number entered in the MAXIMUM TORQUE MOTOR CURRENT entry should be two
times the limit specified by the manufacturer. The maximum displacement
of the Valve and Reaction Mass are automatically calculated during the
calibration procedure. The maximum allowable Reaction Mass Displacement,
and the maximum allowable Valve Displacement, must be entered to set the
limits for the Main Stage Servo Valve Spool Displacement and Reaction
Mass Displacement.
Suggested maximum entries for the limits are listed below:
Maximum Torque Motor Current

This is the rated maximum peak to peak current of the Torque Motor. An
entry of 51 milliamps - 200 milliamps is allowed. For entries greater
than 120 milliamps, current limit protection diodes D1 and D2 on the
Feedback Detector/Servo Card must be removed.
Maximum Mass Displacement

An entry of 50% should also keep the Reaction Mass well within its linear
range without greatly reducing the available Force Output. It is not
unusual for the Reaction Mass to drift slowly up and down during sweeps.
If the Reaction Mass drifts beyond the limit entered by this parameter
entry, the drive will be automatically reduced, which may be undesirable.
If this happens, it may be helpful to enter a larger Maximum Mass Stroke
value.
06Oct99
Maximum Valve Displacement
A maximum entry of 80-90% will normally keep the valve within its linear
range.
Force Set Point

The High Force Out and the Hold-down Weight set the target force for the
Amplitude Control System. (Example: Hold-down Weight = 40,000 lbs, and
High Force Out = 90%, then the target force output for the Amplitude
Control System is 36,000 lbs.)
The amplitude of the Reference signal also affects the Force Set Point.
If the amplitude of the Reference is 50%, the Force Set Point is reduced
by 50%. In Stored Value Mode the Force Set Point may be shaped by using
amplitude ramps on the Reference Sweep.
The Force Loop Gain Entry controls the gain of the Force Amplitude
Feedback System. For a given error in the force amplitude, the torque
motor current will change to correct this error. How fast the current to
the torque motor changes, as a result of the force amplitude error, is
determined by this entry. High output Servo Valves or varying ground
conditions usually require lower Force Loop Gain entries to prevent Force
Amplitude oscillation. Consistent ground conditions will allow higher
Force Loop Gain entries. A good starting point for this entry is 120%.
If sluggish performance is detected, try higher settings. If amplitude
oscillation is detected, try lower settings.
The Amplitude and Limits Control System will try to maintain the Ground
Force Signal to be equal to the Set Point. If the other Vibrator limits
are reached the Force Output will be reduced to prevent overdriving the
Vibrator. To check performance of the Ground Force System, monitor
Ground Force using VPKOP, Vdisplay or one of the QC programs. If the
Force Output drops significantly below the Set Point, either the Force
Loop Gain is too low, or another Vibrator limit is reached. To check the
other limits, monitor the following using the plots of the Vibrator
Display program:
Reaction Mass Force Enabling the Peak Force plot will cause Vibrator
and Reaction Mass Peak Force plots to be generated. If the Reaction Mass
Peak Force plot reaches the level entered for R.M. Force in the CONTROL
LIMITS menu, the vibrators force will automatically be reduced.
Mass Displacement - Plot shows peak movement of reaction mass. A plotted
value of 100% is full stroke. If this plot reaches the level entered for
Maximum Allowable Mass Stroke, the Mass Stroke Limit has been reached and
the Vibrator's drive will automatically be reduced.
06Oct99
Valve Displacement - Plot shows peak movement of the servo valve's main
spool. A plotted value of 100% is equivalent to Maximum Valve
displacement. If the plot the level entered for Maximum Allowable Valve
Flow, Main Spool Valve Limit has been reached and the Vibrator's drive
will automatically be reduced.
T.M. Displacement - Plot shows current through the torque motor. A plot
of 100% is equivalent to the Maximum Torque Motor Current entered. If
this plot reaches 100%, the Torque Motor Current Limit has been reached
and the Vibrator's drive will automatically be reduced.
Standard Phase Control
Controlling the phase response of a vibrator requires a means of:

1. Measuring the phase relationship between the reference sweep
and the vibrator's output.
2. Responding to that difference by adjusting the drive sweep to
achieve the desired relationship.
The Advance III Vib Pro System computes the phase error digitally. The
Advance III System uses dual multiplication and trigonometric
relationships to measure the phase relationship of the fundamental
component of the vibrator's signal and reference. The result is phase
error calibrated in degrees, and is not influenced by amplitude or
distortion of vibrator output. Since the phase computation is done by
computer, maximum and average phase can be "remembered" and reported
after each sweep, to the vibrator operator and to the observer.
Accurate, calibrated phase measurement means stable phase loop gain. So
the Advance III System can operate very close to maximum loop gain for
tighter phase control, without fear of phase loop oscillation.
Correction is applied instantly at the end of each measurement cycle, for
rapid response to changing phase throughout the sweep.
Initial phase correction is "learned" independently for each library

sweep. Usually only one sweep is required to learn proper correction. As
a result, multiple setup sweeps become unnecessary. The vibrator can
track changing terrain much better than with previous control systems.
With the Advance III System, many different signals can be chosen as
vibrator output for phase locking (including baseplate motion, reaction
mass motion, and ground force). The choice is made by computer assisted
parameter selection. No hardware changes are needed.
The Sharc can correct the phase every sample (0.25 milliseconds) or every
cycle.
06Oct99
Digital Adaptive Control
The Digital Adaptive Control algorithm is selected by entering 2 for

Phase Control Type or selecting a Random Sweep. When Digital Adaptive
Control is selected, the Sharc Card controls both Phase and Amplitude of
the selected Vibrator Output Signal (PHASELOCK SIGNAL). Normally
standard control will give as good or better performance for the sine
sweeps. Phase Error and Fundamental Force are not computed in the
Digital Control Mode.
The PHASE LOOP GAIN entry controls the speed at which the adaptive filter
changes. Lower PHASE LOOP GAINs provide more stability to the control
loop while the higher PHASE LOOP GAINs may be required for rapidly
changing earth conditions.
TM
The Pelton DR Servovalve Enhancement
Modifying the servovalve by adding the DR modification converts flow

control valves to pressure control valves. The conversion has little
effect on soft ground, but provides significant improvement in vibrator
linearity when the vibrator is operating on hard surfaces. This
improvement in linearity typically reduces distortion and yields more
accurate force and phase control. Two additional benefits of the DR
modification are that the actuator is stable without Valve Feedback and
the effects of cavitation inside the actuator are reduced.
A thin manifold, about 1/2" (13mm) thick, is mounted between the pilot
and main stages of the servovalve as part of the DR modification. In
addition, two ports must be machined into the body of the main stage.
Blocking these two added ports or replacing some orifices inside the
manifold with blanking plugs will disable the DR modification. An easy
way to determine if the DR modification is enabled is:
1. Make sure the Baseplate is DOWN.
2. Be prepared to press the RESET switch, because if the DR modification

has been disabled, the actuator will go unstable in the following step.
Pelton Company recommends pressing the RESET button if the actuator does
go unstable, however, the controller should drive the actuator to the
bottom of its stroke shortly after it goes unstable if the RESET button
is not pressed.
06Oct99
3. Turn Valve Feedback OFF by entering a value of 001 for Test Valve
Feedback.
CAUTION: The above procedure may cause damage to the actuator if the DR
modification is disabled.
If the DR modification is working the actuator will remain stable. After

the test is completed, enable Valve Feedback by entering 000 for Test
Valve Feedback.
DR is a trademark of Pelton Company, Inc.
Vibrator Amplitude Control Fundamental with Peak Limiting
Control of the force exerted by a seismic vibrator upon the earth's

surface has been implemented since 1980. Although the improvement using
force control has been well established, the best method of force control
has not. Controlling to the peak output of the vibrator was the first
widely used method of force control. Peak control allows the vibrator to
output its maximum force without decoupling. However, this method does
not directly control the useful seismic energy of the vibrator. The
useful energy is that which is contained in the central lobe of the
correlation wavelet. That is the fundamental energy. RMS is often a
good approximation of fundamental, and is easy to measure. When
controlling to fundamental or RMS of the ground force signal, the
vibrator's output set point must be much less than the hold down weight
or decoupling will occur. This is a significant problem, particularly at
low frequencies due to the large amount of harmonic distortion of the
ground force signal. To obtain maximum output without decoupling,
careful setting of the output level can be accomplished at any one
vibrator point. However, because of the varying ground conditions, this
setting will not be optimum over the entire seismic line. Decoupling
will occur.
Decoupling causes a large increase in distortion of the seismic signal,

also damage to the vibrator can occur. For good seismic acquisition,
decoupling must be prevented.
06Oct99
The Advance III Vib Pro System uses Fundamental with Limits Control. In
this mode the Fundamental Ground Force signal is controlled, while
preventing any limit from being exceeded. The Peak Force and Reaction
Mass Force Limits are set along with the limits for Torque Motor Current,
Valve Displacement and Mass Displacement. An entry of 0 disables the
limit. Typically the Peak Force and Reaction Mass Force Limits are set
to 90-100%. This will prevent decoupling and overdriving the Vibrator.
When the peak output exceeds the set point, the peak limiting
automatically reduces the output of the vibrator. This control method
allows control of the useful seismic energy without fear of damaging the
vibrator or contaminating the seismic record because of vibrator
decoupling. The set point for fundamental force output should be set
between 50%-80% of the hold-down weight. The lower setting allows the
fundamental force to be controlled without being peak limited throughout
the sweep. Different set points will be required in different areas
because of the drastic differences in the harmonic distortion of the
ground force signal due to the different ground conditions. Most crews
using this feature allow the peak reduction to lower the force at low
frequencies (below 20 Hz) while having fundamental amplitude control at
the high frequencies. This again will depend on distortion
characteristics of the ground force signal.
Vibrators are limited in their output by their hold-down weight.

Decoupling must be prevented. In order to make the useable seismic
energy of the vibrator more consistent, Fundamental with Peak Force
Limiting is the best choice. This new method prevents vibrator
decoupling while controlling the useful ground force energy.
06Oct99
Radio Telemetry Page 5.1.1
Radio Telemetry
The Advance III Vib Pro system uses the internal Vib Pro Modem Card for
all radio telemetry. All of the radio transmissions in the Vib Pro
system use the same protocol. The radios PTT line is keyed up 400
milliseconds before the start of data. The data is sent at 3.1 K Baud
with the Hamming coded error correction protocol to improve data
reliability. The Start Codes, PSS data and KOP loads form the main
part of the Vib Pro telemetry. The GPS corrections can be received by
the internal Vib Pro Modem, but are transmitted by an external radio
communication card. This option is discussed later in this chapter.
Start Codes
Currently there are two types of Vib Pro Start Code messages and they
are generated by the Encoder computer program. The type 1 Start Code
message is used for normal operations and type 3 Start Code is used
when PSS during the sweep is selected.
Both types of Start Code include the following data fields: Crew
Number, Sweep Index, Sweep Mode, Decoders Enabled for start and
Similarities On/Off switch. A missed PSS from a single Decoder can
also be requested. Additional information can be supplied in the Start
Code from the Seismic Recording Systems: File number, Shot ID, Energy
Point ID, Line number, Station number and Point Index, Line and Station
for the next sweep for type 1 Start Code. The type 3 Start Code
includes Sweep Index and Decoder numbers for PSS report during a sweep.
PSS data
There are many types of PSS data messages, however they all based on
the following data sets:
PSS Vibrator Cross- GPS VSS Encoder PSS Timing

Types Status Correla data Status (milliseconds),
tion N is number of Decoders
in the group
PSS 1 390 + 599*N
PSS 2 522 + 1098*N
PSS 4 398 + 630*N
PSS 5 532 + 1131*N
PSS 10 237 + 548*N
PSS 11 410 + 676*N
PSS 12 550 + 1174*N
PSS 14 418 + 708*N
PSS 15 552 + 1208*N
06Oct99
The Vib Pro Encoder unit always reports PSS type 0. The total time for
the PSS Listen window is computed by the Vib Pro Encoder unit and
depends only on the PSS type and number of Decoders selected for a
sweep. The Decoders are selected by their ID numbers for each start
code. The Encoder unit must have the same PSS Type selected as the
Decoders for the right PSS timing. Each Decoder reports its PSS in the
a time slot, which is calculated according to its ID number and the
other ID numbers of Decoders selected to start. For example, if only
one Decoder is selected in the Start Code and the ID number is 32
(last), the PSS transmission will occur in the first time slot.
KOP loads
All Keyboard Operation Parameters are separated by functional blocks of
data, such us, Sweep 1, Sweep 2, ..., Force Control Block, Phase
Control and etc. Each block of data can be treated as a separate KOP
load message. The KOP load blocks logically are connected to one radio
transmission by the Vibrator ID message and the End message. The
Vibrator ID and crew # fields enables Decoders to receive KOP data. If
the Decoder ID is not on the list or the crew # does not match, then
the Decoder ignores the KOP load.
06Oct99
GPS RTCM corrections and Single Radio Frequency Mode.
The Advance III System allows many different methods of transmitting
RTCM corrections to the Vibrators GPS receiver. The most economical
method is the Single Radio Frequency Mode. In this mode, the Radio
Communication Card (RCC) is used at the Encoder to transmit the RTCM
corrections. The Vibrator Electronics internal radio modem card
receives this data and transmits it to the GPS receiver.
The Radio Communication Card (RCC) option provides GPS corrections on
the same radio and frequency which is used for the main control
instruments. The system hookup is shown on the Fig FRCSB (page 5.1.5).
The RADIO CONTROL signal enables RCC to transmit RTCM corrections. The
Encoder enables the Radio Control Line when it is not busy sending
start codes or receiving PSS information. A high level (TTL) signal
enables RTCM data during that time. The RTCM correction message is
broken up in blocks; each block is 122.951 millisecond long. The RTCM
transmission starts with sub-carrier signal approximately 200
milliseconds long and continues with blocks of data. If the Vib Pro
Encoder unit wants to interrupt RTCM correction by pulling RADIO
CONTROL signal to low level, the RCC unit finishes transmission of the
current data block and then stops. The maximum transmission delay is
equal to maximum length of the data block and it is 122.951
milliseconds. The timing chart on RADIO CONTROL signal is shown on
Fig.1.
RTCM key-up
Start Delay 1- 64 s
RADIO CONTROL 1 sec
LINE
PSS Time
PRE-START TIME BREAK
06Oct99
To enable Single Radio option on the Vib Pro Version 1 and 2, the
WVPDSRF plug must be used to provide GPS correction to internal Vib Pro
GPS receiver. The WVPDSRF plug goes to connector 6 of the Vib Pro
connector panel. The data flow is shown below:
WVPDSRF
PLUG
VIB PRO
RADIO MODEM INTERFACE H8S INTERFACE CONNECTOR GPS

CARD CARD CARD CARD CARD CARD
In addition the Version 1 unit requires the following modifications for

the Single Radio option on Vib Pro Version 1. Use 24 Gauge wire for
the following jumpers.
1. Jumper wire from JC5 Backplane pin 12c to JC6 Vib Pro
Connector Card pin 7.
2. Jumper wire from JC6 Backplane pin 1C to JE connector Pin U.
3. Jumper wire from JC6 Backplane pin 8B to JE connector Pin T.
06Oct99
PSS Page 5.1.7
NORMAL PSS
1ST VIB 2ND VIB 3RD VIB Nth VIB

SWEEP PSS PSS PSS PSS
A B B B B C
END OF
PSS LISTEN
TIME
A = PSS COMPUTATION TIME PLUS INTERNAL SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS.

B = RADIO TRANSMIT TIME PLUS 20mSec KEY DOWN TIME.
C = TIME FOR ENCODER TO RECEIVE LAST VIBS PSS AND SEND IT TO THE
COMPUTER.
PSS TYPE A B C TIME FOR TIME FOR

4 VIBS 8 VIBS
1 245mSec 599mSec 145mSec 2.786Sec 5.182Sec
10 237mSec 548mSec - 2.429Sec 4.621Sec
12Nov99
Sequence Mode Page 5.2.1
Vib Pro Encoder Recorder Command Sequence Mode
The Recorder Command Sequence Mode has been added to the VPE to address
the racing condition that occurs between some recording systems and the
Pelton System. The racing condition occurs with Recording Systems that
use the RS or IO RTI protocol to send the Sequence Number (Sweep Profile
for the current sweep) information right before a sweep starts. There is
not enough time before the sweep starts to allow the Vib Pro Encoder
Computer Program to process this information and pass it on to the VPE.
To solve this, the RTI information is sent directly to the VPE from the
Recording System by also connecting the RS-232 TX Data line and the GND
line from the recorder to the VPE port 5. When the VPE is powered up, or
the Vib Pro Encoder Computer Program is started, or changes are made to
settings inside the Vib Pro Encoder Computer Program, the Start Codes for
Sweep Profiles 1 through 32 are transferred to the VPE. The Recording
System (through the Sequence Code Message Id 0002) will be allowed to
select Sweep Profiles 1 through 32. Any Sweep Profile that is requested
out of this range will cause a System ERROR in the VPE and the Vib Pro
Encoder Computer Program. This feature is enabled in the JOB PROFILE
menu by selection 11, RcdrCmdSEQ being set to ON. RcdrCmdSEQ can only be
set to ON if the VPE is set as a Normal Encoder (MSTRencode = OFF, MON
encode = OFF, SLAVencode = OFF) or set as a Master Encoder (MSTRencode =
ON, MON encode = OFF, SLAVencode = OFF). If the VPE is not in Normal
Mode or Master Mode, the firmware will not allow RcdrCmdSEQ entry to be
set to ON. If RcdrCmdSEQ is set to ON and the VPE Mode is changed to
Slave or Monitor, the RcdrCmdSeq mode will automatically be set to OFF.
The main screen of an idle Vib Pro Encoder in Normal Mode will have the
following:
Normal RcdrCmdSEQ
SWEEP : 04 K
STATUS: OK
ID#: 21457 Unit 02
SimVib: None SEQ#:04
This screen shows:
Normal Vib Pro Encoder Mode
Recording System Command Sequence Mode
Sweep #04 Keyboard was the last sweep that was ran
Status is OK - No Errors or Warnings
ID# 21457 is the Id # for the last sweep that was ran
Unit 02 is the Unit number set for this box (Vibrator Id in Job
Profile Menu)
Sim Vib: is the Vibrator Number that was selects for Radio
Similarities
Seq. # 04 is the Sequence Number of the last sweep that was ran
which is the
Sweep Profile for the last sweep
02May00
When the Vib Pro Encoder is running a Sweep with RTI communications:
Normal RcdrCmdSEQ
SWEEP RUNNING
SWEEP : 05 K SEGM 01
SWEEP : 05 K SEGM01
ID#: 21458 Unit 02
RtiRXOk
StartSource: REC
This screen shows:
A Sweep is running
Sweep #05 Keyboard Segment 01 is running
ID# 21458 is the Id # for this sweep
Profile Menu)
Sim Vib: is the Vibrator Number that is selected for Radio
Similarities
Seq. # 05 is the Sequence Number = Sweep Profile of the sweep that
is running
RtiRxOk indicates the Sequence Code Message - Id 0002 was received
Ok
StartSource: REC - indicates the start source for this sweep was
from the recording system
02May00
When the Vib Pro Encoder is running a Sweep with missing RTI
communications:
Normal RcdrCmdSEQ
SWEEP RUNNING...
SWEEP : 05 K SEGM01
ID#: 21459 Unit 02
NoRtiRx
StartSource: REC
This screen shows:
A Sweep is running
Profile Menu)
Similarities
Seq. # 05 is the Sequence Number = Sweep Profile of the sweep that
is running
NoRtiRx indicates the Sequence Code Message - Id 0002 was not
received
StartSource: REC - indicates the start source for this sweep was
from the Recording System.
02May00
communications with the VPE keyboard being the start source:
Normal RcdrCmdSEQ
SWEEP RUNNING...
SWEEP : 05 K SEGM01
ID#: 21460 Unit 02
NoRtiRx
StartSource: KBD
This screen shows:
A Sweep is running
Profile Menu)
Similarities
Seq. # 05 is the Sequence Number = Sweep Profile of the sweep
that is running
received
StartSource: KBD - indicates the start source for this sweep
was from the front panel of the VPE.
02May00
communications with the Vib Pro Computer Program requesting Vibrator 7
for similarities:
Normal RcdrCmdSEQ
SWEEP RUNNING
SWEEP : 05 K SEGM01
ID#: 21461 Unit 02
SimVib: 07 SEQ#:05
NoRtiRx
StartSource: PEL
This screen shows:
A Sweep is running
Profile Menu)
Similarities
Seq. # 05 is the Sequence Number = Sweep Profile of the sweep
that is running
received
StartSource: PEL - indicates the start source for this sweep
was from the Pelton Vib Pro Encoder Computer Program.
02May00
When the VPE is operating as a Master, the top line will change to:
Master RcdrCmdSEQ
Example Sequence Code Message ID=0002 Version 0001 (Generic)
52530007000200011C5C43
52 - ASCII for R
53 - ASCII for S
0007 - Sz - size is 7 Bytes
0002 - ID - ID is 0002
0001 - Ver- Version is 1
1C - Sequence Number = 28 = Sweep Profile 28
5C - Serial Number = 92
43 - Chksum - XOR checksum of ID, Ver, Seq#, and Serial Number = 43
Example Sequence Code Message ID=0002 Version 0001 (I/O)
494F0007000200011C5C43
49 - ASCII for I
4F - ASCII for O
0007 - Sz - size is 7 Bytes
0002 - ID - ID is 0002
0001 - Ver- Version is 1
1C - Sequence Number = 28 = Sweep Profile 28
5C - Serial Number = 92
43 - Chksum - XOR checksum of ID, Ver, Seq#, and Serial Number = 43
02May00
Vib Pro GPS Page 6.1.1
Vib Pro System with GPS
The Vib Pro uses signals from the GPS receiver for the following:
The system clocks of the Encoder or Decoder may be adjusted using
signals from the GPS receivers PPS pulse.
GPS positions in the PSS data.
GPS position requests from the Recording Truck.
A GPS receiver interfaced with the Encoder may be used as a
reference station to facilitate differential mode in the
decoders.
The use of GPS equipment with the Encoder and Decoder(s) is optional.
Internal GPS Receiver
An internal GPS receiver can be used with the Vib Pro System. A coaxial
connector is provided to interface an installed GPS receiver with an
external antenna. Currently the Trimble DSM Eurocard, DSM II Eurocard,
and the Lassen SK-8 receivers are capable of being used internally. The
internal GPS receivers used in the Vib Pro Decoders must be setup with
the following parameters:
NMEA-0183 Standard GGA and GSA output messages.

RTCM SC-104 Differential Correction input message.
Transmit and Receive at 9600 BAUD, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop
bit.
The internal receiver used in the Vib Pro Encoder as a GPS Reference
station must be setup with the following parameters:
RTCM SC-104 Differential Correction output messages.

Transmit at 9600 BAUD, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop bit.
Port 7 is used to program the internal GPS receivers with a W9DF-F cable
and a computer. DSMCHAT.EXE from Trimble is used for programming their
DSM and DSM II receivers. TSIPCHAT.EXE from Trimble is used for
programming their Lassen SK-8 receiver. (Figure 1, page 6.1.3)
The Pelton Sub-Meter section of this manual describes the commands to

setup the receiver for Vib Pro operation.
DGPS Operation with Internal GPS Receiver

The internal GPS receiver receives or transmits RTCM SC-104 differential
corrections through Port 6 on the Vib Pro connector card. Any radio
telemetry system can be used to send and receive the differential
corrections. Figure 2 and Figure 3, page 6.1.3 shows the Pelton Radio
Modem system being used.
06Oct99
Vib Pro GPS Page 6.1.2
External GPS Receiver
An external GPS receiver can be used with the Vib Pro System. The
internal GPS receiver must first be removed. The serial position output
of the receiver is wired to Port 6, pin 2 and common to pin 5. The PPS
pulse is wired to pin 10 of the 25 pin test connector. A majority of the
GPS receivers have a female 9-pin connector on the end of their data
cable. Use a 9-pin male to male serial gender changer to connect this
cable to the Vib Pro on Port 6. (Figure 4, page 6.1.3)
The external GPS receiver for the decoder needs the following parameters:
NMEA-0183 Standard GGA and GSA output messages.
RTCM SC-104 Differential Correction input message
Transmit and Receive at 9600 BAUD, No Parity, 8 Data bits, 1 Stop
bit.
On some installations the PPS pulse signal on the Test Connector pin 10
was internally wired to pin 9 on Port 6. Some external GPS receivers
wire the PPS pulse to the 9-pin connector with the Tx and Rx lines. This
modification leaves the test connector open for testing purposes.
RTK
Currently the Pelton Modem system can not accommodate the throughput
required for RTK operation. To use RTK GPS receivers a third partys
radio modem system must be used.
Single Radio RTCM Operation

The Vib Pro system is set up to transmit the following on a single radio
frequency.
Start Codes
PSS data
Re-transmit PSS data
RTCM corrections
The RTCM corrections must be transmitted with the Pelton external Radio
Communication Card. The external Radio Communication Card must be
connected to the Vib Pro Encoder for proper single radio operation.
The Vib Pro Decoders automatically demodulate the RTCM data and transmits
it to the GPS receiver.
This system can be used with:

Internal or External GPS Reference Station
Remote GPS Reference Station with secondary telemetry system.
Internal or External GPS receiver unit at the vibrator truck.
06Oct99
SUB-METER Page 6.2.1
PELTON SUB-METER AND TRIMBLE DSM GPS Receivers
Reference Station Set-Up Procedure
Vib Pro (Adv III)
The following is the parameters for the PELTON SUB-METER AND TRIMBLE DSM
GPS receiver Reference Station:
Transmit and Receive Baud Rate is 9600, N, 8, 1. RTCM 104 output.
Port 6, 9 pin GPS serial connector. This serial port is connected

directly to the GPS receiver. This port is used by the main H8S to
receive the $GPGGA position message from the receiver, or the RTCM
correction data from the base station. Also the internal GPS receiver
uses this port to receive or transmit the RTCM correction on an external
radio modem System. When using an external GPS receiver the internal GPS
receiver must be removed. The serial position output of the receiver is
wired to this connector and the PPS pulse is wired to pin 10 of the 25
pin text connector.
Port 7, 9 pin GPS serial control connector. This Serial port connects
directly to the GPS receiver. It is used to set-up the GPS receiver.
Connect the computer to the Pelton Sub-Meter GPS Receiver with a W9DF-F
cable. Port 7.
Run DSMCHAT.
Press Control-B to set Basic Reference Station Parameters
Press the down arrow to Reference Station Control:

[X] ON, [ ] OFF, [ ] Reset Place a X in the ON box.
Press the down arrow to Reference Antenna Latitude:

Enter the degrees (ex: 36)
Press the right arrow

Enter the minutes (ex: 43.314830) include the decimal point.

Enter N for north or S for south.
Press the down arrow then the left arrow to Reference Antenna Longitude:
Enter the degrees (ex: 097)
06Oct99
Enter the minutes (ex: 06.220140) include the decimal point.

Enter W for west or E for east.
Press the down arrow to Reference Antenna Altitude:

Enter the altitude in meters (ex: 308.5)
Use the arrow keys or TAB key to highlight Apply Position to Receiver
{X}
Use the arrow keys or Tab key to go to RTCM SC-104 Output:

[X] Version 2 (PRC Type 1)
Down Arrow to PRC (Type 1 or 9) Output Interval:

Enter the amount of time wanted between differential correction messages.
Ex: Zcount multiple(s), 5.0 seconds
Down Arrow to Port A Tx:

Change the bps to the baud rate on the modem (ex: 9600).
Change the format to 8-N-1; [X] RTCM
Down Arrow to Tx
[X] Ignores CTS
Down Arrow to Send Now:

Type2 {X}
The PELTON SUB-METER and DSM reference station now has the new reference
position loaded and is ready to send RTCM data to the radio modem.
06Oct99
PELTON SUB-METER and TRIMBLE DSM GPS Receivers
Vibrator Set-Up Procedure
Vib Pro (Adv III)
The following is the parameters for the PELTON SUB-METER and TRIMBLE DSM
GPS receivers:
Transmit and Receive Baud Rate is 9600, N, 8, 1.

NMEA strings $GPGGA, $GPGSA output.
RTCM 104 input.
Port 6, 9 pin GPS serial connector. This serial port is connected

directly to the GPS receiver. This port is used by the main H8S to
receive the $GPGGA position message from the receiver, or the RTCM
correction data from the base station. Also the internal GPS receiver
uses this port to receive or transmit the RTCM correction on an external
radio modem System. When using an external GPS receiver the internal GPS
receiver must be removed. The serial position output of the receiver is
wired to this connector and the PPS pulse is wired to pin 10 of the 25
pin text connector.
Port 7, 9 pin GPS serial control connector. This Serial port connects
directly to the GPS receiver. It is used to set-up the GPS receiver.
Connect the computer to the Pelton Sub-Meter GPS Receiver with a W9DF-F
cable. Port 7.
Run DSMCHAT.
Press Shift-U to check CHAN-A format.

9600 - XMT, 9600 - RCV
Transmit - NMEA 0183, Receive - Raw RTCM data
If this is not the set-up, do the following.
Press Control-U to set CHAN-A format
Enter XMT Baud Rate:

<7>: 9600 bps (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter RCV Baud Rate:

<7>: 9600 bps (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter bits/char:
<8>: 8 (Press <Enter> to select)
06Oct99
Enter parity:
<4>: none (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter stop bits:

<1>: (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter Ch A Output language:

<5>: NMEA 0183 (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter CTS control:

<1>: ignore (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter Ch A Reception language:

<1>: Raw RTCM data (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter RTS control:

<3>: Always Negate(RTS is always off) (Press <Enter> to select)
Change settings? (Y for yes) Y

The GPS receiver should report back on the screen what you entered. If
the message "... waiting for reply" appears, check the cable connections
and try again.
Press Shift-D to Set DGPS Mode

Enter DGPS mode:
<3>: Auto DGPS/GPS (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter RTCM input version:
<0>: Auto version (1 or 2) (Press <Enter> to select)
Enter the base station ID
<0>: Press <Enter>
Set DGPS mode to Auto DGPS/GPS
Press Y to Accept the Changes.
Press Shift-E for NMEA output cntrl
Enter Subcode:
<1>: Set NMEA Message to output, by name list (Press <Enter> to
select)
Enter the names seperated by commas:
GGA,GSA - Press <Enter>
Set list to "GGA,GSA"? (Y for yes) Y
06Oct99
RCC Page 6.3.1
Radio Communications Card (RCC)
Introduction
The Radio Communications Card (RCC) is used with the Vib Pro and Shot
Pro systems for the Single Radio function. The Shot Pro system also
uses the RCC to radio transmit KOP and position requests and receive
KOP data and GPS positions. An RCC may also be used independent of the
Vib Pro or Shot Pro units for monitoring the A3 protocol data over the
radio (A3 PSS, A3 Ready Messages). SPKOP can be used with the RCC
module independent of the Shot Pro Encoder to download parameters over
the radio from a Shot Pro decoder.
LEDs
There are three LEDs on the RCC module. Each LED represents Status of
the RCC module.
LED Color Status
1 Green Only Received Radio Data is Good.
Red Only - Received Radio Data is Bad
Green and Red Some of the received Radio Data has corrected
bits.
2 Green - Receiving Radio Sub-carrier

Red - RTCM is disabled from sending, because a KOP
or position request has been issued through
the RCC module.
3 Red - RCC has power

Green - Transmitting Radio Data
Vib Pro Single Radio Frequency Mode.

The Advance III System allows many different methods of transmitting
RTCM corrections to the Vibrators GPS receiver. The most economical
method is the Single Radio Frequency Mode. In this mode, the RCC is
used at the Encoder to transmit the RTCM corrections. The Vibrator
Electronics internal radio modem card receives this data and transmits
it to the GPS receiver.
The RCC option provides GPS corrections on the same radio and
frequency, which is used for the main control instruments. The system
hookup is shown on the Figures on page 6.3.5 and page 6.3.6. The RADIO
CONTROL signal enables RCC to transmit RTCM corrections. The Encoder
enables the Radio Control Line when it is not sending start codes or
receiving PSS information. A high level (TTL) signal enables RTCM data
during that time. The RTCM correction message is broken up in blocks;
each block is 122.951 millisecond long.
02Feb00
RCC Page 6.3.2
The RTCM transmission starts with sub-carrier signal approximately 200
milliseconds long and continues with blocks of data. If the Vib Pro
Encoder unit wants to interrupt RTCM correction by pulling RADIO
CONTROL signal to low level, the RCC unit finishes transmission of the
current data block and then stops. The maximum transmission delay is
equal to maximum length of the data block and it is 122.951
milliseconds. The timing chart on RADIO CONTROL signal is shown on
Fig.1.
RTCM key-up
Start Delay 1- 64 s
RADIO CONTROL 1 sec
LINE
PSS Time
PRE-START TIME BREAK

Figure 1.
To enable the Single Radio option on Vib Pro Version 1 and 2, the
WVPDSRF plug must be used to provide GPS correction to internal Vib Pro
GPS receiver. The WVPDSRF plug must be installed on connector 6 of the
Vib Pro connector panel. The data flow is shown below:
WVPDSRF
PLUG
VIB PRO
RADIO MODEM INTERFACE H8S INTERFACE CONNECTOR GPS

CARD CARD CARD CARD
CAR CARD
D
In addition the Version 1 unit requires the following modifications for
the Single Radio option on Vib Pro Version 1. Use 24 Gauge wire for
the following jumpers.
1. Jumper wire from JC5 Backplane pin 12c to JC6 Vib Pro Connector
Card pin 7.
2. Jumper wire from JC6 Backplane pin 1C to JE connector Pin U.
3. Jumper wire from JC6 Backplane pin 8B to JE connector Pin T.
02Feb00
RCC Page 6.3.3
RCC in Monitor Mode
The RCC may be used to monitor A3 protocol radio messages. The RCC can
monitor the PSS messages from the Vib Pro decoders and PFS messages
from the Shot Pro decoders (Vib Pro and Shot Pro modes). The RCC can
be used to request and receive GPS positions from Vib Pro and Shot Pro
(firmware Ver. 3.008 or newer) decoders. KOP functions can be
performed between the RCC and the Shot Pro decoder. The system hookup
is on page 6.3.7.
02Feb00
RCC Page 6.3.4
RADIO COMMUNICATION CARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS:
INTERFACE: RTCM RS232 interface with socket 9 pin data port.
2 wire interface supports 9600 BAUD data rate.
COMPUTER RS232 interface with socket 9- pin data port.
3-wire interface supports 19200 BAUD data
rate.
SERIAL DATA FORMAT: 8 Data Bits, No Parity, 1 Stop Bit.

MODULATION SIGNAL: 0 10 Volts peak to peak. Adjusted by
potentiometer RP8.
DIPSWITCH: CONTACT 8: OFF MICROPHONE NORMAL POLARITY
ON MICROPHONE NEGATIVE POLARITY
CONTACT 7: OFF SPEAKER NORMAL POLARITY
ON SPEAKER NEGATIVE POLARITY.
POWER SUPPLY: 9 to 36 Volts D.C.
CONNECTOR PIN ASSIGNMENT

1 RXD2 COM2 Receive Line (Input) RTCM IN (from GPS Reference
Station)
2 TX2 COM2 Transmit Line (Output)
3 RETURN Common
4 RXD0 n/c COM0 Receive Line (Input)
5 TXD0 n/c COM0 Transmit Line (Output)
6 IN1-A n/c Opto-Coupled Input 1 Active (Input)
7 IN1-R n/c Opto-Coupled Input 1 Return (Input)
8 RADIO RET Radio Return
9 MIC A Microphone Active (Output to Radio)
10 ENMIC A ESG Microphone Active (Input) from Vib Pro or Shot Pro
11 RADIO CONTROL Radio Control Line (Input)
12 (-)9-36V Ground
13 - +9-36V 9 to 36 Volts D.C.
14 RXD1 COM1 Receive Line (Input) from COMPUTER
15 TXD1 COM1 Transmit Line (Output) to COMPUTER
16 RETURN Common
17 IN2-A n/c Opto-Coupled Input 2 Active (Input)
18 IN2-R n/c Opto-Coupled Input 2 Return (Input)
19 OUT1 A n/c Opto-Coupled Output 1 Active (Output)
20 OUT1 R n/c Opto-Coupled Output 1 Return (Output)
21 OUT2 A n/c Opto-Coupled Output 2 Active (Output)
22 OUT2 R n/c Opto-Coupled Output 2 Return (Output)
23 SPKR R Speaker Return (Input)
24 PTT M PTT Active (Output)
25 SPKR A Speaker Active (Input)
n/c no connect
02Feb00
OEM4 Page 6.4.1
NOVATEL OEM4 GPS RECEIVER SETUP INSTRUCTIONS
Quick Start Commands For Novatel OEM4 GPS Receivers
Installed In Pelton Equipment:
Rover Command Set:
Unlogall
Interface mode com2 RTCM Novatel
log com2 gpgga on time 1.0
log com2 gpgsa on time 5.0
dgpstimeout 30
saveconfig
Reference Station Command Set:
Unlogall
Interface mode com2 none rtcm
Fix position 51.11358042 114.04358013 1059.4105
Log com2 rtcm1 on time 5
Saveconfig
Factory Reset Command:
FRESET
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.2
Novatel OEM4 Set-Up General Information:
The OEM4 has multiple capabilities. The commands pertaining to this

unit can be found in the Novatel Manual Volume 2. This instruction
set is only intended for a quick introduction to the set-up.
The OEM4 responds to commands that are issued over the serial link
in an ASCII format (text). Connect the serial cable from a PC
(computer) to J7 on the connector panel of the Vib Pro. Using the
gpssolution4, which is a Novatel program, command lines can be
entered and data monitored in the ASCII messages window of the same
program.
After starting gpsolution4.exe select:
-Device\Open
The Open window appears (below). If no device configuration has

been previously created select New. Else re-use the same
configuration.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.3
The New Config window opens. Enter a name for the new
configuration.
Click on Settings (Serial).
Select the desired serial port and set the Baud rate to 9600.
Click off the Hardware handshaking tab.
Click OK on the Serial Device Settings and the New Config windows.
Then open the device using the newly created configuration.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.4
The program will attempt to connect to the GPS unit.
If the connection cannot be established the error message below will

show. Verify the serial connection (standard Pelton RS232 null
modem cable) between the PC and J7 of the connector panel. If
correct place the GPS carrier card on extender and check the LED on
the GPS card to be green.
When a good communication link is established the gpssolution4 will

show the acknowledgement of the GPS card as shown on the top of next
page.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.5
Entry of the command can be done in the edit window as in the

example below followed by a click to the Enter button or an Enter
key from the keyboard. Commands are not case sensitive.
If the command is successful the display will echo the command as

shown above else in case of an illegal entry the display will return
the message below generally indicating a typo error.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.6
Using Hyperterminal With The Oem4:
Command entries for the OEM4 can be made by typing them into the
command line at the bottom of the gpsolution.exe main window, one
line at a time, each command being followed by an Enter, as
described above. If the entry of the commands is to be repeated it
is preferable to create a text file with all the command lines and
use the HyperTerminal program or a similar terminal emulator.
In Windows start\accessories\HyperTerminal.
If the configuration file for the HyperTerminal has not been created
the program will prompt the user for a configuration name and icon
as shown below.
After entry of the name and OK select the COM port from the list.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.7
The port will be configured as shown below.
Use then the Send Text File which will enable to browse to the path
where the command file is located (as shown on top of next page).
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.8
After transmission of the file the Hyperterminal will show the

acknowledgement for each respective command line.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.9
Rover Mode Setup:
A typical set-up for a rover station (Vib Pro decoder) will include
the following commands.
Unlogall
Interface mode com2 rtcm novatel
log com2 gpgga on time 1.0
log com2 gpgsa on time 5.0
dgpstimeout 30
saveconfig
The effect of Line 1 is to disable any outputting from the GPS unit.
If the unit was previously operational the time update shown on the
screen (Vib Pro) will cease after entry of this line.
Line 2 will enable the receiving of RTCM corrections on the serial

receive line of the second port and enable NMEA outputting on the
transmit line.
Lines 3 and 4 will send the GGA data every second and the GSA data
every 5 seconds. If installed in a Vib Pro unit the time display
will begin to update every second.
Line 4 will enable the reset of the differential mode if RTCM

corrections are not received for a period of 30 seconds.
Line 5 will save the configuration in the flash memory of the GPS
receiver and the configuration will be re-used at power up.
By opening the ASCII messages window (View) and entering the command
Log gpgga on time 1.0 the receiver will also return the GGA data
to com1 and the data will be displayed as shown below.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.10
Reference Station Setup:
A typical set-up for the reference station is shown below:
Unlogall
Interface mode com2 none rtcm
Fix position 51.11358042 114.04358013 1059.4105
Log com2 rtcm1 on time 5
Saveconfig
The above values correspond to a location in Alberta, Canada.
Note that the fix position should reflect the position of the of the
antenna of the reference station using:
Lat, Long, Hgt
Where Lat is the latitude from 90 to 90 degrees, negative

numbers are southern hemisphere. The format is DD.dddd
(degrees with 4 decimal places of degrees)
Long is the longitude from 360 to 360 degrees. Negative

numbers indicate displacement from zero degrees longitude in a
westward direction. Positive numbers indicate displacement
from zero degrees longitude in an eastward direction, e.g. -90
and +270 both indicate 90 degrees west longitude. The format
is DD.dddd
The 4th decimal place in degrees longitude or latitude at the

Equator is roughly 10 cm distance.
Hgt is the altitude from 1000 to 20000000 (ellipsoidal WGS84:

default setting). The resolution for height is meters.
06Feb03
OEM4 Page 6.4.11
Troubleshooting:
There is a Status LED on the OEM board. It is difficult to see this

LED when the unit is installed in a Vib Pro, but one can look at the
inside of the Vib Pro enclosure, about 1 beyond the GPS antenna
connector, and see the reflected light of the LED shining on the
inside of the case. On power up, the LED typically flashes red,
then amber, then green, then back to red and amber, and finally
starts flashing green at a rate of about one second per on/off
cycle. The green flashing at about 1 Hz indicates normal operation.
If the LED does not do this, refer to the Novatel OEM4 Installation
and Operation manual that is either printed on paper and/or on the
Novatel CD.
If, when attempting to setup the OEM4, the connection cannot be

established, an error message will be displayed. Verify the serial
connection (standard Pelton RS232 null modem cable) between the PC
and J7 of the connector panel. If correct place the GPS carrier
card on extender and check the LED on the GPS card to be green.
If the commands appear to be unsuccessful but the communication has

shown to be operating satisfactorily a command FRESET will return
the unit to the factory default and clear the RAM of the GPS unit.
This will lead to a need to rebuild the almanac before the GPS will
output any data. The NMEA message will show the type of message
i.e. $GPGGA followed by empty fields and the sum check of the line.
After completion of the almanac reload, which takes approximately
12 minutes. The normal data will be returned in the messages. The
receiver must be connected to an antenna and receiving signals from
satellites to reload the almanac.
06Feb03
Com4All, Com4NT Page 7.1.1
PELTON VIB PRO
Com4All
Com4All is another generation of the Pelton serial port driver,

capable of sharing one or more serial ports between the Pelton windows
programs. This driver has a VXD extension which is the convention for
the Virtual Device Driver computer technology. Com4All is capable of
sharing up to nine serial ports between the Pelton windows programs.
Each port may be operated at speeds of up to 115200 baud.
Com4All is compatible with Windows 95, 98, and ME operating systems.

The big advantage with this driver is that it does not have to be
registered with the operating system. However, VXD technology is not
supported by Windows NT 4.0 or Windows 2000, and as such Com4All
cannot be used in that operating environment. Com4NT must be used in
the Windows NT and Windows 2000 environment.
***NOTE*** When performing a software installation from the current

distribution CD, then installation program automatically determines
the type of operating system, and will install the appropriate driver,
either Com4All or Com4NT.
VibQc32 cannot share a port with any other program, but it can access
a port via Com4All, if VibQc32 is the only application using that
port.
09Oct01
Com4All, Com4NT Page 7.1.2
PELTON VIB PRO
Com4NT
Com4NT is another generation of the Pelton serial port driver, capable

of sharing one or more serial ports between the Pelton windows
programs. This driver has an EXE extension, and is similar in purpose
and operation to the Com4All device driver. Com4NT is to be used with
Windows NT or Windows 2000. Com4NT is capable of sharing up to nine
serial ports between the Pelton windows programs. Each port may be
operated at speeds of up to 115200 baud.
Com4NT does more than share com ports between programs. It is an

essential component when implementing the "Slip Sweep operation" using
just one Vib Pro Encoder.
***NOTE*** When performing a software installation from the current

distribution CD, the installation program automatically determines the
type of operating system, and will install the appropriate driver,
either Com4All or Com4NT. Com4NT must be registered with the
operating system.
VibQc32 cannot share a port with any other program, but it can access
a port via Com4NT, if VibQc32 is the only application using that port.
09Oct01
Encoder Setup Page 7.2.1
Encoder Setup Program
The first step defines main serial communication port number.
Please select serial port number for

the Encoder program. Com Port 1
Step 2 Files, the second page appears that confirms if all files were
found for normal program operations.
Step 3 RTI selects type of Recording System Interface. Depends on the

recording system you will need to select second serial port or configure
Ethernet link.
RTI-None
RTI-I/O System 2, SCM serial link
RTI-I/O System 2, OCM serial link
RTI-Raps 1000, serial link
RTI-Raps 2000, serial link
RTI-I/O System 2000,serial link
RTI-I/O System 2000, Ethernet link
RTI-GEO-X Aram 24, serial link
RTI-Sercel, serial link
RTI-Sercel, Ethernet link
RTI-Gego MAXIS, serial link
RTI-Western-Geco FRS/Q, serial link
The Enable Index file saving box must be checked to support VSS
operations (the VSS is the Pelton implementation of the Mobils HFVS
technology). When it is checked the Encoder program creates (or appends)
VSS index file and logs Shot description information according to the
Encoders sweep index.
Step 4 is allowing to select serial port driver. The diver is used to

share data on the serial bus between the Encoder and other Pelton
programs.
The last screen of the EncSetup program displays all selections and
creates a configuration file when the Finish button is selected.
Configuration information is contained in the A3Encode.INI text file,

which resides in the main Windows directory.
09Oct01
Encoder Program Page 7.3.1
Advance III Vib Pro Encoder Program
Introduction
This guide describes how to install, configure, and run the Encoder
program.
If the information in the ENCODER.TXT file in the Encoder program

subdirectory differs from the information in this section, follow the
instructions in the ENCODER.TXT file.
The Encoder program is made to operate on Windows 95, 98, NT computers

and provides serial interface to the Pelton Vib Pro unit operating in the
Encoder mode. The program shares serial port with other Pelton programs
like WVSig32 and VPKOP. The Encoder program controls Decoder Groups,
Sweep Profiles, enables Similarities for Decoder units and provides
interface to various types of the Recording Systems.
Features:
Supports 1 50 Sweep Profiles

Auto-Sweep Profiles in any order, reset auto-Sweep Profile, jump
to any Sweep Profile
Auto or manual Similarities
Four groups of vibrators, total - 32 units
Different types of RTI interface
Decoder Position request
Sharing PC serial port with other Pelton Advance III programs
Requirements:
Make sure your PC meets the following requirements:
Windows 95, 98 or NT operating system

Pentium II or higher processor
64 Mbytes of RAM
CD Drive
2 Gig or higher of available hard drive space
Mouse or other pointing device
SVGA Color Monitor
At least one available serial port (second port is optional)
Access to a network port for a network connection (optional)
09Oct01
Installation and Cabling Setup:
The Encoder program must be installed from Pelton supplied CD or floppy

disks. To install program, insert disk or CD in your PC, click Start
button, select Run and type path to the Setup file. Then click OK
button.
The first run of the Encoder program will start EncSetup program to
generate configuration file. Just follow the program to make settings
and click Finish at the end to create new configuration file. To change
the Encoder configuration run EncSetup program. Make sure the Encoder
program is not running the same time!
Cabling:
The corresponding Com Port on the PC with the Encoder program must be
connected to Vib Pro Encoder Unit with the standard serial cable to
connector 3 on the D-Sub Panel. All other connections between PC and a
Recording System are optional and will be discussed in the next release
of "Encoder program, User Guide".
Changing configuration settings:
To change the Encoder configuration exit the Encoder program and run
EncSetup program.
09Oct01
Operation
To start the Encoder program click on the icon or shortcut. The program
shows "splash" window with status bar on the bottom to indicate loading
progress. The program first tries to locate and start Pelton serial
server - PelComOs. If it is not found then Encoder will try to access
serial port directly and sharing serial data is not allowed in this mode.
The program dialog window always resides in the right bottom corner of
the screen and is shown on the picture below.
Edit menu Includes: Swp Profiles 1

50, Groups, Auto Functions
list and etc
Sweep Profile Options: Auto, SP 1 SP 50
selector
Similarities Options: None, Sim. 1 -

selector Sim. 32, Auto Similarities
Current sweep Displays value selected for

and sweep the current (running) or
profile for next sweep
Status window Encoder status and sweep ID
and Sweep ID
Extend dialog Extends Encoder dialog with

button additional options: SP jump
and Position request
Log window Extended status display,
shows received PSS and
confirmation messages
Last event Double click displays PSS
window status window
09Oct01
The click on the "<|" button extends
Encoder dialog box and gives two new
options:
If "SP - Auto" mode selected then Sweep
Profile Jump option enabled to jump back
and forward inside of auto sweep profile
list.
The second option is Position request

box. Five buttons allowing to request
position information from Group A, B, C,
D or individual Decoder.
To restore Encoder dialog box click on

"|>" button.
09Oct01
Edit menu Sweep Profiles
The Previous and Next buttons rotating the Sweep Profile number. Sweep
number field has a range for value: 1- 16, and Crew number value can be
anything from 0 to 255.
09Oct01
Edit menu - Groups
To move/remove vibrators from one group to another group click on the

vibrator number, hold left mouse button down and move it. Release button
above desired place. The program aligns vibrator numbers in numbering
order. In the Touch screen mode moving vibrator is different - click on
vibrator to select then click to desired group to place.
The Add Unit and Remove buttons helps to organize this screen. Type in
box vibrator number to add/remove and click on Add or Remove button.
Cancel restores all groups in original position.
Edit menu - Auto Functions
The main feature - Auto Sweep Profiles list. The Sweep Profile numbers
can be entered in any order and must be separated by commas or dash line.
For example, the following entries for Auto-Sweep Profile list edit box
are legal: 1 4, 8 - 11 or 1 - 4,4,3,2,1.
The Delayed PSS check box enables option of sending PSS information
later, during a sweep.
The Current GPS check box enables Current Position report right after
the last sweep and available only in the Delayed PSS mode.
The Auto Similarities option selects group of vibrators for
similarities and in combination with Auto Sweep Profiles A entry
requests similarities for selected group and sweep.
The Auto Start option can be used for test porpoises only and enables
the program to generate software start commands.
09Oct01
Edit menu - Checksums
The checksum control window is used to setup checksum control during

encoder operations. If the program detects the difference in checksums it
warns the operator.
If sweep or vibrator parameters have changed then user should click
appropriate checksum reset button to make program learn new checksum
values during operations.
The program does not need reset if same as previous checksum control
is selected. In this case program warns operator once on each checksum
change and selects new checksum value for next cycle.
09Oct01
Edit menu Clock Status
This dialog displays system clock status for all vibrators in the crew.
If clock status is out of specs then user has an option to correct clock.
Double click on the item with out of specs clock will bring dialog to
correct system clock. This option is needed only if vibrator electronics
does not have GPS installed. On the vibrator equipped with GPS system
clock is corrected automatically. The correction value (DAC) is stored in
nonvolatile memory and can be updated by manual corrections or by GPS.
09Oct01
Edit menu PSS Status
This dialog keeps track of received PSS messages for each unit in the
crew. If needed, all or individual counters can be cleared.
09Oct01
Retrieve PSS
It is also possible to retrieve missing PSS (if there is any) all at once
when production is stopped by some other reasons. There is only one thing
to do is to click Start PSS Retrieve button and wait until the program
finishes it. If there is need to interrupt this process, for example to
free up radio channel, just click Stop button in the same dialog form.
Glossary
Encoder Applies to the Vib Pro unit operating in the "Encode Sweep
Generator" mode. The unit normally located in the "dog house"
and interfaced with Recording System and radio to provide
telemetry data to the units in the field called "Decoders".
Decoder Applies to the Vib Pro unit operating in the "Decoder" mode.
The unit normally placed in the Seismic Vibrator to provide
desired control environment for Vibroseis operations and data
telemetry to the unit operating in the "Encoder" mode. Each
decoder unit has own assigned decoder ID number.
Group Logically grouped number of Decoders.
Sweep Profile Preprogrammed event
RTI Recording Truck Interface
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.1
Sweep Program
The Sweep program is used for the generation and analysis of non-linear
sweeps for the Advance II version 5 and 6 Systems and all Mini Plus
Systems. This program replaces the older SCIO, SV, and SCII DOS
programs. Stored Values Mode and Stored Parameters Mode sweeps can be
generated with the Sweep program. Advanced menus are available to allow
complex sweep design, or with the non-advanced menus, more user-friendly
operation for common sweep design.
In the Stored Parameter Mode, changes in frequency are computed and

stored. This mode allows for the operation of most frequency non-linear
sweeps. The change of frequency information is limited to +/- 64Hz in
1/16 (0.0625) of a second increments. If the change of frequency limit
is exceeded, the program will default to +/- 64Hz. The amplitude control
of a Stored Parameter Sweep is limited to start/end cosine taper and/or
up/down linear amplitude ramps. Loading the sweep is done via radio or
wireline. Sixteen Stored Parameters sweeps with up to 127 seconds each
can be stored.
The Stored Value Mode is used to define and load Stored Values Sweeps.
The amplitude values for each sample of the sweep are computed and stored
in the Stored Value Mode. Any waveform can be computed and stored in the
Stored Value Mode. The SWEEP program allows definition of 16 different
frequency segments and 16 different amplitude segments. The frequency
segments editor allows definition of linear, dB per octave, dB per hertz,
T-power, and graphic types of sweeps. The Amplitude Segment editor
allows linear ramps and cosine tapers to define the amplitude segments.
SCIO sweep data files allow loading of any user generated files.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.2
Configuring Sweep:
Figure 1 is the configuration screen.
Figure 1
Select which com port you need to use for communication with the external
equipment, in the Com Port box.
The Transmit Mode box indicates whether the equipment being used is
version 5 or version 6. The version 6 sweeps need to be linked with a
link message, whereas version 5 sweeps do not need linking. Version 6 is
used with the Mini Controllers.
The Message Delay specifies how many seconds to wait between data
transmissions. The default delay is 8 seconds.
The Segment Block Size box specifies the maximum seconds of sweep data to
send at one time. The DOS based SCIO program used blocks of 7 seconds.
The newer CCC interface can accept up to 30 seconds of data.
The Program Mode box allows switching between Stored Values and Stored
Parameters mode. This can be done without loosing any sweep data. When
a sweep is calculated (or loaded from an SCIO file), both Stored Values,
and Stored Parameters data is generated. Switching modes controls which
data format to use in the transmission. The mode of operation also
changes the fields shown in the Sweep Composition Menu. The Sweep Edit
Mode box allows switching between standard and advanced editing modes.
The Ramps On check box enables editing ramp parameters for the sweeps.
The standard mode is used when generating simple single segment sweeps.
Use the advanced mode for generating multiple segment sweeps. Ramps, if
needed can be turned on in either advanced or standard mode.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.3
The settings in the Configuration tab are saved in the .INI file, and are
reloaded each time the program is started. The .INI file is updated when
exiting the program.
Sweep Definition
The Sweep Definition menus change depending on the mode of operation

selected. The non-advanced mode allows for generation of most non-linear
sweeps.
Non-Advanced Mode
Frequency Definition
Start Frequency- Enter the desired starting frequency in hertz.
End Frequency- Enter the desired ending frequency in hertz.
Length- Enter the length of sweep in seconds. This must be in integer
seconds in the non-advance mode.
Type- Enter the sweep type equation to use.
L is a linear sweep
O is a dB/octave equation
T is the T (time) power equation
H is the dB/hertz equation
G uses the graphic editor to define the spectrum
R uses the random function
SCIO is shown the sweep values have been loaded from a SCIO file
Constant- Enter the constant associated with the type of sweep selected.
The linear sweep needs no further information.
The dB/octave equation requires you to enter the Emphasis.
The T-power equation will need an exponent.
The dB/Hz equation needs the dB per Hertz.
The Graphics mode requires minimum dB level.
The default is -20 dB.
The random mode requires a seed entry.
CORRELATED vs. UNCORRELATED AMPLITUDE SPECTRUM
When specifying the compensation, it must be indicated whether the
compensation refers to the spectrum of the sweep signal only, or to the
spectrum for the auto-correlation of the sweep signal. A sweep signal
whose spectrum increases 3 dB/octave will result in an auto-correlation
function whose spectrum increases 6 dB/octave.
The SWEEP editor's dB/Hz, dB/octave, and Graphics mode sweep all relate
to the correlated amplitude spectrum.
The FFT in the graph sweep menu plots the uncorrelated amplitude
spectrum. The VIBQC program also plots the uncorrelated amplitude
spectrum.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.4
GRAPHICS EDITOR
The Graphics Editor allows you to graphically select points within the
amplitude spectrum for a given sweep. By setting the amplitude at the
appropriate frequencies, you are able to control the desired spectrum of
the non-linear sweep.
In the SWEEP Graphics Editor, the cursor movement is ONLY controlled by

the mouse.
The minimum X axis value is controlled by the minimum frequency entered

in the Start or End frequency fields. The maximum X axis value is
controlled by the maximum frequency entered in the Start or End frequency
fields.
After the Constant is entered in the Segment Editor, press [ENTER] to

proceed to the Graphics Editor.
The graphics editor starts out with 2 points, with X = Minimum Frequency,
Y = 0dB, and X = Maximum Frequency, Y = 0dB. New points may be added by
positioning the mouse cursor at the desired location, and clicking the
left mouse button. Positioning the cursor on an X value that corresponds
to a point, and clicking the right mouse button will set the Y value of
that point to 0 dB. If the left button is clicked, the point moves to
the location of the mouse cursor. Click on the Finish button when the
editing of the graph is done. Click on the Cancel button to cancel the
changes made to the graph. The ResetAll button will reset the graph to
just 2 points - this can be undone by the UnDoAll button, but not by the
Cancel button. UnDoAll will undo any changes made to the graph in the
current session.
The upper right hand corner of the graph, under the title bar, displays
the current X (Frequency) and Y (dB) value of the mouse cursor.
Amplitude Definition
Only one Amplitude Segment is used in the Non Advanced or Stored

Parameter Mode. The length is automatically defined to be the same as
the total Sweep Length. The following Amplitude Control is available:
Up Taper Length - length of cosine taper applied to the

start of the sweep.
Down Taper Length - length of cosine taper applied to the

end of the sweep.
Segment Definition
Select which sweep number the Advance II system will assign to the sweep.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.5
Amplitude Ramps
When the Linear Amplitude Ramps are selected in the Configuration Menu.
The following additional entries in the Amplitude definition appear.
Up Ramp Length - Defines the length of the linear amplitude ramp

applied to the start of the sweep. Entry of
0.000 disables the linear starting ramp.
% Start - Defines the starting amplitude % of the linear
amplitude ramp and is applied to the start of
the sweep. Entry of 100% disables the linear
starting ramp.
Down Ramp Length- defines the length of the linear amplitude ramp
that is applied to the end of the sweep. Entry
of 0.000 disables the linear end ramp.
% End - Defines the ending amplitude % of the linear
amplitude ramp and is applied to the end of the
sweep. Entry of 100% disables the ending ramp.
Transmitting the sweep

Set the segment number (0-15) to the desired value. In the Non-Advanced
mode, this will be the sweep number. Make sure that the proper mode
(Stored Values, or Parameters) is selected. Figure 2 shows the
appearance of the Send box for Stored Parameters mode, Figure 3 shows the
same for Stored Values mode. Select the equipment that is to receive the
sweep data. (The Append check box in figure 3 is only available in
advanced mode).
Figure 2 Figure 3
Then click on the Send Segment Definition (SendSegDef...) button.

Figure 4 shows the next dialog that is displayed for Stored
Parameters.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.6
Figure 4
The upper box of the dialog displays information about the impending
transmission of data. If the Cancel button is clicked, then all changes
made in the dialog will be deleted, and the transmission operation will
be canceled.
There are two edit fields for phase in the lower part of the dialog. The
Esg and Vib phase entries set the starting phase for each, not the
relative phase (there is no entry for relative phase in Sweep).
Clicking the OK button in the dialog will start the transmit operation.
If the sweep needs to be recalculated, then the recalculate is done

first. Then the sweep is sent. If version 6 is selected, the link
message will be sent first, then the Esg data (if selected), then the Vib
data (if selected). You will notice that the CancelSend button becomes
active when the transmission starts. When this button becomes inactive,
the transmission is over. This cancel button can be clicked at any time
to cancel the transmit operation.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.7
Erasing Segments
In the Send Box, select the equipment (Esg and/or Vib) that is to receive
the erase command.
Enter the Stored Values Segment Number to be erased in the Segment Number
box then click Erase Segment button.
To erase all segments click on the Erase All Segments button.
Note: This operation does NOT erase any sweep data in the computer.
Advance Menu
With the Advanced menus the sweeps are composed of one or more segments,
that are linked together (in the computer) to form one sweep. The
initial phase of any segment can be changed for veriphase operation. The
version 6 system handle these sweeps, stored in the Advance II sweep
memory, as segments which can be linked together as desired, to form
segmented sweeps.
Segment Definition (Frequency)
Up to 16 different frequency segment definitions (0-15) can be entered.

The definitions consist of Segment Number, Start Frequency, End
Frequency, Length (in seconds), Sweep Type, Constant, Continuous / Non-
continuous Phase, and the initial Phase. See the Non Advanced-Mode,
Frequency Definition, for a description of most of these fields.
Segment Length
Unlike the Non-Advanced Mode, the Segment Length does NOT have to be an
integer number of seconds. However, the length should be a multiple of
either 1/16th or 1/2048th of a second, for Stored Parameters and Stored
Values, respectively. The final sweep definition will be composed of one
or more of these segments, and the sum of all the segment lengths must be
an integer number of seconds.
Phase
The initial phase of any segment may be set to a predetermined value. To

do this, the Continuous / Non-continuous check box must be unchecked.
The Phase field will then be active, and the initial phase can be
entered.
If the C/N box is checked, then Continuous Phase is selected, and the
phase field will be disabled.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.8
Segment Definition (Amplitude)
In Stored Values mode, up to 16 different frequency segment definitions

(0-15) can be entered.
The Amplitude definition is composed of Up Taper time, Down Taper time,
Amplitude segment length, and optionally, Start Ramp percent, and End
Ramp percent. Taper lengths of 0 are acceptable.
A dead time segment may be defined by entering Start and End Ramp
percents of 0.
Note: The Amplitude segment length, and the Frequency segment length are
independent of each other. For example, an 8 second sweep could be
composed of 4 frequency segments, each 2 seconds long, and 2 amplitude
segments, 1 that is 2.5 seconds long and the other that is 3.5 seconds
long.
Segment Definition (for calculation and transmit)
The Segment Definition frame has 3 fields, Segment Number, Frequency, and
Amplitude. The Segment number (0-15) indicates to the control
electronics which segment the data belongs to. The Frequency field
indicates which frequency definitions make up this segment. Each number
(0-9,A-F) that is placed in this field must have a frequency definition.
As the numbers are entered (or deleted), the total segment length is
displayed above the edit field.
The same procedure is done for the Amplitude definition. If the

Frequency length is greater than the Amplitude length, the remainder
(Freq. length - Ampl. length of this segment will calculate as dead time.
If the Frequency length is less than the Amplitude length, the segment
length will be that of the
Frequency segment. The total Frequency and Amplitude lengths need to be
an integer number of seconds.
Advanced Sweep Link
Link Definition, (Not Used with Version 4 or 5 sets.), is used to define

Sweeps for Advance II Version 6 equipment and Mini-Plus Controller. The
data loaded with the send Segment Definition button, are called Segments
for Version 6. The Link Definition program defines Sweeps by directing
the Version 6 equipment to use one or more Segments to make each Sweep.
With the Version 6 Systems and Mini-Plus Controller, the Stored Values
and Stored Parameter Mode sweep segment definitions are computed on an
external computer and are stored to memory in the vibrator control
electronics. The sweeps in the control electronics are then composed of
the sweep segments. Multiple sweep segments with any initial phase may
be linked together to build a sweep.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.9
Example:
Sweep Segment 1 = 10 - 80 Hz 8 Sec 0.2 dB/Hz
Sweep 1 = Segment 1 Phase 0 = 1N0
In this example a 90-degree phase rotation of a 10 - 80 Hz 0.2 dB/Hz
sweep is desired. The first step is to load the base sweep segment into
the sweep segment memory. After this segment has been defined it is then
loaded into the Advance II System as Sweep Segment number 1.
The next step is to link the sweep. Linking the sweep defines which
sweep segment to use for each sweep. A sweep may have one or multiple
sweep segments. Each segment may have any phase offset.
If two segments are used, then the second segment may have continuous
phase or the phase may be set. In continuous phase, the phase of the
next segment is combined with the last phase sample of the last segment.
For the example, Sweep 1 consists of frequency Segment 1 with a Non-
continuous phase of 0. This is entered as "1NO" in the frequency segment
line for Sweep 1. Sweep 2 will use segment 1 with a phase of 90, this is
entered 1N90. Sweep 3 is segment 1 with a phase 0f 180, entered as
1N180. Sweep 4 is segment 1 with a phase of 270, entered as 1N270.
The sweep table then must be sent to the vibrator control electronics.
Select which sweep generator(s) to load: ESG1, ESG2, and Vibrator. In
Stored Parameter Mode the link information is sent by radio, and in
Stored Values Mode the link information is sent by wireline. Click Snd
LNK button to transmit the sweep table. The Vibrator Electronics and ESG
should display a sweep load OK message after proper reception of data.
The ESG1, ESG2, VIB check boxes enables transmission for the Encode Sweep
Generator 1, Sweep Generator 2 and Vibrator Electronics.
The Send LNK button will send segments for only the sweep currently
visible.
The Send ALL button will send all sweeps who s segments data has been
entered.
Format of the Frequency Segments:
0N0, 2C0, 9N90
Example.
| | |
| | |_ Phase in degrees: 0 - 359 (For the continuous phase
this | | number is 0 ).
| |
| |_____ N for non-continuous and C for continuous phase.
|
|__________ Number of the segment ( 0 - 15 ).
Note that commas separate each segment entry.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.10
Loading an SCIO file:
Switch to the Sweep Definition tab. Select the File menu, then the Open
Signal File menu selection. The "standard" SCIO file extension is ".SV",
but any file extension except ".FMR" may be selected. Sweep
automatically detects the SCIO file format being loaded (Exxon or
Pelton). After loading, the first two file records are examined to
determine the start frequency of the sweep. The records are then
examined to determine the length of the beginning and ending tapers (if
any). These values are then displayed in a dialog, and may be changed
(see figure 5). In this program, the amplitude envelope of an SCIO sweep
can be recalculated without changing the frequency components. The
recalculation will take place if the amplitude parameters are changed,
before the sweep is transmitted or plotted.
Figure 5
Saving an SCIO sweep:
Sweep Parameters may be stored to disk with the File Save selection.
These files have an SSD extension. To save the actual sample values of
the sweep, select the File, Save Signal As selection. A sweep may be
saved in two different formats: Force Meter and SCIO. The first dialog
to come up in this operation, is a comment edit box. If the file to be
saved is to be in the SCIO format, ignore this box and click on the Save
As button. The Save file dialog is next. The Save File As Type box
allows the selection of either Force Meter or SCIO file type. Because of
the behavior of this dialog you are advised to type in the file extension
(.FMR or .SV) if it is not displayed in the File Name field.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.11
When an SCIO sweep is loaded, the edit fields for defining new segments
are disabled. To return to "normal" operation, click on the Type field,
and make a new selection. When an SCIO file is read, the Phase and
Envelope values in the file are used to calculate the stored values sweep
data, as well as the stored parameters sweep data. With SWEEP in the
Stored Values mode, the stored values data is calculated directly from
the SCIO file.
With SWEEP in Stored Parameters mode, the data is calculated to simulate

the Stored Parameters mode. This allows graphical analysis of the Stored
Parameters sweep. If this data is stored in a .FMR file, it will be
slightly different than the data generated from the SCIO file when loaded
in Stored Values mode.
Plotting a sweep:
Clicking on the Sweep Computation tab displays the graph screen. There
are five different graphs to choose from: Signal Trace, Frequency vs.
Time, Amplitude Spectrum, Auto Correlation, and Auto Correlation
Envelope.
These graphs are designed to operate in the same manner as the graphs in
VibQC, including the over-lay capability. In addition, the correlation
graphs have the ability to stack each correlation that is calculated,
either manually, or automatically, and then display the result of the
stacking operation as an overlay.
SCIO File Format
Differences between File Version 4 and 5
The sweep data format that the Pelton equipment expects is the Stored
Values format. With the release of Advance II Version 5B, this format
has changed. This has forced a change in the data stored in the input
files and the transmission format that are used by SCIO. SCIO Version 5
transmit format is compatible with Version 5B, and later firmware.
Version 4 transmit format is compatible with the Version 3 or 4 firmware.
SWEEP does not support the version 4 transmit format. The DOS program
SCIO must be used if the version 4 transmit format is needed.
Input File Formats
Each record contains one sample of signal data. There are 2048 samples
per second of sweep, so there will be 2048 records per second of sweep.
Each record is terminated with a Carriage Return/Line Feed (0x0D 0x0A).
Version 5 File Format
Each record in this file contains the Sample number, the Current
Envelope, and the current Phase, followed by the Carriage Return/Line
Feed. The Sample number is a 32 bit signed integer. It is stored in
character positions 1 to 7, right justified, in the record.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.12
The Envelope number is a 2's complement 16 bit number, that ranges from 0
to 32767 (0-10 Volts). It is stored in character positions 8 to 14,
right justified, in the record. The Phase number is a 2's complement 16-
bit integer that ranges from -32768 to +32767 (-180 to +179.9945
degrees). It is stored in character positions 15 to 21, right justified,
in the record.
In Fig. 6, b = blank, p = phase, r = record number, v = envelope value, s

= sign (+ or -, + not required).
+-<Record number
| +-<Envelope value
| | +-<Phase
| | |
/---------+--\/------+---------\/---------+-----------------\
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
r r r r r r r b s v v v v v b s p p p p p 0D 0A
1 4 7 3 3 2 7 6 7 8 1 9 2
(Record # 1473, envelope at full scale, phase at 45 degrees.)

Fig. 6, Input file record format.
When you calculate the phase, you need to convert to degrees, and make
sure it is -180, <180 degrees. Then multiply by the constant 65536/360.
The Envelope value is 32767 * Envelope, where 32767 is full scale, and
Envelope is any number 0, 1.
Example: The following pulse (Fig. 7) is to be stored in a text file as

Record#, Envelope value, and Phase. The tables following Fig. 7 shows
the values to be stored in the file that SCIO will read.
-| _______
-| ___| |___
-| ___| |___
-| ___| |___
-|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|----|.....|----|
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 995.5 1000.0
Fig. 7, Pulse.
Note: Time is included in these tables for reference only.

The phase number = (+/-90 * 65536) / 360. The pulse ramps up by .25% of
32767 each sample, until full scale is reached. Then it ramps down by
25% of 32767 each sample, until 0 is reached.
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.13
Table 1 (Example for Ver. 4 input file)
Time Record Amplitude File

mSec Number Values Data
-------------------------------- --------
0.0 1 0 0
0.488 2 8192 8192
0.977 3 16383 16383
1.465 4 24575 24575
1.953 5 32767 32767
2.441 6 -32767 -32767
2.930 7 -24575 -24575
3.418 8 -16383 -16383
3.906 9 -8192 -8192
4.395 10 0 0
2037 more records of 0 Amplitude values.
1000.0 2048 0 0
Table 2 (Example for Ver. 5 input file)
Time Record Amplitude Phase File

mSec Number Envelope Degrees Data
--------------------------------------- --------------------
0.0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0.488 2 8192 16384 2 8192 16384
0.977 3 16383 16384 3 16383 16384
1.465 4 24575 16384 4 24575 16384
1.953 5 32767 16384 5 32767 16384
2.441 6 32767 -16384 6 32767 -16384
2.930 7 24575 -16384 7 24575 -16384
3.418 8 16383 -16384 8 16383 -16384
3.906 9 8192 -16384 9 8192 -16384
4.395 10 0 0 10 0 0
2037 more records of 0 Envelope, 0 Phase
1000.0 2048 0 0 2048 0 0
09Oct01
SWEEP Page 7.4.14
Pelco's Non-Linear Sweep Equations
F1 = START FREQUENCY
t = time
SL = SWEEP LENGTH
F2 = END FREQUENCY
dB per Octave
1 /n
F(t) = (K1 + K 2 t )
dB/Oct
n =( + 1) (for dwell after correlation)
6
n
K1 = (F1 )
n n
F2 - F1
K2 =
SL
T Power
t n
F(t) = F1 + (F2 - F1) ( )
SL
n = T - Power
dB per Hertz
20 t LN(10) (F2 - F1)

F(t) = F1 + LN 1 + exp -1
LN(10) SL 20
= BOOST __ dB/Hz
09Oct01
Stored Values Page 7.5.1
PELTON VIB PRO
Stored Values Sweeps (Stored32)

The computer program Stored32 is used to generate stored values sweeps
for the VibPro system and store them to flash memory cards for use by the
Sharc card. This program is quite similar to the original SWEEP program
developed for the Advance II system. All sweep types that are available
in the keyboard mode are available here. This is true also for all of
the sweep types that are available in the SWEEP program with the
exception of the graphics type. In addition, it is not possible at this
time to apply amplitude ramps to sweeps in Stored32. For this reason the
Stored32 program is capable of importing Advance II type stored values
sweeps generated by the SWEEP program.
One major difference between the Advance II system and the VibPro is the
sample interval at which they operate. The Advance II system operated at
1024 samples per second or 0.488 milliseconds per sample. The VibPro
system operates at 4000 samples per second or 0.250 milliseconds. For
this reason, when importing an Advance II stored values sweep Stored32
will recognize this fact and ask the user if he wishes to resample the
data to 0.250 milliseconds. In most cases the answer to this should be
Yes. Failure to resample the sweep will result in different than
expected sweep lengths and frequencies. Importing an Advance II stored
values file is accomplished by clicking on the File menu and then
selecting Import SV File.
There are three tabs at the top of the operational screen for Stored32.
The first tab contains all of the Sweep Definition entries and
controls. Sweeps are designed here and can be saved to and read from the
computer system hard disk. Sweeps can also be loaded into the program
from a sweep memory card that has previously been programmed. After a
sweep has been defined the Calculate button must be clicked in order to
generate all of the sweep values. Once this has been accomplished the
defined sweep may be programmed into a sweep memory card by clicking on
the Program button.
The second tab is titled Sweep Preview and provides all of the tools
necessary for analysis of the sweep properties. These include signal
trace, frequency vs. time, sweep spectrum and correlation envelope.
After reviewing the sweep the user may also program a sweep memory card
from here by clicking on the Program button at the bottom of the
screen.
09Oct01
Stored Values Page 7.5.2
The final tab is titled Card Operations and provides the user with
tools for viewing the contents of a sweep memory card, erasing a card and
copying the contents from one card to another. The copy function
provides a process by which all vibrators in a fleet can be assured of
performing the same sweeps without the need to regenerate all of the
sweeps for each card.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.1
Advance III Vib Pro VPKOP Program
Section I
Introduction
This guide describes how to install, run and operate the VPKOP program.
The VPKOP program operates on Windows 95, 98, NT, ME, and 2000 computers
and provides loading, display and saving of data from the Pelton Vib Pro
Unit operating in the Encoder and Decoder modes. The program can share
serial ports with other Pelton programs like WVSig and Encoder. The
VPKOP program allows receiving and comparing data from VibPro by using
Radios or a direct cable connection.
Features:
Open, save and print sweeps and control parameter files (*.par)
Open and save VibDisplay data files (*.vpd)
Load, receive and compare parameters 32 vibrators
Use Radio or direct cable connection
Display detailed line graph for different parameters
Possibility to work in Touch Screen Mode
Sharing PC serial port with other Pelton Advance III programs
Requirements:
Make sure your PC meets the following requirements:
Windows 95, 98, NT, ME or 2000 operating system

64 Mbytes of RAM
CD Drive
SVGA Color Monitor
Installation:
The VPKOP program must be installed from the Pelton software CD. To
install programs, insert CD in the computer, click 'Start' button, select
'Run' and type the path to the 'Setup.exe' file on the CD Drive. Then
click OK button. Make sure the VPKOP program is not running at the same
time!
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.2
Cabling:
The corresponding Comport on PC with the VPKOP program must be connected

to Vib Pro Unit with a standard serial cable to connector 3 on the D-Sub
Panel.
Operation:
To start the VPKOP program click on the icon or shortcut. It also

can be started by clicking on the "Start" button, then move the
cursor to "Programs", then moving the cursor to "Pelton for
VibPro", then to "VPKop".
When the VPKOP program is started, it will try to find VPKOP.INI and
VPKOPLOG.TXT files under the Windows subdirectory with all the settings,
parameters and log data. If its absent, the VPKOP program creates a new
VPKOP.INI file with the default parameters and settings, and creates a
new VPKOPLOG.TXT file. VPKOP then locates and starts Pelton serial
server Com4ALL or Com4NT. If the Pelton comport share utility program
Com4ALL or Com4NT can not be accessed. Then the program will try to open
the comport directly. Then that comport can not be shared with other
Pelton applications.
Main Window:
The VPKOP Main Window consists of

seven sections.
First at the very top of the

Window is the section for Moving,
Minimizing and Closing the Window.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.3
The second section is the

Main Menu Selection Row.
The third section contains

Icons for quick selection of
Items from the Action,
Configuration, VibDisplay and Help Menus.
The fourth section contains

the Icons for quick section
of the Items in the
Parameters Menu.
The fifth section contains a

running log of dates, times
and Actions taken.
The sixth section displays

the comments contain in the
open file if any.
The seventh section displays

the status of Comport (1 to
9), Communications Link (Cable
or Radio), Sweep Parameters Mode (Normal or Advance), and VibDisplay Data
(Receiving or Ready). Two Examples are shown.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.4
Section II
VPKOP Main Menu Selections:
1. FILE
2. PARAMETERS
3. ACTIONS
4. CONFIGURATION
5. VIBDISPLAY
6. HELP
Each of the Main Menu Items above is explained in greater detail below.
#
1 FILE Menu
From the File command menu from

top tool bar, select one of the
following:
Open Select to open a

previously saved file. (Or
use the first Icon in the second
row tool bar.)
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.5
Save Select to save a new

file. (Second Icon in the
second row tool bar.)
Notes: The following five (5) types of files and comments relating to
those files can be saved or opened:
1. Sweep and Vibrator Control Parameters Data File Name.PAR

2. Sweep and Vibrator Parameters plus VibDisplay Data File Name.KOP
3. Vibrator Control Parameters Data File Name.VIB
4. Sweep Parameters Data File Name.SWP
5. VibDisplay Data File Name.VPD
The VibDisplay file saves data for that one sweep only.
This Comments window will open

when the Save operation is first
selected. Any comments about the
file to be saved can be added at
this time.
Or the Comments Icon can be

selected at anytime to write or
update comments.
Save as Default Select to save as user

default file.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.6
Print Select one of the

following print features.
(Third Icon in the second row tool
bar.)
1. Select print all sweep

parameters only.
2. Select print a single sweeps
parameters (From the Advance Sweep
definition files only).
3. Select print the vibrator control parameters only.
4. Select to print both the sweep and control parameters.
Exit Select to Close / Exit the program.
#
2 PARAMETERS Menu
From the Parameters command menu from the top tool bar,
select one of the Menu Items. Or a Menu item may also
selected from the third tool bar displaying the Menu
Icons.
Notes: Each Menu Item in the Parameters Menu is explaned in greater

detail in Section III of the VPKop Manual or the Parameter Entry Menus
sectionn of this manual.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.7
#
3 ACTIONS Menu
From the Actions command menu from top tool bar,
select one of the following:
Send Use to
send parameters
by Radio or Cable to a
Vib Pro Unit. (Or use
the Send Icon Button
in the second row tool
bar.)
Select Radio to sent

KOP parameters to one
or more Vibs (Select
the Vib Numbers of the
Vibs that data is to be
transmitted) by radio. Select and send either Sweep data (single or all),
Vib Parameters data or both.
Select Cable to sent KOP parameters by a direct connection. Select and

send either Sweep data (single or all), Vib Parameters data or both.
Notes: Crew Numbers must match to Send and Receive.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.8
Receive Use to
receive / download
parameters by Radio or
Cable from a VibPro Unit.
(Or use the Receive Icon
in the second row tool
bar.)
Select Radio to Receive

KOP parameters to one Vib
(Select the Vib Number of
the Vib that data is to be transmitted from) by radio. Select to receive
Sweep data (single or all), Vib Parameters data or both.
Select Cable to Receive KOP parameters by a direct connection. Select to

receive Sweep data (single or all), Vib Parameters data or both.
Notes: Crew Numbers must match to Send and Receive.
Compare Use to
compare a
Parameters file to another
file or a downloaded file
from a Vib Pro Unit. (Or
use the Compare Icon
Button in the second row
tool bar.)
Default Parameters Select

either Load Factory or
Load User Default
Parameters.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.9
Remote Sweep Start Button Enables the Start

Sweep Icon Button between the Help Icon and
the Send Icon in the second row tool bar. This
Icon Button is used to remotely start the Decoder.
The Remote Sweep Start Button can also be enable

from the VibDisplay window. VibDisplay does not have
to be enabled for this feature to be enabled.
Auto-Restart This feature will allow an

automatically restart of a VP Decoder Unit
every 5 to 32 seconds.
To enable the program select Auto-Restart,

then select Auto-Restart enable, then
enter the desired Time Delay between
sweeps and then select OK.
Now start a Sweep from the Decoder front

panel, VPKop program, or by a radio start. The program will now continue
re-starting the Decoder.
To stop press either the Stop or Lift Up buttons on the Decoders

front panel, or by deselecting Auto-Restart enable or Vib Display
enable from the VPKop program.
Notes: VibDisplay must be enabled before the Auto-Restart feature can be

enabled. Connect the computer via a serial cable to D-sub connector
number Three (VPKOP / ENCODER) on the Vib Pro Units D-Sub Panel, and then
set the VP Decoder Start Code to 101.
#
4 CONFIGURATION
Use the Configuration command menu
from top tool bar, to setup the
following:
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.10
Comport Status: CLOSE / OPEN
Set this entry to OPEN for normal Comport communications.
Set this entry to CLOSE if the user needs to close the Comport without
The default setting is Open.
Comport Selections: 1 to 9
Set this entry to the Comport connection to be used.
Sweep Definition: NORMAL / ADVANCE
Set this entry to NORMAL for 16 basic programmable single segment

sweeps, in the Sweep Menu (# 3).
Set this entry to ADVANCE for 16 programmable sweeps, with up to 16

segments for each sweep in the Sweep Menu (# 3).
Entry Checking: OFF / ON
Set this entry to ON to prohibit /

prevent entries that are outside the
normal operating range of that Entry
Item being loaded. An entry outside its
limit gives warning BEEP and the entry
background turns RED. Then the entry
will automatically load the default
value.
Set this entry to OFF to allow

entries that are outside their normal
operating range. An entry outside its
limit gives warning BEEP and the entry
background turns RED.
Notes: Operating a Vibrator outside its NORMAL operating parameters can

be very DANGEROUS. However, some times its useful and/or necessary for
test and research purposes.
The default setting is ON.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.11
#
5 VIBDISPLAY
Notes: Before starting VibDisplay connect the computer via a serial
cable to D-sub connector number Three (VPKOP / ENCODER) on the Vib Pro
Units D-Sub Panel, and then set the VP Decoder Start Code to 101. If
necessary go to the Configuration Menu to setup Serial communications.
VibDisplay must be enabled before the Auto-Restart feature in the Actions
Menu can be enabled.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.12
Use the VibDisplay command menu from top tool bar,

to enable VibDisplay, and other related features.
Select VibDisplay Settings or the forth Icon in the second row

tool bar.
Then select the Enable VibDisplay setting

to enable the VibDisplay features from the
VibDisplay settings' menu. Select it again
to disable the VibDisplay features.
When the VibDisplay features are enable,

more than 18 Vibrator functions can be
monitored and displayed on 15 graphs and/or
displays at a time for each sweep taken.
Simply select the individual vibrator
functions to be monitored, or select ALL
from the menu. The sweep length determines
the X-axis of all the graphs. In addition,
the maximum and minimum Y-axis setting of
the top 12 menu items (graphs) can be user
defined.
There are three methods of Overlays to pick from to overlay data for up
to eight sweeps for the top 12 menu items
(graphs).
Notes: Some graphs display more than one

vibrator function, in this case the user
must select which function is to be
overlaid. (Only one function can be overlaid
at a time.) To select the desired vibrator
function from a graph with more than one.
Select the Overlay Icon found in the upper
left corner of the graph to open the
Overlay window; then select the desired
vibrator function from the Graph to
Overlay window.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.13
The first method is the Auto Overlay

setting in the VibDisplay Settings
menu window. When selected the data
for the next eight sweeps will
automatically be overlaid for ALL the graphs that have been enabled.
Select Auto Overlay again to disable and clear the old data from the
Auto Overlay feature.
The second method is the Auto

Overlay feature found in the
Overlay window of each graph.
Select the Overlay Icon found in
the upper left corner of the graph to
open the Overlay window; then
select the Auto Overlay feature.
When selected the data for the next
eight sweeps will be overlaid for
those graphs that have enabled this
feature. Select the Clear buttons
in each window to clear the overlays
and to restart again. Select the
Auto Overlay in each window again
to disable this feature.
The third method is to save the data

from any eight sweeps at anytime for
any menu item (graph) desired.
Select the Overlay Icon found in
the upper left corner of the graph
to open the Overlay window of the
desired graph; then under store,
select the storage location for the
overlay data to be stored (OvS1
though OvS8). The overlays are not
automatically displayed as with the
first two methods. To display the
overlays for a desired menu item
(graph) select the Restore feature
next to each stored overlay or
select the Restore all (Ovall)
selection from the Overlay window of that item (graph).
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.14
When the Status (Limits) setting is enabled, it allows the user to
monitor when any of the below listed functions reaches or hits its
limits, and the duration it is in that limit. The Status window displays
the following:
Number of Sweep Segments Segment

Reaction Mass Force Limit Reached Pk RMF
Peak Force Control Limit Reached Pk GndF
Valve Displacement Limit Reached Valve
Mass Displacement Limit Reached Mass
Torque Motor Current Limit Reached TM Curr
Notes: Each of the above functions is

represented by a reference line which
toggles between a zero and a one (Low
and High).
Each time a new sweep segment starts

the Segment line toggles between a
zero and a one (Low and High). Example:
A 20-second sweep consisting of four 5-
second segments will be displayed as
low from zero to five seconds, high
five to ten seconds, low ten to fifteen
seconds, and high fifteen to twenty
seconds.
The point at which the next five functions (Limits) toggle between a zero
and a one (Low and High) is determined by their settings in the Limits
Control menu # 6.
The example shows a four-segment sweep, with the Peak RM Force hitting
limits at the beginning of each segment and the TM current hitting its
limits at the end of each segment.
Warning: The tighter a control function (Valve, Mass and TM) limit is set
the more likely that limit will be reached. Usually causing a reduction
in Force and the reference line for that function will toggle high for as
long as that limit is reached.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.15
When the PSS setting is enable, the PSS

Data is only display if the Decoder is
remotely started. Acceptable PSS Types are
1, 2, 11 and 12.
Remote Sweep Start Button Enables the Start Sweep

Icon Button between the Help Icon and the Send
Icon in the second row tool bar. This Icon Button is
used to remotely start the Decoder.
The Remote Sweep Start Button can also be enable from

the Actions Menu window. VibDisplay does not have to
be enabled for this feature to be enabled.

to enable Tile Graphs. Select Tile Graphs to tile
all Active Graph windows.
09Oct01
VPKOP Page 7.6.16
to Minimize all Graphs. Select Minimize all
Graphs to minimize all Active Graph windows.

to Restore all Graphs. Select Restore all Graphs
to restore all minimize Graph windows.
# 6 HELP
Use the Help command menu from top tool bar, to select
one of the following:
Help Select either Help from the Help command menu or select the
Sixth Icon in the second roll tool bar or Press F1 at anytime for
Help.
About Select About for program

Version number, Date, and for Contact
information.
09Oct01
Vibra*Sig Page 7.7.1
Pelton Vibra*Sig32 for Windows
System Requirements:
Windows 95, 98 or NT operating system

64 Mbytes of RAM
CD Drive
Super VGA with 1 Meg (minimum) video memory recommended.
Installation:
1. Install PelComOs, then WVSig

2. Edit autoexec.bat file
3. Edit properties of communication ports
4. Edit properties of display
5. Determine location of WVSig data files
1.) Before installing WVSig, PelComOs must be installed. PelComOs

(Pelton Com port Ole Server) is the component used by WVSig to
manage the communications port.
2.) After both WVSig and PelComOs are installed, there needs to be an
addition made to your autoexec.bat file. Add the following line
near the top of the file:
SET RDRIVE=C:\WINDOWS\TEMP\
Make sure there are no spaces around the = , and that the line
ends with a \.
This change can be made with the program sysedit that is

included in Windows95. Click on the Start button, then click
on the Run menu selection. In the Open box, type sysedit
(without the quotes), and then click the Ok button. After the
change is made, save the file, and exit the sysedit program.
This is required for the DOS GPSmap program to receive data.
09Oct01
3.) Next, the properties of the com port(s) need to be checked, and
possibly changed. To check the properties, click on the Start
button, and then move the cursor to the Settings selection.
Then click on the Control panel selection. In the Control
panel, find the System icon, and double-click on it. Click on
the Device Manager tab, then find the Ports (COM & LPT)
entry. There should be a + just to the left of that entry.
Click on the +, then find the entry Communications Port
(COMn), where n is 1,2,3, or 4. Click on the Communications
Port entry, and then click on the Properties button. The
Communication port (COMn) properties window will pop up. Click
on the Port Settings tab. Find the Flow control text box, in
the lower part of the window. This window should display the
setting None. If it does not, then change that setting by
clicking on the down arrow that is to the right of the text box.
Then click on the OK button. Select each com port listed in
the Device Manager window, and make sure that the Flow
control is set to None.
4.) Check the properties of the display. The recommended Desktop

area should have 800 x 600 pixels (minimum) and a color palette
of 256 colors (minimum). These properties are under the Display
Properties window, and the Settings tab. A Desktop area of
1024 x 768 and a 16-bit color palette is recommended.
After the Communications port and display properties have been

adjusted, the computer will need to be restarted, to make sure
that the new settings take effect.
5.) One further thing to consider, before starting WVSig, is where to

store the data that WVSig generates. In this manual, it is
assumed that the \Pelton\Data subdirectory is the location of
the WVSig data files.
09Oct01
Starting WVSig for the first time:
First, determine where the data files are to be stored (Generate the
new directory if it does not already exist). By default, WVSig will
store its data files in the Windows temporary subdirectory, which is
usually C:\WINDOWS\TEMP.
Double clicking on the WVSig icon will start the program. It can also
be started by clicking on the Start button, then move the cursor to
Programs, then moving the cursor to WVSig, and clicking on the
WVSig selection.
When WVSig starts, the window in Figure 1 is displayed:
Figure 1
This is the Project window. The title bar (at the top of the
window) displays the program name VibraSig, and the current project
name, which happens to be VibraSig. The project name is surrounded
by brackets. It is important not to start anything else until the red
text in the project window shows (ViewMode: Real Time
Data)(AcquireMode: On). One of the last things that WVSig does
during initialization is to open the communications port. Starting
other tasks or clicking on the menu items could interrupt this
process.
WVSig is organized around projects. Each job can have its own project
file. The project file stores all the configuration settings for
WVSig. When starting a new project, the following sequence needs to
occur:
1. Start a new project (from the File menu).

2. Save the project to the desired location.
3. Select an SP1 file for the processing of the GPS data.
4. Position and adjust the graph windows.
5. Start acquiring new data.
09Oct01
Starting a new project (or changing and existing one): If the project
name of VibraSig is ok, then click on the Configuration menu
selection. If another name is to be selected, then click on the
File menu selection, and then click on the New project selection.
Either of these actions will bring up the Configuration window, shown
in Figure 2.
Note: Whenever the configuration window is called up, WVSig will stop
acquiring data.
When the New Project menu item is selected, WVSig will check to
determine if the current projects configuration needs to be saved.
If it does, then the configuration is saved. All WVSig windows that
are opened are closed, with the exception of the project window, and
the configuration window.
When the Configuration menu item is selected, the program assumes

that only changes to the current project are going to be made.
Figure 2
09Oct01
The Project Name can be almost anything. WVSig uses the first 6
characters of the project name to automatically generate the names for
the data files. In this version of WVSig, only two data files are
generated, the Main data file and the Correlation data file. Later
versions will include a Notes file. The Main file name is VM
(VibraSig Main) followed by the first six letters of the project name.
The Correlation file name is VC (VibraSig Correlation) followed by
the first six letters of the project name. In this example case, the
two data files are named VMVibraS, and VCVibraS. If it is
anticipated that multiple data files will be generated for a given
job, then precede the project name with a unique letter or number,
e.g. A, B, C or 00, 01, 02, etc. In this example, the project
name would be 00 VibraSig or A VibraSig. The file names would
then be VMAVibra or VM00Vibr. The Project Note will accept up to
64 characters of text.
Figure 3 shows the contents of the Properties tab:
Figure 3
MaxVibs field is the maximum number of vibrators that are expected to

send PSS messages. The number in this field ranges from 1 to 16.
This number controls the number of vibrators that will be displayed in
the bar graph.
09Oct01
All vibrator messages that are received will be processed and saved to
the data files, regardless of the number of MaxVibs or the vibrators
that are or are not enabled.
Esg Port specifies which communication port is connected to the Esg.

When the configuration window is exited, WVSig will open this port.
Do not change the communication port when there are unprocessed PSS
messages stored in the buffer.
Support/Vibs is not used in this release. Just click the None option.
Enable Vibrators is used in this release to indicate which vibrator

messages are missing. Vibrator Groups A, B, C and D are not supported
with this release. Vibrator 1A, 1B, 1C and 1D are all enabled by the
Vibrator #1 selection.
Vib Checksum Group selects the vibrators that must have the same
checksums for each shot point. In this release of WVSig, vibrator
groups A, B, C and D are ignored when comparing the checksums.
RTI, Distance to Point Id displays the last Received Line number and
Station number for the purpose of generating the Program Point Id, and
the Flag / Geophone format.
Program Point Id should match source flag number entered in the

current SP1 file. This flag will be used to compute distances to the
current vibrator position. Entering the letters a through j will
extract digits from the Received Line. Entering the letters k through
t will extract digits from the Station number. Entering a numeric
constant, 0 through 9, will force that digit into the Program Point
Id.
Example:
Received Line 0000003500

Station 0000001600
Program Point Id 00fghpqr
Decoded Point Id 0003516
Flag / Geo fmt field specifies the format of how the Decoded Point Id
is to be displayed. The x and y represent two groups. Each group can
have an optional decimal point, for a maximum of two decimal points.
The y group is processed first, from the left. Then the x group is
processed on the remaining characters.
09Oct01
Examples:
Decoded Point Id 00035016
Format Resulting flag label on XY graph

yyyyxxxx 0003-----5016
yyxxxx 00-------0350
y.yxx.xx 0.0------03.50
Figure 4 shows the contents of the Error Limits tab:
Figure 4
Error Limits for High Force and Low Force are entered in this tab.
Peak Phase, Average Phase: Sweep phase (in degrees) should not exceed
these limits.
Peak Force, Average Force: Sweep force (in percent) should not be less
than these limits.
Peak Distortion, Average Distortion: Distortion (in percent) should

not exceed these limits.
09Oct01
The Distance and Average Distance error limits are used to flag errors
when the vibrator position or average vibrator position exceeds the
respective limits. The distance limits are in meters. When RTI data
is available, the reference is the decoded flag. When the Near Flags
option is selected, then the reference point is the nearest flag.
Figure 5 displays the contents of the Display tab:
Figure 5
The Data Windows frame will always be displayed. If the Graphs

checkbox is not checked then the Graph Types frame will not be
displayed. The Text checkbox enables or disables the text data
window.
The Sound checkbox enables or disables sound alerts for errors. The
Auto Scale checkbox enables or disables autoscaling of the graphs. If
the Auto Scale box is checked, then the graphs will automatically
scale themselves to the data that is received. This takes priority
over any graph settings that may have been entered by the operator.
09Oct01
There are six graphs available:
Correlation vibrator correlation data

Amplitude Spectrum (of the correlation data)
Phase (of the correlation data)
Bar vibrator Phase, Force, and Distortion
GPS Bar vibrator Distance from flag
GPS XY Position and orientation of vibrators to flags
The Correlation graph has a checkbox that controls the polarity of the
correlation data.
The GPS graphs have two checkboxes that enable or disable showing all
vibrators, and checking the distance of the vibrators to the nearest
flag.
Show All Vibrators, if checked, will cause the two GPS graphs to
display all the vibrators that send GPS data in their PSS messages.
Otherwise, only the average distance and orientation data will be
displayed.
Nearest Flag, if checked, will cause the two GPS graphs to display the
distance and orientation data in relation to the nearest flag, not the
decoded flag. This will be useful for those crews that have GPS
receivers, but no Recording Truck Interface. If this box is not
checked, then distance and orientation data will be displayed in
relation to the decoded flag.
When all the configuration settings have been made, click on the
Finish button. If the Cancel button is clicked, then all the settings
will be returned to their previous state.
Clicking the Finish button will cause the program to open all the
enabled windows, and close any disabled windows. If the
communications port was changed then the newly selected communications
port will be opened (the previous port was already closed). For a new
project, the new data files will be opened. For a previously existing
project, the data files will be reopened, and WVSig will scan to the
last record. Then the data from the last record will be read,
processed and displayed.
After configuring a new project, save the project. This is done by

the File, Save Project menu selections. This selection is used to
store the new project into a different subdirectory. When WVSig is
started for the first time the default data subdirectory is the
Windows temporary subdirectory. This is generally C:\WINDOWS\TEMP.
09Oct01
It is advised that another location be selected for this programs
data files, e.g. C:\PELTON\DATA. Although the projects file name
can be changed here, it would be best to leave it as is. After typing
in the new path for the project file, click on the OK button. The
project files will be stored into the specified subdirectory. The
path specified is stored in the configuration file, so WVSig knows
where to find the data files.
In this release, there is no mechanism to move an existing project to

a different subdirectory (See WVSIG data file section). For this
reason, it is important to store the project to the desired location,
at the time it is constructed. Note that when saving the project, the
program stops acquiring and processing data. After saving the
project, the program will automatically restart the acquisition
process.
If this project is to process GPS data, then a SP1 file needs to be

specified. This is done by the File, Open SegP1 menu option. The
SP1 file can be specified or changed at any time. Note that when
opening the SP1 file, the program stops acquiring and processing data.
After opening the file, the program will automatically restart the
acquisition process.
When the graph windows are first enabled, and displayed on the screen,
they all pop up in the center of the screen. Each window can be
tagged and dragged to another place on the screen, and then resized.
When the program is exited, the current locations of all the windows
are stored into the project file. When the program is restarted, all
the windows pop up in the same location, with the same size as they
were when the program was last exited.
09Oct01
Functions of the Tool Bar:
Each window of WVSig has a tool bar that is used to navigate through
the PSS data files. The tool bar in the project window has a
flasher (on the left-hand side) that flashes when data is received
by the program. Figure 6 shows the rest of the buttons on the tool
bar.
Figure 6
These buttons are similar in function to the buttons on a tape

recorder or VCR. They are used to scroll through the WVSig data.
Table lists the buttons from left to right, and explains the function
of each.
Tool Bar Buttons
Name Function
Home Display first record.

Rewind Start from current record, and display each previous record,
until the first record is displayed.
Previous From the current record, displays the previous record.
Halt Stop rewind, or forward operation.
Next From the current record, display the next record.
Forward Start from current record, and display each next record,
until the last record is displayed.
End Display last record.
Jump Jump to the record number entered in by the operator.
Table 1
Graphs:
Correlation: Displays the PSS correlation data for each vibrator.
Amplitude Spectrum: Displays the amplitude spectrum of the PSS

correlation data for each vibrator.
Phase: Displays the phase of the PSS correlation data for each
vibrator.
09Oct01
Bar: Three bar graphs that display the PSS Phase, Force, and
Distortion. In each graph, each vibrator has two bars. The bar on
the left (lighter color) shows the peak value, and the bar on the
right (darker color) shows the average value. The error limits are
shown on the graph as a blue line. This line is labeled on the right-
hand side as Peak or Average. When the data values are out of
range of the error limits, the bars (for that vibrator) will change to
light red (peak) or dark red (average).
GPS Bar: Displays the linear distance (in meters) from reference flag
(either near or decoded id) to the vibrator. The title of this graph
shows the reference flag number.
GPS XY: Displays the position of the vibrator in relation to the
reference flag (either near or decoded id). The title of this graph
shows the reference flag number and the average distance (in meters)
to the vibrators.
Notes for the GPS graphs:
If there is no reference flag is found, then the reference point
becomes the first vibrator received. Any vibrator that exceeds the
distance limit, or if the average distance exceeds the average
distance limits then that bar (or vibrator symbol) turns from green to
red, and the background of the graph turns to orange.
At the bottom of this graph window, a caption bar prints the decoded
position id (if available). When receiving RTI data, and the Near
Flags mode is selected, the reference flag and decoded position id
can be different.
Notes for all the graphs:
Clicking the mouse in the graph window, but outside of the graph
itself will pop up a box that allows modification of the X and Y-axis
values. For the bar graph, only the Y axis values can be changed.
For the GPS bar graph, only the X axis values can be changed. If the
Auto Scale mode is on then the graph will not retain the settings that
were entered, but will scale itself to the next PSS message or record.
Shot Pro Data and Graph:
The Shot Pro data is displayed in the Bar graph. The text window also
displays a summary of the Shot Pro record. The Bar graph has to be
enabled for the Shot Pro data to be displayed.
When a Shot Pro record is received, the geophone uphole data is
displayed in the bottom two-thirds of the bar graph. There is a mark
on the graph that indicates the UpHole time. The upper third of the
bar graph will contain a text window that displays the box Id and the
UpHole time. In this release, the User UpHole time cannot be entered.
09Oct01
Running other programs that use the communications port:
Before starting another program that uses the communications port

(e.g. VIBQC, KOPWIN and Sweep), either open the configuration window
(which shuts down the communications port), or exit WVSig.
WVSig Data Files:
When moving the data files to another computer, it is mandatory to

store the files into the same directory structure as existed on the
original computer. For example, if the original computer stored the
data files in C:\PELTON\DATA, then they must be copied into
C:\PELTON\DATA on any other computer. This does not apply if WVSig
will not be used to view the data on the other computer(s). The files
that need to be moved are:
VM??????.CFG configuration file

VM??????.TXT main data file
VC??????.TXT correlation data file
The ?????? in the list mean any ASCII character, but they must
be the same in all three files, e.g.
VMVIBSIG.CFG, VMVIBSIG.TXT, VCVIBSIG.TXT.
The configuration file and the main data file are both text files, but
the correlation file is a mix of binary and text data.
09Oct01
Main data record format:
VIBRATOR PSS RECORD

Field Name Offset Length
------------------------------
Record # 0 7
ShotPoint # 8 7
RecordLength 15 5
RecordType 20 9 VIBRASIG or SHOTPRO
Month 29 3 Computer date and time

Day 32 3
Hour 35 3
Minute 38 3
Second 41 3
Esg # 44 3 First Esg

Esg Sweep # 47 3
Esg ChkSum 50 4
Sequence # 54 4
Esg2 # 58 3 Second Esg

Esg2 ChkSum 61 4
Vibrator # 65 3
Vib group 68 3
Sweep # 71 3
Peak Phase 74 5
Avg Phase 79 5
Peak Force 84 4
Avg Force 88 4
Peak Dist 92 4
Avg Dist 96 4
Vib ChkSum 100 4
Gps Status 104 4

Gps Sats 108 4
Gps Latitude 112 11
Gps Longitude 123 11
Gps Elevation 134 7
Rti Seq # 141 4

Rti File # 145 7
Rti Pt Id 152 7
Rti Line # 159 7
Rti Station 166 7
Rti Flag # 173 9 Generated by WVSig
Hi/Lo Force 182 3

GPS Hour 185 3
GPS Minute 188 3
GPS Second 191 3
GPS HDop 194 3 If available - otherwise, 0.
Subject to change.
Reserved 197 27
End Carriage Return, Line Feed.

------------------------------
END OF VIBRATOR PSS RECORD
09Oct01
SHOTPRO PSS RECORD
Field Name Offset Length
------------------------------
Record # 0 7
ShotPoint # 8 7
RecordLength 15 5
RecordType 20 9 VIBRASIG or SHOTPRO
Month 29 3 Computer date and time
Day 32 3
Hour 35 3
Minute 38 3
Second 41 3
Esg # 44 3
Esg Sweep # 47 3
Esg ChkSum 50 4
Sequence # 54 4
ShotPoint Id 57 3
ShotPro TimeBrk 60 7
ShotPro Id 65 3
Gen Up Hole Time 67 7
CapBefore 74 7
CapAfter 81 7
FireResistance 88 5
FireStatus 93 3
GeoPhone Resis. 96 5
GeoPhone Stat. 101 3
GPS Status 108 4
GPS Sats 112 4
GPS Latitude 116 11
GPS Longitude 127 11
GPS Elevation 138 7
RTI Seq # 145 4
RTI File # 149 7
RTI Point Id 156 7
RTI Line # 163 7
RTI Station 170 7
RTI Flag # 177 9 Generated by WVSig
GPS Hour 186 3
GPS Minute 189 3
GPS Second 192 3
GPS HDop 195 4 If available - otherwise, 0.
Subject to change.
User Up Hole time 199 6
Reserved 205 19
End Carriage Return, Line Feed.
------------------------------
END OF SHOTPRO PSS RECORD
09Oct01
Correlation data record format:
VIBRATOR CORRELATION RECORD
Name Type Length
------------------------------
SP # Long 4
Record # Long 4
Record Length Integer 2 File record length
Record Typechar [8] 8
Vibrator # Long 4
Gain Long 4
Correlation Size Integer 2
ChkSum Long 4
Data Long [129] 516
Blank Long [129] 516 room for expansion
------------------------------
END OF VIBRATOR CORRELATION RECORD
SHOTPRO GEOPHONE VOLTAGE RECORD

Name Type Length
------------------------------
ShotPoint # Long 4
Record # Long 4
Record Length Integer 2 record length
Record Typechar [8]
ShotPro Id Long 4
Gain Long 4gain * 100 (25,000 2500 250 25)
GeoSize Integer 2 number of data points
ChkSum Long 2 raw check sum
Data Long [129] 516
Blank Long [129] 516 room for expansion
------------------------------
END OF SHOTPRO GEOPHONE VOLTAGE RECORD
09Oct01
Windows Vibra*Sig Daily Operation
06/23/98
This document details the instructions on how to handle the data files
generated by Windows Vibrasig, during production. It is assumed that
the data files are to be backed up on a daily basis, and a new (or
empty) project will be used at the start of every working day. It is
also assumed that the files are to be compressed with PkZip.Exe. You
will need to have a project naming convention, a subdirectory for
Windows Vibrasig data, a subdirectory for the compressed data files,
and a destination device for permanent storage of the compressed data
files (e.g. disk drive, writeable cd drive, zip/jazz drive, flash
drive, etc.)
Project naming convention.

The first 6 characters of the project name (excluding spaces) are used
to compose the file name. If you are going to use changing numbers or
letters in the project name (e.g. 01, 02, 03... or AA, AB, AC...)
these letters or numbers should be first in the project name. Don't
use any non alphanumeric characters in the first 6 characters of the
project name.
Starting a new project:
Select File, New project from the menu. The configuration window will
be shown. (As long as this window is displayed, the program will not
be acquiring any data). Type in the project name, and press the
[ENTER] key, BEFORE clicking the Finish button, or clicking on another
tab. After all configuration changes have been made, click on the
Finish button.
Now select the File, Save project As from the menu. Save the project
in the desired subdirectory, without changing the file name. Do this
step immediately after beginning a new project.
Backing up the project data:
This requires Pkzip.exe and Pkunzip.exe. It is assumed for this
example that the data subdirectory is C:\Pelton\Data, the subdirectory
for the compressed data files will be C:\Pelton\wvsbak, and the
permanent storage device will be disk drive A:. It is also assumed
that the current project name is 01Crew41.
First, start a new project for the next day. After this is done, exit
Windows Vibrasig, and open a Dos window.
To make sure that data is not lost during this operation, turn verify
on.
Type: verify on [Enter]
09Oct01
Change the current directory to the data directory.
Type: cd \pelton\data [Enter]
Compress the current project to the compressed file directory:
Type: pkzip -ex \pelton\wvsbak\01crew41 v?01crew41.* [Enter]
Test the integrity of the compressed file. After this command is

entered, a list of all the files that are resident in the compressed
file will be displayed. To the right of each filename will be an "Ok"
if the file is intact. If there is a problem with the file, there will
be error messages.
Type: pkunzip -t \pelton\wvsbak\01crew41 [Enter]
If the compressed file is too large for a single floppy disk, you can
force the compressed file to be copied to several disks. This is
called "spanning". Put a blank formatted backup disk in the drive.
Type: pkzip -&ex a:\01crew41 v?01crew41.* [Enter]
Test the integrity of the compressed file on the disk. Put the first
backup disk in the drive.
Type: pkunzip -t a:\01crew41 [Enter]
Follow the prompts on the screen. You will be instructed at some point
to put the last disk in the drive, and then the first disk.
If the compressed file is small enough to fit on a single floppy then

put a backup disk in the drive.
Type: pkzip -ex a:\01crew41 v?01crew41.* [Enter]
Test the integrity of the compressed file on the disk.
Type: pkunzip -t a:\01crew41 [Enter]
Delete the project that was just compressed.
Type: del 01crew41.* [Enter]

To finish:
Type: verify off [Enter]
Type: exit [Enter]
09Oct01
WVSig32 File Format Documentation
General Information:
With the exception of the correlation file, the WVSig32 data files are text files.
The records in these text files have comma-delimited fields.
The correlation data files are binary.
There are 2 sections in this document, an Advanced II section, and a VibPro section.
The file names are composed of a 2-character prefix, with up to 6 characters taken
from the project name.
All data files have the extension ".txt". The configuration file has the extension
".cfg".
Assuming a project name of "New Project" the files would be as follows:
File Name Comment

VMNewPro Main data file.
VCNewPro Correlation data file.
VNNewPro Notes file.
VENewPro Error / Esg data file.
VSNewPro Signature data file.
Advanced II PSS data.

Vibrator record:
Field Name Position Size Comments
clRecNo 1-7 7 Record #. Starts from 1.
clVpNo 8 - 14 7 Vp #. Interval starts from 1.
ciRecLen 15 - 19 5 Size of 1 record. Can change from file to file.
ccRecType 20 - 28 8 "VIBRASIG" or " SHOTPRO".
ciMo 29 - 31 3 Month acquired, from computer (1 to 12).
ciDd 32 - 34 3 Day acquired, from computer (0 to 31).
ciHh 35 - 37 3 Hour acquired, from computer (0 to 23).
CiMm 38 - 40 3 Minute acquired, from computer (0 to 59).
ciSs 41 - 43 3 Second acquired, from computer (0 to 59).
ciEsgNo 44 - 46 3 Esg number (0 to 3).
ciE1Swp 47 - 49 3 Esg 1st sweep generator sweep number (0 to 15).
ciE1Chk 50 - 53 4 Esg 1st sweep generator checksum (0 to 255).
ciSeqNo 54 - 57 4 Sequence number.
ciE2Swp 58 - 60 3 Esg 2nd sweep generator sweep number (0 to 15).
ciE2Chk 61 - 64 4 Esg 2nd sweep generator checksum (0 to 255).
ciVibNo 65 - 67 3 Vibrator number (0 to 15).
ciVibGrp 68 - 70 3 Vibrator group number (0 to 3).
ciSwp 71 - 78 3 Vibrator sweep number (0 to 15).
ciPPhz 74 - 78 5 Vibrator peak phase (-180 to +180).
ciAPhz 79 - 83 5 Vibrator average phase (-180 to +180)
ciPFo 84 - 87 4 Vibrator peak force (0 to 200).
ciAFo 88 - 91 4 Vibrator average force (0 to 200).
ciPDist 92 - 95 4 Vibrator peak distortion (0 to 100).
ciADist 96 - 99 4 Vibrator average distortion (0 to 100).
ciChk 100 - 103 4 Vibrator checksum (0 to 255).
ciStat 104 - 107 4 Vibrator GPS status byte (0 to 255).
ciSats 108 - 111 4 Vibrator GPS satellite byte (0 to 255).
clLat 112 - 122 11 Vibrator GPS Latitude (Minutes times 10,000).
clLon 123 - 133 11 Vibrator GPS Longitude (Minutes times 10,000).
clElev 134 - 140 7 Vibrator GPS Elevation in meters.
ciRSeq 141 - 144 4 Recording system sequence number.
09Oct01
Advanced II PSS data, continued.
clRFn 145 - 151 7 Recording system file number.
clRPtId 152 - 158 7 Recording system point id.
clRLine 159 - 165 7 Recording system Line number.
clRStation 166 - 172 7 Recording system Station number.
clFlagNo 173 - 181 9 Decoded flag number.
ciHiLo 182 - 184 3 Vibrator force (0 = high, Non 0 = low).
ciGHh 185 - 187 3 GPS Hour (0 to 23).
ciGMm 188 - 190 3 GPS Minute (0 to 59).
ciGSs 191 - 193 3 GPS Second (0 to 59).
ciHDop 194 - 196 3 GPS HDop (0 to 99).
ciPDop 197 - 199 3 GPS PDop (0 to 99).
ciVDop 200 - 202 3 GPS VDop (0 to 99).
clNFlagNo 203 - 210 8 Nearest flag to average distance of the VP.
cReserved 211 - 223 13 Reserved for future use.
cCrLf 224 - 225 2 Carriage return, Line feed. End of record.
End of Vibrator Record
ShotPro Record:
CiMm 38 - 40 3 Minute acquired, from computer (0 to 59).
ciE1Swp 46 - 48 3 Esg 1st sweep generator sweep number (0 to 15).
ciE1Chk 49 - 52 4 Esg 1st sweep generator checksum (0 to 255).
ciSeqNo 53 - 56 4 Sequence number.
ciSpId 57 - 59 3 Shot point ID.
ciSpCtb 60 - 66 7 Confirmed Time Break.
ciSpGut 67 - 73 7 Geophone UpHole time.
ciSpCapb 74 - 80 7 Cap voltage before shot.
ciSpCapa 81 - 87 7 Cap voltage after shot.
ciSpFireRes 88 - 92 5 Fire line resistance.
ciSpFireStat 93 - 95 3 Fire line status.
ciSpGeoRes 96 - 100 5 Geophone resistance.
ciSpGeoStat 101 - 103 3 Geophone status.
ciSpStatus 104 - 107 4 Shot Pro status.
ciStat 108 - 111 4 GPS status byte.
ciSats 112 - 115 4 GPS satellite byte.
clLat 116 - 126 11 GPS latitude (minutes * 10,000).
clLon 127 - 137 11 GPS longitude (minutes * 10,000).
clElev 138 - 144 7 GPS elevation in meters.
clRLine 163 - 169 7 Recording system line number.
clRStation 170 - 176 7 Recording system station number.
clFlagNo 177 - 185 9 Shot Pro flag.
ciGHh 186 - 188 3 GPS Hour.
09Oct01
ShotPro Record continued:
ciGMm 189 - 191 3 GPS Minute.
ciGSs 192 - 194 3 GPS Second.
ciHDop 195 - 197 3 GPS HDop.
ciSpUut 198 - 204 7 ShotPro User UpHole time.
ciPDop 205 - 207 3 GPS PDop.
ciVDop 208 - 210 3 GPS VDop.
clNFlagNo 211 - 218 8 Nearest flag to the shot point.
End of ShotPro Record
End of Main data record format.
ESG, Vibrator Status and Error Data:

clRec 1-7 7 Record #. Starts from 1.
clVp 8 - 14 7 VP #. Interval starts from 1.
clRecLen 15 - 18 4 Size of 1 record. Can change from file to file.
ciESwitch 28 - 30 3 Mode. Hex "00" - "FF".
ciSysCon 31 - 33 3 System control error byte. Hex "00" - "FF".
ciPDet 34 - 36 3 Phase detector error byte. Hex "00" - "FF".
ciSwpGen 37 - 39 3 Sweep Generator error byte. Hex "00" - "FF".
ciSwpGen2 40 - 42 3 2nd Sweep Generator error byte. Hex "00" - "FF"
ciVibNo 43 - 45 3 Vibrator number.
ciVChk 46 - 48 3 Vibrator checksum. Hex "00" - "FF"
ciVSwitch 49 - 51 3 Vibrator switch settings. Hex "00" - "FF"
ciInternal 52 - 54 3 Vibrator internal errors. Hex "00" - "FF"
ciAccPol 55 - 57 3 Accelerometer polarity. Hex "00" - "FF"
ciBatTque 58 - 60 3 Battery / Torque motor. Hex "00" - "FF"
ciExBias 61 - 62 2 Excitation / Bias. Hex "00" - "FF"
cRLf 95 - 96 2 Carriage return, Line feed. End of record.
End of ESG, Vibrator Status and Error Data.
Correlation Binary data:

lVp 1-3 4 (long) VP #. Interval starts from 1.
lRec 4-7 4 (long) Record #. Starts from 1.
iRecLen 8-9 2 (short) Size of 1 record. Can change from file to file.
cRecType 10 - 17 8 (char) "VIBRASIG" or " SHOTPRO".
iVib 18 - 19 2 (short) Vibrator number.
lGain 20 - 23 4 (long) Gain number for the correlation data.
iCorlSize 24 - 25 2 (short) Number of data points in lData.
lChk 26 - 29 4 (long) Checksum of original data in lData.
lData[129] 30 - 545 516 (long) Scaled data.
lBlank[129] 517 - 1061 516 (long) Reserved for future use.
Correlation Notes:
1. To process the gain: Convert Gain to a float, and divide by 32768.
2. Correlation data in lData is already scaled. Gain and checksum are provided as a reference, if needed.
End of Correlation Binary data.
09Oct01
Note data:
clVp 1-9 9 VP #. Interval starts from 1.
clRec 10 - 18 9 Record #. Starts from 1.
cNote 19 - 98 80 Note text.
End of Note data.
NOTES:
1. If 2nd sweep generator does not exist in the ESG, then the sweep number is set to an invalid value.
2. The record length in the file is assumed to be the same throughout the file, for both Vibrator and ShotPro.
3. The field sizes include the delimiting comma in the last position of each field.
4. If the correlation record has an invalid vibrator number (e.g. -1), then the data in that record either does not exist, or the
data is invalid.
End of Advanced II PSS data.
VibPro PSS data:

Vibrator record:
ccRecType 20 - 28 9 " VPMISS" or " VPVIBRA" or " VPSHOT".
clSwpIndex 29 - 35 7 Sweep Index number.
ciCrewNo 36 - 39 4 Crew number (1 - 999).
ciMm 49 - 51 3 Minute acquired, from computer (0 to 59).
ciEChko 58 - 61 4 Unused - may be used later.
ciESwp 62 - 64 3 ESG Sweep number (1 - 16).
ciESChko 65 - 68 4 Unused - may be used later.
ciVibNo 69 - 71 3 Vibrator number (1 - 32).
ciSwp 72 - 74 3 Vibrator sweep number (1 - 16).
ciPPhz 75 - 79 5 Vibrator peak phase (-180 to +180)
ciAPhz 80 - 84 5 Vibrator average phase (-180 to +180).
ciPFo 85 - 88 4 Vibrator peak force (0 - 200).
ciAFo 89 - 92 4 Vibrator average force (0 - 200).
ciMFo 93 - 96 4 Vibrator minimum force (0 - 200).
ciPDist 97 - 100 4 Vibrator peak distortion (0 - 100).
ciADist 101 - 105 4 Vibrator average distortion (0 - 100).
ciPStiff 105 - 108 4 Vibrator peak stiffness.
ciAStiff 109 - 112 4 Vibrator average stiffness.
ciMStiff 113 - 116 4 Vibrator minimum stiffness.
ciPVisc 117 - 120 4 Vibrator peak viscosity.
ciAVisc 121 - 124 4 Vibrator average viscosity.
ciMVisc 125 - 128 4 Vibrator minimum viscosity.
ciChk 129 - 135 7 Vibrator sweep checksum.
ciVChk 136 - 142 7 Vibrator checksum.
ciStat 143 - 146 4 GPS Status byte (0 - 255).
ciSats 147 - 150 4 GPS Satellite byte (0 - 255).
clLat 151 - 161 11 GPS Latitude (minutes times 10,000).
Vibrator record continued:
09Oct01
clLon 162 - 172 11 GPS Longitude (minutes times 10,000).
clElev 173 - 179 7 GPS Elevation (in meters).
clRShotId 298 - 204 7 Recording system Shot id.
ciShotCoordType 219 - 222 4 Recording system shot coordinate type.
ciShotCoordSize 223 - 226 4 Recording system shot coordinate size.
ciHiLo 236 - 238 3 Vibrator force (0 = high, Non 0 = low).
ciSwpMode 239 - 241 3 Vibrator sweep mode.
clVibEnable 242 - 250 9 Vibrators enabled in hex (00000000 - FFFFFFFF).
ciVStat1 251 - 255 5 Vibrator status 1 (0000 - FFFF).
ciAgeDop 288 - 293 5 GPS Age Dop.
clNFlagNo 294 - 302 9 Nearest flag number.
clStartTime 303 - 311 9 Start time. lsb=10uSec.
ciTargForce 312 - 317 6 Target force.
ciEChk 318 - 322 5 ESG Checksum
ciESChk 323 - 326 4 ESG Sweep Checksum
End of Vibrator Record.
ShotPro Record:
clSwpIndex 29 - 35 7 Sweep Index number.
ciCrewNo 36 - 39 4 Crew number (1 - 999).
ciMm 49 - 51 3 Minutes acquired, from computer (0 to 59).
ciSs 52 - 54 3 Seconds acquired, from computer (0 to 59).
ciEsgNo 55 - 57 3 ESG number (1 - 4).
ciEChko 58 - 61 4 Unused - may be used later.
ciESwp 62 - 64 3 ESG sweep number.
ciESChko 65 - 68 4 Unused - may be used later.
ciSpId 69 - 71 3 Shot point ID.
ciSpCtb 72 - 78 7 Confirmed Time Break.
ciSpGut 79 - 85 7 Geophone UpHole time.
ShotPro Record continued:
09Oct01
ciSpCapb 86 - 92 7 Cap voltage before shot.
ciSpCapa 93 - 99 7 Cap voltage after shot.
ciSpFireRes 100 - 104 5 Fire line resistance.
ciSpFireStat 105 - 107 3 Fire line status.
ciSpGeoRes 108 - 112 5 Geophone resistance.
ciSpGeoStat 113 - 115 3 Geophone status.
ciSpStatus 116 - 119 4 Shot Pro status.
ciStat 120 - 123 4 GPS status byte.
ciSats 124 - 127 4 GPS satellite byte.
clLat 128 - 138 11 GPS latitude (minutes times 10,000).
clLon 139 - 149 11 GPS longitude (minutes times 10,000).
clElev 150 - 156 7 GPS elevation in meters.
clRShotId 175 - 181 7 Recording system shot id.
ciShotCoordType 196 - 199 4 Recording system shot coordinate type.
ciShotCoordSize 200 - 203 4 Recording system shot coordinate size.
ciSpUut 225 - 231 7 User up hole time.
ciAgeDop 238 - 242 5 GPS AgeDop.
clNFlagNo 243 - 251 9 Nearest flag number.
ciEChk 252 - 256 5 ESG checksum.
ciESChk 257 - 260 4 ESG sweep checksum.
End of Main data record format.
ESG, Vibrator Status and Error Data:

clVp 8 - 14 7 VP #. Interval starts from 1.
clRecLen 15 - 18 4 Size of 1 record. Can change from file to file.
clSwpIndex 29 - 35 7 Sweep index number.
ciSimVib 36 - 39 4 Vib # that was running a similarity.
ccVEn 40 - 48 9 Vibrators enabled (in hex).
clStartTime 49 - 60 12 Start time.
ciEsgMode 61 - 64 4 Which mode of operation.
ciStatus 65 - 69 5 First status field (in hex).
ciStatus2 70 - 74 5 Second status field (in hex).
ciStatus3 75 - 79 5 Third status field (in hex).
ciStatus4 80 - 84 5 Fourth status field (in hex).
End of ESG, Vibrator Status and Error Data.
09Oct01
Correlation Binary data:
lVp 1-3 4 (long) VP #. Interval starts from 1.
lRec 4-7 4 (long) Record #. Starts from 1.
iRecLen 8-9 2 (short) Size of 1 record. Can change from file to file.
cRecType 10 - 17 8 (char) " VPMISS" or " VPVIBRA" or " VPSHOT".
iVib 18 - 19 2 (short) Vibrator number.
lGain 20 - 23 4 (long) Gain number for the correlation data.
iCorlSize 24 - 25 2 (short) Number of data points in lData.
lChk 26 - 29 4 (long) Checksum of original data in lData.
lData[129] 30 - 545 516 (long) Scaled data.
lBlank[129] 546 - 1061 516 (long) Reserved for future use.
Correlation Notes:
1. To process the gain: Convert Gain to a float, and divide by 32768.
2. Correlation data in lData is already scaled. Gain and checksum are provided as a reference, if needed.
End of Correlation Binary data.
Note data:
clVp 1-9 9 VP #. Interval starts from 1.
clRec 10 - 18 9 Record #. Starts from 1.
cNote 19 - 98 80 Note text.
End of Note data.
Signature data:
clVpNo 8 - 14 7 VP #. Interval starts from 1.
clSwpIndex 28 - 34 7 Sweep index.
ciVib 35 - 37 3 Vibrator number.
ciSwp 38 - 40 3 Sweep number.
ciSwpBlocks 41 - 46 6 Number of sweep blocks saved.
ciSwpsSaved 47 - 52 6 Number of sweeps saved.
ciDskSpace 53 - 56 4 Percent of disk space remaining.
ciSigStatus 57 - 62 7 Signature status.
End of Signature data.
NOTES:
1. The record length in the file is assumed to be the same throughout the file, for both Vibrator and ShotPro.
2. The field sizes include the delimiting comma in the last position of each field.
3. If the correlation record has an invalid vibrator number (e.g. -1), then the data in that record either does not exist, or the
data is invalid.
End of VibPro PSS data.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.1
USING VIBQC
VIBQC is used for the analysis of Vibrator signal data. This program
reads and writes 16 bit Force Meter files (.FMR). There is a Serqc
option, for analysis of two channel radio or wireline similarities.
There is a Scope mode that allows selection of any signal channel for
Reference, Base Plate, and Reaction Mass. Otherwise, the Scope mode is
the same as Fm16 mode. Analysis consists of Raw Signal Traces,
Vibra*Chek, Amplitude Spectrum, Correlation, Harmonic Distortion, and
Accelerometer test.
Installation
Assuming the standard Pelton installation, make the directory VIBQC under
\PELTON\WIN. The following files need to be in this subdirectory
(\PELTON\WIN\VIBQC):
BC500RTL.DLL 08/08/96
A3CDLL.DLL 12/19/96 01.69
VIBQC.EXE 12/19/96 01.22.14
VIBQC.WRI 09/06/95
VIBQC.TXT 12/19/96
The following files need to be in the \WINDOWS\SYSTEM subdirectory:
CMDIALOG.VBX 04/28/93
MSMASKED.VBX 04/28/93
SPIN.VBX 04/28/93
THREED.VBX 04/28/93
GRAPHX16.VBX 05/15/96
GSWDLL16.DLL 05/20/96
GSW16.EXE 05/20/96
GSWAG16.EXE 05/30/96
VBRUN300.DLL 05/12/93
VER.DLL 11/01/93
Operation
As shown in Fig. 1, the main window of Vibqc has a title bar, menu bar,
tool bar and comment bar. If you want to know the function of a button
on the tool bar, move the cursor over that button, and a brief, one line
description of that button will be displayed at the bottom of the window.
If the button is disabled, the description will not be displayed. To
execute the function of a button on the tool bar, position the cursor
over the button, and click the mouse once. A double click could cause
the button to execute twice. Double clicking on the comment bar will
open the comment edit dialog.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.2
\File/Acquire / \ / \Graphs/\ Window manip./\ Quit /

Signal Polarity
Fig. 1
Fig.1a
Fig. 1b
The title bar of the Vibqc main window, shows the program name, and the
current mode, and filter compensation selected. In fig. 1, the title bar
indicates that it is in Fm16 mode. There are three modes available:
Fm16, Scope and Sqc16. The mode selections are found in the
Configuration dialog. Fig 1a, and 1b show the title bar when in Sqc16
mode, with Radio and WireLine version 6 filters were selected.
NOTE: When changing modes, the graphs are all erased, and any signal data
present in memory is lost. A warning message is posted, so that the mode
switch can be canceled.
When selecting the Sqc16 mode, the BasePlate weight will automatically be
changed. When returning to the Fm16 or Scope mode, the BasePlate weight
will have to be re-entered by the user, via the Parameters dialog.
When starting Vibqc for the first time, a graph window is opened, and the
Graphs menu is activated, so that a graph type can be selected for that
window. The first graph window must always be open, and can only be
closed by exiting the program.
If the first window is the active window, the Close Window tool button
will be disabled, as in fig. 1. So, if you try to close a window, and it
does not close, then it must be the first window.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.3
The graph types are as follows:
Signal traces.
Vibra*Chek.
Amplitude spectrum.
Correlation.
Distortion.
Accelerometer Test.
You may open any combination of these graphs, or duplicates, if you wish.
Because of memory and speed considerations, try to limit the number of
graphs open at one time, to around eight.
New Graph.
This button opens a new graph window. A new window can also be opened
via the Window menu, or by [CTRL] N. Immediately after opening a new
graph window, the Graphs menu is activated, and a graph type can be
selected for the new graph window.
Close Graph.
This button closes the current graph window, as long as the current graph
is not the first window. The current window can also be closed via the
Window menu, or by [CTRL] C, or by the [ESC] key.
File Open.
This button brings up the open file dialog so .FMR files can be found and
loaded. The parameters from the file will over write the parameters that
were set up in the Parameters menu selection. After the file is loaded,
the graphs will be recomputed and displayed. This function can also be
accessed via the File, Open menu selection, or [CTRL] O.
File Save As.

This button brings up the Edit Comment dialog. The Edit Comment dialog
has a button that leads to the File Save As dialog. So, the comment can
be inspected and changed before saving the data in a new file.
The File Save As dialog can also be accessed (without edit of comment)
via the File, SaveAs menu selection, or [CTRL] S.
NOTE: When data is acquired, the file comment is not changed, so before
saving to a file, check the comment, and make sure that it is what you
want.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.4
Print.
This button brings up the print dialog. The print dialog allows you to
edit the comment before printing. From this dialog, the current graph
can be sent to the printer, to a file (.BMP), or to the windows
clipboard. If the graph is to be sent to a file or to the clipboard, the
image saved will be the same size as the graph on the screen.
The print screen (or alt print screen) functions of the windows operating
system allows the entire page to be saved to the clipboard. Using the
shift insert key in paint shop, or some other windows graphic program,
allows the whole page to be viewed and later printed.
Reverse Signal Polarity.

The polarity is defined as acceleration up is a positive number. This
button inverts all the signals except the reference signal, and
recalculates the graphs. To determine the current polarity, move the
cursor over this button, and the current polarity will be noted at the
bottom of the screen.
Acquire Signal Data.

This button starts signal acquisition. Before using this button, check
the parameters setting to make sure that all the settings are correct.
This same function can be accessed via the File, Acquire menu selection
or, [CTRL]Z. When acquisition is started, the Stop Acquire button, and
menu selection is enabled. If the Version 2 Notebook VCA does not
respond after 10-30 seconds an error message will be displayed "Did Not
RX Ack", check serial cable, Com Port selection and reset the Notebook
VCA and try again. After all the data has been received, a message is
displayed indicating how many samples were received, and if there were
any errors. If any signal data is already in memory, a message will be
displayed to warn that the data is about to be lost, and the acquire
process can be canceled. All warning messages can be disabled by
accessing the Configuration dialog (fig. 2), and clicking on the
NoWarnings box.
NOTE: When the acquire function starts, the cursor changes to a white
cable. When the Acknowledge message from the VCA is received, the cursor
will change to a black cable. On some computers, this will cause errors
in the acquisition process. If this occurs, then there is a selection,
under the Configuration dialog (fig. 2), that will permit the cursor
change to be disabled. The selection is NoRxCursor. A check will appear
beside this item, if it is selected. If the cursor does not change, then
the Acknowledge from the VCA has not been received, and data acquisition
will not occur.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.5
Stop Acquire.
After acquisition of data has been started, this button is enabled. If
the acquisition process needs to be terminated, use this button. This
function can also be accessed via the File, Stop Acquire menu selection,
but this seems to be unreliable.
If you have problems acquiring data, try the following:
Turn off the Receive Cursor (Configuration, NoRxCursor).
Exit any other programs running on the system, and have VIBQC the
only program running.
Turn off any screen savers.
Check the amount of memory free. There should be more than 2 Megs
free.
If the computer has only 4 meg of ram installed, and there is no

swap file, or the swap file is small, then the amount of free memory
can be less than 2 Megs.
Check the swap file. It should be a permanent swap file, not

temporary.
Exit.
This button will exit the program. The same function can be accessed via
the File, Exit menu selection.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.6
MODE
Fig. 2
Fig 2 shows the Configuration dialog. This dialog is used to change the
Modes, Filters (in Sqc16 mode), and some miscellaneous selections.
Smooth data: If this box is checked, then the data used in the
Vibra*Chek, Correlation, and Amplitude spectrum graphs
will be averaged, or "Smoothed".
NoRxCursor, NoWarnings: See Acquire Signal Data Section, above.
No Tool Bar: If this box is checked, the tool bar will be hidden, and
its space will be made available to the graphs.
Smooth - Selects if smoothing is to be used on graphs. The Vibra*Chek

functions (Phase, Fund, RMS, Peak, and Pk & Tr VForce) average 3 points
when smoothing is selected. The Ref amplitude spectrum, Vib amplitude
spectrum, cross or auto correlation envelopes average 9 points when
smoothing is selected.
SQC16 Filters - When using the SQC16 mode with the Advance II system,
filter compensation can be selected. This selection affects the
Vibra*Chek force output graphs. When using Version 6, Mini or Mini Plus
Systems select Version 6 filters. Select Radio Sims if radio
similarities from the ESG are being performed.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.7
Parameters
Fig. 3
Fig. 3 shows the Parameters dialog that is activated by the menu
selection Parameters.
The first three items in this dialog, Reference, BasePlate, ReactionMass,
cannot be changed when in the Sqc16, or Fm16 mode. In the Scope mode,
any 1 of 8 channels may be selected for Reference, Base Plate and
Reaction Mass.
ComPorts allows selection of the com port to use for data acquisition.
This is one of the first selections to make when the program is first
run.
Trig Chn allows selection of the signal channel which will act as the
trigger. In Sqc16, only reference will be used. In Fm16, or Scope mode,
reference or channel 0 can be used.
Trigger Level is used in acquisition and in the VibraChek calculations.
It is possible to have a trigger level that is greater than the reference
signal. In this case, the Vibra*Chek graphs may not show anything.
Lowering the trigger level will most likely solve this problem.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.8
Sample Rate is changed by what is called a "spin button". This is found
to the left of the Seconds label. If an increase of the sample time is
desired, position the mouse cursor on the black triangle that points up,
and click the mouse. To decrease the sample time, position the mouse
cursor on the black triangle that points down, and click the mouse. The
sample time ranges from .125 milliseconds to 2 milliseconds. The sample
rate determines the maximum sweep length that can be acquired. If the
sample rate is changed, then the current sweep in memory (if any) will be
deleted when the dialog is exited.
Graph Controls
Fig. 4
The upper left part of the graph window, with the ChangeXY Dialog, is
shown in fig. 4. There are four buttons that will change the X or Y axis
of the graph, so different areas of the data can be displayed.
Left Button.
This button decreases the values of the X axis by half of the difference
between the maximum X and minimum X values.
Right Button.
This button increases the values of the X axis by half of the difference
between the maximum X and minimum X values.
Down Button.
This button decreases the values of the Y axis by 50% of the difference
between the maximum Y and minimum Y values.
Up Button.
This button increases the values of the Y axis by 50% of the difference
between the maximum Y and minimum Y values.
Overlay Button.
This button opens the Overlay Dialog (if a sweep has been acquired or
loaded). The Overlay Dialog has sixteen buttons, eight for storing graph
data, and eight for displaying graph data.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.9
Save Button.
Restore Button.
Each graph window can store eight overlays. The overlay data in one
window can not be used in another window. The actual x and y data points
are stored, not the graphics information. This means that the data needs
to be overlayed on the same type of graph. When the data is displayed,
the program will read the X and Y axis of the graph, and store the data
at the proper locations, relative to the X and Y axis. This means that
even if the X and Y axis is changed, the data will be shown correctly.
If some or all of the overlay data values lie outside the graph, then
those data points are "clipped", and will not be shown. The color of the
overlay traces depend upon how many traces are already in the graph, and
the order in which the overlays are displayed. Each graph can handle a
total of 6000 data points. The program will allow overlay data to be
displayed until this limit is reached. Vibra*Chek graphs usually contain
less than 200 trace. Fft graphs contain 500 points per trace. If the
graph is recalculated, or if the X and or Y axis values are changed, then
any overlay data being shown will be erased, but the overlay data is
still accessible.
To the right of the buttons are two fields that will display the current
value, X and Y of the cursor in the graph. The values displayed are in
the units listed for the X and Y axis of the graph. If the cursor is in
either of these fields, and the mouse is double clicked, the ChangeXY
dialog will be displayed. This dialog will allow the minimum and maximum
X and Y values to be input from the keyboard.
Fig. 4
The ChangeXY dialog is shown in fig. 4. Canceling will leave the graph
unchanged. If a graph has a problem, and generates an error, usually the
problem can be overcome by changing these XY values. If there are still
problems, close the graph window, then open a new graph window, and make
the same graph selections as before.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.10
Parameters Window
Fig. 6
This window is opened via the Windows, Parameters Window menu selection.
It displays some of the current parameters that are selected via the
Parameters dialog (Fig. 3). When this window is the current window, not
all of the menu selections are available. The menu selections under
Windows is available.
VIBQC.INI
All the parameter settings, and the number of windows and their settings
are saved in a file called VIBQC.INI. This file is saved in the Windows
subdirectory.
If problems keep occurring when running VibQC or when installing a new
version of VibQC it is recommended to delete the VibQC.INI file.
Overlays
The Overlay menu can be accessed by the "OV" button next to the up arrow
button. There are eight different storage locations for each graph type.
To save an overlay select the buttons with the "S". To restore an
overlay select the buttons with the "R". Only the current displayed
graph data will be saved to the overlay memory. The overlay data can be
rescaled only if it was part of the original saved data. To overlay peak
force on absolute force graph, first select and save the overlay. Then
change the peak force window to absolute force, then restore the saved
overlay.
Weights
SQC16 mode - The hold down weight is the only weight which can be
entered. This entry must match the entry made in the Vibrator
electronics.
FM16 mode - The reaction mass and baseplate weights must match the
entries on the Vibrator electronics and the weights of the vibrator. The
hold down weight is only used for internal scaling of the signal and does
not affect the final force output. If Ground Force Overflow error
occurs, try entering 99,900 in Hold down weight to correct this problem.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.11
Display and Processing
Signal Traces, Reference, Baseplate (BP), Reaction Mass, Ground Force -
Graphs the Signal (volts) versus Time (seconds). Select the Y-axis units
and select to offset or overlay multiple traces.
NOTE - Signal Traces Graph:
At this time there is a limitation of 1000 data points per trace in this
graph. If 8000 samples (8 seconds @ 1 millisecond sample rate) are
selected to be displayed, then the program will graph only 1 every 8
samples. This can cause the sweep traces to APPEAR to be a liased. The
area that appears to be incorrect can be magnified. As the number of
samples to be displayed approaches 1000 (1 second at 1 millisecond sample
rate), the aliasing will disappear.
VIBRA*CHEK Graphs
Vibra*Chek Calculations - The Phase, Peak Force, Pk & Tr VForce,
Fundamental Force, RMS Force and Frequency vs. Time graphs are computed
simultaneously with the Vibra*Chek algorithm. The Vibra*Chek algorithm
assumes that the Reference signal is undistorted. Fundamental Force and
Phase calculations will be wrong when analyzing random sweeps.
Warning: The Vibra*Chek algorithm will compute improper phase and
fundamental force, when a distorted signal is used for
reference. If precise phase error calculation is required,
compute the phase of each signal vs. the reference, then use
the overlay feature for comparison.
Phase - Graphs the fundamental phase difference in degrees between the
Reference and Vibrator signals. The X-Axis can either be Time or
Frequency by selections in the Graph Setup.
Fund. VForce - Graphs the Fundamental Amplitude (Distortion Removed) of
the Vibrator Output Signal. The X and Y-Axis are selected by the Graph
Setup.
Peak Vforce Compression - Graphs the positive peaks of the Vibrator
signal. This graph is used to evaluate the Peak Ground Force Amplitude
Control performance when used with Ground Force Similarities and Peak
Ground Force Amplitude control. The X and Y-Axis are selected by the
Graph Setup.
Peak Vforce Non-Compression - Graphs the negative peaks of the Vibrator
signal.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.12
RMS VForce - Graphs the R.M.S. output of the Vibrator signal. This graph
is used to evaluate the R.M.S. Ground Force Amplitude Control performance
when used with Ground Force Similarities and R.M.S. Ground Force
Amplitude Control. The X and Y-Axis are selected by the Graph Setup.
Abs Pk VForce - Absolute Peak Vibrator Force. Graphs the peak of the
absolute value of the Vibrator Signal. The absolute value of the
positive peak and the negative peak (trough) are used to determine output
of vibrator.
Freq Vs Time - Graphs the frequency versus time of the Reference sweep. A
linear sweep will be a straight line.
Amplitude Spectrum
Reference, Baseplate, Reaction Mass, or Ground Force Ampl. Spec. - Graphs

the Amplitude Spectrum (db) versus frequency (Hertz).
Correlation
Correlation - The type of correlation must be selected. Auto or Cross
Correlation may be selected. The Correlation or the Correlation Envelope
may also be selected.
The Correlation Envelope is useful in evaluating harmonic distortion
noise (ghosting) of the cross-correlated wavelet.
The Amplitude and Phase of the cross-correlation wavelet may also be

selected. This phase analysis may be used on any sweep. Random sweeps
should always be analyzed with this algorithm and not the Vibra*Chek
algorithm.
Distortion
The Distortion Menu - Select which signal to analyze. Then select the
distortion calculation to perform, Total or Harmonic. Next, the type of
graph to display can be selected, either Waterfall or Percent Distortion.
As an option, the raw data of the distortion calculations can be graphed.
If the Waterfall graph is selected, there is a choice of three different
graphs to display the waterfall data.
The first is the "Normal" graph. The second is a 2D Surface graph. The
third is a 3D Surface graph. The 2D and 3D graphs are very similar,
except when viewed perpendicularly, from above. The 2D graph appears
flat, while the 3D graph appears to have some depth, with some
perspective. At this angle, the 2D graph is more acceptable.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.13
The upper left-hand corner of these two graphs is the origin of the X,Y,
and Z axes. X is frequency, Y is trace # (time), and Z is magnitude
(dB). At the origin, X = 0, Y = 0, and Z = -40.
The viewing angle may be moved for a different view of the graph. This
means that the viewer is moving, not the graph. The [Ctrl] key with the
arrow buttons on the graph will change the viewing angle. To move the
viewing angle to the left, use the [Ctrl] Left button. To move the
viewing angle higher (above) the graph, use the [Ctrl] Up button. As
with the "Normal" waterfall graph, the right arrow button increases the
maximum value of the X axis (frequency), and the left button decreases
the maximum value of the X axis. Overlays are not available for these
graphs.
Water Fall Graph - Displays the Frequency Output of the Vibrator versus
Time. Time in seconds is the Y-Axis and Frequency in Hertz is the X-
Axis. This graph displays the Fundamental Output of the Vibrator plus
the Harmonic Distortion Output. The graph is generated by performing
Amplitude Spectrums (db) on time windows of the sweep.
To view the individual amplitude spectrum traces that make up the

waterfall graph, move the mouse cursor into the graph, and then click the
left mouse button. The up graph button will increment the trace number
to view, and the down graph button will decrement the trace number.
Moving the mouse button into the amplitude spectrum graph, then clicking
the left mouse button will restore the waterfall graph.
Note: In the PELCOVCE.HLP file is a section on Monitoring Distortion,

that will give more information on Total and Harmonic Distortion.
The Harmonic Distortion Waterfall graph is computed by dividing the sweep

into segments. For an eight second sweep, fifteen overlapping one second
segments are used. The first segment from 0-1 second, the second from
0.5 - 1.5 seconds, the third from 1.0 - 2.0 seconds, and so on. A Cosine
Taper is applied to each segment, then an amplitude spectrum is taken.
Values below -40 dB are not graphed on the Waterfall Harmonic Distortion
graph.
The %THD is computed from the windowed amplitude spectrums. The highest
amplitude is considered the fundamental energy. If any energy is greater
than the fundamental energy, then the %THD calculations will be wrong.
After the fundamental frequency is computed the energy is divided into
Fundamental Energy, Odd Harmonic Energy, and Even Harmonic Energy.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.14
The total energy of each type is computed.
Total Fundamental Energy = Total Energy from

0.5 x Fund - 1.5 x Fund
Even Harmonic Energy = Total Energy from

+3.5 x Fund - 4.5 x Fund
Etc..
Odd Harmonic Energy = Total Energy from

+4.5 x Fund - 5.5 x Fund Etc..
The % Odd Harmonic Distortion, % Even Harmonic Distortion and %THD

are calculated from these summations.
2 2
ODD + EVEN
% THD =
Fund
ODD
% ODD =
Fund
EVEN
% EVEN =
Fund
Analyzing the %THD Graphs
Note: Please refer to the PELCOVCE.HLP file on Monitoring Distortion, for

more information on Total and Harmonic Distortion. The Harmonic
Distortion and %THD show detail Energy Analysis. The amount and
character of the energy depend on soil condition, vibrator type, vibrator
condition, vibrator output level, and sweep parameters. Because of the
large effect soil condition has on Harmonic Distortion, comparison from
different areas is extremely difficult. %THD of 60-80% may be excellent
performance on one prospect, while %THD readings of 20% may represent
poor performance in another prospect. For this reason only vibrators on
the same ground position should be compared. Direct comparison of
vibrators shaking on the same ground with the same sweep can be used to
analyze vibrator condition.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.15
Geophysical Analysis of %THD
To analyze effect of %THD on the seismic data, the cross-correlation

envelope graph should be used. With an upsweep, the cross-correlation
noise will appear in the negative time. The harmonic ghosting will
appear on the record before or after a strong reflection. A -40 dB
cross-correlation noise at -2.0 seconds means that a secondary event will
be seen on the seismic record 2.0 seconds early.
Vibrator Distortion Measurements
Vibrator distortion measurements depend on two important variables; the

computer algorithm, and the analog antialias filter.
There are two common types of distortion measurements used in Vibrator

Analysis, one is Harmonic Distortion, and the other is Total Distortion.
Harmonic Distortion
Harmonic Distortion is nonlinear distortion characterized by the

generation of harmonics of an input frequency. The percent harmonic
distortion is a measure of fidelity; if Ef is the rms voltage of the
fundamental and En is the rms voltage of the nth harmonic, the percent
total harmonic distortion is:
%THD = 100 ( E 2n )1/2 / E f
Total Distortion
Total Distortion includes all signal components produced during the

vibration which are not included in the vibrator reference signal. This
distortion includes not only harmonics but also any noise on the vibrator
or noise which may not be an even multiple of the fundamental frequency.
The total distortion is usually greater than the harmonic distortion. If
ET is the total rms voltage of the total energy and Ef is the rms voltage
of the fundamental, the percent total distortion is:
%TD = 100 ( ( ET - E f )2 )1/2 / E f
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.16
Analog Filter
The analog filter used before the signal is converted to digital can
greatly reduce the distortion calculations. The Advance II ver 5, the
VCIU2, and the Notebook VCA all use different analog filters. The
greatest difference occurs above 250 Hz. If there is large amounts of
noise above 250Hz, the VCIU2 would show less distortion than the VCA or
the Advance II systems. The difference in the filter response has been
summarized in the following table.
System 200Hz 400Hz 800Hz

VCIU2 -2.2dB -26dB -61dB
VCA 0dB -0.12dB -32dB
AdvII -1.2dB -5.5dB -25dB
Before October 1993, the Pelton SERQC and FMETER programs used an
algorithm which computed Harmonic Distortion. After 1993, all of the
Pelton programs were changed to compute Total Distortion. The change
from harmonic distortion to total distortion typically increased the
amplitude of the distortion by a factor of two. The Advance II vibrator
electronics measures and computes the total distortion in the time
domain, while the FM16, SQC16, and VibQC programs compute the total
distortion in the frequency domain.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.17
Old SERQC Algorithm
In the SERQC and FMETER programs prior to October 1993 the %THD plots
were computed using only the harmonic energy. The computation is done in
the frequency domain.
The first step in the process is to apply time windows to the time
domain Vibrator Output Signal.
A Hamming Taper is applied to this time window. If the time window is

0.5 seconds, then a 0.25 hamming taper is applied to the first and the
last of this time window.
The Amplitude Spectrum is then computed.
The largest single point is found. This point is considered the

fundamental frequency.
The amplitude of this discrete point is then used to compute the

fundamental energy.
The discrete point at 2 times the fundamental frequency is used to

compute the energy of the second harmonic.
The point at n times the fundamental frequency is used to compute the

energy of the nth harmonic.
The percent harmonic distortion equation is then used to compute the

%THD for this time window.
Ef is the rms voltage of the fundamental
En is the rms voltage of the nth harmonic
%THD = 100 ( E 2n )1/2 / E f
The next overlapping time window is then analyzed. If 0.5 second windows
are being used, then the first time window is from 0 to 0.5 seconds, the
second time window is from 0.25 to 0.75, the third is from 0.5 to 1.0
seconds, etc.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.18
Current SERQC Algorithm
In the SQC16, FM16, and VibQC programs after 1993 the %THD plots were
computed using total distortion energy but the plots are mislabeled %THD.
The computation is done in the frequency domain.
The first step in the process is to apply time windows to the time
domain Vibrator Output Signal.
A Hamming Taper is Applied to this time window. If the time window is
0.5 seconds, then a 0.25 hamming taper is applied to the first and the
last of this time window.
The Amplitude Spectrum is then computed.
The largest single point is found. This point is considered the
fundamental frequency.
The amplitude of all of the points from 0.5 * fundamental frequency to
1.5 * fundamental frequency are used to compute the fundamental
energy. All values lower than -40dB are ignored.
2.5 * fundamental frequency are used to compute the second harmonic
3.5 * fundamental frequency are used to compute the third harmonic
The amplitude of all of the points from (n-0.5) * fundamental
frequency to (n+0.5) * fundamental frequency are used to compute the
nth harmonic energy. All values lower than -40dB are ignored.
The following total distortion equation is then used to compute the
%TD for this time window.
%TD = 100( ( E 22 + E 32 + E 2n ...) )1/2 / E f
This is the same equation used to compute harmonic distortion. But since
the energy includes all frequencies, this is really total distortion.
The plots are mislabeled in the software programs as %THD.
The next overlapping time window is then analyzed. If 0.5 second windows
are being used, then the first time window is from 0 to 0.5 seconds, the
second time window is from 0.25 to 0.75, the third is from 0.5 to 1.0
seconds, etc.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.19
PSS Algorithm
The Advance II ver 5E and later vibrator electronics compute total
distortion in the time domain. The vibrator electronics use the
instantaneous values computed for phase and fundamental force to compute
the desired value of the fundamental vibrator output signal. If there
are problems with the phase locking or amplitude control, then there will
also be problems with the values computed for total distortion. The
Fundamental Vibrator Output and the Raw Vibrator Output are compared
every 0.5 mSec, and the %Total Distortion is computed every 0.5 seconds.
The first step is to obtain the fundamental amplitude and phase error
of the vibrator output signal.
From the phase and fundamental values, a synthetic vibout signal is
computed which has only fundamental energy.
The actual value of the vibout signal and the synthetic signal are
compared. The difference of these two signals is considered
distortion.
The total distortion is computed every 0.5 seconds from the sum of the
squares of these variables.
VOI - Current Vibrator Output
%TD = 100( ( V FI - V OI )2 /( V FI )2 )1/2
VFI - Current Synthetic Vibrator Output (Fundamental Only)

VibQC Triggering Options
VibQC, like FM16 and SQC16, can be set up to trigger when the Reference
Sweep reaches a given voltage level. In this mode the sweep parameters
will change when the triggering occurs. In addition, the accuracy of the
triggering depends on the sample rate selected. If 1 millisecond
sampling is selected then the accuracy of the triggering is +/-1
millisecond. For more accurate triggering, the Time Break signal from
the Version 6 ESG or the Version 6 Vibrator Electronics may be used.
Time Break Triggering
Connect the time break signal to channel 0 of the Notebook VCA system.
Select trigger channel 0 in the VibQC parameter selection. When Channel
0 is selected for triggering in the VCA system, only channel 0 is sampled
until the trigger is detected. This allows the trigger accuracy to be
about 30 microseconds. If Negative Trigger Delay is selected then the
timing accuracy depends on the sample rate.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.20
ESG Time Break
The ESG time break signal can be configured for different polarity and
lengths. These selections are done by jumpers on the Encode Interface
Card. The standard Configuration is a positive pulse for about 10
milliseconds. To use this for triggering, select trigger channel 0,
positive trigger edge, trigger level=2.5 volts, and a trigger delay=0 in
the VibQC parameter selections.
Vibrator Time Break
The Advance II Vibrator Electronics Time Break is a high(5 volt) going

low(0 volt) pulse. To use this signal for triggering connect the Time
Break from the Test Point Selector Box to channel 0 of the Notebook VCA
system. Note: Time Break is not available on the Mini Controller Plus
Test Point Selector system. Select trigger channel 0, negative edge
triggering, trigger level=2.5 volts, and a trigger delay=0 in the VibQC
parameter selections.
Notebook VCA Voltage Settings:

Sometimes precise voltage readings at different points in the Force Meter
System are desired. To graph voltage, select volts on the graph set-up
menu, and select the following weights.
NOTEBOOK VCA Settings: (CCC) FM16 Bit Mode
Raw Accelerometer Voltages (1.2 volts maximum input)
25mV/g - sensitivity - software selection
Reaction Mass Weight - 256
Baseplate Weight - 256
Hold-down Weight - 52428
10mV/g - sensitivity - software selection
A/D Voltage - CCC - 16 Bit Mode (10 volts maximum input)
Sensitivity = 25mV/g
Sensitivity = 10mV/g
Reaction Mass - 512
Hold-down Weight -34635
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.21
Theory of Operation
Ground force (Fg) is equal to the vector sum of the reaction mass force
(FRM) and the baseplate force (FBP). Positive voltage occurs with
acceleration in the upward direction.
FRM + FBP = Fg
Force (F) = Mass (M) x Acceleration (A)
Therefore: (MRM x ARM) + (MBP x ABP) = +Fg
Both the Reaction Mass (MRM) and the Baseplate Mass (MBP), are known and
are parameter entries in the VIBQC program. Reaction Mass acceleration
(ARM) and Baseplate acceleration (ABP), are measured using the VCIU2/FM
accelerometers which are mounted on the Vibrator's Reaction Mass and
Baseplate. The Notebook VCA filters the unwanted high frequency noise
from the accelerometer signals using a linear phase high cut filter.
The VIBQC program amplifies the accelerometer signals according to the

Reaction Mass weight and Baseplate weight parameters entered into the
program. The program will sum these two signals together to produce the
Ground Force signal. The Ground Force signal is then scaled according to
the Hold-down weight parameter entry. The Ground Force will be
represented in percentage of Hold-down Weight where 5.12 volts is 100% of
Hold-down Weight.
The raw acceleration (unweighted) signals are acquired and stored to

disk. The Reaction Mass weight, Baseplate weight, and Hold-down weight
may be changed at any time during the program execution. When the
weights are changed, the Reaction Mass Force, Baseplate Force, and Ground
Force Signals will automatically be rescaled.
09Oct01
VIBQC Page 7.8.22
Definitions: (Terms used in the FM16 program.)
Polarity - Positive polarity is defined as upward acceleration results in

a positive number.
Pilot Signal - The reference sweep signal used as correlation operator.
Mass - That characteristic of a body that gives it WEIGHT in the presence

of a gravity field.
Baseplate Mass - The value of the total MASS of the baseplate pad, any
structure rigidly attached to it, and half the mass of any flexible
members (airbags) or linkages (radius rods) attached to it.
Reaction Mass - The member of a shaker assembly against which the

hydraulic circuit pushes in one direction as it pushes against the
baseplate and stilt structure in the other. The value of the MASS of the
Reaction-Mass includes that of all assemblies rigidly attached to it
(e.g. the servo-valve) and half that of all flexible members (e.g.
hydraulic hoses) attached to it.
Ground Force - The contact force between the baseplate and the earth,
usually considered being the dynamic alternating component of total
ground force.
For a p-wave vibrator in operating but quiescent attitude, the GROUND

FORCE is a positive compressive bias created by the HOLDDOWN FORCE.
In vibrating mode, the oscillating driven GROUND FORCE alternates about

the bias to result in alternately more (positive) and less (negative)
compressive force than the bias.
The Ground Force is being approximated in the FM16 program to be equal to

Fg = MRM ARM + MBP ABP.
Holddown Force - The downward force registered by a scale placed beneath

the baseplate while the vehicle is jacked up in operation attitude.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.1
GPSMAP (DOS) PROGRAM
Requirements
. MS-DOS computer preferably '286' or above
. 512k of conventional memory
. VGA adapter preferably color
. Math co-processor
. Hard Disk drive and a floppy drive
. Pelton Hardware Key
. Serial Port RS 232
. Parallel Port
Installing GPSMAP
GPSMAP.EXE is the only file needed, but 3 more files (CURRVIBS, CURRICNS,
and GMAP.CFG) will be generated in the current DOS default directory when
GPSMAP requires a hardware key attached to the parallel port. The GPS
Hardware Key allows the operator access to serial port data and SEG P1
file data. The Hardware Key may not operate when other software driver
packages are installed for the same parallel port (example: a Bernoulli
Box is connected to the same parallel port).
It is best to reserve a special directory that is named GPS and run

GPSMAP from there.
Example of installing GPSMAP on the C drive in the GPS directory:
type C:\ then press [Enter] (set Current DOS drive to C)

type MD GPS then press [Enter] (makes the directory)
type CD GPS then press [Enter] (move to new GPS directory)
insert GPSMAP diskette in drive A
Type COPY A:GPSMAP.EXE (install program)
Running GPSMAP
Type GPSMAP then press [Enter].
The program starts executing and looks for the configuration files which
are not present the first time. (Built in default values are used.)
An empty Sinusoidal Projection Map of the Earth appears on the screen and
in the center a window showing the version level of the GPSMAP program.
Pressing [Enter] makes the window disappear.

See GPSMAP OPERATION below.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.2
Exiting GPSMAP
Press [Esc] or [Q]uit or select Exit option of the File Window. The
program then asks if you really want to quit. Press [Y].
Press Control Q [Ctrl][Q] if you choose not to save new changes in

settings to the configuration file.
When exiting for the first time 3 files are automatically generated:
- GPSMAP.CFG : General configuration file Drive, Path, Extension for
SEG P1 files, Time Zone, Scale, Mid Screen Lat, Mid Screen Long,
Trace On/Off, Re-Center Vib#, Parallels/Meridians, VPnumbers,
Browse, Control Port, Rx Baud Rate, Tx Baud Rate, Remote Receiver,
Demo, Cursor Lat, Cursor Long, Cursor Jump, Current Icons and
Colors, Icon (A-Z) and pointer, etc.
- CURRVIBS for Vibrator Positions in Memory and Vib pointers.
- CURRICNS for Icons in memory and current Icon pointer.
These 3 files are automatically updated when exiting.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.3
GPSMAP OPERATION
General
After Starting GPSMAP as indicated previously, Press [Alt]. This makes

the Menu appear at the top of the screen:
==============================================================
| File Screen Icons Config AdvEnt Help |
==============================================================
Pressing [F] will open the File window: Save/Load File & Clear memory
[S] ............. Screen ....: Screen related selections

[I] ............. Icons ....: Current Icons select, also [F2]
[C] ............. Config ....: Configuration selections
[A] ............. AdvEnt ....: Advanced Entries
[H] for Help will display a quick Help window.
It isn't necessary to hold the [Alt] key while pressing one of the above
keys, if [Alt] is held the Menu will stay without being active when a
window is open. Pressing the [TAB] key in GPSMAP displays the menus one
by one.
In each window, options and available keystroke commands are shown on the
bottom line. Usually the Arrow Up & Arrow Down keys are used to move to
the field of interest, the field can be modified sometimes by entering
data, and other times by selecting data with the arrow <- -> keys.
[Enter] Closes the current window and refreshes the screen.
[Esc] Exits the current window or the program if no window is open.
[Q] Allows to quit just like [Esc] if no window is open.
Display
The display is a standard VGA 640 x 480 pixels. The Vibrators are
displayed by their Vibrator Number. Vibrator Group B, Vibrators 0-15 are
displayed as Vibrators 16-31. Pressing "?" places a distance scale
markers on the display. The Scale bar represents the distance from the
middle of the display to the outer scale circle.
Moving the Cursor
Cursor Latitude & Longitude always appears in Red on the right side of
the screen when the cursor is being moved.
Pressing [Enter] re-centers the Screen on the cursor.
The Cursor is moved by pressing one of the 4 arrow keys.
To move faster press [Ctrl] and the Arrow key.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.4
Pressing [Ctrl][C] toggles the cursor On/Off. When turning the cursor
back on with [Ctrl][C], the latitude and longitude will appear to the
middle right of the screen.
Use the mouse or trackball to move the cursor.
Each Arrow key press advances the cursor by a certain amount. The
current amount is set using keys 1-9 as follows:
'1' 1 pixel
'2' 2 pixel
'3' 4 pixel
'4' 8 pixel
'5' 16 pixels
'6' 32 pixels
'7' 64 pixels
'8' 128 pixels
'9' 256 pixels
or pressing [J] for Cursor Jump Value entry in Lat/Long [DMM.dddd']
format. F3 or right mouse button zooms in and F4 or middle mouse button
zooms out the display.
Re-Centering the Screen

There are several ways the screen can be re-centered:
- Choosing a center position with the Mid Latitude & Mid Longitude
entries (AdvEnt Window). Move the cursor first so if Vibs are
loaded one will not force re-centering to it self.
- Moving the cursor until it is at the wanted location then pressing
[Enter] or left mouse button. If a Vib is received and Re-
Centering on that Vib or on Last Vib is selected (SCREEN Window),
the Vib will force re-centering to itself.
- Setting the Re-centering on entry (SCREEN Window) to the number of
the Vib you are going to receive or to Alw Last will force to re-
center on that Vib if it is out of the screen range (on the next
receive if the cursor was moved and you didn't press [Enter] from
the Re-centering on field of the SCREEN Window).
- Press [F7] and display re-centers on the last Vibrator shown. Keep
pressing [F7] and display re-centers on the next vibrator in the
last vibrator group.
- Press [F8] and display re-centers on the last Support Vehicle
shown. Keep pressing [F8] and display re-centers on the first
Support Vehicle shown (A) to the last Support Vehicle shown (X).
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.5
File Menu
File Menu Press [Alt][F] or [F]
Vibrator files (*.Vib)
Path [C:\gps\ ]
Enter the Drive and Path to the Vibrator files in the Pelton Format.
Open MMDDhhmm.vib
Select the file to be loaded in Vibrator Memory.
Save 12011341.vib
Type in a name to save the current Vibrator data to disk. Or, use the
default Month, Day, Hour and minute for the filename.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.6
Icon files (*.ICN)
Path [C:\WVSIG32\ ]
Enter the Drive and Path to the Icon files in the Pelton Format.
Open MMDDhhmm.icn
Select the file to be loaded in Icon Memory.
Save 12011341.icn
Type in a name to save the current Icon data to disk. Or, use the
SEG P1 files (*.SP1)

Enter the extension for the SEG P1 files.
Path [C:\WVSIG32\ ]
Enter the Drive and Path to the SEG P1 file.
Open MMDDhhmm.SP1
Select the SEG P1 file for loading in Memory.
Save A 12011341.SP1
Type in a name to save the current Icon data to disk. Or, use the
Icon A
Select the Icon to Open or Save.
Bit Map Files (*.BMP)
Bit Map Image OFF [Enter]

Select if to have BMP image ON or OFF.
Path [C:\maps\ ]
Enter the Drive and Path to the BMP files.
Open .BMP
Select the BMP file to be opened.
Color n
Select the color of the 2-bit BMP file.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.7
DXF vector files (*.DXF)
Path [C:\maps\ ]
Enter the Drive and Path to the DXF and/or DCN files.
Open xxxxx.dxf
Select the DXF file to load and tag.
Open MMDDhhmm.dcn
Select the DCN file to load.
Save 12011341.dcn
Type in a filename to save the current DXF icons (DCN). Or, use the
Clear DCN [ENTER]

Clear the DCN icons from icon memory.
Record file (*.SP1)
Recording OffVibSupAll
This is the Autosaving of Vibrator data.
OFF No Real-time recording of data.
Vib Real-time recording of Vibrator data.
Sup Real-time recording of Support Vehicle data.
All Real-time recording of Vibrator and Support Vehicle data.
Data to Point ID Point_Id/Near Flag

This entry determines which data is sent to the SEG P1 file.
NonDiff to SEG P1 On/Off

On Non-Differential data can go to the SEG P1 file.
Off Non-Differential data can not go to the SEG P1 file.
Elevation format ?????

Not supported
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.8
Log to Log.dat Nothing
PSS, RTI, Correlation and GPS data can be sent to one binary file.
Nothing No data saved.

GPS GPS data saved.
PSS PSS data saved.
GPS + PSS GPS and PSS data saved.
Correla Correlation data saved.
Cor + GPS Correlation and GPS data saved.
Cor + PSS Correlation and PSS data saved.
Cor + G + P Correlation, GPS and PSS data saved.
Rec_INF Recorder Information data saved.
Rec + GPS Recorder Information and GPS data saved.
Rec + PSS Recorder Information and PSS data saved.
Rec + G + P Recorder Information, GPS and PSS data saved.
Rec + Cor Recorder Information and Correlation data saved.
Rec + G + C Recorder Information, GPS and Correlation data saved.
Rec + P + C Recorder Information, PSS and Correlation data saved.
All Recorder Information, PSS, Correlation and GPS data saved.
Clear Vibs
Used to clear vibrators from memory. Normally cleared at start of day.
Press [ENTER]
Clear Vibs Memory (Y/N)?
Y - Clears all the Vibrator positions in Vibrator Memory
N - Returns without clearing any Vibrator positions
Clear Icons
Used to clear source and receiver flags.
Press [ENTER]
Clear All/Icn/Dcn/Sel/No?
All - Clears all the standard Icons and DXF Icons in Icon memory.
Icn - Clears all the standard Icons in Icon memory.
Dcn - Clears all the DXF Icons in Icon memory.
Sel - Clears only the selected Icon Type.
No - Returns without clearing any Icons.
Exit Map ???

Exit the program and see Version number of GPSMap.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.9
SCREEN Menu Press [Alt] [S] or [S]
Recentering on (VSLAN)
This entry has many selections. The operator can select which vibrator
to re-center the display (0-63). Always Last (Alwys) keeps the last
position obtained in the center. Last Position (Last) re-centers on the
last position if it is off the display. None to not re-center on any
vibrator. The operator can select which support vehicle position to re-
center the display (A-Z, a-n). If the Support has a name, it is
displayed between re-center on and the Sup?. Normally set to Last
Position (Last)
Screen Menu
V Goes to Vibrator
S Goes to Support
L Last
A Always Last
N None
Browsing
When ON, the operator can use the +, -, Ctrl-PgUp, and Ctrl-PgDn keys to
observe the vibrator data visually on the display. When in the Report
Window [R] the PgUp and PgDn keys can be used to make bigger jumps in the
Vibrator data. Turn Browsing OFF when acquiring new data.
Vib Trace
This selection turns ON and OFF a bread crumb trail of the previous
vibrator and support vehicle positions.
Text Visibility
On - Turns ON the Text Icons all the time.
Off - Turns OFF the Text Icons all the time.
Aut - Turns ON the Text Icons only when the scale level is less than
the Auto VP# @Scale entry in the ADVANCED ENTRIES menu.
Normally set to Auto.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.10
Flag # Direction
This feature decides which side of the Text Icon to place the text.
N-North, S-South, E-East, W-West.
Parallel/Meridian
Select Parallel and/or Meridian lines ON or OFF.
OFF - Parallel and Meridian Lines OFF
Lat - Latitude lines ON only
Lon - Longitude lines ON only
LL - Latitude and Longitude lines ON only
LLN - Latitude and Longitude lines ON with Number notation
Dist from (VSFLAN)
The distances feature has many selections. The selections are distances
from the nearest Flag icons to Vibrator 0 - 63, Support Vehicles (A-Z, a-
n), 1st, Last, AvgV, and Off. This entry is used to determine the point
of effect () used for the distances display.
Distance From
V Vibrator
S Support
F First
L - Last
A Always Last
N None
Figure 1. displays the Distances feature turned on with the Offset Line
feature. The Distances is set to Avg and the Offset Line is set to Mid.
The bottom of the display is the distance from the point of effect () to
the two closest source flag icons and the line that connects the two
closet icons. When the Offset Line feature is turned off the operator
can not see the imaginary line that connects the two flag icons.
This example shows that the point of effect () is 15 meters from flag
1266 1215, 36 meters from flag 1267 1215, and 3.4 meters from the
imaginary line connecting the two flag icons. If the Distances selection
is set to V#00 the point of effect () would be on top of Vibrator Number
0. If 1st is selected the point of effect () would be on top of the
first vibrator, Vibrator Number 0. If Last is selected the point of
effect () would be on top of the last vibrator, Vibrator Number 1. The
Avg selection places the point of effect () in the average position of
all the vibrators received for that sweep. Normally set to Avg.
If the point of effect is farther away than the Maximum Vib offset entry
(Adv Entries Menu), the message "Error! Max Offset reached," will be
displayed. See Recorder Interface (RTI) section.
Scale
The scale from the middle of the display to the side. This is user
adjustable.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.11
Figure 1 Distances and Offset Line
Offset Line
The Offset Line draws a line between two Flag Icons and draws a
perpendicular line. The length is determined by the Maximum Vib Offset
entry in the Advanced Entries menu. The Offset line is determined by the
Offset Line entry and the point of effect. The point of effect is
determined by the Distances entry.
On - A line is drawn connecting the Flag Icons that the point of
effect () is between. The perpendicular line is placed on the
Flag Icon closest to the point of effect().
Off - The Offset Line is turned OFF.
Mid - A line is drawn connecting the Flag Icons that the point of
effect () is between. The perpendicular line is placed in the
middle of the previous line (see Figure 1).
Normally set to OFF.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.12
Clear Icons
Press [ENTER]
Clear Vibs
Press [ENTER]
New Position Redraw

Enables or disables screen redraw.
on - Will refresh and redraw the screen every time a new position is
received.
off - When a new position is received then the new position is added
to the screen, without redrawing the entire screen.
Support on [ ^W]
Selects which support vehicle(s) to show when control W is pressed.
Frame On/Off
Selects Outside Frame on the screen.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.13
ICON MENU PRESS [ALT][I] OR [I]
The Icons in GPSMAP are used as an overlay. The Icon letters represent
buffers than can represent many Icon definitions from Line Segments to
source flags.
ICON A A-Z, a-f

To select an Icon, type the letter identifying the Icon. Use the left
and right arrow keys to change the Icon definition for the current Icon
buffer.
COLOR
Use the left and right arrow keys to change the current Icon Color.
RADIUS
When using the circle and circle field definitions, these Icons have a
user specified radius.
Note: With these Icons, circles can be placed around the flag Icons with
the radius equal to an error condition. The shot point file would be
loaded twice, once for flags and again for the circles.
NAME
The individual Icon buffers can be named or commented. This allows to
write a comment describing what is in the Icon buffer.
CLEAR ICONS
Press [ENTER]
CLEAR VIBS
Press [ENTER]
QUICK A
TEXT
This feature is not currently operational.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.14
FLAG/GEO FMT [YYYYXXXX] (Y/X/.)
The flag and geophone Icon text can be user formatted. This feature
gives the user the option to change the amount of digits in the source
and receiver numbers.
EX: Flag Number in SEG-P1 file is 12345678.

Flag/Geo fmt is yyyyxxxx
Flag text is displayed as 1234
5678
If Flag/Geo fmt is yyxxx
Flag text is displayed as 45
678
"ICN" ICONS USED
The data represents each Icon buffer, the definition, and the amount of
Icons in the buffer. Pressing CTRL-M displays the DXF Icon buffers.
ENTERING ICONS (Vps)
There are several types of Icons that can be used:
- Recorder (Dog House)
- VP
- Geophone
- Segment
- Text
- Etc...
Normally all source and receiver flags are loaded from a SEG-P1 file.
Individual icons may be added.
To place an Icon in the Map, select the current Manual Icon type & color
- Press [Alt] [I] or [I] for the Icon Window
- Using Arrow Up & Arrow Down move the cursor to the Icon field
- Press Letter (A-Z, a-f) to select the Icon
- Using <- -> select definition of the Icon (text, road, etc...)
- Using Arrow Up & Arrow Down move to the Color
- Using <- -> select the Color
- The value to the right side of each letter represents the number of
Icons that currently exist in memory.
- Press [Enter]
- Now each time you press [Ins] the selected Icon is placed at the
current Cursor Location. (VPs & Segments are special cases) There
is nothing special about the Dog House and the Dot Icons, you can
place one where ever you want.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.15
Vps
The VP (flag) Icon [Ins]ertion leads to a special VP Entry window. An X

and a Y numbers can be entered for 3D flag icons and an X number for 2D
flag icons. If you select a VP Qty greater than 1 then you will have to
enter the position in terms of Lat & Long of the last VP and an X
increment value.
When you finally press [Enter] the Selected number of VPs will be
generated from Cursor position to Last VP position automatically assuming
a Linear increase/decrease in Lat & Long. For short distances of 1
kilometer or so the VPs will be in an almost straight line. To generate
longer VP lines move the Cursor to the next position and generate a new
series.
Line Segments
Drawing a Segment, the Segment Icon must be the Current Icon.
Pressing [Ins] for the first time places a pixel at the Cursor location.
Moving the Cursor again and pressing [Ins] again places a line segment of
the selected color between the 2 points. It is possible to repeat this
operation many times to draw contours or a real Map.
At the end point of the last line segment, the [End] key must be pressed
so a new line will not be connected to the last insert location.
Text
The Text Icon [Ins]ertion leads to a special Text Entry window. Text up
to 9 characters may be entered. The text will be seen whenever the VP
numbers are shown on the display.
Delete or End Icons
Move cursor close to icon to be deleted. Press F3 to zoom in the

display.
Press [Del], the ICON EDITING window will be displayed. The Icons within
3 pixels will be listed up to 6. The last two entries will be the last
Icon entered and the last line segment entered.
Select the Icon to delete and press [Del]. A 'R' appears in the lower
right of the Icon Editing window. Press [R] and the last deleted Icon
will re-appear. The line segment Icon uses Start and End markers to
decide if to draw line segments between the line segment Icons. If a
line segment Icon has a start marker ([), then GPSMAP draws a line
segment between this Icon and the next line segment Icon. If a line
segment Icon has an End marker (]), then GPSMAP does not draw a line
segment between this Icon and the next line segment Icon.
Press [ENTER] or [ESC] to exit window.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.16
Saving Icons (VPs)
- Compact Pelton format:

Press [Alt] [F] or [F] for the File Window
Select Drive and Path (ending \ must be entered)
Example: Drive [C:]
Path [\Pelton\GPS\ ]
Move Cursor to the Save Icons field
Accept the filename in the field or Type you own filename
Press [Enter]
This saves the file under the name listed on that field
The filename that was listed is the computer date and time with
the .ICN extension:
Example: 02041700.ICN meaning Feb 4th at 17:00 & Icon file.
- SEG P1 format:
Select Drive, Path (same as above), and SEG file Extension
Move Cursor to the SEG Icon field
Select the Icon to save with the <- -> keys
The Save field displays the number of Icon locations for each
Icon letter
Example: Save 00843 G 02041700 means that IconG contains
843 Icon points and the filename is the computer date
and time.
Accept the filename or Type your own filename
Press [Enter]
This saves the file under the File Name listed on that field with
the selected Extension.
Loading Icons (VPs)

Select Drive and Path (Same as above)
Move Cursor to the Load Icons field
Using <- -> select the File to be loaded
Press [Enter]
- SEG P1 format:
Select Drive, Path (Same as above), and SEG file Extension
Select the Icon letter that will represent the SEG file on the
map.
Move Cursor to the Load field
Using <- -> select the File to be loaded.
Press [Enter]
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.17
CONFIGURATION MENU PRESS [Alt][C] or [C]
Port PssNav-RTI Com 1:

(A)-Selects the serial port that will be connected to the Encode Sweep
Generator. This port will receive Post Sweep Service, RTI messages and
Position requests.
CfgHdr Com 2:
(B)-Selects the serial port that will be connected to the Recording
System. This port will receive the Configurable header information from
the Recording System.
Support Com 1:
(C)-Selects the serial port that will be connected to the Encode Sweep
Generator or the Remote GPS Monitor (Support Vehicle module in Remote GPS
Monitor Mode). The Support Port will need to match either port A or B.
If the Support Port matches the CfgHdr Port, set-up the Baud Rate and
Format for the support in the CfgHdr entry in the Advanced Entries Menu.
If using a serial mouse, place the mouse on another serial port then the
Ctrl Port.
Mode - EsgCIC/EsgCCC/Navig2/Navig1
EsgCIC must be selected when using the CIC module in the Encode Sweep
Generator. EsgCCC must be selected when using the CCC module in the
Encode Sweep Generator.
When in EsgCIC or EsgCCC modes another mode Vib Averaging is available.
Navig2 is used when the computer is connected directly to a GPS receiver.
In this mode position is continuously received and plotted to the screen,
but is only stored when [SpaceBar] is pressed or if the 'Sto Nav
every(0=no) xxxxxp' entry of the AdvEnt Window is non zero, automatically
every xxxxx positions. When leaving the Configuration window the
[SpaceBar] must be pressed to initiate the Navig2 mode. To stop
gathering data press, [SpaceBar]. To stop gathering data and place an
End to a road or line segment, press [SpaceBar]. To restart collecting
data, press [SpaceBar].
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.18
Navig1 is used when the computer is connected directly to a GPS receiver.
GPSMAP will continuously simulate receiving PSS data from Vib #0 using
the position data. A crosshair will appear on the map to show the
position of the receiver. The position is continuously received and
plotted to the screen (with a crosshair Icon), but is only stored when
[SpaceBar] is pressed or if the 'Sto Nav every(0=no) xxxxxp' entry of the
AdvEnt Window is non zero, automatically every xxxxx positions. To start
receiving position data press [SpaceBar]. To stop receiving position
data press [SpaceBar].
When using Navig2, Navig1, or Areas mode, the Receiver Type must
correspond to the connected GPS receiver. If the connected GPS receiver
can transmit the NMEA Sentence, $GPGGA, use Trimble for the Receiver
Type.
GPS I/F Ctrl O1
This entry controls the type of Vib averaging done in the Vibrators GPS
Interface Module. Transmits over the ESG radio Link to the VCE the type
of position required for Post Sweep Service (PSS).
L - Last best position obtained during the sweep
M - Middle position obtained during the sweep
A - Average position obtained during the sweep
Normally set to M (Mid).
This feature transmits the selected PSS vibrator position mode to the
Pelton GPS Interface Module in the vibrator. Three modes are available.
The GPS Interface Module receives and analyzes all positions received
during the sweep. The data is first evaluated for the best DOP
positions. Only the positions with the lowest DOP are used and all other
positions are ignored. Also, if some positions are non-differential and
some are differential, the non-differential data is ignored. The choices
are:
Last - The last good position that was received during the sweep is sent
back for GPS Post Sweep Service.
Mid - The remaining position data is evaluated. The center position is
used the other positions are ignored.
Avg - The remaining position data is averaged and the average value is
used.
Select one of the options and Press [Enter]. The message is sent through
the ESG to the GPS Interface Module. When the vibrator data is received
the algorithm selected is displayed in the Report Window at the right (L-
Last, A-Average, M-Mid) and stored in the Pelton compressed Vibrator
format. The algorithm selected is not stored in the SEG-P1 file. If an
original GPS Interface Module is used with the new program (GPSMAP 2.00
or later) the data displays that the Last algorithm is used.
The selection of the O1 can be made via software or hardware. If the two
switches on the GPS Interface Module are "OFF", then the selection is
made via software. If these two switches are "ON", then the hardware
selects the Mid algorithm at power up or reset.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.19
O2 OnOff, GPGGA, None
This entry determines what ASCII data comes out the GPS interface
computer port.
OnOff ASCII ON when sweep starts and

ASCII OFF when sweep ends.
GPGGA ASCII GPGGA string of the postion for the sweep.
None No ASCII data sent out.
I2 N+GSA,Norml
This entry determines if the GPS Interface should interpret the $GPGSA
NEMA string for the PDOP and VDOP.
N + GSA Read $GPGSA string if available, along with $GPGGA

string.
Norml Read only $GPGGA string.
Receiver Type GGA_4800, GGA_9600, SerNR106
This entry selects the type of $GPGGA message the GPS Interface will
read. Also Which $GPGGA message GPSMAP will use for the Navigating
modes.
GGA_4800 Trimble $GPGGA message at 4800 Baud.

GGA_9600 Trimble $GPGGA message at 9600 Baud.
SerNR106 Sercel NR106 $GPGGA message. The Sercel GPS receiver
handles the Quality number differently than any other GPS
receiver.
Sound
Select ON or OFF with the <- -> keys

Press [Enter] to accept the choice
This feature turns the alarms noises ON and OFF
Time Zone
This feature allows the operator to adjust the time displayed in the
Report window to the time zone the operator is working.
Example: UTC is 13:00 Time Zone is -0500 for Houston, Texas summertime
Report displayed time is 08:00.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.20
NAVIGATION
GPSMap is capable of receiving $GPGGA messages from a GPS receiver. The
position will be displayed at the bottom of the display. The position
will also be graphically displayed as a circle with a crosshair. GPSMap
can be used to Navigate to the different flags.
Change the Mode in the Configuration Menu to Navig1 and Receiver Type to
match the $GPGGA message going to the computer.
GO TO FLAG [G]
Number Enter the number of the flag to navigate towards.
Next The next flag in the list from Number.
Prev The previous flag in the list from Number.
Near The 5 nearest flags to crosshair or cursor.
From Vibs The operator can navigate from the crosshair (Vibs) or the
Cursor (Curs).
Varia [+000] (Magn-True)

Place in the compass variation to receive an accurate bearing.
Cancel
Leave Go To Flag menu.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.21
The screen will display a red circle from where you started, draw a green
line to the distination, and a green circle around the destination.
BRG = 003
Direction to take for destination.
RNG = 01415m
Distance to destination in meters.
CMG = 045
Course made good, direction from the starting point.
DMG = 00000m
Distance made good, distance from starting point in meters.
TRK = 000 VEL = 075KmH
TRK = Current direction you are going.
VEL = Current Velocity you are traveling.
The second line from the bottom line contains the time, DOP, Latitude,
Longitude, Altitude and satellites for the current data from the GPS
receiver.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.22
Send Cursor Position For Navigation [F2]
GPSMap is capable of sending the Cursor or nearest flag's position to the
Shot Pro Decoder. Place the cursor on the desired flag, press [F2]. The
Send Cursor Position for Navigation will emerge with the desired flag
number.
Flag Number - Flag number that will be sent to the Shot Pro. User can
change this number.
ID# - Use the left and right arrows to select Shot Pro ID. Select All to
send the data to all Shot Pro Decoders.
Send Position! - Press <Enter> on this selection to send the data over
the Radio.
Cancel - Leave this menu.
ESC - Leave this menu.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.23
Auto Saving Vibrator Data (Record Mode)
The Auto Saving feature is in the File menu [Alt] [F] or [F] and can be
accessed if the Pelton hardware key is installed.
Move Cursor to the Record field
Using <- -> select ON
Press [Enter]
Enter Drive, Path, and Filename on same line
Press [Enter]
As soon as the file name is entered a file with that name is opened and
16 lines of information are stored into it. From that moment on the GPS
PSS data received from the Vibrators on the 1st Serial Port(usually COM1)
is stored, until RECORD is turned Off. The vibrator data will be stored
in a SEG P1 format.
Only Valid Position Data goes to the file. The GPS receivers in the
Vibrators must be in the Navigation Mode and have valid positions.
When the 'NonDiff to SEG' entry is OFF (FILE Window), then only
Differential GPS data will be stored. This is particularly important if
the Reference station has been fooled by entering a non WGS84 reference
position to force the Vibrators to output the same non WGS84 coordinates.
In this case the offset between the 2 coordinate systems will show when
corrections aren't received by the remote GPS Receivers (Vibrators).
Also in the non Differential mode the accuracy drops to +/-100meters and
you might want to totally discard the data.
When RECORD is turned ON, the GPSMAP program uses the selection made in
the Recorder Interface selection to store recorder information (file #,
etc...) to the SEG-P1 file.
SEG P1 Format
With the Record ON, the SEG P1 file format is standard with the following
exceptions:
1 blank
2-9 8 digit File Number
10-17 Vibww-xx ww=vibrator # xx=2 LSB of EPID or Avxxxxyy xxxx=# of
positions yy=# of Sweeps
18-25 8 digit Point ID
RTI condition, file # is file # and Point ID is the decoded Flag number,
if a message is not received from the RTI for that sweep these fields are
left blank.
Second Port condition file # and point ID are decoded from second com
port in the above example, file # is file # and point ID is sweep number
in the pattern (i.e. for 8 sweeps per VP this is a number which goes from
1-8). These two fields will contain the last valid data received from
second com port.
The VP average can be stored when the Average Mode is turned ON. When in
the main display press Ctrl-A. The following menu appears.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.24
AVERAGE MENU [Ctrl]-[A]
Averaging - Off = no average

On = average saved to SEG-P1 file
ON - Count = The average is calculated and stored
after an entered amount of sweeps.
File# = The average is calculated and stored
when a new File number is received.
Normally set to File#
Partial Avg now [Ent] - The current positions are averaged and stored
to the SEG-P1 file.
Sweeps per V.P. - The amount of sweeps to receive before
calculating the position average in Count Mode.
Sweep Counter - Where the sweep count is currently in the VP
(Count Mode).
Clear Swp Cnter [Ent] - Clears the Sweep count to zero.
The File Number is automatically stored in every data line of the

RECORDING file. All SEG files hold explanations on the file format and
fields contained, in ASCII format.
When exiting GPSMAP, the file will be closed and data will be appended to
the file when GPSMAP is restarted. If the file is not present, GPSMAP
will give three options.
(R)eTry, (C)reate the file, or Turn (O)ff Record
When the Disk is full, the file will be closed, three options will be
offered.
(N)ew Disk (S)top Recording (F)ile Menu
New Disk - A new disk is inserted before pressing [N], then the current
filename will be used to create the new file on the new disk.
Stop recording - Recording is turned OFF.
File Menu - Recording is turned OFF and File Menu is on the screen. The
data is preserved if Recording is turned ON. The Drive,
Path, and Filename can be changed at this time.
When closing the file, Press [Alt][F] or [F] for the File Menu
Move Cursor to the Record field
Using <- -> select OFF
Press [Enter]
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.25
Saving Vibrator Data
Normally Vibrator data should be saved real time using the SEG-P1
format. This is done with the Record Mode.
Compact Pelton format:
Select Drive and Path if necessary
Move Cursor to the Save Vibs field
Accept the filename in the field or Type you own filename
Press [Enter]
This saves the file under the name listed on that field.
The filename that was listed is the computer date and time with
the .VIB extension:
Example: 02041700.VIB meaning Feb 4th at 17:00 & Vibrator
file.
SEG P1 format:
Select Drive, Path and SEG file Extension
Select the Icon with text of Currvibs
Move Cursor to the SEG Save field
Accept the filename or Type your own filename
Press [Enter]
This saves the file under the File Name listed on that field with the
selected Extension. The filename that was listed is the computer date
and time.
ADVANCED ENTRIES MENU PRESS[ALT][A] OR [A]
PSS-NAV-RTI RX Baud
TX Baud
The mode in the Configuration Menu determines the RX
and TX Baud rates. Do not change.
DEMO MODE Oper - Normal mode of operation
Dem1 - Demo Mode 1, the program will transmit the Vib
memory data out serial port B every time F12 is
pressed. The data will be in $GPGGA format at 4800
Baud.
Dem2 - Demo Mode 2, the program will transmit the Vib

memory data out serial port B every time F11 is
pressed. The data will be in the PSS format at 19200
Baud.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.26
RECORDER INTERFACE
The serial data that contains the file number is called a header. The
header format is defined by the Recorder Interface. The 'Recorder
Interface' Entry field allows many settings:
CfgHdr - allows operator to define Header information from the 2nd
Serial Port.
R.T.I. - accepts the Recording Truck Interface Module messages for
File Number.
OFF - GPSMAP does not look for File Number message.
CfgHdr
Access a header format selection by pressing [TAB] with the cursor on

CfgHdr in this field, or after changing the entry. The Recorder Interface
Window CfgHdr lets you define:
- The Header Baud Rate for the 2nd Serial Port (300-19200)
- The Serial Format (8N1, 8E1, 8O1, 7N2, 7E1, 7O1)
- The first 8 bytes of the header, an entry of 00 means don't care
- The total number of bytes in the header
- The number of digits that will be in the re-constructed File Number
- The position of the last byte with File Number data
- The number of digits that will be in the re-constructed Point ID
- The position of the last byte with Point Id data
- The type of data transmitted (ASCII, BCD or Hex)
ASCII Is the simplest case as there is one character per byte. If
the File Number starts at the 4th byte and is 4 digits, the
data will be at bytes 4, 5, 6 & 7, so the last byte entry
above should be 7.
BCD There are 2 characters or digits per byte (compressed BCD).
If the number of digits is Odd the data must be right
justified.
Example: 123 takes 2 bytes x1h 23h.

If the file number data starts at byte 5, we have cc oo xx
xx x1 23 and the last byte entry is 6.
HEX Uses the hex bytes to compute file number, when this number
exceeds 99999999, the 8 LSB digits are stored to the SEG P1
file.
- The Serial Time Out (up to 41ms)

The Time Out is made necessary by the following facts:
We want the serial receive to recover if the wrong number of bytes
was entered, or if the message was cut short.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.27
We want to re-synchronize by resetting during the gap between 2
messages when Card Code and Op Code are 00.
150 baud must not be used as the maximum Time Out (41ms) would be
too short.
Baud Rate Time Out Required
300 38ms
600 19ms
1200 10ms
2400 5ms
4800 3ms
9600 2ms
19200 1ms
Header every - 00 Swps - Set how often a Header should be received in

terms of sweeps. If this entry is non 00 and a Header is not received,
an error will be flagged until a new Header is received.
Configurable header on 2nd port using I/O System - The following example
stores up to 8 digits in the SEG P1 file, for file number, and the EP ID.
Baud Rate 9600 (must exit and restart program to initialize
com port)
Serial Format 8B-1S-NP
Start Hex 494f00000000000000000
Total Bytes 31
Data Type Hex
File # bytes 4*
end byte 30
Point ID bytes 4*
end byte 26
Serial Time Out 27
Header every 00
MAP235 uses the 4 hex bytes to compute file number, when this number
exceeds 99999999 then the 8 lsb digits are stored to the SEG P1 file.
* Previous versions of this program referred to the number of digits
after conversion, the entry should be 8, not 4, for # of digits in Map234
and earlier.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.28
R.T.I. (refer to Figure 2)
Press [TAB] to access the R.T.I. sub-menu. Currently operational for I/O
System One and Two in the Advance II Plus Mode.
============ RTI =============
| |
| Distances to Point Id |
| Received line Station: |
| +0000003500 0000001600 |
| abcdefghij klmnopqrst |
| |
| Program Point Id 00fg hpqr|
| Decoded Point Id 0003 5016|
| |
| From RTI message received |
|enter digits order to use |
|and program Point Id field |
| 0-9 a-j [Esc/Tab/Ent] |
===============================
Figure 2.
Distances to - Near Flags or Point Id

Near Flags - Selects two nearest flags to display distance from
vibrator after every sweep. Places File number and EpId Number into
the RECORD File.
Point Id - Decoded Point Id should match source flag number entered
into GPSMAP program. This flag will be used to compute distances to
current vibrator position. A circle with a radius of the Maximum Vib
Offset selection(Advanced Entries Menu) will be around the flag
corresponding to the Decoded Point ID. If the point of effect is out
of the circle, the message "Error! Max Offset reached" will be
displayed. Also, places File Number and decoded Point Id Number into
the RECORD file. Point Id is Normal Selection.
Line & Station received from RTI - represents the line and station
data received from the Recording System. The letters a - t under the
data are used to decode the Point Id.
Source Flag type - 2D or 3D.

This field is used if Distances to is Point Id.
2D - Use this if Source flags are 2D. A 6 digit number is used
for the decoded Point Id.
3D - Use this if Source flags are 3D. Two 4 digit numbers are
used for the decoded Point Id.
Program Point Id - arrange the letters a - t and 0 - 9 to code the

Point Id. Arrange the received line and station numbers to match the
numbers used in the Source flags. Figure 2 shows zeroes being forced
into the decoded Point Id.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.29
Figure 3.
Figure 3 displays the shot point 0016 0035 with vibrator 0 reporting.
The bottom line of the display shows the decoded Point Id number and the
distance from Vibrator 0. This feature works when Point Id is selected
in the Distances to field.
MID LATITUDE - Middle Latitude of the display.
MID LONGITUDE - Middle Longitude of the display.
AUTO VP# @SCALE < . KM

This entry corresponds with Text Visibility in the Screen Menu. When
Text Visibility is in Auto, the text will apear when the scale level
is less than this entry.
VIB MEM SIZE 04096 VIBS

This entry determines the amount of memory to be used for vibrators.
After changing this entry, exit the program and re-enter for the
change to take effect.
MAXIMUM VIB OFFSET M
This entry determines the length of the offset line in the Screen
Menu. The entry also determines the Error limit for the Distances
feature in the Screen Menu.
MOUSE LEFT BUTTON
The operator has the capability to change the actions of the mouse
buttons.
OFF - Left button does not have an action.
RCnt- Left button re-centers the display.
Zout- Left button Zooms out the display.
Goto- Left button brings up the Navigational Goto Memu.
Normally set to Rcnt.
MOUSE RIGHT BUTTON
OFF - Right button does not have an action.
InsI- Right button is used to insert the current icon.
Goto- Right button brings up the Navigational Goto Memu.
ZmIn- Right button Zooms in the display.
Normally set to ZmIn.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.30
SUPPORT NAMES
Auto- Turns ON the Support Names only when the scale level is less
then Auto VP# @Scale entry.
ON- Turns ON the Support Names all the time.
Normally set to Auto.
Re-Loading Vibs

Press [Alt][F] or [F] for the File Window
Select Drive and Path if necessary
Move Cursor to the Load Vibs field
Using <- -> select file name
Press [Enter]
This loads the file
- SEG P1 format:
Press [Alt][F] or [F] for the File Window
Select Drive, Path and SEG file Extension
Select the Icon with text of Currvibs
Move Cursor to the SEG Load field
Using <- -> select the File to be loaded
Press [Enter]
Computer Time Set

Changing the DOS time to the last GPS time received plus the Zone Entry
requires pressing [Control][T].
Changing the CMOS time to the last GPS time received plus the Zone Entry
requires pressing [Control][Alt][T].
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.31
Vibrator and Support Position Request (refer to Figure 4.)
Press [P], the Position Request Selections menu will appear on the right
side of the screen. The V.C.E. needs to be in either Mode Independent 1
(Grp 8, Fn 6) or Mode 4 to accept the position request.
---------------- POSITION REQUEST ----------------

| |
| Vib Group A |
| # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9101112131415 |
| |
| Supt# ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmn |
| Name JUGGIE 1 |
| Continuous Request is Off |
| of Vibrator Supports |
| Delay 004 secs |
| |
| , [Space]&[^C]Supt select. [Enter]request |
| in main: [^S]req Supts [^P]toggle AutoRequest|
--------------------------------------------------
Figure 4.
Vib Group- Use the left and right arrow key to select the Vibrator Group
you are requesting the Vibrator from.
# - Use the left and right arrow key to select the desired
Vibrator. Press [ENTER], GPSMAP will send the position
request to the Encode Sweep Generator or the Remote GPS
Monitor.
Supt# - Use the left and right arrow key to move to the desired
Support Vehicle then press [Control][C] for individual
selection. Pressing space-bar selects all the Support
Vehicles left of the selected Support Vehicle and pressing
space-bar again de-selects the Support Vehicles.
Name - Type in a name for the highlighted support letter. Support
Names in the Advanced entries menu is a selection that keeps
the Support name 'ON' all the time or Auto. Auto turns the
name on when the scale level is less than the Auto VP#@scale
in the Advanced Entries menu.
Continuous Request is - 'ON' Continually request positions from vibrator
or Support Vehicles.
'OFF' - Does not continually request positions.
Vibrator Supports - Use the left and right arrow key to select Vibrator
or Support Vehicle to be continuously requested.
Delay - this feature sets the time delay between Position requests in
the Continuous Request mode.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.32
The GPSMAP program will display the position request as REQ in the POS
column in the Report window (Press [R] for the Report window). The
vibrator number and Support Vehicle letter will be displayed in yellow on
the Main Screen.
Press [Control][P], to receive continuous requested positions (Vibrator
or Support Vehicles).
Press [Control][P], to stop receiving continuous requested positions.
Press [Control][S], to receive the selected Support Vehicle positions.
GPSMAP needs to be in ESGCCC mode if using a CCC module or ESGCIC mode if

using a CIC module before Position Request will work.
FUNCTION KEYS
F1 - Help Menu.
F2 - Send Cursor Position for Navigation Menu.
F3 - Zooms in the display.
F4 - Zooms out the display.
F5 - The Text icons are toggled between ON, OFF, and Auto.
F6 - The Flag icon text and text icon position are toggled between
North, South, East, and West.
F7 - Display re-centers on the last Vibrator shown. Keep pressing [F7]
and display re-centers on the first vibrator to the last vibrator
in the group.
F8 - Display re-centers on the last Support Vehicle shown. Keep
pressing [F7] and display re-centers on first Support Vehicle
shown(A) to the last Support Vehicle shown(X).
F9 - Cycles forward through *.BMP files in BMP Subdirectory
Ctrl F9 - Cycles backward through *.BMP files in BMP Subdirectory.
PRINTING
When running the program from DOS the printer must be in EPSON graphics
emulation mode.
[Shift][PrtScr] - First load GRAPHICS.COM from DOS. GPSMAP will use

GRAPHICS.COM to print the display.
[Control][PrtScr] - GPSMAP prints the graphics display in black and

white.
[Alt][PrtScr] - When GPSMAP is running in Windows, these keystrokes place

the graphic display into the clipboard. On most
computers the top half of the GPSMAP screen must be
displayed before the [Alt][PrtScr] will operate
correctly. Press [PgeUp] to view top half of screen,
then press [Alt][PrtScr].
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.33
MEMORY USED Press [M]
This is an information screen describing the amount of memory left for
vibrator and icon data (refer to Figure 5). The icon and vibrator
position data share memory. The amount of memory designated for vibrator
positions can be changed in the Advanced Entries menu. The entry Vib Mem
Size contains the amount of vibrator positions possible.
Change the value, press [Enter], and the next time into GPSMAP the new
Vibrator memory size will be used.
Figure 5.
ICONS - 00001/22457 refers to 1 icon present out of a possible 22457.

000016/359312 bytes refers to 16 bytes of data are used out of a
possible 359312 bytes for icons.
Vibs - 00001/04096 refers to 1 vibrator position in memory out of a

possible 4096 positions.
000016/065536 bytes refers to 16 bytes of data are used out of
a possible 65536 bytes for positions.
Last SEG item loaded - the comment line in the last SEG-P1 file loaded.
Last SEG file loaded - The last SEG-P1 file loaded (shot points).
Last BMP file loaded - The Last Bit-mapped file loaded for an overlay.
The IFStat line shows status information from the GPS I/F module. A
position request from each Vibrator must be done before the status line
is updated.
FF No position request
00 GPS I/F older than 12/97
Other Bits
0,1 Avg Mode
00 Last
01 Mid
10 Avg
2,3 Firmware Version of GPS I/F
00 Older than 12/97
01 12/97 Version
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.34
4, Sercel NR106 GPS receiver = 1
All other GPS receivers = 0
5,6 Serial Output port 2 GPS I/F
00 No output
01 On/Off ASCII message
10 - $GPGGA string
7, Serial Input port 2 GPS I/F
0 - $GPGGA string only
1 - $GSA and GGA string
Status Window
=== (1) ===
:(2)(3)(4):
: (5) :
:(6) (7):
:(8)(9)(10:
===========
(1) - Hdw33 - This represents that a Hardware key is needed. The first 3
represents the protection level at assembly time of the program.
The second 3 means the Hardware key is installed and the program is
ready to receive serial data. If the second number is 0, the
program is lacking a Hardware key and is not able to receive serial
data.
(2) - Serial Errors are displayed in High Intensity Red.
OR = OverRun Error
FE = Framing Error
PE = Parity Error
(3) - Receiving - Receiving any Serial information on Com1 a 'R' appears
in High Intensity Green. When requesting a vibrator position the
letter 'T' for transmitting is displayed in Red for a short time.
(4) - Receiving Header information is in High Intensity Cyan. This
lights whenever a new file number is received from the recording
system and whenever activity occurs on the Serial Port.
(5) - DOS Time - The computer DOS Time is displayed.
(6) - D0 - represents status of position and vibrator number that
reported the position.
I = Invalid position displayed with Red. Possible reason less than
3 satellites were reported for the position fix.
G = GPS position displayed with Yellow.
D = DGPS position displayed with Green.
(7) - Time since Last PSS - is a counter that tells how long since last
PSS position. Mode EsgPss.
(8) - Repeat Counter - Count down timer before next position is saved in
Modes Navig1, Navig2, and Areas.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.35
(9) - Recording - When the Record (Auto Saving Vibs) feature in the File
Menu is on, the Low Intensity Cyan 'R' is displayed. When a PSS
position is being recorded to the SEG-P1 file, a High Intensity
White 'R' is displayed.
(10)- Point Id - When the Record (Auto Saving Vibs) feature is on the
program is ready to receive the pre-selected Header information.
When the Header information is received the program places the
Point Id in this location. The Point Id is extracted from the
Header information by setting up the format in the Advance Entries
Menu.
(11)- File Number - When the Record (Auto Saving Vibs) feature is on the
program is ready to receive the pre-selected Header information.
When the Header information is received the program places the File
Number in this location. The File Number is extracted from the
Header information by setting up the format in the Advance Entries
Menu.
Example:
(HI Red) Big Red 'T' if Position Request
SERIAL Receiving Position (HI green 'R')
ERRORS :Receiving Header (HI cyan 'R')
: : : ::
===Hdw33=====
:ORFEPE RR :
I=Invalid(Red)\ : 18:36:03 :--DOS Time
G=GPS(Yellow)-- :D0 59:59 :--Time since last PSS (ESGPSS mode)
: :
D=DGPS(Green)/ :R87654321 : \Repeat counter(Navig or Vib_Rx
: : mode)
0-F=last Vib Rxd =============
: \ \
(LI cyan 'R') Recording ON \ File # received (File Number=4321)
Point Id received
(Point Id = 8765)
(HI white)Recording...
HI=High Intensity LI=Low Intensity
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.36
Report Window
Pressing [R] brings up the Report Window. Several items of information

are displayed in this window.
Rec# - A number representing the data's position in Vibrator Memory.
* - If the asterisk exists, the position is from a vehicle in
Panic.
Time - The time from the GPS receiver when the data was taken. Then
adjusted by the Time Zone entry in the Configuration menu.
Vib - The number of the vibrator or support vehicle whose position
is displayed. A Designates Group A.
P - Describes the source of the position data.
P - position from Post Sweep Service
R - position from position request.
L - position is caused by Panic Mode.
Latitude - The GPS position's Latitude (0000.0000')
Longitude - The GPS position's Longitude (00000.0000')
Altitude - The GPS altitude +/-0000.0 meters. E means ellipsoidal
height.
Qu - Quality of GPS position.
D - Differential GPS position.
G - Navigating GPS position with out differential
corrections.
2 2D position
3 3D position
CAge - The Age of Differential/Correction.
Pdp - Position Dilution of Precision.
Hdp - Horizontal Dilution of Precision.
Vdp - Vertical Dilution of Precision.
S - Number of satellites used for GPS position.
A - Type of position obtained in Post Sweep Service.
L - Last best position obtained during the sweep
M - Middle position obtained during the sweep
A - Average position obtained during the sweep
FileNum - 8 digit File number from Recording System.
Ep_Id: - 8 digit Ep Id from Recording System.
DecodId: - 8 digit Decoded Point Id from Recording System.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.37
Demo mode - Not Normally Used.
Several Demo modes (AdvEnt Window) can be used to Test the equipment:
'oper' Operate.
GPSMAP receives 'PSS' position messages from Vibs on the selected
Control port (19200 baud), stores them in 'Vib' Memory and refreshes
the screen. Re-centering will take place if necessary, according to
'ReCenterVib' selection.
OR
A GPS receiver can be tied to the same port and if the baud rates are
matching (normally 4800 baud), a point will be plotted on the screen
approximately every second if the received position is within current
Map range. In this case the data isn't stored in Vib Memory, and
refreshing the screen with [Enter], [Alt], [Esc]... will erase the
trace. (There is a way to store that data as Vib #0 data, see Navig1.)
'1' Selecting Demo 1, the previous contents of Vib Memory are

overwritten by the 'DEMO.VIB' file which is invisible but uses
the normal Vib memory space. Then Pressing [F12] sends one
DEMO.VIB, $GPGGA, position on COM2: at 4800 baud(normal GPS
Receiver Baud Rate) and increments the position pointer.
'2' Selecting Demo 2, the 'DEMO.VIB' file is loaded into memory as

above, but now when the [F11] key is pressed a message in the
'PSS' format is sent on COM2: at 19200 baud (normal Rx baud Rate
for an other computer).
Com2: can be Fed into COM1: or into an other computer.
NOTE: Any '.Vib' file can be renamed 'Demo.Vib' from DOS prompt.
09Oct01
GPSMAP Page 7.9.38
$GPGGA Message Format
The '$GPGGA' is a standard position message present in most DGPS
receivers, the normal format is:
$GPGGA,hhmmss.dd,DDMM.dddd,N,DDDMM.dddd,W,Q,S,xx.d,+aaa.d,M,+gggg.d,M*CS 0D 0A
12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 CS CR LF
\ /
All fields are separated by commas Hex
1 Time in hours (hh) minutes (mm) seconds (ss)
hhmmss
or hhmmss.d
or hhmmss.dd
the 3 formats above are supported
2,3 Latitude Degrees(2 digits) Minutes(2 dig) dec fraction (2-6dig)
4,5 Longitude Degrees(3 digits) Minutes(2 digits) dec fraction (2-6dig)
6 Quality 0 or nothing = invalid (not navigating)

1 = GPS position
2 = DGPS position
7 Number of Satellites used in position computation
8 Horizontal Dilution Of Precision (HDOP)
9,10 Antenna Height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), M = in meters
11,12 Geoidal Height, M = meters
CS Usually no CheckSum. If present it is always preceded by '*' and

consists of 2 ASCII characters representing the Hex value of the
CheckSum. The CheckSum is computed as follows: from the character
following '$' to the last character of Geoidal Height (included)
all characters are XORed together including separators (commas).
This is equivalent to taking the Modulus 2 of the summation of each
bit for all characters. CheckSum or no CheckSum format supported.
CR Character 13 decimal for [Enter] must be present.
LF Character 10 decimal for Line Feed.
Most fields can have variable length. This variable length is

supported to the best of our knowledge. Initially Trimble outputs
a reduced GGA message of the form '$GPGGA,,,,,,0,0,,,, CR LF'.
09Oct01
Encoder Installation Page 8.1.1
VIB PRO ENCODER INSTALLATION
Mechanical:
The Advance III Vib Pro as is shock mounted. The unit may be mounted
with optional brackets to secure the unit to a table top, overhead, wall
or other suitable structures. It may also be mounted directly (without
shock mounts) to other structures that are adequately shock mounted.
Refer to drawing on page 8.1.9.
Considerations for determining the best location for the unit are:
1. Convenience to the operator.
2. Shortest possible cable runs to the recording system and the radio.
3. Vertical clearance of at least 4 inches above the unit for attaching

cables.
4. Vertical clearance of at least 3.5 inches below the unit for

attaching cables.
Electrical:
The Encoder Recording System Cable connector JF provides connections for

power, radio, True Reference #1, Wireline Reference #1 and Wireline
Reference #2. Connector JE provides connections for True Reference #2,
Radio Reference, Radio Vibrator Out, Recording System Start, Encoder
Start, and Time Break.
Each wire in the Encoder Recording System Cable, wired to mating

connectors PE and PF, is labeled according to the JE/JF pin it is
connected to.
1. Power Input - The unit is powered by the vehicle's battery voltage

(9-36 VDC) electrical system, or by a power supply capable of
producing 9 to 36-volts DC at 40 watts.
Pins c and e (red 16 gauge) are connected to the positive (+) side
of the power source.
Pins g and h (black 16 gauge) are connected to the negative (-) side
of the power source.
06Oct99
2. Radio Interface - The Encoder must be connected to an FM radio
transceiver so the Start Code and data can be transmitted to the
Vibrators and similarity and data signals can be received from the
Vibrators. Some requirements of the radio transceiver are:
A. Response time (from activation of PTT at transmitter to
quieting and stabilization of speaker audio at receiver) - less
than 125 milliseconds.
B. Audio Band width (3 dB) - at least 300 Hz to 3000 Hz.
C. Signal to Noise Ratio (Voltage measured at speaker, ratio
between 100 percent modulation and 0 percent modulation) - 20
dB.
D. Required speaker voltage at 100 percent modulation - at least
1 volt peak-to-peak.
E. Transmitter audio input for 100 percent modulation - 2 volts
peak-to-peak.
F. Mic. disconnect switch when PTT button released.
G. Negative PTT (the radio must transmit when the PTT line is
connected to common).
The MS3106E14S-5S radio connector is wired to Encoder connector PF as
follows:
Connector Wire type Radio Radio Connection
PF pin Connector
b Single conductor A Transmitter input
shielded (Mic High)
h, Red wire of B Speaker Active
shielded
twisted pair
d,k 22 gauge Black C Radio Return
a 22 gauge Yellow D Push-to-talk
f, Black wire of E Speaker Return
shielded
twisted pair
If the radio transceiver requires less than 2 volts p-p for 100 percent
modulation, RP81 on the Modem Card must be adjusted.
06Oct99
3. Recording System Start Command
A start command is available to start the Recording System from the
Vibrators or from Encoder automatic sequencing. The signal is
available at PE pin E using PE pin F for Return.
A. ISOLATED RECORDER START (ISO REC ST)
If the Recording System requires a switch closure to start:
Install Jumpers J7 and J8 on the Interface card so the center
pin is connected to pin 1 (their isolated positions).
B. NONISOLATED RECORDER START (NISO REC ST)
If the recording system requires a 5-volt voltage pulse to
start:
pin is connected to pin 2 (their non-isolated positions).
4. Encoder Remote Start Command
The Encoder receives a start command from the Recording System. It
responds by sending start codes to the Decoders and then starting
the local sweep. Encoder Start Active is available at PE pin J,
with return on PE pin K.
Jumpers J3 and J4 on Interface Card provide selection for:
Isolated (ISO)
Non-Isolated (NISO)
Differential (Diff)
5. Time Break
Time Break is generated by the Encoder at the instant the sweep
starts.
A. If the recording system requires a switch closure Time Break
input:
pin is connected to pin 1 (their isolated positions). In this
configuration, the optical coupler will be turned on for 4
milliseconds at time break. Time break is at the start of the
4 milliseconds.
06Oct99
B. If the recording system requires a 5 volt voltage pulse
Time Break input:
Install Jumpers J5 and J6 on the Interface card so the
center pin is connected to pin 2 (their non-isolated
positions). In this configuration, Time Break will go high
for 4 milliseconds at time break. Time break is at the
start of the 4 milliseconds.
6. True Reference 1 (Pilot) Sweep (TREF1) - The True Reference Sweep

output of the Encoder is the sweep against which data is correlated.
It should be connected to the input of an auxiliary channel of the
recording system which has the same phase and amplitude response as
the data channel.
A. If the auxiliary channel accepts a high level (20 V p-p) input:
Connect Pin s (the center conductor of a coaxial cable) to the

active input of the auxiliary channel.
Connect Pin S (the shield of a coaxial cable) to the return

input of the auxiliary channel.
B. If the auxiliary channel requires a lower level signal, True

Reference from pins X, and Y must be attenuated by an external
resistor divider network, preferably a balanced network,
installed as close as possible to the point of use.
7. The encoder provides two True Reference signals. As of this

writing, they are identical. Special software and firmware will
allow the two reference signals to be different. TREF2 is available
from JE pins B (active) and A (return). It should be interfaced with
the same considerations as TREF1.
06Oct99
8. Radio Similarity Signals:
If two additional phase-matched auxiliary channels are available in
the recording system, radio similarities may be recorded with data.
The Radio Reference Sweep, RADIO REF, against which the Vibrators
will be compared, is connected as follows:
A. If the auxiliary channel accepts a high-level (20 v. p-p)
input:
Connect PE Pin C (Radio Ref) (the center conductor of a coaxial
cable) to the active input of the auxiliary channel.
Connect PE Pin A (common) to the return input of the auxiliary
channel for Radio Reference.
B. If the auxiliary channel requires a lower level input:
An external resistor divider network must be used.
The Radio Vibrator output signal, showing the performance of the
Vibrator, is connected as follows.
A. If the auxiliary channel accepts a high-level (20v p-p) input:
Connect PE Pin D (the center conductor of a coaxial cable) to
the active input of the auxiliary channel.
Connect PE Pin A (common) to the return input of the auxiliary
channel.
B. If the auxiliary channel requires a lower level input:
An external resistor divider network must be used.
9. Wireline Reference Sweep 1 (WL REF1), available at PF Pin X (active)
and PF Pin Z (return) in high-level form (20 v. p-p) is normally not
used directly, but is connected to the recording system through the
Wireline Similarity System. If a lower level signal is needed, an
external resistor divider network must be used.
10. The encoder provides two Wireline Reference signals. As of this
writing, they are identical. Special software and firmware will
allow the two reference signals to be different. The second
Wireline Reference Signal (WL REF2) available at PF Pin Y (active)
and Pin Z (return) in high-level form (20 v. p-p) is normally not
used directly, but is connected to the recording system through the
Wireline Similarity System. If a lower level signal is needed, an
external resistor divider network must be used.
06Oct99
Computer Interfacing
Computers will normally be interfaced with the encoder for several
purposes. The programs control different kinds of functions.
Encoder: Controls functions such as starting sweeps, the sweep number
and type to be run, the start codes to be issued, selecting which
vibrator(s) should sweep, which vibrator, if any, should return a radio
similarity, etc. This program is considered necessary for executing
encoder functions. The computer running this program must be connected
to connector 3 on the D-Sub Panel of the encoder.
VPKOP: Allows the entry of operational parameter selections for the
encoder and decoders, by radio link, that may also be made via the front
panel. This program will normally only be run when parameters need to be
changed. It also communicates with the encoder through connector 3 on
the D-Sub Panel of the encoder. It may share connector 3 with the
Encoder program through another program, PelComOS, which is automatically
started when either Encoder of VPKOP are started. A menu item in VPKOP
allows it to take or release control of the com port it is using to
communicate with the encoder.
WVSig: Displays quality control and status information from the vibrators
and encoder. Windows Vibra*Sig normally receives information from the
recording system that indicates which source point the vibrators should
be near when a sweep is executed, GPS reports from the decoders, and
displays positional quality control/documentation information about the
vibrators. This information may be received after the sweep, as part of
the PSS data, or before the sweep, included in an optional ready message
from one or more decoders. WVSIG can also display status, quality
control and position data from Pelton Shot Pro dynamite detonator
decoders. This program also shares connector 3 on the D-Sub Panel of the
encoder.
GPSMAP: Supports advanced interfacing with the GPS system. Maps or

aerial photographs of the prospect may be overlaid with points of
interest, source points, receiver points, receiver cabling, the positions
of shots or sweeps taken. This program extends the GPS capabilities of
WVSIG, which should provide adequate positional information most of the
time. The operator will normally task swap from WVSIG to GPSMAP only
when additional information of special functions are needed. GPSMAP also
uses connector 3 on the D-Sub Panel of the encoder.
Normally, all the programs listed above will be running on a single

computer. More than one computer may be used for the programs by
installing special adapter cables between them and connector 3.
06Oct99
VIBQC: Receives, processes, stores, and displays analog similarity data.
This data may be received by radio or direct connection to sensors placed
on a vibrator. VibQC uses connector 4 on the D-Sub Panel of the encoder.
GPS: The encoder may use signals from a GPS receiver for two purposes.
The system clocks of the encoder and decoder(s) may be adjusted using
signals from the GPS receiver. A GPS receiver interfaced with the
encoder may also act as the reference station to facilitate differential
mode in the decoders. The use of GPS equipment with the encoder and
decoder(s) is optional. A coaxial connector is provided to interface an
installed GPS receiver with an external antenna.
An external GPS receiver may be connected to the encoder through
connector 6 on the D-Sub Panel instead of installing one internally. The
PPS pulse may be accessed from connector 1.
GPS Setup Programs: Connector 7 on the D-Sub Panel of the encoder is the
com port for control interfacing with installed GPS receivers. That port
is used for setting the configuration and checking the status of the
receivers. Trimble DSM and their Lassen SK8 receivers are currently
being installed Vib Pro equipment. DSMCHAT.exe from Trimble is for their
DSM receiver. TSIPCHAT.exe is the Trimble program to be used with their
Lassen SK8 receiver. They are normally only used when configuring or
checking the status of the GPS receiver.
Digital Radio: Connector 2 on the D-Sub Panel is for the Digital Radio
Interface. This connector can be used to monitor the performance of the
Vib Pro Modem Card.
Test Connector: Connector 1 on the D-Sub Panel of the encoder provides
easy access to signals normally used for testing and crew setup. This
connector also has several signals that are only used in the decoder.
06Oct99
Decoder Installation Page 8.2.1
VIB PRO DECODER INSTALLATION
1. Vibrator Electronics Installation A mounting bracket must be
installed in the cab of the Vibrator usually located between the
driver seat and the passenger seat.
Dimensions, angles and hole locations of the mounting bracket may be
changed to allow for unusual space restrictions and mounting angle
requirements.
2. Connector Panel Cable Installation - Make a rough cutout in the rear
wall of the cab for mounting the Connector Panel. The cutout should
be rectangular, 10 1/8 inches wide and 5 3/8 inches high. Locate
the cutout in a position that provides adequate clearance for the
External Cables. Once the large opening is cut, the panel itself
can be used as a template for locating the mounting screw holes.
The mechanical drawing "Adv II Vib Elec C.P. Mtg Hole Diag." in the
documentation section of this manual can also be used as a template.
A rubber gasket or silicone seal should be used between the panel
and the outer wall of the cab to keep the cab rain-tight.
The large circular connector on the end of the cable opposite the
Connector Panel plugs into a mating connector located on the
Vibrator Electronics.
3. Radio Connections - An FM radio transceiver is required in the
Vibrator cab for data communications between the Vibrator Control
Electronics and the Encode Sweep Generator in the recording truck,
as well as for voice communications.
Some requirements of the radio transceiver are:
A. Response time (from activation of PTT at transmitter to quieting
and stabilization of speaker audio at receiver) - less than 125
milliseconds.
B. Audio band width (3 dB) - at least 300 Hz to 3000 Hz.
C. Signal-to-Noise Ratio (Voltage measured at speaker, ratio
between 100 percent modulation and 0% modulation) - 20 dB.
D. Required speaker voltage at 100% modulation at least one volt
p-p.
E. Transmitter audio input for 100% modulation two volts p-p.
F. Mic. disconnect switch when PTT button released.
06Oct99
G. Negative PTT (ground to transmit). Plug the Radio cable into
the 5-pin connector located on the back of the Connector Panel.
This cable is connected to the FM radio transceiver as follows:
Pin Wire type Radio connection
A. Single Conductor shielded Transmitter Input (mic. high)
B. Red wire of shielded Speaker Active
twisted pair
C. Black stranded Radio Return (usually chassis
ground)
D. Yellow stranded Push-to-talk
E. Black wire of shielded Speaker Return (usually
twisted pair chassis ground)
Do not connect the shields.
NOTE: If the radio inverts the signal, the sweep will fail to
start, or start unreliably. In this case, reverse the
connections to pins B and E.
If the radio requires less than 2 volts peak-to-peak for 100 percent
modulation, RP81 on the Modem Card must be adjusted.
4. Accelerometer Installation - Install a dual accelerometer on the

baseplate structure. This device is usually located at the top of
the baseplate structure (above the reaction mass) to keep it cleaner
and to allow shorter cable runs.
Install another dual accelerometer on the top of the reaction mass.

Accelerometers should be vertically oriented, with the connector up.
Must use M5I or later accelerometers.
5. Lift System Wiring - The following comments apply to the Lift System
Cable available from Pelco. The wiring of this cable is shown in
the Circuit Diagrams and Bills of Materials section of this manual.
An MS3102E-14S-2P connector (J17A) must be mounted on the solenoid
housing of the four-way lift valve. A special part available from
Pelco provides a convenient mounting surface for this connector.
Pin A is connected to the "down" coil and Pin B is connected to the
"up" coil. The return sides of both coils connect to the metal
housing of the valve, which should provide an electrical path to the
negative side of the vehicle battery.
The junction box of the lift cable should be mounted close to the
Stiff-leg supports in a location that will provide protection from
mechanical damage and excessive moisture.
06Oct99
Up to three of the four or five microswitches extending from the
junction box are stiff-leg safety switches which prevent the
baseplate assembly from being forced down when the stiff-leg
supports are holding the baseplate assembly up. Each of these
microswitches should be mounted so it is actuated only when its
stiff-leg is in the open, non-supporting position.
The lengths, types, and quantity of the microswitch cables extending
from the junction box depend on the relative locations of the
junction box and the microswitches, so this information must be
supplied when ordering a Lift Cable. It is generally possible to
order a Lift Cable by specifying Vibrator type.
One external cable is used to connect the lift solenoid (J17) to the
junction box (J17A). Another external cable is used to connect the
junction box (J15A) to the lift connector on the control panel
(JF6).
6. External Cable Installation

A. Connect a standard external cable between the torque motor (on
the servo valve pilot stage) and JF1 on the Connector Panel.
B. Connect a standard external cable between the Valve LVDT (on
the Servo Valve main stage) and JF2 on the Connector Panel.
C. Connect a standard external cable between the Mass LVDT (on the
reaction mass or baseplate structure) and JF3 on the Connector
Panel.
D. Install an MS3102E14S-2P connector on the battery box. Connect
pins A and C of this connector through a 20-amp fuse to the
positive post of the battery (16-gauge wire). Connect pins B
and D of this connector to the vehicle frame, at the same point
where the battery ground strap connects to the vehicle frame
(16-gauge wire).
Do not connect B and D directly to the minus post of the
battery.
Connect a standard external cable between the connector just
installed on the battery box and JF4 on the Connector Panel.
E. Connect a standard external cable between J15A on the Lift
Junction Box and JF6 on the Connector Panel.
F. Connect a standard external cable between the Baseplate dual
accelerometer and JF5 on the Connector Panel.
06Oct99
G. Connect a standard external cable between the Reaction Mass
dual accelerometer and JF7 on the Connector Panel.
CAUTION: Be very careful to insure the two accelerometer

external cables are not reversed. Baseplate accelerometers
must connect to JF5 and Reaction Mass accelerometers must
connect to JF7.
H. Connect a standard external cable between the Down Interlock

switch and JF8 on the Connector Panel. If the Vibrator is not
equipped with a Down Interlock switch, pins A and B of JF8 must
be shorted together.
I. Install a dust cover on JF9 on the Connector Panel. This

connector will be used only for Vibrator testing and for
wireline communications with the recording truck. External
cables should be routed so they cannot rub against any moving
parts or high-pressure hoses, since the resulting friction will
cause accelerated cable wear and failure. External cables
supplied by Pelco are normally ten feet long. If special
lengths are required, this information should be supplied when
ordering.
7. To test the installation, complete the procedures described in the

"CALIBRATION" section of this manual.
06Oct99
Start Time Adj Page 8.3.1
Start Time Adjustment for the
Advance III Vib Pro Systems
Abbreviated Procedure:
Part 1A. - Preparation:
1. CONNECT THE COMPUTER to the appropriate ports on the Encoder.
2. POWER UP the VPE and VPD.
3. START COMPUTER PROGRAMS - Start the Encoder, VPKop, and VIBQC

programs.
4. SETUP VIBQC:
a. Program Mode Menu: Vib Pro, Fmeter, New CCC on or off according
to firmware in CCC.
b. Parameters Menu: Seconds = Com Port selected, Trigger Edge =

Negative, Trigger Level = 2, Trigger Delay = 0, Sample Rate = 1
Mil, Seconds = length of sweep to be used, Neg. Polarity = not
selected, Smooth Data = selected, Hold Down = 24000, Base Plate
= 1000, BPSens = 25, RMSens = 25.
c. Graphs/Vibra*Chek Menu: Select Baseplate, Phase, Time, Pounds.
5. SETUP VPKop:
a. Configuration Menu: Sweep Definition = NORMAL
b. Configuration Menu: Set Com Port
6. RECEIVE VPKop PARAMETERS - Using VPKop, receive All Parameters from

a unit having valid parameters.
7. SETUP SWEEP - Confirm or enter sweep parameters for the test.
8. SEND ALL PARAMETERS to all units.
SETUP ENCODER - In the Encoder program, set up desired Sweep Profile to

run the sweep to be used.
10Apr02
C:\Reallytemp\Ch08-3-1.doc
Part 2A. - Setting Encoder Delay:
1. CONNECT TRUE REFERENCE from a Connector Panel in a vibrator to the
Baseplate Acc (LBACCA) BNC connector on the VIB PRO ENCODER
RECORDING SYSTEM PF CABLE using the special BNC female to female
attenuator shown on page 9.3.1 and page 3.16b in the documentation
section.
2. PREPARE FOR SWEEPING - When the decoder ready, take the steps
necessary to prepare for sweeping.
3. RUN A TEST SWEEP Start a sweep from the decoders front panel.
4. ENSURE DECODER Dly is set to 00000.
5. START VIBQC data Acquisition.
6. START A SWEEP, starting it from the Encoder.
7. CHECK THE PHASE BP plot.
8. ADJUST ENCODER DELAY (Encoder Dly) entry on the ENCODER for minimum
phase. Note: If Start Time adjustment is not working, try an
initial setting of 3000 for ENCODER DELAY and repeat procedure.
9. Repeat Part 2A using each vibrator.
10. SEND the final ENCODER DELAY value to all units.
Note: A SHOT PRO UPHOLE SIMULATOR-2 (the uphole simulator with two BNC
connectors on the front) can be used to set ENCODER DELAY. See the SHOT
PRO UPHOLE SIMULATOR-2 manual for instructions.
Part 3A. - Setting Decoder Delay (optional):
If start times achieved in the above steps are adequately consistent from
one vibrator to another, disregard this part of the procedure and
continue, starting at Part 4A, the Setting Radio Similarity Delay
section, below. Note: If Decoder Delay will not be used, it should be set
to the same value, usually 00000, in all Vib Pro units.
1. SET DECODER DELAY (Decoder Dly) on all Vib Pros to 01000.
2. RESET ENCODER DELAY In the Encoder, reset Encoder Dly in the
ENCODER. Add 1 millisecond (01000) to the value entered in Part 2A.
3. START VIBQC data Acquisition.
4. START A SWEEP, starting it from the Encoder.
5. CHECK THE PHASE BP plot.
10Apr02
6. ADJUST DECODER DELAY (Decoder Dly) entry on the DECODER (not the
Encoder) for minimum phase.
7. REPEAT Part 3A using each vibrator. After this test has been
completed all Vib Pros may have different Decoder Delay settings. It
is important to ensure one value does not get entered into all units
by VPKop or direct keyboard entry. Decoder Delay values for each
vibrator should be recorded for future use. Any time Vib Pros or
radios are exchanged between vibrators, the testing in this part may
have to be done again.
Part 4A. - Setting Radio Similarity Delay:
1. SIM SIGNAL = REFERENCE - With the VPKop program, select Reference

for the similarity signal from all decoders.
2. REQUEST SIMS FROM PROPER UNIT - Use the Encoder program to select
the proper unit for similarities.
3. ACQUIRE VIBQC data in the VibPro Sqc16 ESG mode.
4. CHECK THE PHASE Vib plot.
5. ADJUST RADIO SIMILARITY DELAY for minimum phase error.
6. REPEAT the tests using all the decoders and vibrators.
7. SEND the resulting Radio Similarity Delay to all Vib Pros. Be

careful not to change the Decoder Delay if Part 3A was used.
8. Repeat the test with all vibrators at least 200 meters away or
attenuate RF signal between VPEs radio and vibrators radios.
Part 5A. - After Test:

Restore the proper operating parameters, especially Similarity Signal =
Ground Force.
10Apr02
Detailed Procedure:
Options:
Adjustment of Start Time synchronization between Encoders and Decoders
has historically been accomplished by comparing signals on an
oscilloscope. This may be done with the Vib Pro system, but the
following procedure should be much simpler and should provide accurate
Start Time synchronization.
Some users prefer to adjust Start Time by comparing the timing of Time
Break signals from the Encoder and Decoder(s). This is also valid. The
Time Break signals from Vib Pros are accurate indications of start of
sweep when the Vib Pros are being operated in the Encoder and Decoder
modes. Either an oscilloscope or VibQC, using the SIGNAL TRACES plot,
can be used to observe the two Time Break signals.
A SHOT PRO UPHOLE SIMULATOR-2 (the uphole simulator with two BNC
connectors on the front) can be used to set ENCODER DELAY. See the SHOT
PRO UPHOLE SIMULATOR-2 manual for instructions.
The following procedure involves using VibQC with a Vib Pro Encoder
having a CCC installed for adjusting both Encoder Delay, Radio Similarity
Delay, and possibly Decoder Delay. Due to sequential sampling of analog
inputs for the CCC or SIC cards, if the same sweep signal is applied to
two analog inputs, there is some time skew, which manifests itself as
phase skew if the sweep goes to high frequencies, significantly above 100
Hz. This phase skew is normally not significant when production sweeps
are used for this procedure because the sweep frequencies of production
sweeps usually stay low enough (less than about 180 Hz) that the
resulting phase error is less than one degree. Testing Start Time
accuracy using a production sweep is usually sufficiently accurate.
It is necessary to run the following programs to complete this procedure:

Vib Pro Encoder, VPKop, and VibQC. The operating system on the computer
to be used must be Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT, Or Windows
2000. All three programs should be started and serial port connections
should be made before beginning the test. It is necessary to have VibQC
running on it's own serial port, with the other 2 programs sharing
another port. Connect the computers port for VibQC to connector 4 on
the D-Sub Panel of the Vib Pro encoder. Connect the computers port for
the other two programs to connector 3 on the D-Sub Panel of the encoder.
10Apr02
Part 1D. - Setup
Recommended setup for the VibQC program:
Program Mode Menu: Vib Pro, Fmeter, New CCC selected or not
according to firmware in CCC. (Note: If this setting is wrong,
the program will not acquire data in later steps, when that is
attempted. If that happens, come back to this menu and try the
other setting for New CCC.) AutoOverlay(all) not selected.
Parameters Menu: Com Ports - select port connected to Port 4 of the

Vib Pro Encoder, TriggerEdge = Negative, Trigger Level = 2, Trigger
Delay = 0, Sample Rate: = 1 Mil., Seconds = length of sweep to be
used, Neg. Polarity = not selected, Smooth Data = selected, Hold
Down Weight = 24000,
Baseplate Weight = 1000.
10Apr02
Graphs/Vibra*Chek Menu: Select Baseplate, Phase, Time, Pounds.
Note: Menu items not mentioned may be set as the user prefers.
Phase Plot setup (when using a sweep): Scaling -90 to +90 degrees; 0 to
sweep length seconds. Reduce the scaling to +5 to -5 degrees as
adjustment progresses.
Use the Signal Traces plot if using Time Break instead of a sweep.
Recommended setup for the VPKop program:
Configuration Menu: ComPort Status = Open, ComPort Selection -

Select com port connected to port 3 of the Vib Pro Encoder, Sweep
Definition = Normal, VibPro Type - to match equipment in use.
Note: Any parameters not mentioned above may be set to the users
preference.
When using Time Break with VibQC, adjust for alignment of the rising
edges, not the falling edges. Due to sample rate limitations, using
VibQC and Time Break to adjust Start Time may be slightly less accurate
than using an oscilloscope. Using a sweep with VibQC will be slightly
more accurate than using Time Break with VibQC.
10Apr02
The SHOT PRO UPHOLE SIMULATOR - 2 (the unit with 2 BNC connectors on the
front) can be used to set ENCODER DELAY. See the a SHOT PRO UPHOLE
SIMULATOR - 2 manual for instructions.
Computer v/s front panel control:
Most of the entries below can be made from the front panel of the Vib
Pros but it may be easier to make them from the VPKop and Encoder
programs. Some of the items, such as selecting a decoder number for
radio similarities must be made from the Encoder program. In the
procedure below, the front panel steps will be given in regular text,
instructions for making the same entries using the computer will be in
italics. Notes for computer programs will be in the format:
Program/first window/next window/etc. followed by instructions. For
example:
Encoder/EDIT/Sweep Profile:
Means The Encoder program, The Edit window, in the Edit window, select
Sweep Profiles, then make any selection changes in the Sweep Profile
window.
Kop operations will not work unless the CREW# in the VPKop Sending
Parameters window matches Crew Number in the Radio Control Menu on the
Vib Pro.
Part 2D. - Setting Encoder Delay:

Set the Encoder Delay (Encoder Dly) by doing the following:
At the Encoder:
Encoder/EDIT/SWEEP PROFILES: Use the NEXT or PREVIOUS buttons to
select the SWEEP PROFILE to be used. Ensure the settings in the
window are appropriate. Press the APPLY button then the OK button.
10Apr02
a. Select the RADIO menu item then Enter.
b. Select the Encoder Dly item.
c. Using the KEY PAD, enter the value 3000 then Enter.
d. Enter OK by pressing the "D" soft key to exit to the MAIN MENU.
VPKOP/RECEIVE: Select: Cable; All Sweeps, Vib Parameters; ensure

Crew # matched the entry in the Vib Pro Encoder in the Radio
menu; then do OK
VPKOP/RADIO CONTROL (click on the button with an icon that looks like
a radio): Set ENCODER DELAY to 3000 and SEND.
On the Encoder and Decoder:
10Apr02
e. Select the SWEEPS menu and Enter.
f. Using the right or left arrow keys, select the sweep to be used for
Start Time adjustment and verify the parameters are what you want
them to be. A production sweep should work fine. If no production
sweep has been defined, the following parameters will work well for
this test:
VPKOP/SWEEP PARAMETERS
Sweep: With the right or left arrow keys select a sweep.

Segment: 01
Sweep Type Linear
Start Frequency 005
End Frequency 120
Sweep Length 8
Taper Type 0
Start Taper .2
End Taper .2
Phase Init: 000
Constant: 00000
VPKOP/SWEEP button.
Select a sweep number by opening the sweep number pull-down menu or

by clicking on the one of the parameters for the sweep to be
modified. Make any changes necessary.
To ensure the decoder(s) have the same sweep parameters, do:

VPKOP/SEND Select: Radio; Sweeps; Parameters; select the appropriate
Vib number(s), then do OK.
10Apr02
Including the Vibrator ID Number assigned to the Vib Pro the computer
is connected to will cause the parameters to be loaded to it at the
same time the parameters are sent to other units by radio.
At the Decoder:
g. From the Main Menu, select the PHASE CONTROL menu and Enter.
h. Select Sim. Sig. CODE
i. Using the RIGHT or LEFT cursor control keys, Select REF then
press the Enter key.
VPKOP/PHASE button: Select SIMILARITIES SIGNAL CODE, select REFERENCE

from the pull-down menu, and Send
j. From the Main Menu, select the RADIO menu and Enter.
k. Select Decoder Dly
10Apr02
l. Using the KEYPAD, Enter 00000 then press the Enter key.
VPKOP/RADIO button: Select Decoder Delay, enter 0, and Send
m. Return to the OPERATE screen by pressing the EXIT soft key.

n. If the baseplate down interlock switch is in use, either defeat it
or pressure the vibrator up and put the baseplate down.
o. Make sure the LIFT command is set to DOWN.
p. Make sure the Decoder can take a sweep by pressing the START button
and verifying its light comes on.
q. Move one Vibrator close enough to the recording truck to pass a
cable from the Vib Pro decoder in that vibrator into the recording
truck and to reach the baseplate accelerometer (LBACCA) BNC
connector on the VIB PRO ENCODER RECORDING SYSTEM PF cable.
r. There should be a True Reference BNC connector on the Connector
Panel in the vibrator. If there is, connect one end of a long BNC
to BNC cable to it. If not or if the connector panel is
inaccessible, use a TEST POINT SELECTOR BOX, connected to the
decoder, with one rotary switch set to position 9, to access TREF
(True Reference). Connect a test cable (usually a BNC to BNC
cable) to the proper BNC connector on the TEST POINT SELECTOR BOX.
s. Pass the other end of the test cable to the recording truck.
10Apr02
At the Encoder:
t. Use a special attenuator attached to your encoder cable to connect
the cable from the decoder to the baseplate accelerometer (LBACCA)
BNC connector on the VIB PRO ENCODER RECORDING SYSTEM PF cable.
You can build an acceptable attenuator by putting a 20 K ohm
resistor in series with the signal line and a 2 K ohm loading
resistor to ground on the encoder side of the series resistor. The
schematic of this attenuator is in the Vib Pro manual, in the
Documentation section, under Zero Time Adjust.
Notes: If a computer is not available, you can connect True Reference
from the encoder and decoder to two channels of an oscilloscope and
adjust Start Time by monitoring the timing of those signals on the
scope.
If Test Point Selector Boxes are not available, TREF can be
accessed by connecting to Pin 3 of the INTERFACE connector on the
side of the Vib Pros, using Pin 1 for return.
10Apr02
At the Computer:
u. Running the VibQC program, start acquisition.
Press this button to start acquisition.

v. Start a sweep by pressing the START button on the encoder or using
the Vib Pro Encoder program on the computer.
w. In the graph selection window, select Vibra*Chek, then select phase
of the baseplate.
x. Use the phase plot to determine if the true reference signals from
the encoder and decoder are starting at the same time. If the
phase plot shows a negative trend Encoder Delay needs to be
increased. A positive trend indicates Encoder Delay needs to be
decreased.
y. Repeat sweeps, adjusting Encoder Delay for minimum phase error.

Reduce the Y scaling of the plot as error decreases. Less than 1
degree of error and flat response should be attainable for the
majority of the sweep.
Actual Phase plot with good start time adjustment.
10Apr02
Notes:
A few degrees of phase error is normal very early in the plot.
It may be helpful to use the X-Y mode to make the final Start Time
adjustments if a scope are being used.
z. Repeat this part of the procedure with each of the vibrators.
aa. SEND the final Encoder Delay value to all units.
Part 3D. - Decoder Delay Option:

If the Encoder Dly setting found in the above procedure results in start
time accuracies from vib to vib that are not consistent enough, one may
adjust Decoder Delay (Decoder Dly) in each vibrator. If the vib to vib
variation is acceptable, go directly to Part 4D, which is the Set the
Radio Similarity Delay (Radio Sim Dly) section, and disregard the
remainder of this part.
The Decoder Delay entry allows the user to adjust the start time of
individual decoders. Usually all the vibrators on a crew will have
Radios that are made by the same manufacturer, are the same model, and
are configured the same. This typically results in all vibrators
starting at nearly the same time. Sometimes, especially when equipment
from two or more seismic crews are used together on a prospect, the
radios may be configured differently, different models, or even made by
different manufacturers. When this happens the vibrators with one type of
radio may start significantly earlier or later than others. Differences
in configuration of or interfacing with radios, even if they are all of
the same make and model can cause significant differences in start times.
While it would probably be best to resolve any differences so the
vibrators would naturally start at the same time, Decoder Delay can be
used to correct for these differences. Occasionally, it will be
desirable to intentionally have vibrators start at different times.
Decoder Delay can provide this capability. There are many variations on
implementing Decoder Delay. The following procedure may not be optimum
for your operation but will be usable in almost all situations.
Note: If adjusting Decoder Delay without first adjusting Encoder
Delay, do all steps in Part 2D up to step x, then continue
starting with step c below.
a. Set Decoder Dly in all the Vib Pros to 01000.
b. Increase the value for Encoder Dly in all the units by 01000.
10Apr02
At the Computer:
c. Running the VibQC program, start acquisition.
Press this button to start acquisition.
d. Start a sweep by pressing the START button on the encoder or using

the Vib Pro Encoder program on the computer.
e. In the graph selection window, select Vibra*Chek, then select phase

of the baseplate.
f. Use the phase plot to determine if the true reference signals from
the encoder and decoder are starting at the same time. If the
phase plot shows a negative or positive trend Decoder Delay in the
DECODER needs to be adjusted.
g. Repeat sweeps, adjusting Decoder Delay for minimum phase error.

Reduce the Y scaling of the plot as error decreases. Less than 1
degree of error and flat response should be attainable for the
majority of the sweep.
Notes:
10Apr02
h. Repeat this part of the procedure with each of the vibrators.
After this test has been completed all Vib Pros may have different
Decoder Delay settings. It is important to ensure one value does
not get entered into all units by VPKop or direct keyboard entry.
Decoder Delay values for each vibrator should be recorded for future
use. Any time Vib Pros or radios are exchanged between vibrators,
the testing in this part may have to be done again. Again, this is
an OPTIONAL procedure. Most users leave Decoder Delay set to 00000
in all units.
Part 4D. Set the Radio Similarity Delay (RADIO Sim Dly) by doing the
following:
a. Using the Encoder program, select the Similarity Selector to

request a similarity from the decoder being tested.
b. In the VibQC Program MODE window, select Sqc16 ESG mode.
10Apr02
c. Start acquisition
d. Use the phase plot to determine if the Radio Reference signals from
the encoder and the true reference signal being returned from the
decoder by radio are starting at the same time. If the phase plot
shows a negative trend Radio Similarity Delay needs to be
increased. A positive trend indicates Encoder Delay needs to be
decreased.
e. Repeat sweeps, adjusting Radio Reference Delay for minimum phase

error. Reduce the Y scaling of the plot as error decreases.
Less than 1 degree of error and flat response should be
attainable for the majority of the sweep.
Notes:
3. Repeat the above tests using all the decoders and vibrators.
4. Restore the proper operating parameters, especially Drive Attenuator

(attenuation)= 0 and Similarity Signal = Ground Force.
10Apr02
Tech Info and Block Diagram Page 9.1.1
Module Description
Vib Pro H8S card - The main H8S card provides all communications from the
Vib Pro Sharc Card to the outside world. This card performs
communication or control of the following:
Keyboard and display via front panel Interface Card.

Vib Pro Modem Card
External Serial Communication
Serial via Interface Card
GPS - Serial Communication and PSS input
Lift
Vib Pro Sharc Card - The Sharc card controls the hydraulic system of the
Vibrator. This card performs the following:
Sweep Generation
Phase Control
Force Control
Calibration
Vdisplay data
Controls Feedback Detector/Servo Card
Controls A/D D/A Card
Computes PSS Correlation, Phase, Force and Distortion Data
Communicates to Main H8S via link port on Interface Card and
serial
Filter Card - Performs anti-alias filter on raw loop and sim

accelerometers. Provides Gain of 8 after filtering. Output goes to A/D
D/A card.
06Oct99
A/D D/A Card - Provides Analog to Digital and Digital to Analog
conversion for the Sharc Card.
A to D - All 4 accelerometer signals

A to D of +15V, -15V and +5V
A to D of (VFB) Valve Feedback and (MFB) Mass Feedback
A to D of Servo Mux Signals
+30V, -30V, Torque Motor, Valve LVDT Primary Voltage, Mass LVDT
Primary Voltage, DC Input Voltage
D to A in Decoder Mode
True Ref
Drive to Feedback Servo Card
Vib Out
Wireline Reference
D to A in Encoder Mode
True Ref 1
True Ref 2
Wireline Ref 1
Wireline Ref 2
Interface Card - Connects directly to the Main H8S Card and through the
link port to the Sharc Card.
High Speed Link port from Sharc to H8S

4 Serial Ports
UART A
UART B
UART C
UART D
Non-isolated and Isolated outputs for:
TB - Time Break output from Vib Pro when sweep Starts.
RSTART - Remote Start input to Vib Pro to remotely start Vib
Pro Unit. 1 Second before Time Break.
Rec. Start - Recorder start output from Vib Pro to pre-start
external device. In Decoder Rec Start occurs 96mSec before
Time Break. In Encoder Rec Start is not used.
Radio Reference - 20 Volt peak to peak delayed Reference to align
with Radio Vib.
Radio Vib Out - Not used when H8S Modem is installed.
06Oct99
Lift Card - Connects Main H8S Card to the Vibrator lift system.
Vib Pro Modem Card - Connects Voice Radio to main H8S Card.
Communicates serial data to H8S via radio link

VCO Vibrator Similarity modulation in Decoder
VCO demodulation in Encoder
Radio Vib Output in Encoder. Maximum output 10 volt peak to peak.
100% force = 5 volt peak to peak. Reference sim code 1 = 5 Volt
peak to peak.
Uses Hamming Coding to error correct radio data
Transmit data at 3153K baud
Feedback/Servo Card - Interfaces the Vib Pro Sharc Card to the hydraulic
servo system of the Vibrator.
Valve and Mass LVDT primary voltage generation

Demodulates LVDT secondary signal
Sets valve and mass feedback level
Sets attenuation level of Drive Signal from Sharc Card
Sums feedback's and drive to generate Torque Motor Current
Measures Torque Motor Current
+30 Volt and -30 Volt power supplies for Torque Motor and
Accelerometers
Offset Adjustment for centering Reaction Mass
Vib Pro Power Supply Card - Receives 9-36 volts DC and outputs regulated:
+5 volts DC @ 4 amps (4A)

+15 volts DC @ 0.65 amps (0.65A)
-15 volts DC @ 0.65 amps (0.65A)
Two set screws on Bircher Guide Rails must be loosened to remove
card.
Vib Pro case is used as Heat sink for power supplies.
Front Panel - Vib Pro front panel interfaces the following to the main
H8S board.
LCD display
Front panel Interface Card
Front panel Piezo-electric switch panel
LED's for Lift, Start and Stop buttons.
06Oct99
Serial Data and Link Port
TX2, RX2 Main H8S - Wired to Connector 3 on D-Sub panel. This serial
port is used to receive and transmit data to Computer. VPKOP, Encoder,
WVSIG and GPSMap all use this port.
UART A I/F board - RX only from GPS receiver. This port is used to
receive data from GPS receiver. TX not wired. The RX is wired on pin 3
on Connector 6 on the D-Sub panel.
UART B I/F board - Spare
UART C I/F board - Wired to Connector 2 on D-Sub panel. This serial port
is used by the Vib Pro Modem Card.
UART D I/F board - Wired to Connector 5 on D-Sub panel. This serial port
is used for the Vibrator Signature program in the Decoder.
CCC Serial connector is wired to Connector 4 on the D-Sub Panel. This

port is dedicated to radio or Wireline Sims with the VibQC program.
Other Internal Connections
Link Port H8S to Sharc - 4 bit Link port is used to transmit all
parameters from main H8S to Sharc board.
Link Port Sharc to Interface to H8S - 4 bit Link port is used to transmit
high speed data from Sharc to H8S. This port is used for Radio Reference
in Encoder and the Vibrator Signature data in Decoder.
TX0, RX0 Main H8S - Debug connector - This serial port is dedicated to
software development. The TX0 (TXD1) is wired to the CCC Module and may
be used in future systems.
RX2 Clk, Main H8S - Synchronous serial port is used to receive data from
Sharc processor.
06Oct99
DSS Page 10.1.1
Pelton Company
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
The Distributed Similarity System (DSS) can be used with the Pelton
Advance II Vibrator Control Electronics (VCE) or the Vib Pro System for
vibrator quality control. It attenuates VCE reference and accelerometer
signals, produces a ground force signal, and outputs low-level
differential signals suitable for a seismic data acquisition system. The
DSS-1 and DSS-2 have changes to make them more suitable for the Vib Pro
System.
INPUT
Advance II
In a vibrator which has a Version 5.1 connector panel manufactured
after January 1994, or which has been upgraded to the Version 5.1
connector panel, connect the Input Cable (WDSI) to the JF11
Vibra*Chek connector on the inside of the panel. Connect the other
end to the DSS Unit's 9-pin D-type connector. In vibrators with
older connector panels, one may upgrade the connector panel using
the instructions in this manual.
Vib Pro
On the DSS-2, the WDSI-2 cable supplied with the system, the 12 pin
connector goes to JF11 on the Connector Panel and the 6 pin MS
connector plugs into the DSS-2 unit.
OUTPUT
Advance II
The outputs are on 4 individual cables (WDSO), which the user may
terminate to match the seismic data acquisition system. Individual
cables allow flexibility in termination and in testing individual
signals. Connect the outputs to the data acquisition system inputs,
using care to note which signal connects to which channel.
Vib Pro
The output cable (WDSO-2) connects to the DSS-2 18 pin MS connector.
Connect the outputs to the data acquisition system inputs, using
care to note which signal connects to which channel.
09May01
DSS Page 10.1.2
Pelton Company
TESTING VIBRATOR POLARITY BY THE SEG POLARITY CONVENTION OF 1994
Using Pelton VCE and Ground Force phase control
When testing the polarity of the vibratory source/recording system, it is
important to focus on the polarity of the complete system, not just the
individual components. The following is an excerpt from "SEG Polarity
convention for vibratory source/recording systems" by R.A. Landrum, R.A.
Brook, and J.J. Sallas in Geophysics Vol. 59, No. 2 (Feb 1994). "Our
objective in establishing a convention is not to prescribe a set of
component level standards, but to define a system level polarity. For
example, not every company will use the same geophone polarity
convention, but these recommendations establish an overall system phase.
Similarly, different manufacturer's vibrator controllers internally
control the vibrator phasing to different values, but our setup procedure
compensates for that." In this regard, we suggest following the
procedures outlined by the SEG Polarity Convention.
1. Perform standard tests to confirm that all recording system filters
are alike and all cables and geophone strings are functional.
2. Tap the top of a spread geophone and record whether the first break
is positive or negative.
3. For Advance II VCE, select sweep type 800, for Vib Pro, in the Sweep
menu entry 3, set sweep type to Pulse. Both result in the Vibrator
Pulsing instead of sweeping. Be sure the reaction mass pulses
upward. Connect the Distributed Similarity System outputs to the
recording system in a manner which gives the following polarity:
Baseplate Accelerometer - First break same as spread geophone.
Reaction Mass Accelerometer - First break opposite spread geophone.
DSS Ground Force Output - First break opposite spread geophone.
The same wiring polarity should have been used for all 3.
4. Test for correct wiring.
C Zero the RM Weight on the Distributed Similarity Unit and take a
production sweep. Baseplate Acc. and Ground Force should be
identical except for gain.
C Set RM weight to the same value used in the VCE, zero the BP Weight,
and repeat. Reaction Mass Acc. and Ground Force should look the
same, and should be larger and less distorted at low frequencies
than Baseplate Acc.
5. Set BP Weight and RM weight to the same as used by the Vibrator
Control Electronics. Run the production sweep again and set the
Pilot sweep to be in phase with the signal connected to the DSS
Ground Force Output. This conforms to the SEG polarity convention.
09May01
DSS Page 10.1.3
Pelton Company
Ground Force Phase Lock Polarity
The DSS Ground Force output (marked Ground Force) is actually a Weighted
Sum approximation of the Vibrator's Ground Force. Positive voltage on
the DSS Ground Force output represents Compressive Ground Force. The
polarity of the recorded Weighted Sum signal will be determined by the
polarity of the geophones.
Case 1
If the polarity of the geophones/recording system are SEG Standard, (A
tap on top gives negative voltage). Then the DSS Compressive Ground
Force output must be Polarity Reversed to the recording system. In this
case a negative lobe of the weighted sum signal from the DSS corresponds
to positive downward compressive Ground Force. In this case, the SEG
polarity convention recommends this signal to be in phase with the pilot
sweep.
Case 2
If the polarity of the geophones/recording system are non SEG standard,
(A tap on top gives positive voltage). Then the DSS compressive Ground
Force output is not polarity reversed to the recording system. In this
case a positive lobe of the weighted sum signal, from the DSS,
corresponds to positive downward compressive Ground Force. In this case,
the SEG polarity convention recommends this signal to be in phase with
the pilot signal.
Shear Wave Vibrators
Imagine rolling a p-wave actuator over onto its right side (driver's
right). The polarities are the same as for a p-wave vibrator except that
what was up on a p-wave vibrator is to the right on a shear wave
vibrator.
09May01
DSS Page 10.1.4
Pelton Company
UPGRADING THE CONNECTOR PANEL
From Version 4 or 5 to Version 5.1
In January 1994, Pelton Company upgraded production to Version 5.1

connector panels for the Vibrator Control Electronics (VCE). This
version can be recognized by the flexible cable covered with "snake skin"
which plugs into the VCE. Earlier versions used a molded rubber jacketed
cable.
Version 5.1 connector panels have the signals needed by the Distributed
Similarity System available at the Vibra*Chek connector, the 12-pin
silver-colored circular connector on the inside of the vibrator cabin.
Earlier connector panels may be upgraded in the field to Version 5.1.
The upgrade can be done in the vibrator if you have adequate access to
the inside of the panel. Otherwise, it may be necessary to remove the
panel from the vibrator.
UPGRADE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the inside cover from the connector panel.
2. Remove the wire from pin 11 of the Vibra*Chek connector, JF11 and
insulate.
3. Remove any wires from pin 12 of the same connector. If there is more
than one wire, solder their ends together and insulate.
4. Add a wire from JF5 (Baseplate Acc) pin C to JF11, pin 10. This
signal is Similarity Baseplate Accelerometer Active.
5. Add a wire from JF7 (Mass Acc) pin C to JF11, pin 11. This signal is
Similarity Mass Accelerometer Active.
6. Add a wire from the center conductor of the True Reference BNC
connector to JF11, pin 12. This signal is True Reference.
7. Replace the connector panel cover.
09May01
DSS Page 10.1.5
Pelton Company
SPECIFICATIONS
INPUTS
True Reference, Reaction Mass Acceleration, and Baseplate Acceleration.
Single-ended, Resistance is 100 kilohms, Capacitance is 470 picofarads
SIGNAL FILTERING
All signals have single-zero low-cut filters at 0.133 Hz, and single-pole
high-cut filters at 13.2 KHz. The input connector has internal
capacitive RF filters.
CROSS-TALK
Between any two inputs: Less than -20 dB with open input.
OUTPUTS
True Reference, Reaction Mass Acceleration, Baseplate Acceleration, and
Ground Force. Differential signals with resistance of 90 to 100 Ohms,
nominal.
OUTPUT OFFSET
Less than 1 mV differential. Outputs are isolated from ground.
POWER
Voltage: 10 to 36 Volts DC, of either polarity.
Current: less than 50 milliamps.
CALIBRATION
Baseplate and Reaction Mass Accelerometer Outputs:
1 mV/g differential; or 1 mV/g peak, single-ended, tolerance +/- 1%
Ground Force Output:

25 microvolts differential per 100 pounds force, or
25 microvolts peak per 100 pounds force single-ended.
tolerance +/- 1% when mass and baseplate weights = 5,000 pounds
True Reference Output:

25 mV differential; or 25 mV peak, single-ended.
Calibration Notes:
1. Assuming 25mV/g accelerometers.
2. Assuming True Reference input is 10 V pk single ended
3. Calibrations are at room temperature.
09May01
DSS Page 10.1.6
Pelton Company
SPECIFICATIONS (Cont.)
SIGNAL POLARITY when used with ADVANCE II and p-wave vibrators:

Baseplate and Reaction Mass Accelerometer Outputs:
Downward impulsive accelerometer motion results in an initial
negative voltage.
Upward acceleration produces positive voltage.
Ground Force Output:

Compressive (downward) ground force results in positive voltage. A pulse
in which the reaction mass initially moves upward and the baseplate
downward results in an initial positive voltage.
Ground Force:
The force applied by the vibrator to the earth usually considered to be
the dynamic alternating component of total ground force. For a P-wave
vibrator in operating, but quiescent, attitude, the Ground Force is a
positive compressive bias created by the Holddown Force. In vibrating
mode, the oscillating driven Ground Force alternates about the bias to
result in alternately more and less compressive force than the bias.
True Reference Output from Pelton Vibrator Control Electronics (VCE):

With no "Phase Trim" (in ADVANCE II versions prior to 5.0), and with
ground force phase locked to the reference, True Reference is 180 degrees
out of phase with Compressive Ground Force.
Pilot Signal:
The reference generated in the recording truck commonly used as the
correlation operator.
Reaction Mass:
The member of a shaker assembly against which the hydraulic circuit
pushes in one direction as it pushes against the baseplate and stilt
structure in the other. The value of the Mass of the Reaction Mass
includes that of all assemblies rigidly attached to it (e.g., the servo-
valve) and half that of all flexible members (e.g., hydraulic hoses)
attached to it.
Weighted-sum Signal:
The weighted-sum of two accelerometer signals, the first accelerometer
being mounted to the reaction mass, and the other being mounted to the
baseplate assembly. The positive weights applied to the accelerometer
signals before summing are in proportion to the values of mass of the
assemblies to which they are respectively attached.
09May01
DSS Page 10.1.7
Pelton Company
The Weighted-Sum Signal is useful for approximating the value of the
alternating dynamic component of Ground Force. Using the polarity
convention for detectors, a negative lobe of the weighted-sum signal
corresponds to positive downward compressive ground force.
Polarity notes:
1. Every signal has zero or an even number of inversions.
2. In a true impulse, acceleration, velocity, and displacement are

all in phase with one another. In sinusoidal motion, velocity
lags acceleration by 90 degrees, and displacement lags
acceleration by 180 degrees. In sinusoidal motion,
accelerometer and force polarities specified apply to
acceleration and force, not to displacement.
3. The SEG updated "Polarity convention for vibratory source /

recording systems" published in Geophysics vol. 59, Feb. 1994
recommends as a basis for comparison, the True Reference
polarity used here, but the opposite polarities for baseplate
and reaction mass acceleration, and therefore ground force. Any
sensor polarity is allowed, so long as all are known and
properly accounted for. Since the True Reference sweep of the
Vibrator Control Electronics is 180 degrees out of phase with
compressive force, a vibrator controlled by ADVANCE II or Vib
Pro Vibrator Control Electronics has SEG POSITIVE polarity when
considered by itself. This assumes ground force phase control.
4. The ADVANCE II Encode Sweep Generator (ESG) and Vib Pro Encoder
(VPE) True Reference signal can be independently adjusted to any
phase; and therefore, can set the system to any polarity.
09May01

!"# $%&
' ( $

)'!*+&
$ $ $

$
, $

-.(
/$ -!$ $
( $ $

) 0
( -12
3$ (
(( ($
* ! 4 )
*
$ -*
$ -(
*#5
#
$&# ($
&# ( $
5$ 5 # 6
#*+
(
$ # 5 $ 5 # * +& $#

$
27Mar00

2

&$

6,$

$

$
71*,
81*,#
71-#*,
81-#*,#
,* 9 ' #(

9*+ &

27Mar00

:

' &)'!
2 !$$$
: $
7

6 6,$
8 ! $ #($
; ( *
< ) $

$ #

= ' $# #&

$
44&
>
&$ , 4 &
$
? ) 0 9 9

0 $
2 - $
-12
! $$ ( #

& 0#

27Mar00

7

@A2; B$
$8A2?: B$
+ A>??? B
C8 B
C B&

A>??; B
9$
2$
@A2;
A2?:
+ A>??;92A?=?<2

A?=:?
22? A2?:$

8? A:=8$
>; A==;$
=? A<:=$
78 A78$
27Mar00

8

'4/

&
'4/ #
*

* '4/
1?7$ #)'!

$$$
2 -! D
'4/ 8
PC-104 CPU
C4!
DC/DC Card
Controller
*2 4&
27Mar00

;

&#
$1 -! D !
9 ( (
CAUTION!
Exposed cards are very delicate and easily damaged. Severe

damage can occur if cards are dropped or mishandled in any
way. Take precautions to protect the card from Electro
Static Discharge (ESD) damage.
27Mar00

<

@

# + &
* 7
@
( ( 9

'4/

*7 + *
@ 1

!
4 '4/ + &#
( $ ' $#

! ( *+&
$
' $ #

#
(! $
' '4/ $ ( (

$$ 5'*
$ $
/$ $
@
$ ( &
./
!+E
5'*
/ $
27Mar00

=

4

$

,

'+
$'+
$'+ ) 4&
! (
. 4 $
4& ! (
+ *&
$
'+
'+
5.
.
'9
)
6
4
6
F B
! (
,B $

27Mar00

>

)1+/; 22

$

G+/G1)1+/
G!+/*
G1(
G@
/F@G1( $$$
G 5
/.G1 $
!F
/ H 4!
/.*'- E
/))!.+ /)
/.*'- E
*'5 A=?
4F** A:?
+/A@'-@#F)4
+ ' AG+/G@') ) EB

) )/**
+ ' @'-@AG!+/*
G
/' H
+ ' @'-@AG!+/*
G H
+ ' @'-@AG!+/*
G!55/ H
+ ' @'-@AG!+/*
G!
!+ H
+ ' @'-@AG!+/*
G)
++ H
+ ' @'-@AG!+/*
G!+'+ H
!9$!F
/ H 4!

I @//**
!
@G+/JG@
/F@
). H
5'. F +*/
/F@!+F/
)@
/F@
+G 5
/.G
)! H
27Mar00

?

-1)!$$$ (

( $& ! $
# &
& "9
&$$
(9
&$$
$ (
( ( # $
#&+H* 4
#& $
)$ !( KL (
#* ;
*;
$ $ )&)

K'4.!L $K!L!(
#* <
K'4) )'M L +H*
D$K'4) )'M L $+H*
!9$# ?27( 7?>;

*<!( )
27Mar00

9$ KL&
$
$ #*=
*= )#/** *> )#

/. ) 4&$ #
GG
* =

&$ )K/**L#K/.LK/.C4FL
&

& $ &
$

- $KL&
2 + /**$
: $ &$
$
KGL KGL
& (
$ $
7
$ '+

'+ $
F
8 /./.C4F$
; &
$$#* ?
*? #/.
< ' 9 $ $

&
9 $$
$E (
27Mar00

2

5 +. * $
$K*L$& #
*
* * $
6 $# & #

$# !
@
$ $ 6 $
N N
+. # $
& +.
!(
O

1 $(
4O
4&

27Mar00

Vib Net Page 11.2.1
Pelton Vib Net
DESCRIPTION
The Vib Net System is designed to provide navigation and Source Driven
Acquisition functionality to a Vibroseis crew. The Navigation feature
allows the vibrator operators to navigate to a given Flag position or any
locations, either by a displayed position or by Voice Commands from the
computer. The Center Of Gravity (COG) feature allows the Master Vibrator
to collect the position of each vibrator in the Vib Net Network, after
all the vibrators are in position and their Baseplates are down. Vib Net
calculates the COG of the Energy Source (Vibs). The information is
transmitted, through the Vib Pro Decoder (VPD) in the Master Vibrator,
back to the Recording Truck in a PSS Data format. The data is then
displayed on the Pelton Windows Map32 program, prior to Data
Acquisition.
INSTALLATION and REQUIREMENTS:

The Pelton Vib Net Computer, comport one (COM 1) connects to the Vib Pro
Decoder (VPD) Port 3. Comport two (COM 2) of the Vib Net Computer is
connected to the Vib Net Network Module (a low powered wireless network
device). The Vib Net power cable must be connected to vehicle power;
acceptable input voltage range is 12-18 VDC. The Vib Net assembly should
be mounted for optimum network communications within a Vibrator Group.
The unit should be aligned as close to vertical as possible. The Main
H8S should be Version 0032 or later.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.2
Vibrator Installation
Condition One
Original one radio for Vibroseis Control and GPS Data, and one radio for
Voice.
Note: A Jumper needs to be installed on Connector P6 of the VP Decoders

Jumpier between Pins 3 & 7 for Differential GPS Data.
Convert for Vib Net

A Radio Control box is installed in at least the Master Vib to allow the
Master Vib Pro Decoder (VPD) the use of both radios. The Voice radio
will be used by the VPD to send the Vib Net COG information to the
Recording Truck, without walking on any other vital data communications.
Note: Relay shown in its rest/dead state.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.3
Vibrator Installation
Condition Two
Original one radio for Vibroseis Control, and one radio for GPS Data.
The GPS data is multiplexed for a single radio, by using either a Radio
Communication Card (RCC) or a modem card.
Convert for Vib Net

Vibroseis Control and Master Vib Net use the same Radio.
Note: Disadvantage with this configuration is that the VCE and Master Vib
Net may try to transmit at the same time.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.4
Recording Truck Installation
Condition One
Original one radio for Vibroseis Control and GPS Data, and one radio for
Voice.
All Vibroseis Control and GPS data are multiplexed on a single radio, by
using a Radio Communication Card (RCC).
Convert for Vib Net
A second Radio Communication Card (RCC) is needed in the Recording Truck
connected between the Voice Radio, Computer and the Vib Pro Encoder to
act as traffic Cop. It is to prevent the Vib Net Data interfering with
the Normal transfer of data between Recording System, Computer, GPS-
Reference Station, and the Vib Pro Encoder.
Note: The Reference GPS Receiver is normally included in the VPE, but an
external Receiver maybe used. However, it must use the same Radio
used for Vibroseis Control as shown.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.5
Recording Truck Installation
Condition Two
Original one radio for Vibroseis Control, and one radio for GPS Data.
The GPS data is multiplexed for a single radio, by using either a Radio
Communication Card (RCC) or a modem card.
Convert for Vib Net

Vibroseis Control and Vib Net use the same Radio.
Notes: 1) The Reference GPS Receiver is normally included in the VPE, but
an external Receiver maybe used.
2) Disadvantage with this configuration is that the VCE and Master
Vib Net may try to transmit at the same time.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.6
STARTUP
When power is applied to the Vib Net Computer, the operating system loads
Windows CE and starts VIB NET.EXE. The program reads its settings from
the CE Registry and tries to load default source and receiver flags from
SP1 files. The file(s) must be placed on a PC Card and inserted into the
PCMCIA slot A or B of the computer. The default file names for the flags
must be SOURCE.SP1 and RECEIVER.SP1. If sound files are used, they
must be placed on the same PC Card, a list of files can be found in the
software section of this manual.
The program loads and saves a configuration file every time it starts and
exits. The configuration maybe changed by, first touching the File Menu
on the touch screen, then touch Computer Setup. No keyboard or pointing
device is needed.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.7
The first screen in the configuration procedure allows selecting
vibrators in the group for COG calculation. Touching the label or box
for each unit includes or releases that unit from the Group. The Master
unit should be included in the Group setup.
Click OK to proceed to the next screen in the configuration procedure,

shown below:
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.8
Select Master Vibrator if the current Vib Net Computer must be in charge
of COG calculation. If Master is selected, when the Save Changes
button is pressed, the current Vib Net Computer will save its
configuration to the Registry and will send group configuration to all
other Vib Net Computers in the group. The Group/Channel Code must match
on the receiving unit(s) in order to accept new configuration. If a
receiving unit was Master, it will change its status to Slave. To
receive a new configuration, the Vib Net Computer must have:
- Power ON
- Same Group/Channel number, as the transmitting unit
- ID in the list of selected units
To change SP1 file setup, use File menu and select SP1 File Setup.
The next screen in the configuration procedure allows Line and/or Station
number recognition setup.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.9
Master Computer features
The Master unit COG check-calculation is initiated automatically when the
operator sets the Baseplate down. The Master unit is responsible for
collecting ready and position status from other units in the group. When
all vibrators are ready (Baseplates down). The Master Computer
calculates COG and reports it to VPD. The VPD sends this message over
the normal VPD radio channel to the Recorder. The Master configuration
adds two options to the program:
Ready Override Button, manually forces the COG message to the Recorder.
It can be used in cases when one or more vibrators cannot be included in
COG-Ready message.
Manual start for the COG check/calculation can be used to send a COG
message to the Recorder in case the first one was not received. This is
done by pressing the Vib Net Master Button on the touch screen. The
Master Vib polls Slaves again, when the Vib Net Button is touched.
09Oct01
Vib Net Page 11.2.10
Navigation features
The following screen shows the navigation menu and its corresponding
buttons.
Zoom In maximum zoom in level is 10 meters
Zoom Out maximum zoom out level is 10 kilometers (10000 meters)
Source enable/disable source point display
Receiver enable/disable receiver point display
Trace enable/disable display log of past positions of Vib
Flag Numbers enable/disable source point flag number display, sensitive

to zoom level. It can only be enabled/disabled from the
menu.
Find Near Finds and selects nearest source flag for navigation
Flag destination.
Flag Number shows dialog Box or Window for manual entry of

destination flag number Line Station format.
Voice Nav enable/disable; voice navigation to destination source
flag. The program Voice Navigation generates voice
messages for the distances 300, 200, 100, 50, 40, 30, 20
and 10 meters; the direction in the following format: One
oclock, Two oclock and etc. The voice files must be
loaded on the PC Card for this feature to work correctly.
It can only be enabled/disabled from the menu.
09Oct01
Example of source flag number entry:
Scroll bar is used to scroll up or down through flag positions.
09Oct01
Upgrading software
To upgrade software on the Vib Net Computer, copy the new version of
VIB NET.EXE to the PC card. When the program is executed from the Vib
Net computer, the PC card will load the newer version. The files that
should be included on the PC card are listed below:
VIB NET.EXE Pelton Vib Net Program
SOURCE.SP1 Is one of the default file names the program is

looking for at startup. (The flag layout SP1 file.)
RECEIVER.SP1 Is another of the default file names the program is

looking for at startup. (The geophone layout SP1
file.)
*.WAV Sound files can be downloaded off the Pelton CD dated

Nov 2000 or later, currently all files are in
English. User can create different language WAV
files with the use of a microphone and the sound
recorder located with most Windows 9x versions. Some
computers must have a sound card to be able to record
sound. The sound files will require the files to be
saved as the same name as the English files. Making
a backup of the WAV files is recommended before over
writing the WAV files.
09Oct01
Appendix A - Page 12.1.1
BACKPLANE SIGNAL ABBREVIATIONS
FILTER CARD
+15V POSITIVE 15 VOLTS
+5VD POSITIVE 5 VOLTS DIGITAL
-15V NEGATIVE 15 VOLTS
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
FLB ACC A (OUTPUT) FILTERED LOOP BASEPLATE ACCELERATION ACTIVE
FLM ACC A (OUTPUT) FILTERED LOOP REACTION MASS ACCELERATION ACTIVE
FSB ACC A (OUTPUT) FILTERED SIMILARITY BASEPLATE ACCELERATION ACTIVE
FSM ACC A (OUTPUT) FILTERED SIMILARITY REACTION MASS ACCELERATION
ACTIVE
LBACCA (INPUT) LOOP BASEPLATE ACCELERATION ACTIVE
LBACCR (INPUT) LOOP BASEPLATE ACCELERATION RETURN
LMACCA (INPUT) LOOP REACTION MASS ACCELERATION ACTIVE
LMACCR (INPUT) LOOP REACTION MASS ACCELERATION RETURN
SBACCA (INPUT) SIMILARITY BASEPLATE ACCELERATION ACTIVE
SMACCA (INPUT) SIMILARITY REACTION MASS ACCELERATION ACTIVE
TREF (INPUT) TRUE REFERENCE
TREF.F (OUTPUT) FILTERED TRUE REFERENCE
A/D-D/A CARD
/RES (INPUT) SYSTEM RESET SIGNAL
+5VA POSITIVE 5 VOLTS ANALOG
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
FLB ACC A (INPUT) FILTERED LOOP BASEPLATE ACCELERATION ACTIVE
FLM ACC A (INPUT) FILTERED LOOP REACTION MASS ACCELERATION ACTIVE
FSB ACC A (INPUT) FILTERED SIMILARITY BASEPLATE ACCELERATION ACTIVE
FSM ACC A (INPUT) FILTERED SIMILARITY REACTION MASS ACCELERATION ACTIVE
LMOUT (OUTPUT) GAINED LOOP REACTION MASS ACCELERATION SIGNAL
MFB (INPUT) MASS DISPLACEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL
S_/RD (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) READ SIGNAL
S_/WR (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) WRITE SIGNAL
SA0-SA7 (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) ADDRESS BUS
SD0-SD15 (BIDIR) SHARC (DSP) SYSTEM DATA BUS
SERVO M (INPUT) MULTIPLEXER INPUT
TREF.F (INPUT) FILTERED TRUE REFERENCE
VFB (INPUT) SERVO-VALVE FEEDBACK SIGNAL
WL REF(WL REF1) (OUTPUT) DECODER WIRELINE REFERENCE
ENCODER WIRELINE REFERENCE #1
VIB OUT(WL REF2) (OUTPUT) DECODER VIBRATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
TREF(TREF1) (OUTPUT) DECODER TRUE REFERENCE
ENCODER TRUE REFERENCE #1
DRV(TREF2) (OUTPUT) DECODER DRIVE SIGNAL
05Oct99
SHARC CARD
/EXTEN (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) ENABLE SIGNAL
/PRE START (INPUT) SWEEP START REQUEST
/T0 (OUTPUT) SAMPLE RATE SYSTEM INTERRUPT
BCLK (OUTPUT) SYSTEM CLOCK
CLK/4 (OUTPUT) SYSTEM CLOCK/4
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
EXTAS (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) ADDRESS STROBE
FREQ ADJ (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) CLOCK CONTROL VOLTAGE
KEYSTART (INPUT) SWEEP START REQUEST FROM KEYBOARD
L0ACK (INPUT) LINK0 DATA ACKNOWLEDGE
L0CLK (OUTPUT) LINK0 SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK
L0DAT0-L0DAT3 (OUTPUT) LINK0 DATA BUS
L2CLK (INPUT) LINK2 SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK
L2DAT0-L2DAT3 (INPUT) LINK2 DATA BUS
S_/RD (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) READ SIGNAL
S_/WR (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) WRITE SIGNAL
SA0-SA7 (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) ADDRESS BUS
SCLK0 (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) SERIAL SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK
SD0-SD15 (BIDIR) SHARC (DSP) SYSTEM DATA BUS
SDR0 (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) SERIAL DATA INPUT
SDT0 (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
SHARC_SN (BIDIR) SHARC (DSP) CARD SERIAL NUMBER DATA LINE
GPS CARD
CTS_B (INPUT) GPS CHANNEL B CLEAR TO SEND
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
PPS (OUTPUT) GPS PULSE PER SECOND
RTS_B (OUTPUT) GPS CHANNEL B REQUEST TO SEND
RXD_A (INPUT) GPS CHANNEL A SERIAL DATA RECEIVE
RXD_B (INPUT) GPS CHANNEL B SERIAL DATA RECEIVE
TXD_A (OUTPUT) GPS CHANNEL A SERIAL DATA TRANSMIT
TXD_B (OUTPUT) GPS CHANNEL B SERIAL DATA TRANSMIT
05Oct99
FEEDBACK DETECTOR/SERVO CARD
/EXTEN (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) ENABLE SIGNAL
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
BATTCH (INPUT) BATTERY VOLTAGE LEVEL SIGNAL
CLK/4 (INPUT) SYSTEM CLOCK/4
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
DRV (INPUT) DRIVE SIGNAL
EXTAS (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) ADDRESS STROBE
LMOUT (INPUT) GAINED LOOP REACTION MASS ACCELERATION SIGNAL
MFB (OUTPUT) MASS DISPLACEMENT FEEDBACK SIGNAL
MLVDTPA (OUTPUT) MASS DISPLACEMENT SENSOR PRIMARY CIRCUIT ACTIVE
MLVDTPR (OUTPUT) MASS DISPLACEMENT SENSOR PRIMARY CIRCUIT RETURN
MLVDTSA (INPUT) MASS DISPLACEMENT SENSOR SECONDARY CIRCUIT ACTIVE
MLVDTSR (INPUT) MASS DISPLACEMENT SENSOR SECONDARY CIRCUIT RETURN
SD0-SD7 (INPUT) SHARC (DSP) SYSTEM DATA BUS
SERVO M (OUTPUT) MULTIPLEXER OUTPUT
TMA (OUTPUT) TORQUE MOTOR ACTIVE
TMR (INPUT) TORQUE MOTOR RETURN
VFB (OUTPUT) SERVO VALVE FEEDBACK SIGNAL
VLVDTPA (OUTPUT) SERVO VALVE DISPLACEMENT SENSOR PRIMARY CIRCUIT
ACTIVE
VLVDTPR (OUTPUT) SERVO VALVE DISPLACEMENT SENSOR PRIMARY CIRCUIT
RETURN
VLVDTSA (INPUT) SERVO VALVE DISPLACEMENT SENSOR SECONDARY CIRCUIT
ACTIVE
VLVDTSR (INPUT) SERVO VALVE DISPLACEMENT SENSOR SECONDARY CIRCUIT
RETURN
LIFT CARD
-15V NEGATIVE15 VOLTS
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
B/CS_0 (INPUT) ENABLE SIGNAL
B_/RD (INPUT) H8S READ SIGNAL
B_/WR (INPUT) H8S WRITE SIGNAL
BATT.R. (INPUT) BATTERY RETURN
BATT+9-36V (INPUT) BATTERY VOLTAGE
BATTCH (OUTPUT) BATTERY VOLTAGE LEVEL SIGNAL
BD0-BD7 (BIDIR) H8S SYSTEM DATA BUS
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
DN (OUTPUT) DOWN
FUP (OUTPUT) FULL UP
HUP (OUTPUT) HALF UP
LIFTSW (INPUT) LIFT SWITCH SIGNAL
RMDA (INPUT) REMOTE DOWN ACTIVE
RMDR (INPUT) REMOTE DOWN RETURN
XD (INPUT) PRESSURE SENSOR SIGNAL
05Oct99
H8S CARD
/PRE START (OUTPUT) SWEEP START REQUEST
/RES MAN (INPUT) MANUAL RESET SIGNAL
/RES (OUTPUT) SYSTEM RESET SIGNAL
/T0 (INPUT) SAMPLE RATE SYSTEM INTERRUPT
+5VD POSITIVE 5V DIGITAL
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
B/CS_0, B/CS_3,
B/CS_4, B/CS_5,
B/CS_7, B/CS_8 (OUTPUT) ENABLE SIGNALS
B_/RD (OUTPUT) H8S READ SIGNAL
B_/WR (OUTPUT) H8S WRITE SIGNAL
BA0-BA3 (OUTPUT) H8S SYSTEM ADDRESS BUS
BCLK (INPUT) SYSTEM CLOCK
CONTR (OUTPUT) EXTERNAL MODEM CONTROL SIGNAL
D_/CS (OUTPUT) DISPLAY ENABLE SIGNAL
D_/RD (OUTPUT) DISPLAY READ SIGNAL
D_/WR (OUTPUT) DISPLAY WRITE SIGNAL
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
FREQ ADJ (OUTPUT) SHARC (DSP) CLOCK CONTROL VOLTAGE
KB0-KB4 (OUTPUT) KEYBOARD ROWS READ SIGNAL
KEYSTART (OUTPUT) SWEEP START REQUEST FROM KEYBOARD
L2CLK (OUTPUT) LINK2 SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK
L2DAT0-L2DAT3 (OUTPUT) LINK2 DATA BUS
LINK0IRQ (INPUT) LINK INTERRUPT
MAINSN (BIDIR) BACKPLANE SERIAL NUMBER DATA LINE
MODEMFLG (INPUT) START CODE FLAG
PPS (INPUT) GPS PULSE PER SECOND
RADTXSTART (OUTPUT) RADIO TRANSMISSION REQUEST FOR MODEM
RSTARTIRQ (INPUT) START INTERRUPT
RXD2 (INPUT) H8S CHANNEL 2 SERIAL DATA INPUT
SBACCA (INPUT) SIMILARITY BASEPLATE ACCELERATION ACTIVE
SBCCC (OUTPUT) COMPUTER COMMUNICATION CARD SERIAL BUS
SCLK0 (INPUT) SERIAL SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK
SDR0 (INPUT) SERIAL DATA INPUT
SDT0 (OUTPUT) SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
SEL1 (OUTPUT) DISPLAY CONTROL SIGNAL #1
SEL2 (OUTPUT) DISPLAY CONTROL SIGNAL #2
SHARC_SN (BIDIR) SHARC (DSP) CARD SERIAL NUMBER DATA LINE
SIMFLG (OUTPUT) SIMILARITY TRANSMISSION REQUEST FOR MODEM
SMACCA (INPUT) SIMILARITY REACTION MASS ACCELERATION ACTIVE
T.B. (OUTPUT) TIME BREAK
TXD2 (OUTPUT) H8S CHANNEL 2 SERIAL DATA OUTPUT
UART1IRQ,
UART2IRQ (INPUT) UART INTERRUPTS
V0 (OUTPUT) DISPLAY CONTRAST CONTROL VOLTAGE
05Oct99
INTERFACE CARD
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
B/CS_3, B/CS_4
B/CS_5, B/CS_7,
B/CS_8 (INPUT) ENABLE SIGNALS
B_/RD (INPUT) H8S READ SIGNAL
B_/WR (INPUT) H8S WRITE SIGNAL
BA0-BA3 (INPUT) H8S SYSTEM ADDRESS BUS
CTSC (INPUT) UARTC CLEAR TO SEND
CTSD (INPUT) UARTD CLEAR TO SEND
DCDC (INPUT) UARTC DATA CARRIER DETECT
DCDD (INPUT) UARTD DATA CARRIER DETECT
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
DSRC (INPUT) UARTC DATA SET READY
DSRD (INPUT) UARTD DATA SET READY
DTRC (OUTPUT) UARTC DATA TERMINAL READY
DTRD (OUTPUT) UARTD DATA TERMINAL READY
ENCODERSTARTA (INPUT) ENCODER START ACTIVE
ENCODERSTARTR (INPUT) ENCODER START RETURN
L0ACK (OUTPUT) LINK0 DATA ACKNOWLEDGE
L0CLK (INPUT) LINK0 SYNCHRONOUS CLOCK
L0DAT0-L0DAT3 (INPUT) LINK0 DATA BUS
LINK0IRQ (OUTPUT) LINKO INTERRUPT
MODSTART (INPUT) RADIO START FROM MODEM
RADIO REF (OUTPUT) RADIO REFERENCE
RADIO VIB OUT (OUTPUT) RADIO VIB OUT
REC STA (OUTPUT) RECORDER START ACTIVE
REC STR (OUTPUT) RECORDER START RETURN
RSTARTIRQ (OUTPUT) START INTERRUPT
RTSC (OUTPUT) UARTC REQUEST TO SEND SIGNAL
RTSD (OUTPUT) UARTD REQUEST TO SEND
RXA(TXD_A) (INPUT) UARTA SERIAL DATA RECEIVE
RXB (INPUT) UARTB SERIAL DATA RECEIVE
RXC (INPUT) UARTC SERIAL DATA RECEIVE
RXD (INPUT) UARTD SERIAL DATA RECEIVE
T.B. (INPUT) TIME BREAK
T.B.A (OUTPUT) TIME BREAK ACTIVE
T.B.R (OUTPUT) TIME BREAK RETURN
TXC (OUTPUT) UARTC SERIAL DATA TRANSMIT
TXD (OUTPUT) UARTD SERIAL DATA TRANSMIT
UART1IRQ,
UART2IRQ (OUTPUT) UART INTERRUPTS
05Oct99
COMPUTER COMMUNICATION CARD
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
CTS1 CCC (INPUT) COMPUTER COMMUNICATION CARD CLEAR TO SEND
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
RADIO REF (INPUT) RADIO REFERENCE
RADIO VIB OUT (INPUT) RADIO VIB OUT
RTS1 CCC (OUTPUT) COMPUTER COMMUNICATION CARD REQUEST TO SEND
RX1 CCC (INPUT) COMPUTER COMMUNICATION CARD SERIAL DATA RECEIVE
SBCCC (INPUT) COMPUTER COMMUNICATION CARD SERIAL BUS
T.B. (INPUT) TIME BREAK
TX1 CCC (OUTPUT) COMPUTER COMMUNICATION CARD SERIAL DATA TRANSMIT
WL REF(WL REF1) (INPUT) DECODER WIRELINE REFERENCE
VIB OUT(WL REF2) (INPUT) DECODER VIBRATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
TREF(TREF1) (INPUT) DECODER TRUE REFERENCE
MODEM CARD
/T0 (INPUT) SAMPLE RATE SYSTEM INTERRUPT
ACOM ANALOG COMMON
DCOM DIGITAL COMMON
MIC A (OUTPUT) MICROPHONE ACTIVE
MIC R (OUTPUT) MICROPHONE RETURN
MODEMFLG (OUTPUT) START CODE FLAG
MODSTART (OUTPUT) RADIO START
PTT A (OUTPUT) PUSH-TO-TALK ACTIVE
PTT R (OUTPUT) PUSH-TO-TALK RETURN
RADIO VIB OUT (OUTPUT) RADIO VIB OUT
RADTXSTART (INPUT) RADIO TRANSMISSION REQUEST FOR MODEM
RXC(TXD2) (OUTPUT) MODEM SERIAL DATA RECEIVE #2
SIMFLG (INPUT) SIMILARITY TRANSMISSION REQUEST FOR MODEM
SPKR A (INPUT) SPEAKER ACTIVE
SPKR R (INPUT) SPEAKER RETURN
TXC(RXD2) (INPUT) MODEM SERIAL DATA TRANSMIT #2
VIB OUT (INPUT) VIBRATOR OUTPUT SIGNAL
05Oct99
Pelton Company, Inc. Appendix B - Page 12.2.1
VIB PRO BACKPLANE MAP

Table NOTES: (I) Input, FILTER A/D-D/A SHARC GPS FEEDBACK LIFT H8S INTERFACE COMPUTER MODEM
(O) Output, CARD CARD CARD CARD DETECTOR/ CARD CARD CARD COMMUNICATION CARD
(B) Bi-directional
(X) - Power Connections
SERVO CARD CARD
/EXTEN (O) (I)
/PRE START (I) (O)
/RES MAN (I)
/RES (I) (I) (O) (I) (I) (I)
/T0 (O) (I) (I)
+15V X X X X X X X X
+30V X
+5VA X
+5VD X X X X X X X X X X
-15V X X X X X X X X
-24V X
ACOM X X X X X X X X
B/CS_0 (I) (O)
B/CS_3 (O) (I)
B/CS_4 (O) (I)
B/CS_5 (O) (I)
B/CS_7 (O) (I)
B/CS_8 (O) (I)
B_/RD (I) (O) (I)
B_/WR (I) (O) (I)
BA0-BA3 (O) (I)
BATT.R. (I)
BATT+9-36V (I)
BATTCH (I) (O)
BCLK (O) (I) (I) (I)
BD0-BD7 (B) (B) (B)
CLK/4 (O) (I)
CONTR (O)
CTS_B (I)
CTS1 CCC (I)
CTSC (I)
CTSD (I)
D_/CS (O)
D_/RD (O)
D_/WR (O)
DCDC (I)
DCDD (I)
DCOM X X X X X X X X X X
DN (O)
DRV(TREF2) (O) (I)
DSRC (I)
DSRD (I)
DTRC (O)
DTRD (O)
ENCODERSTARTA (I)
ENCODERSTARTR (I)
20Sep99
(B) Bi-directional
SERVO CARD CARD
EXTAS (O) (I)
FLB ACC A (O) (I)
FLM ACC A (O) (I)
FREQ ADJ (I) (O)
FSB ACC A (O) (I)
FSM ACC A (O) (I)
FUP (O)
HUP (O)
KB0-KB4 (O)
KEYSTART (I) (O)
L0ACK (I) (O)
L0CLK (O) (I)
L0DAT0-L0DAT3 (O) (I)
L2CLK (I) (O)
L2DAT0-L2DAT3 (I) (O)
LBACCA (I) (I) (I)
LBACCR (I)
LIFTSW (I)
LINK0IRQ (I) (O)
LMACCA (I) (I) (I) (I)
LMACCR (I)
LMOUT (O) (I)
MAINSN (B)
MFB (I) (O)
MIC A (O)
MIC R (O)
MLVDTPA (O)
MLVDTPR (O)
MLVDTSA (I)
MLVDTSR (I)
MODEMFLG (I) (O)
MODSTART (I) (O)
PPS (O) (I)
PTT A (O)
PTT R (O)
RADIO REF (O) (I)
RADIO VIB OUT (O)*(1) (I) (O)
RADTXSTART (O) (I)
REC STA (O)
REC STR (O)
RMDA (I)
RMDR (I)
RSTARTIRQ (I) (O)
RTS_B (O)
RTS1 CCC (O)
RTSC (O)
RTSD (O)
RX1 CCC (I)
RXA(TXD_A) (O) (I)
*(1) Not Used 20Sep99
(B) Bi-directional
SERVO CARD CARD
RXB (I)
RXC(TXD2) (I) (O)
RXD (I)
RXD_A (I)
RXD_B (I)
RXD2 (I)
S_/RD (I) (O)
S_/WR (I) (O)
SA0-SA7 (I) (O)
SBACCA (I) (I)
SBCCC (O) (I)
SCLK0 (O) (I)
SD0-SD15 (B) (B)
SD0-SD7 (I)
SDR0 (I) (O)
SDT0 (O) (I)
SEL1 (O)
SEL2 (O)
SERVO M (I) (O)
SHARC_SN (B) (B)
SIMFLG (O) (I)
SMACCA (I) (I)
SPKR A (I)
SPKR R (I)
T.B. (O) (I) (I)
T.B.A (O)
T.B.R (O)
TMA (O)
TMR (I)
TREF(TREF1) (I) (O) (I)
TREF.F (O) (I)
TX1 CCC (O)
TXC(RXD2) (O) (I)
TXD (O)
TXD_A (O)
TXD_B (O)
TXD2 (O)
UART1IRQ (I) (O)
UART2IRQ (I) (O)
V0 (O)
VFB (I) (O)
VIB OUT(WL REF2) (O) (I) (I)
VLVDTPA (O)
VLVDTPR (O)
VLVDTSA (I)
VLVDTSR (I)
WLREF(WLREF1) (O) (I)
XD (I)
20Sep99
Appendix C - Page 12.3.1
PELTON VIB PRO
APPENDIX C
GLOSSARY OF TERMS
ACC - See Accelerometer.
Accelerometer - An electronic device used to measure acceleration.
Actuator - The components of a vibroseis vibrator unit directly involved

in generating energy to be transferred into the ground beneath the
vibrator for seismic exploration. See Reaction Mass and Baseplate.
Baseplate - The part of a servo-hydraulic actuator (seismic energy

source) that contacts the ground.
Baseplate Weight - The weight of the baseplate and all pieces of the
vibrator that are attached rigidly to it. This usually includes the
weight of the: Baseplate, Actuator Piston, Stilt Structure, 1/2 the
weight of any radius arms connected to the baseplate, any "road pad" or
other attachments to the underside of the baseplate, etc.
Checksum - A value used for error-detection. It is a numerical value

based on the number of set bits in a message or data set.
Sweep Checksum - A number based on the set bits in the data

describing each of the samples of a sweep.
Vib Checksum - A number based on the set bits of selected items in

the data set generated from Keyboard Parameter entry. This does not
include Sweep Checksum.
Correlation - The mathematical process used to compress the data produced

by the Vibroseis method of seismic exploration into data that is very
similar to that produced by impulsive sources. The characteristics of
the resulting data indicate the degree of similarity between two signals.
For seismic purposes, one of the two signals will be a Reference or Pilot
sweep. The second signal will usually be the signal received from a
geophone or group of geophones or a similarity signal from a vibrator.
The process is also often used for Quality Control purposes.
DGPS - Differential GPS. A technique of improving the accuracy of the

position solution from a GPS receiver by using correction data from a GPS
Reference Station.
05Oct99
Decoder - A Vib Pro unit configured to receive start commands from an
Encoder and control a seismic energy source, usually a servo-hydraulic
vibrator.
Decoder Group - See Group
DOP - Dilution of Precision. Indicates the accuracy of GPS position

information. Increasing numbers indicate less accurate position data.
The values typically range from 1 for very accurate data to 7 for
marginally useful data.
GDOP - Geometric Dilution of Precision. A measure of accuracy in

position and time.
HDOP - Horizontal Dilution Of Precision. A measure of accuracy in

latitude and longitude.
PDOP - Positional Dilution Of Precision. A measure of accuracy in

latitude, longitude, and altitude.
TDOP - Geometric Dilution of Precision. A measure of range errors

caused by user clock offset from GPS time.
VDOP - Vertical Dilution Of Precision. A measure of accuracy in

elevation.
DR Valve - A servo valve with the DR servo valve modification installed.

This modification converts a flow control servo valve to a pressure
control servo valve, resulting in significant benefits for servo
hydraulic vibrators.
DSS - Distributed Similarity System. Conditions Vib Pro True Reference

and accelerometer signals, and generates a Ground Force signal. It
converts them into low-level differential signals suitable for
application to geophone inputs of a seismic data acquisition system.
Encoder - A Vib Pro unit configured to send start commands to other Vib
Pro units (Decoders) and to receive quality control reports and radio
similarity signals from Decoders. This unit is interfaced with a
recording system. Also, a Pelton computer program used to control a Shot
Pro Encoder and to interface it with a seismic acquisition system.
EncSetup - A program used to configure the Pelton Encoder program.
05Oct99
ESG - Encode Sweep Generator. A unit of Advance I or Advance II Pelton
equipment that performed the functions of a Vib Pro operating in the
Encoder mode. See Encoder.
FMETER - Force Meter. A system used to measure and analyze the Ground
Force produced by a Vibrator.
Fundamental Force - See Ground Force, Fundamental Force
GPS - Global Positioning System. A system of Earth orbiting satellites

and receivers. The satellites transmit radio signals, to the receivers,
which compute their positions relative to a mathematical model of the
Earth. The system also includes auxiliary equipment to enhance the
accuracy of the calculated positions. Receivers are typically
incorporated into or connected to Vib Pro units. GPS data is often
included in the PSS and VSS data.
GPSMAP - A Pelton computer program used to display the positions of

Vibrators, Shooters, and Support Vehicles, relative to source points,
receivers points, cultural and geographic features.
GPS Reference Station - A GPS receiver, in a fixed and accurately defined

position, used for sending correction data to mobile GPS receivers. This
correction data is used to increase the accuracy of the positions
generated by the mobile receivers.
Ground Force - The signal generated by a vibrator that is transferred

into the ground. Sometimes called Vector Sum or Weighted Sum Force. The
Ground Force signal is derived from the sum of the baseplate acceleration
multiplied by its weight plus the acceleration of the reaction mass
multiplied by its weight.
Fundamental Force - The part of a vibrator's Ground Force signal

remaining when all distortion components, harmonic and otherwise,
have been removed.
RMS Force - The raw Ground Force Signal, resolved for Root Mean
Square power equivalency.
Peak Force - The component of Ground Force indicating one or more of

the extremes of the vibrator's ground force signal.
Absolute Peak Force - The maximum values of Ground Force in the
direction that causes either increased or decreased compression of
the ground beneath the baseplate, whichever is greater, in a given
cycle of the sweep.
05Oct99
Peak Compression Force - The maximum values of Ground Force in the
direction that causes increased compression of the ground beneath
the baseplate.
Peak Non-Compression Force - The maximum values of Ground Force in

the direction causes reduced compression of the ground beneath the
baseplate.
Group - One or more vibrator(s) operating in unison to form a seismic

energy source. Vibrators are often organized into two groups so that one
group can be moving while the other group is sweeping. Other uses for
vibrator grouping are also used.
H8S - The Hitachi H8S microprocessor, Used on the H8S and Modem Modules.
KOP - A Pelton computer program, Keyboard Operation. See VPKop.
Loop - A Control Loop, including: (1.) Driving components, (2.) a driven

device, (3.) Measuring the response of the device, and (4.) Modifying the
drive signal to the device so that the device's response is like that
desired. Also, components of a vibrator's control system such as
accelerometers, filters, amplifiers, etc., used to measure or condition
signals from it, or generate or modify the drive signal going to it, for
the purpose of controlling the energy generated by that vibrator. Also,
systems used to control components of the signal produced by a vibrator
such as phase or force, e.g. Phase Control Loop. See also Similarity.
LVDT - Linear Variable Differential Transformer. A device used to

measure the position of some component of a vibrator relative to some
other component;
MLVDT - The device used to measure the position of the Reaction Mass
relative to the Baseplate of the vibrator.
VLVDT - The device used to measure the position of the spool of the
main stage of the servo valve relative the housing around it.
NMEA - National Marine Electronics Association. The Standard for

Interfacing Marine Electronics Devices.
Notebook VCA - Notebook Vibrator Computer Analysis system. Hardware and

computer programs used to record and analyze similarities from a vibrator
and other signals.
Peak Force - See Ground Force, Peak Force
05Oct99
PPS - Pulse Per Second. A very accurate timing signal available from
most GPS receivers.
PSS - Post Sweep Service. Quality control data that is normally

transmitted from Decoders to an Encoder by radio. This data may be
transmitted after each sweep or during subsequent sweeps.
PSSXVS - A Pelton computer program used to condense large amounts of PSS

data into manageable text and graphics displays.
Radio Reference - See Reference, Radio Reference
Radio Similarity - See Similarity, Radio Similarity.
Reaction Mass - The components of a vibrator's actuator against which the

hydraulic circuit pushes as it pushes the baseplate structure in the
opposite direction. Typically a heavy structure including the servo
valve and hydraulic cylinder part of the actuator.
Reaction Mass Weight - The weight of the reaction mass and all pieces of
the vibrator that are attached rigidly to it. This usually includes the
weight of the reaction mass including added mass weights, the servo valve
and may include the weights of parts of the hoses attached to the
reaction mass.
Reference - Signals used as a standards against which other signals are

compared for quality control testing. Also the sweep used as the
correlation operator for correlated seismic data.
Radio Reference - A signal generated by a Vib Pro Encoder. Radio

Similarity from the Decoder should compare favorably to Radio
Reference. Made up of True Reference which is phase and time
shifted to match the time and phase shifts introduced into the Radio
Similarity signal path.
True Reference - A signal generated by a Vib Pro Encoder used for

correlating the data received from the sensors (typically geophones
or hydrophones). Should be used for comparison with similarities
generated by the DSS (Distributed Similarity System).
Wireline Reference - A signal generated by a Vib Pro Encoder or

Decoder. SV Out (Wireline Similarity Signal) should compare
favorably with Wireline Reference. Made up of True reference which
is phase shifted to match the phase shift introduced into the
Wireline Similarity signal path (not used for DSS similarities).
05Oct99
RMS Force - See Ground Force, RMS force
RTCM - Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services SC-104. The

recommended standard for transmitting GPS correction information from a
GPS Reference Station to allow mobile receivers to operate in the
differential Mode.
RTI - Recording Truck Interface. Hardware and software used to

facilitate the exchange of data between a Vib Pro or Shot Pro Encoder and
the Seismic Acquisition system it is working with.
RTK - Real Time Kinematic A method of GPS position measurement and error
correction that typically gives improved accuracy.
SCIO - A function of the Sweep program that allows sweep data generated
by other programs to be formatted and used by the Advance II and Advance
III systems.
Servo Valve - The component of a vibroseis actuator that converts

electrical signals to hydraulic signals to drive the actuator.
SHARC - The Analog Devices Super Harvard Architecture Computer (SHARC),

a Digital Signal Processor (DSP).
Similarity - Components such as accelerometers, filters, amplifiers,

etc., used to measure or condition signals from a vibrator for the
purpose accurately indicating the signature of that vibrator, usually
Ground Force. These components are redundant to Loop components and
separate from them, an independent measurement of vibrator performance.
Also, plots or data sets derived from the comparison of Similarity
Signals from a vibrator with Reference signals.
Radio Similarity - A filtered and conditioned signal, showing the

vibration of the actuator, returned by radio from a vibrator
(usually ground force) for Quality Control analysis and
documentation. This signal originates at the Vib Pro Decoder and is
finally detected in and available from the Vib Pro Encoder.
Wireline Similarity - A filtered and conditioned signal, showing the

vibration of the actuator. May be used at the vibrator or sent to
the recording truck via the acquisition system. Used for Quality
Control analysis and recording. The signal is also called
Similarity Vibrator Out or SV Out. See DSS.
05Oct99
SPE - Shot Pro Encoder. A Shot Pro unit, normally interfaced with a
seismic acquisition system, used to send start commands to decoders and
to receive quality control data from them.
SPD - Shot Pro Decoder. A Shot Pro unit operating used to detonate
explosive charges or trigger air guns.
SWEEP, STORED, and STORED 32 - Pelton Computer Programs used to generate

sweeps that cannot be generated through keyboard entry. Requires the
addition of optional PCMCIA Flash Ram Cards.
Sweep Checksum - See Checksum
Sweep Profile - A term used to define a set of operational parameters to

be used when a particular sweep is to be executed. Includes: Sweep
Number, Sweep Source, Target Force, Start Code, Crew Number, and Vibrator
Group to sweep.
Time Break - A signal used to indicate start of sweep for vibroseis or

application of detonation or trigger voltage to impulse sources.
True Reference - See Reference, True Reference
UART - Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter
UART D - Port 5 on the D SUB Panel of a Vib Pro. The port used to pass
data to and from a computer used for recording VSS data.
VibDisplay - Part of VPKop, A Pelton computer program. VibDisplay allows

the user to monitor several aspects of vibrator operation such as phase
error, force levels, displacements, etc., easily and quickly.
Vector Sum Force - An approximation of Ground Force from a seismic

vibrator. Derived from measuring Reaction Mass Acceleration (RMA) and
Base Plate Acceleration (BPA) of a seismic vibrator, multiplying those
signals by the Mass of the Reaction Mass Structure (RMM) and the Mass of
the Base Plate Structure (BPM), respectively, and summing the resulting
signals together. e.g. (RMA x RMM) + (BPA x BPA) = Vector Sum Force.
Also called Weighted Sum.
Vib Checksum - See Checksum
VibKop - A Pelton computer program used to send, receive and store

operational parameters for Pelton Vibroseis equipment. See VPKop
05Oct99
Vibra*Chek - A family of Mathematical algorithms used to analyze vibrator
performance.
Vibrator - A unit, usually self propelled, including a power source -

usually hydraulic, vibroseis actuator - usually servo-hydraulic, a
Decoder, and usually radio equipment.
Vibrator Group - See Group
VibPro.PDF - The entire Vib Pro manual in Adobe Acrobat format.
VibQC and VibQC32 - A Pelton computer program for storage and analysis of
similarity and other analog data.
VPE - A Vib Pro unit acting as an Encoder. See Encoder
VPD - A Vib Pro unit acting as a decoder. See Decoder
VPKop - A version of VibKop specifically for Vib Pro equipment. Includes

VibDisplay.
VSS - Vibrator Source Signature. A system for automatically recording

True Reference, Reaction Mass Accelerometer, Baseplate Accelerometer
signals and data including but not limited to PSS information for each
sweep, from each vibrator. This allows Ground Force to be reconstructed
for each sweep at a later time. Used for Quality Control and in
processing, typically in Mobil Oils HFVS system.
Weighted Sum - See Vector Sum
Wireline Reference - See Reference, Wireline Reference
Wireline Similarity - See Similarity, Wireline Similarity
Wvsig32 - A Pelton computer program used to display real time Quality

Control information in the recording truck, based on PSS data. This
includes Vib Pro or Shot Pro performance data and GPS positions.
05Oct99
Appendix D - Page 12.4.1
PELTON COMPUTER PROGRAM ABBREVIATIONS
ABS - ABSOLUTE
ACC - ACCELEROMETER/ACCELERATION
ACK - ACKNOWLEDGE
ACQ - ACQUISITION
ADIST - AVERAGE DISTORTION
AFO - AVERAGE FORCE
AMPL - AMPLITUDE
APHZ - AVERAGE PHASE
AVG - AVERAGE
BP - BASE PLATE
BPSENS - BASE PLATE (ACCELEROMETER) SENSITIVITY
CHK - CHECK
CHN - CHANNEL
COM - COMPORT
CORR - CORRECTION OR CORRELATION
CTR - CENTER
DAC - DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTER
DEG - DEGREE
DIFF - DIFFERENTIAL
ELEV - ELEVATION
ENV - ENVELOPE
ERR - ERROR
ESG - ENCODE SWEEP GENERATOR
FFT - FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM
FMR - FORCE METER
FND - FOUND
FREQ - FREQUENCY
GRP - GROUP
Hz - HERTZ
KGS - KILOGRAMS
KOP - KEYBOARD OPERATION PROGRAM
LAT - LATITUDE
LBS - POUNDS
LMT - LIMIT
LPT - LINE PRINTER
LON - LONGITUDE
MSG - MESSAGE
MSec - MILLI SECOND
NEG - NEGATIVE
OV - OVERLAY
PARAMS - PARAMETERS
PDIST - PEAK DISTORTION
PFO - PEAK FORCE
PHZ - PHASE
PK - PEAK
PPHZ - PEAK PHASE
PPM ERROR - PARTS PER MILLION ERROR
PREV - PREVIOUS
PSS - POST SWEEP SERVICE
09Oct01
Appendix D - Page 12.4.2
PTID - POINT ID
S - STORE
SEC - SECOND
SEG - SEGMENT
SEGDEF - SEGMENT DEFINITION
SEQ - SEQUENCE
SIG - SIGNAL
SIM - SIMILARITY
SP - SHOT PRO OR SOURCE POINT
SPEC - SPECIFICATION
STO - STORED
SV - STORED VALUES
SWP - SWEEP
R - RESTORE
RDY - READY SIGNAL
RM - REACTION MASS
RMS - ROOT MEAN SQUARE
RMSENS - REACTION MASS (ACCELEROMETER) SENSITIVITY
RPC - REMOTE PROCEDURE CALL
RTI - RADIO TRUCK INTERFACE
RX - RECEIVE
THD - TOTAL HARMONIC DISTORTION
TM - TORQUE MOTOR
TRIG - TRIGGER
TXD, TX - TRANSMIT
VIB - VIBRATOR
09Oct01
Appendix E - Page 12.5.1
PELTON GPS SEG P1 FILES
The Seg P1 file format can be used to save icon and vibrator memory in
the GPSMap program. Only one icon type can be saved or loaded at one
time. Flexibility has been designed into the code to allow saving of one
type of icon, then loading the same file into a different icon. For
example the vibrator icons can be saved and then loaded into circle icons
to show the previous positions. All icons in memory have Latitude and
Longitude position information, while some icons have additional
information. Vibrator icons have the most additional information with
the vibrator number, altitude, DOP, Differential, Quality, and 3-D
designation. The text icons and the arc icons are currently not
supported by SEG P1 file format. To load or save a SEG P1 file, first
select the icon to use in the Icon menu, then go to the file menu under
the SEG section and load or save the file.
Requirements:
ASCII file consisting of lines of text or data.
Each line must contain 80 characters or spaces followed by CR(13h)
LF(0Ah)
The 1st Character of a line is always either a 'H' or a 'space'.
Latitude must be 8 digits (0-9) in fields 27-35
A N or a S must be in field 35
Longitude must be 9 digits (0-9) in fields 36-44
A W or a E must be in field 46
Both Latitude and Longitude fields can only have digits 0-9 or a space
A space is translated to a zero in the Latitude and Longitude fields
The Point ID field (18-25) is used to load flag numbers with flag icons
Header
First character in column 1 must be an H for a header to be detected.
An 'H' as 1st character of a line implies 20 text Lines (19 more to
follow).
The text can be anything but lines must be exactly 80 characters or
spaces followed by CR LF.
Data
First character must be a space.
Starts exactly after the header data or at line 1 if there is no header.
Latitude must be 8 digits followed by a N or a S.
Longitude must be 9 digits followed by a W or a E.
Both Latitude and Longitude fields can only have digits 0-9 or a space.
A space is translated to a zero in the Latitude and Longitude fields.
Altitude field is only used with Vibrator icons.
09Oct01
See below an example of a Vib file.
There are 13 basic fields for each data line.
In the case of Vib Files 2 of these fields have been subdivided:

- The Name field
column 2 to 9: an 8 digit File # if available
NEWER FILES Vib Record

column 10-12: 'Vib'
13-14: 2 digit Vib#
15 : '-'
16-17: possible 2 digit EpId when Decoded Point Id used for Pnt. Id
field
OLDER FILES Vib Record

column 10-15: 'Vib # '
16-17: 2 digit Vib#
VIB Avg Record

column 10-11: 'Av'
12-15: 4 digit total number of Vib positions in Avg
16-17: 2 digit number of sweeps in Avg
- The bbb field

column 78 : 'D' for DGPS position / 'G' for simple GPS position
79 : '2' for 2-D / '3' for 3-D position
80 : 1 digit truncated HDOP limited to 7
In Icon files a '[' or ']' can be placed at column 26 to mark a possible

'End' of graphics line (or mark Text Icons as visible at all scales).
The brackets are only used for the line icons to mark the end of a line
and are not required for any other icon type.
09Oct01
Loading SEG P1 files
When loading Icons from an SEG P1 file the Pnt.Id field is interpreted as
follows:
if the Current Icon is a 3-D Flag or Geophone:
the 1st 4 characters are used as a Y # - this is the top line of
the flag number
the last 4 characters are used as a X# - this is the bottom line
of the flag number
if the Current Icon is a 2-D Flag or Geophone:
Ver 2.49 and earlier if the whole number is > 999.9 wrong values
will be used .
Ver 2.50 the 8 digits will be handled correctly when saving/
loading
(format xxxxxxx.x with '.' implied)
----------- a sample SEG P1 file begins after this one -------------
File Generated by a "MAP.EXE" version ..............................

Field Columns Round the Implied Decimal # of
Fractional
Description Value (Y/N) Point (Y/N) Decimal Digits
Name 2-17
Point Id 18-25 Integer
Latitude 27-35 No Yes 2
Longitude 36-45 No Yes 2
Reserved X,Y 46-61
Elevation in M 62-66 No Yes 1
Date YYDDD 67-71
Time HHMMSS 72-77
Quality D3d 78-80 (where: D=(D)gps/(G)ps, 3=(3)D/(2)D,
d=Dop(0-7)
the Name field is subdivided for Vib records:
<File #>Vibww-xx normal ww=Vib#, xx=EpId 2 Least Signif digits
<File #>Avyyyyzz Av=Average, yyyy=Positions, zz=Sweeps
]=Pelton Marker (Line End)
<.....Name.....><Pnt.Id> <..Lat.>N<..Lon..>W<......><......><Alt>YYDDDHHMMSSbbb
DDMMSSdd DDDMMSSdd MMMMd
00000123Vib00-10 000001 00000000N000000000E 0000096243140000D31
00000123Vib01-10 000001 00000000N000000000E 0000096243140000D31
00000123Vib02-10 000001 00000000N000000000E 0000096243140000D31
00000123Vib03-10 000001 00000000N000000000E 0000096243140000D31
00000124Av000401 000001 00000000N000000000E 0000096243140000D31
-------------------------------------------------------------------
09Oct01
DOCUMENTATION Page 1
VIB PRO ELECTRONICS
VIB PRO
FSVP-D BOM VIB PRO DECODER SYSTEM 1.1a
FSVP-E BOM VIB PRO ENCODER SYSTEM 1.2a
FGVPE-D-3 BOM VIB PRO ENCODER TO DECODER-3 1.2b
WVP-E/RSPE2 SCHEM VIB PRO RECORDING SYSTEM PE CABLE 1.3a
WVP-E/RSPE2 BOM VIB PRO RECORDING SYSTEM PE CABLE 1.3b
WVP-E/RSPF SCHEM VIB PRO RECORDING SYSTEM PF CABLE 1.4a
WVP-E/RSPF BOM VIB PRO RECORDING SYSTEM PF CABLE 1.4b
VIBCABLE SCHEM VIBRATOR EXTERNAL CABLING P-1&2 1.5a
FGLIFT-2 BOM VIB LIFT ASSEMBLY (TYPICAL) 1.5b
HELIFT-2 SCHEM LIFT ENCLOSURE HOFFMAN 1.5c
FGLB-2 BOM LIFT SYSTEM BOX 1.5d
WLMS SCHEM LIFT SYSTEM MICRO SWITCH CBL(LSA1A) 1.5e
WLMS-B SCHEM LIFT SYSTEM MICRO SWITCH CBL(BZE62RN2) 1.5f
FGVIBCPA-5.1 SCH VIB CONNECTOR PANEL ASSEMBLY-5.1 1.6a
FGVCPA-5.1 BOM VIB CONNECTOR PANEL ASSEMBLY-5.1 1.6b
FGVCPA-VSS SCHEM VIB CONN PNL ASSEMBLYY W/VSS TEST 1.6c
FGVCPA-VSS BOM VIB CONN PNL ASSEMBLYY W/VSS TEST 1.6d
10-690 MECH VIB ELEC CONN PANEL MTG HOLE DIAGRAM 1.6e
WVPRD SCHEM VIB PRO REMOTE DOWN CABLE 1.7a
WVPRD BOM VIB PRO REMOTE DOWN CABLE 1.7b
W2RC SCHEM VIBRATOR RADIO CABLE 1.8a
W2RC BOM VIBRATOR RADIO CABLE 1.8b
WRIB-RC SCHEM RADIO INTERCONNECT CABLE 1.9a
WRIB-RC BOM RADIO INTERCONNECT CABLE 1.9b
FGVP-3 BOM VIB PRO UNIT-3 1.10a
FGVP-E-3 BOM VIB PRO ENCODE UNIT-3 1.10b
FGVPEA-2 BOM VIB PRO ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY-2 1.11
FGVPFPA BOM VIB PRO FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY 1.12a
05Feb02
C:\My Documents\V6MAN\Vibpro2\doc-vp-ver3.doc
VIB PRO (CONT)
FGVPMA BOM VIB PRO MOUNTING ASSEMBLY 1.13a
FGVPEMA BOM VIB PRO ENCODE MOUNTING ASSEMBLY 1.13b
WVP-2 SCHEM VIB PRO WIRING-2 1.14a
WVP-2 BOM VIB PRO WIRING-2 1.14b
FCVPCC-2 SCHEM CONNECTOR CARD-2 1.15a
FCVPCC-2 CL CONNECTOR CARD-2 1.15b
FCVPCC-2 BOM CONNECTOR CARD-2 1.15c
FCVPBP-2 SCHEM VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2 1.16a
FCVPBP-2 CL VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2 1.16b
FCVPBP-2 BOM VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2 1.16c
CARDS
A/D D/A CARD AD/DA
FCVPAD-DA-1 SCHEM VIB PRO AD/DA CARD-1B 2.1a
FCVPAD/DA-1B CL VIB PRO AD/DA CARD-1B 2.1b
FCVPADDAC-1 BOM VIB PRO AD/DA CARD-1 2.1c
COMPUTER COMMUNICATIONS CARD - CCC
FCVPCCC-3 SCHEM VIB PRO COMP COMM. CARD-3 2.2a
FCVPCCC-3 CL VIB PRO COMP COMM. CARD-3 2.2b
FCVPCCC-3 BOM VIB PRO COMP COMM. CARD-3 2.2c
EXTENDER CARD - EX
FCEXT-1 SCHEM EXTENDER CARD WIRING 2.3a
FCEXT-1 CL EXTENDER CARD WIRING 2.3b
FCEXT BOM EXTENDER CARD WIRING 2.3c
FCEXT-1 BOM EXTENDER CARD WIRING-1 2.3d
HYDRAULIC INTERFACE CARD - HI/FC
FCVPHI/FD-1 SCHEM HYDRAULIC INTERFACE CARD-1B 2.4a
FCVPHI/FD-1 CL HYDRAULIC INTERFACE CARD-1B 2.4b
FCVPHI/FD-1 BOM HYDRAULIC INTERFACE CARD-1 2.4c
05Feb02
CARDS (CONT)
FILTER - FC
FCFC-6 SCHEM FILTER CARD-6 2.5a
FCFC-6 CL FILTER CARD-6 2.5b
FCFC-6 BOM FILTER CARD-6 2.5c
H8S CARD H8S
FCVPH8SC-1 SCHEM VIB PRO H8S CARD-1 2.6a
FCVPH8S-1B CL VIB PRO H8S CARD-1B 2.6b
FCVPH8SC-1 BOM VIB PRO H8S CARD-1 2.6c
H8S MICROPROCESSOR CARD - H8SM
FCH8SMC-2 SCHEM VIB PRO H8S MICROCOMPUTER CARD-2 2.7a
FCH8SMC-2 CL VIB PRO H8S MICROCOMPUTER CARD-2 2.7b
FCH8SMC-2 BOM VIB PRO H8S MICROCOMPUTER CARD-2 2.7c
INTERFACE CARD - IC
FCVPI/FC-1 SCHEM VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD-1 2.8a
FCVPI/FC-1B CL VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD-1B 2.8b
FCVPI/FC-1 BOM VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD-1 2.8c
1XL LIFT CARD - 1XLC
FCVP1XLC-1 SCHEM VIB PRO 1X LIFT CARD-1 2.9a
FCVP1XLC-1 CL VIB PRO 1X LIFT CARD-1 2.9b
FCVP1XLC-1 BOM VIB PRO 1X LIFT CARD-1 2.9c
MODEM CARD- MC
FCVPMC-1 SCHEM VIB PRO MODEM CARD-1 2.10a
FCVPMC-1A CL VIB PRO MODEM CARD-1A 2.10b
FCVPMC-1 BOM VIB PRO MODEM CARD-1 2.10c
POWER SUPPLY - PSC
FCVPSC-1 SCHEM VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1 2.11a
FCVPSC-1B CL VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1B 2.11b
FCVPSC-1 BOM VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1 2.11c
05Feb02
CARDS (CONT)
SHARC CARD - SC
FCVPSC-2 SCHEM VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2 2.12a
FCVPSC-2 CL VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2 2.12b
FCVPSC-2 BOM VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2 2.12c
VIB PRO OPTIONS

FSVPGPS BOM VIB PRO GPS SYSTEM 3.1
FSPSRGPS BOM PELTON SUBMETER REF STATION SYSTEM 3.2
FSVPEGPS BOM VIB PRO ENCODER GPS SYSTEM 3.3
FSVPSMGPS BOM VIB PRO SUB-METER VIB GPS SYSTEM 3.4
FSVPSK8 BOM VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 GPS SYSTEM 3.5
FGVPSK8 BOM VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 GPS RECEIVER 3.6
FCVPSK8 BOM VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 MOUNTING CARD 3.7
FGVPGPS BOM VIB PRO SUB-METER GPS RECEIVER 3.8
FCVPDSM-2 BOM VIB PRO DSM MOUNTING CARD 3.9
FCVPGPSMC-2 SCHEM VIB PRO GPS MOUNTING CARD-2 3.10a
FCVPGMC-2B CL VIB PRO GPS MOUNTING CARD-2BCL 3.10b
WGPSTCS BOM GPS TEST CABLE SET 3.11
FGVPEFMO BOM VIB PRO ENCODER FORCE METER OPTION 3.12
FGVPS BOM VIB PRO SPARES 3.13
FSVPGPS-SMR BOM VIB PRO SUBMETER REF STA & CABLE 3.14
FSVPG BOM VIB PRO DIFF. GPS SYSTEM 3.15
FGVPZTA BOM VIB PRO ZERO TIME ADJUST 3.16a
FGBA SCHEM FEMALE-FEMALE BNC ATTENUATOR 3.16b
FGBA BOM FEMALE-FEMALE BNC ATTENUATOR 3.16c
FSDS-1 BOM DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY SYSTEMS 3.17a
FSVSS BOM VIB VSS SYSTEM 3.18a
FSVSSR BOM VIB VSS RECORDER SYSTEM 3.18b
FSVSSN BOM VSS NAVIGATION OPTION 3.19
05Feb02
VIB PRO OPTIONS (CONT)
WVPRIB SCHEM KENWOOD RADIO INTERFACE BOX 3.20a
WVPRIB-1 SCHEM VIB PRO RADIO I/F - KENWOOD 3.20c
FSVPGPS-1 BOM SINGLE RADIO SUBMETER GPS SYSTEM 3.21a
FSVPDGPS-1 BOM VIB PRO DECODER SINGLE RADIO FREQUENCY
SUB METER GPS SYSTEM 3.21b
FSVPEGPS-1 BOM VIB PRO DSM REFERENCE STATION
USING VIB PRO RADIO FOR TTCM 3.21c
FGRCC BOM RADIO COMMUNICATION MODULE AND CABLE 3.21d
FGVPTK BOM VIB PRO TEST KIT 3.22a
FGVNO BOM VIBRATOR NETWORK OPTION 3.23a
HAVPG750 BOM VIB PRO BD750 MOUNTING ASSEMBLY 3.24a
FGVPBOB BOM VIB PRO BREAKOUT BOX 3.25a
VIB PRO TEST POINT SELECTOR

FSVPTPS BOM VIB PRO TEST POINT SELECTOR SYSTEM 4.1
FGA2TEST SCHEM ADVII TEST POINT SELECTOR BOX 4.2a
FGA2TEST BOM VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR BOX 4.2b
WM-TPS SCHEM VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR CABLE 4.3a
WM-TPS BOM VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR CABLE 4.3b
CABLES
W9DF-F SCHEM FEMALE TO FEMALE 9D CABLE 5.1a
W9DF-F BOM FEMALE TO FEMALE 9D CABLE 5.1b
W9DM-M-1 SCHEM MALE-MALE 9D ONE WAY CABLE 5.2a
W9DM-M-1 BOM MALE-MALE 9D ONE WAY CABLE 5.2b
WVPESG SCHEM VIB PRO ADV II ESG ADAPTER CABLE 5.3a
WVPESG BOM VIB PRO ADV II ESG ADAPTER CABLE 5.3b
HEVPEAA BOM VIB PRO ENCODER ADAPTER ASSEMBLY 5.3c
WRCSA SCHEM RECORDER COMMAND SEQUENCE ADAPTER 5.4a
WRCSA BOM RECORDER COMMAND SEQUENCE ADAPTER 5.4b
05Feb02
Page 1.1
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVP-D
VIB PRO DECODER SYSTEM
QTY DESCRIPTION STOCK #
.. 1. VIB PRO MANUAL....................AMVP

.. 2. M5 ACCELEROMETER ASSEMBLY-5.......FGDACCA-5
.. 1. VHF FM RADIO WITH HARDWARE........FGRADIO
.. 1. VIB PRO UNIT-3....................FGVP-3
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY SYSTEM-2...FSDS-2
.. 1. VIB PRO REMOTE DOWN CABLE.........WVPRD
.. 1. VIBRATOR WIRING...................WVW
04/17/98 03/06/01 KJG

Page 1.2a
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVP-E
VIB PRO ENCODER SYSTEM
.. 1. VIB PRO MANUAL....................AMVP

.. 1. VIB PRO COMP. COMM. CARD-3........FCVPCCC-3
.. 1. PELTON SOFTWARE...................FGCISDS
.. 1. VIB PRO ENCODE UNIT-3.............FGVP-E-3
.. 1. VIB PRO ENCODER CABLE SET-2.......FGVP-ECS-2
.. 1. VIB PRO COMPUTER..................FGVPCOMP
.. 1. VIB PRO ENCODER TO DECODER-3......FGVPE-D-3
.. 1. VIB PRO ENCODE MOUNTING KIT.......FGVPEMK
04/20/98 12/17/99 KJG

Page 1.2b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPE-D-3
VIB PRO ENCODER TO DECODER-3
.. 1. FILTER CARD-6.....................FCFC-6
.. 1. VIB PRO 1X LIFT CARD-1............FCVP1XLC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO HYDRAULIC I/F CARD-1......FCVPHI/FC-1
05/15/2000 KJG
Page 1.2c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVP-ECS-2
VIB PRO ENCODER CABLE SET-2
.. 1. RADIO INTERCONNECT CABLE..........WRIB-RC

.. 1. VIB PRO RECORDING SYS PE CABLE-2..WVP-E/RSPE-2
.. 1. VIB PRO RECORDING SYS. PF CABLE...WVP-E/RSPF
07/13/99 KJG
Page 1.3b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVP-E/RSPE-2
VIB PRO RECORDING SYS PE CABLE-2
.. 15. 1/2 EXPANDO SHEATHING............ABH12

.. 1. #6 SOLDERLESS RING LUG............HLUG6
.. 1. #16 90 DEG. END BELL..............HM3182
.. 1. #16 SHELL CABLE CLAMP.............HM85049
PE .. 1. 18-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC18SR
.. 45. 2-CONDUCTOR #28 SHIELDED CABLE....W1120
.. 15. 22 GA. INSULATED BLACK WIRE.......W22GB
.. 75. 1-CONDUCTOR #22 SHIELDED CABLE....WA2254
.. .500 10 FOOT BNC TO BNC COAX CABLE.....WRBNC-10
07/13/99 09/14/99 KJG

Pelton Company, Inc. Page 1.4b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVP-E/RSPF
VIB PRO RECORDING SYS. PF CABLE

.. 1. 5-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR..........JM6E5S
.. 1. 41-SOCKET 90 DEG. EMI CONNECTOR...JS41-1
.. 1. #8 INSULATED RING TERMINAL........JW8IRT
.. 1. .312 CONNECTOR BOOT...............PCC
.. 30. 16 GA. INSULATED RED WIRE.........W16GR
.. 15. 22 GA. INSULATED YELLOW WIRE......W22GY
.. 2. 10FT SINGLE ENDED BNC COAX CABLE..WRBNC-10-1
05/11/98 07/30/98 KJG

Page 1.5b
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGLIFT-2
VIB LIFT ASSEMBLY-2
.. 1. LIFT SYSTEM BOX-2.................FGLB-2

.. 1. SHORTING PLUG.....................PCER2S
.. 5. LIFT SYSTEM MICRO SWITCH CABLE....WLMS
12/11/95 11/19/98 MRG

Page 1.5d
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGLB-2
LIFT SYSTEM BOX-2
.. .500 3/16 SHRINK TUBING...............ASHRINK316

.. 2. 200 VOLT 1 AMP. POWER DIODE......DS1N4004
.. 1. 10-815 LIFT ENCLOSURE HOFFMAN-2...HELIFT-2
.. 8. MS3102E14S PANEL MOUNT GASKET.....HGASKET5
.. 32. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. LIFT SYSTEM BOX OVERLAY...........HOLIFT
.. 1. LIFT SYSTEM BOX STIFF LEG LABEL...HOLIFT-2
.. 1. 10-32X1/4 BH SS SCREW............HS1014B
.. 1. #10 SOLDER LUG....................HS141010
.. 32. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 8. 4-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E2P
.. 1. 18 GA. INSULATED BROWN WIRE.......W18GBR
.. 1. 18 GA. INSULATED GREEN WIRE.......W18GGN
12/11/95 02/06/01 MRG

Page 1.6b
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVCPA-5.1
VIB CONNECTOR PANEL ASSEMBLY-5.1

.. 1. 90 DEGREE CONDUIT ELBOW ASSY......H90ELL
.. 1. 10-680 CONNECTOR PANEL............HA2CPNL
.. 1. 10-654 CONNECTOR PANEL COVER......HA2CPNLC
.. 1. HO10-656 CONN. PNL. CVR. OVERLAY..HCPCO
.. 1. CONNECTOR PANEL OVERLAY...........HCPPO
.. 48. #4 INTERNAL LOCKWASHER............HILW4
.. 12. 4-40 HEX NUT......................HN440
.. 2. #10 SOLDER LUG....................HS141010
.. 5. #6 SOLDER LUG 5/8 LONG..........HS14126
J15 .. 1. DUAL BINDING POST RED-BLACK......HS269RB
.. 6. 4-40 x 1/4 PAN HEAD PHILLIPS......HS414PHP
.. 36. 4-40 x 7/16 PAN HEAD PHILLIPS.....HS4716PHP
AN .. 1. PROTECTIVE METAL CAP..............HWPC
JF11 .. 1. 12-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR..........JP12-1
JF14 .. 1. BNC CHASSIS CONNECTOR (ISOLATED)..JPBNC
PF .. 1. 41-SOCKET 90 DEG. EMI CONNECTOR...JS41-1
PF8 .. 1. SHORTING PLUG.....................PCER2S
JF1-9 .. 10. 4-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E2P
JF13 4-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E2P
JF10 .. 1. 5-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E5P
RF1-2 .. 2. 10K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..............RF10KBC
.. 8. 18 GA. INSULATED BLUE WIRE........W18GBL
.. 8. 18 GA. INSULATED WHITE WIRE.......W18GW
.. 8. 24 GA. INSULATED GREEN WIRE.......W24GG
.. 8. 24 GA. INSULATED GRAY WIRE........W24GGR
.. 16. 24 GA. INSULATED ORANGE WIRE......W24GO
.. 8. 24 GA. INSULATED VIOLET WIRE......W24GV
.. 8. 24 GA.INSULATED WHITE/BLACK WIRE..W24GW/B
.. 8. 24 GA. INSULATED WHITE/GRAY WIRE..W24GW/GR
09/22/00 02/28/01 JAB

JF1
A
JF B
B C
A D
C
D
JF2
E
A
F
B
G C
H D
J
K
JF3
c
A
g
B
e
C
i
D
N
P
V JF4
W A
B
m
C
n
D
p
q
L JF5
M A
T B
U C
D
R
S
JF6
X A
Y B
j C
Z D
b
d
JF7
f
A
h
B
a
C
k
D
s
r
t JF8 JC1
A 1
B 2
C 3
D 4
JF9
A
B
C
D
10
11
12
C
D
C
A
B
E
B
JP12-1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
JF13
JF10
JF11
PCA JCA
10 10
9 9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
PP10-S JC10-1
VIB CONNECTOR PANEL ASSEMBLY

WITH VSS TEST
FGVCPA-VSS
MASS BASEPLATE 10/27/2000 06/13/01
KJG
Page 1.6d

Page 1 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVCPA-VSS
VIB CONN PNL ASSEMBLY W/VSS TEST

.. 5. 2 DIAM. BLACK CABLE TIE...........APAN-CPO
.. 1. VSS TEST BOX MOUNTING CARD-1......GVSS-1
.. 1. 90 DEGREE CONDUIT ELBOW ASSY......H90ELL
.. 1. 10-680/10-692 CONN PANEL W/TEXT...HA2CPNL/T
.. 1. 10-654 CONNECTOR PANEL COVER......HA2CPNLC
.. 1. HO10-656 CONN. PNL. CVR. OVERLAY..HCPCO
.. 1. 1/8 BLACK AL. KNOB...............HKS5B8
.. 14. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. CONN PNL COVER VSS OVERLAY........HOCPC-VSS
.. 2. #10 SOLDER LUG....................HS141010
JF12 .. 1. DUAL BINDING POST RED-BLACK......HS269RB
.. 36. 4-40 x 7/16 PAN HEAD PHILLIPS.....HS4716PHP
.. 2. SPACER 3/16 HEX .25 L 4-40THRD...HS9147
.. 5. WIRING CLAMP W/ADHESIVE...........HWCLAMP-1
.. 1. PROTECTIVE METAL CAP..............HWPC
JCA .. 1. 10 CONTACT CRIMP CONNECTOR........JC10-1
JF11 .. 1. 12-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR..........JP12-1
JF14-15 .. 2. BNC CHASSIS CONNECTOR (ISOLATED)..JPBNC
.. 8. 22-30 AWG CRIMP CONNECTOR.........P08-65
PF8 .. 1. SHORTING PLUG.....................PCER2S
JF1-9 .. 10. 4-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E2P
JF13 4-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E2P
JF10 .. 1. 5-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E5P
PCA .. 1. 10 PIN STRAIGHT PCB MOUNT.........PP10-S
RF3 .. 1. 100K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.............RF100KBC
RF9 182K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.............RF182KBC
RF4-5 .. 2. 1K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR...............RF1KBC
RF6 .. 2. 20.0 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.........RF20UBC
RF10 20.0 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.........RF20UBC
RF8 .. 2. 24.9K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR............RF24.9KBC
05/16/01 06/13/01 KJG

Page 1.6d

Page 2 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVCPA-VSS
VIB CONN PNL ASSEMBLY W/VSS TEST
RF12 24.9K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR............RF24.9KBC

SR1 .. 1. 1P8T ROTORY SWITCH................SRS8T
ST2 .. 1. SPDT LOCKING TOGGLE SWITCH........STSSL
CB1-2 .. 2. 10 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER............XC10A
05/16/01 06/13/01 KJG

Page 1.6b
Pelton Company
Page 2 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVCPA-5.1
VIB CONNECTOR PANEL ASSEMBLY-5.1
.. 8. 24 GA. INSULATED WHITE/ORNG WIRE..W24GW/O

.. 8. 24 GA. INSULATED WHITE/RED WIRE...W24GW/R
CB1-2 .. 2. 10 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER............XC10A
09/22/00 02/28/01 JAB

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVPRD
VIB PRO REMOTE DOWN CABLE
.. 1. #16 90 DEG. END BELL..............HM3182

SP1 .. 1. SPDT CORD PUSHBUTTON SWITCH.......SPDSM
.. 6. 4-CONDUCTOR #18 CABLE.............W8454
10/09/97 MRG
Page 1.7d
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVPVNRD
VIB PRO VIBNET REMOTE DOWN CABLE
.. .250 1/2 SHRINK TUBING................ASHRINK12

.. 1. #16 90 DEG. END BELL..............HM3182
.. 1. CONNECTOR BOOT....................PCC-1
.. 1. 2-PIN CABLE CONNECTOR.............PM6E4P
.. 6. 2-CONDUCTER LEADER WIRE...........WF-TP-165
10/19/2000 10/31/2000 KJG

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
W2RC
VIBRATOR RADIO CABLE

.. 1. 5-SOCKET 90 DEG. CABLE CONNECTOR..JM8E5S
10/22/90 8/29/91 JAB

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WRIB-RC
RADIO INTERCONNECT CABLE

.. 1. 5-PIN CABLE CONNECTOR.............PM1A5P
.. 1. CONNECTOR CABLE CLAMP.............PSR
8/14/90 JAB
Page 1.10a
PELTON COMPANY, INC.
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVP-3
VIB PRO UNIT-3
.. 1. FILTER CARD-6.....................FCFC-6
.. 1. VIB PRO 1X LIFT CARD-1............FCVP1XLC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO A/D D/A CARD-1............FCVPADDAC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2...............FCVPBP-2
.. 1. VIB PRO H8S CARD-1................FCVPH8SC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO HYDRAULIC I/F CARD-1......FCVPHI/FC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD-1..........FCVPI/FC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO MODEM CARD-1..............FCVPMC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1.......FCVPPSC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2..............FCVPSC-2
.. 1. VIB PRO ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY-2......FGVPEA-2
.. 1. VIB PRO FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY......FGVPFPA
.. 1. VIB PRO MOUNTING ASSEMBLY.........FGVPMA
05/15/2000 01/14/02 KJG

Page 1.10b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVP-E-3
VIB PRO ENCODE UNIT-3
.. 1. VIB PRO A/D D/A CARD-1............FCVPADDAC-1

.. 1. VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2...............FCVPBP-2
.. 1. VIB PRO H8S CARD-1................FCVPH8SC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD-1..........FCVPI/FC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO MODEM CARD-1..............FCVPMC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1.......FCVPPSC-1
.. 1. VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2..............FCVPSC-2
.. 1. VIB PRO ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY-2......FGVPEA-2
.. 1. VIB PRO FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY......FGVPFPA
.. 1. VIB PRO MOUNTING ASSEMBLY.........FGVPMA
07/21/2000 01/14/02 KJG

Page 1.11
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPEA-2
VIB PRO ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY-2
.. 1. VIB PRO CONNECTOR CARD-2..........FCVPCC-2

.. 1. 25D FEMALE DUST COVER.............HC25DF
.. 1. 9D FEMALE DUST COVER..............HC9DF
.. 5. 9D MALE DUST COVER................HC9DM
.. 1. 40-024 VIB PRO 1/2 ENCL-DS........HEVP-DS
.. 1. 40-023 VIB PPO 1/2 ENCL-JF........HEVP-JF
.. 1. 40-030 VIB PRO GASKET.............HGASKETVP
.. 1. 40-032 VIB PRO D-SUB PNL GASKET...HGVPDSP
.. 1. 3/8 DIA. CABLE CLAMP..............HL8103
.. 2. .20 1"x6" ISOLOSS SHOCK...........HLI
.. 6. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. #8 PUSH NUT.......................HN8P
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL A/D D/A........HOVPADDA
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL CCC............HOVPCCC
.. 1. VIB PRO D-SUB PANEL LABEL.........HOVPDS
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL FILTER.........HOVPF
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL MAIN H8S.......HOVPH8S
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL HYDRAULIC/IF...HOVPHI
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL INTERFACE......HOVPI
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL LIFT...........HOVPL
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL MODEM..........HOVPM
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL POWER SUPPLY...HOVPP
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD LABEL SHARC..........HOVPS
.. 4. 8-32x5/16 CAPTIVE SCREW...........HS411CS
.. 1. 4-40 x 1/2 PAN HEAD PHILLIPS.....HS412B
.. 3. 4-40x3/8 PAN HEAD PHILLIPS........HS438B
.. 8. 6-32x1/2 SOCKET HEAD SS...........HS612HS
.. 4. 8-32 X 5/8 PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW....HS858P
.. 14. D CONNECTOR MOUNTING HARDWARE.....HSD20418-2
.. 1. 40-027 VIB PRO BOTTOM COVER.......HVPBC
.. 1. 40-026 VIB PRO D SUB PANEL........HVPDSP
.. 4. #10 SEALING WASHER NEOPRENE.......HWS10
.. 1. FUSE HOLDER PANELMOUNT............HXLF
.. 1. FUSEHOLDER ANTI ROTATION WASHER...HXLFARW
.. 1. SMA FEMALE-N FEMALE PANEL MOUNT...HXPE9252
.. 1. VIB PRO WIRING-2..................WVP-2
.. 2. VIB PRO ENCLOSURE GROUND STRAP....WVPGS
.. 1. 8 AMP AGC FUSE NORMAL BLOW........XAGC8
07/13/99 02/07/02 KJG

Page 1.12a
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPFPA
VIB PRO FRONT PANEL ASSEMBLY
.. 1. VIB PRO FRONT PANEL I/F CARD......FCVPIFC

.. 1. VIB PRO DISPLAY WITH WIRING.......FGVPD/W
.. 1. VIB PRO FRONT PANEL WITH GASKET...FGVPFP/G
.. 2. 3M 3518-0000 POLARIZING KEY.......HPKEY-1
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/4 FILLISTER SS SCREW.....HS414F-1
08/14/97 06/20/01 MRG

Page 1.12b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPD/W
VIB PRO DISPLAY WITH WIRING
.. 1. AZ 128X128 GRAPHIC LCD DISPLAY....HG1212D

.. 4. 2-56X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS238B
.. 4. SPACER 1/4 RND. .188 L #4 BODY....HS8703
.. 1. VIB PRO DISPLAY WIRING............WVD
06/20/01 KJG
Page 1.12c
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPFP/G
VIB PRO FRONT PANEL WITH GASKET
.. 1. 40-030 VIB PRO GASKET.............HGASKETVP

.. 1. 40-022 VIB PRO FRONT PANEL-1......HVPFP-1
06/20/01 KJG
Page 1.13a
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPMA
VIB PRO MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
.. 4. 1/4 -28 CAPTIVE SCREW.............HCS1/428

.. 12. 1/4 INTERNAL LOCKWASHER...........HILW14
.. 4. WIRE ROPE SHOCK MOUNT.............HLC4H810
.. 4. 1/4-28 FLOATING NUT INSERT........HN1428FI
.. 8. 1/4-20x1 HEX HEAD BOLT............HS141H
.. 4. 1/4-28 x 3/8 HEX HEAD BOLT........HS142838H
.. 8. 1/4-20 X 3/4 FLATHEAD SCREW.......HS1434F
.. 2. 40-028 VIB PRO MOUNTING ANGLE.....HVPMA
.. 2. 40-029 VIB PRO MOUNTING BAR.......HVPMB
.. 2. 40-033 VIB PRO MOUNTING PLATE.....HVPMNTP
10/22/97 08/18/98 MRG

Page 1.13b
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPEMA
VIB PRO ENCODE MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
.. 4. 1/4 -28 CAPTIVE SCREW.............HCS1/428

.. 12. 1/4 INTERNAL LOCKWASHER...........HILW14
.. 4. WIRE ROPE SHOCK MOUNT.............HLC4H810
.. 4. 1/4 SPLIT RING LOCKWASHER.........HLW14
.. 4. 1/4 - 28 HEX NUT..................HN1428
.. 4. 1/4-28 FLOATING NUT INSERT........HN1428FI
.. 8. 1/4-20x1 HEX HEAD BOLT............HS141H
.. 4. 1/4-28 X 1/2 HEX HEAD BOLT........HS142812H
.. 4. 1/4-28 x 3/8 HEX HEAD BOLT........HS142838H
.. 8. 1/4-20 X 3/4 FLATHEAD SCREW.......HS1434F
.. 2. 40-035 VIB PRO ENCODE MOUNTING....HVPEMNTG
.. 2. 40-028 VIB PRO MOUNTING ANGLE.....HVPMA
.. 2. 40-029 VIB PRO MOUNTING BAR.......HVPMB
.. 2. 40-033 VIB PRO MOUNTING PLATE.....HVPMNTP
01/06/99 KJG
PCE JE
1 A
2 B
3 C
4 D
5 E
6 F
7 G
8 H
9 J
10 K
11 L
12 M
13 N
14 P
15 R
16 S
T
U
JC16F
PP18
PCV JF
1 A
2 B
3 C
4 D
5 E
6 F
7 G
8 H
9 J
10 K
11 L
12 M
13 N
14 P
15 R
16 S
17 T
18 U
19 V
20 W
21 X
22 Y
23 Z
24 a
25 b
26 c
27 d
28 e
29 f
30 g
31 h
32 i
33 j
34 k
m
n
p
q
r
s
t
PP41
VIB PRO WIRING-2
WVP-2
03/12/98 10/05/99
KJG
Page 1.14b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVP-2
VIB PRO WIRING-2
.. 1. JE CABLE ASSEMBLY.................WJE
.. 1. JF CABLE ASSEMBLY-2...............WJF-2
.. 1. PCC CABLE ASSEMBLY................WPCC
.. 1. PCD CABLE ASSEMBLY................WPCD
.. 1. PCP CABLE ASSEMBLY................WPCP
07/13/99 KJG
Page 1.14c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WJE
JE CABLE ASSEMBLY
.. 1. SHIELDED CONNECTOR GASKET #14.....HGASKET8

.. 1. 18 PIN 14S EMI FILTER.............HX14S-18P
PCE .. 1. 16-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC16F
PE .. 1. 18-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR..........PP18
.. 1. 16 CONDUCTOR COLOR FLAT CABLE.....W3302/16
01/15/99 KJG
Page 1.14d
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WJF-2
JF CABLE ASSEMBLY-2
DS1 .. 1. 10 AMP SILICON RECTIFIER..........DS10A02

.. 1. CONNECTOR SHIELDED GASKET.........HGASKET4
.. 4. #4 X 5/8 SOLDER LUG...............HS14124
PCV .. 1. 34-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC34F-2
PCL .. 1. MOLEX #09-50-3081 8PIN C.SOCKET...JC8
.. 7. MOLEX 08-58-0189 PINS/JC8 SOCKET..P8P
JF .. 1. 41-PIN EMI CHASSIS CONNECTOR......PP41
ST2 .. 1. DPDT LOCKING TOGGLE SWITCH........SDPDTL
.. 1. 18-GA. INSULATED YELLOW WIRE......W18GY
.. 1. 34-CONDUCTOR COLOR FLAT CABLE.....W3302/34
07/13/99 10/05/99 KJG

Page 1.14e
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WPCC
PCC CABLE ASSEMBLY
PCC .. 2. 50 SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC50F-2

PCT 50 SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC50F-2
.. .500 50-CONDUCTOR COLOR FLAT CABLE.....W3302/50
01/15/99 KJG
Page 1.14f
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WPCD
PCD CABLE ASSEMBLY
P3 .. 2. 34-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC34F-2

PCD 34-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC34F-2
01/15/99 KJG
Page 1.14g
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WPCP
PCP CABLE ASSEMBLY
.. 2. MOLEX #09-50-3081 8PIN C.SOCKET...JC8

.. 1. 18-GA. INSULATED YELLOW WIRE......W18GY
01/15/99 KJG
JC1
DCOM 1
TMR 14
VFB 2
MFB 15
TREF(TREF1) 3
LMACCA 16
LBACCA 4
JCT VIB OUT(WL REF2) 17
1 DCOM WL REF(WL REF1) 5
2 TMR FLM ACC A 18
3 VFB FLB ACC A 6
4 MFB 19
5 TREF(TREF1) DRV(TREF2) 7
6 WL REF(WL REF1) T.B. 20
7 FLM ACC A 8
8 FLB ACC A /PRESTART 21
TEST
9 LMACCA TXB 9
10 LBACCA 22
11 TXB PPS 10
12 PPS SMACCA 23
13 DRV(TREF2) SBACCA 11
14 VIB OUT(WL REF2) FSM ACC A 24
15 T.B. FSB ACC A 12
16 FSM ACC A 25
17 FSB ACC A 13
JC6
18 SMACCA
19 SBACCA PC25SF-1
20 DCOM
21 RXD_A
GPS
22 TXD_A
23 RTS1 CCC
24 CTS1 CCC
25 RX1 CCC PC9SF-1
26 TX1 CCC
27 DCOM
JC4
28 DCDD
29 DSRD
30 DTRD
CCC
31 RTSD
32 CTSD
DCOM
33 RXD
34 TXD
PC9PF-1
35 RXD_B
JC7
36 TXD_B
37 RTS_B
38 CTS_B JC5
GPS
39 DCOM
CONTROL
40 /PRE START
DCOM
41 DCDC
42 DSRC
PC9PF-1
43 DTRC DCOM
44 RTSC JC2
45 CTSC
PC9PF-1
46 RXC
RTS-7
47 TXC
COM 2
48 DCOM PELTON COMPANY, INC.
CTS-8
49 RXD2 DCOM 1500 N. Waverly
50 TXD2 PONCA CITY, OK 74601
JC3 PC9PF-1 TITLE:
REF
PH50PL VIB PRO CONNECTOR CARD-2
RXD2
RTS-7 MAT'L: NUMBER CARD REV
TXD2
COM 1 2
QUAN: FCVPCC-2
CTS-8
2 - 07/09/99 ADDED TXB AND PPS TO JC6 09/01/99 DCOM
SCALE: DATE REV
08/13/97 09/01/99
PRODUCTION
PCB-DATE REVISION PC9PF-1
DATE DRAWN BY KJG APVD BY SHEET OF
Page 1.15c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPCC-2
VIB PRO CONNECTOR CARD-2
.. 1. VIB PRO CONNECTOR CARD-2 PCB......GVPCC-2

JC1 .. 1. FILTERED 25 SOCKET D-SUB PCB......PC25SF-1
JC2-5 .. 5. FILTERED 9 PIN D-SUB PCB..........PC9PF-1
JC7 FILTERED 9 PIN D-SUB PCB..........PC9PF-1
JC6 .. 1. FILTERED 9 SOCKET D-SUB PCB.......PC9SF-1
JCT .. 1. 50 PIN PCB HEADER.................PH50PL
07/29/99 KJG
GPS VPMC CCC VPLC VPI/FC VPH8SC VPHI/FC VPS VPA/D D/AC FC
JC1 JC2 JC3 JC4 JC5 JC6 JC7 JC8 JC9 JC10 JCD
1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM 1a DCOM DCOM 1
1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM 1b DCOM DCOM 2
1c DCOM 1c DCOM 1c DCOM 1c DCOM 1c DCOM 3
2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 2a +5VD 4
2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD 2b +5VD BD0 5
2c +5VD 2c +5VD 2c +5VD 2c +5VD 2c +5VD BD1 6
3a 3a 3a 3a BD0 3a BD0 3a BD0 3a SD0 3a SD0 3a 3a BD2 7
3b TXD_A 3b 3b LMACCA 3b BD1 3b BD1 3b BD1 3b SD1 3b SD1 3b 3b BD3 8
TO FRONT PANEL
3c 3c LMACCA 3c 3c 3c BD4 9
4a 4a 4a 4a BD2 4a BD2 4a BD2 4a SD2 4a SD2 4a 4a BD5 10
4b 4b 4b 4b BD3 4b BD3 4b BD3 4b SD3 4b SD3 4b 4b BD6 11
4c 4c SMACCA 4c 4c 4c BD7 12
5a 5a 5a 5a BD4 5a BD4 5a BD4 5a SD4 5a SD4 5a 5a KB0 13
5b RXD_A 5b 5b LBACCA 5b BD5 5b BD5 5b BD5 5b SD5 5b SD5 5b 5b V0 14
5c 5c LBACCA 5c 5c 5c KB1 15
6a 6a 6a 6a BD6 6a BD6 6a BD6 6a SD6 6a SD6 6a 6a -24V 16
6b 6b 6b 6b BD7 6b BD7 6b BD7 6b SD7 6b SD7 6b 6b CONTR 17
6c DCDC 6c 6c KB0 6c 6c KB2 18
7a 7a 7a 7a DTRD 7a 7a SHARC_SN 7a TMA 7a SD8 7a 7a D_/WR 19
7b 7b 7b 7b BATTCH TXC 7b 7b V0 7b TMR 7b SD9 7b TREF 7b D_/CS 20
7c RTSC 7c 7c KB1 7c SHARC_SN 7c KB3 21
8a 8a 8a 8a RXC 8a 8a -24V 8a VLVDTPA 8a SD10 8a FLM ACC A 8a D_/RD 22
8b 8b 8b 8b CTSC 8b 8b CONTR 8b VLVDTPR 8b SD11 8b FLB ACC A 8b SEL2 23
8c DTRC 8c 8c KB2 8c 8c KB4 24
9a 9a 9a DN 9a DSRC 9a 9a D_/WR 9a VLVDTSA 9a SD12 9a FSM ACC A 9a SEL1 25
9b 9b 9b DN 9b TXD 9b 9b D_/CS 9b VLVDTSR 9b SD13 9b FSB ACC A 9b /RES 26
9c RXD 9c 9c KB3 9c 9c B_A0 27
10a 10a 10a 10a DCOM 10a 10a D_/RD 10a MLVDTPA 10a SD14 10a 10a LED BL- 28
10b 10b 10b 10b XD RADIO REF 10b 10b SEL2 10b MLVDTPR 10b SD15 10b 10b 29
10c RADIO VIB OUT 10c 10c KB4 10c 10c LED BL+ 30
11a 11a 11a 11a 11a 11a SEL1 11a MLVDTSA 11a SWEEP 11a 11a +5VD 31
11b 11b 11b 11b B_/RD B_/RD 11b B_/RD B_/RD 11b 11b MLVDTSR 11b S_/RD S_/RD 11b 11b +5VD 32
CONTR
11c 11c L2DAT0 11c L2DAT0 11c 11c 33
12a 12a 12a 12a RXB 12a SBACCA 12a VFB 12a 12a ST_SW_PULSE 12a VFB CMACCA 12a 34
12b 12b 12b 12b B/CS_0 12b B/CS_0 12b 12b 12b 12b 12b
12c TXB 12c L2DAT1 12c L2DAT1 12c 12c TREF.F PH34PL
13a 13a TXC(RXD2) CTS1 CCC 13a 13a DSRD 13a RXD2 13a MFB 13a 13a FLAG1 13a MFB 13a
13b TXD_B 13b RXC(TXD2) DCOM 13b 13b DCDD 13b TXD2 13b 13b LMOUT 13b LMOUT 13b 13b
13c RTSD 13c L2DAT2 13c L2DAT2 13c 13c
14a 14a RX1 CCC 14a BATT+9-36V 14a 14a B/CS_3 B/CS_3 14a 14a CMACCA 14a SA0 SA0 14a 14a LMACCA
14b CTS_B 14b TX1 CCC 14b BATT+9-36V 14b 14b B/CS_4 B/CS_4 14b 14b 14b SA1 SA1 14b 14b LMACCR
14c CTSD 14c L2DAT3 14c L2DAT3 14c 14c LMACCA
15a 15a 15a BATT+9-36V 15a 15a B/CS_5 B/CS_5 15a 15a 15a SA2 SA2 15a 15a SMACCA
15b RXD_B 15b SIMFLG 15b BATT+9-36V 15b 15b BA0 15b MODEMFLG 15b 15b SA3 SA3 15b 15b
15c ENCODERSTARTA 15c BA0 15c BA0 15c 15c
16a 16a RTS1 CCC 16a 16a 16a BA1 B/CS_7 16a 16a 16a SA4 SA4 16a 16a SBACCA
16b RTS_B 16b 16b 16b 16b BA2 BA1 16b 16b 16b SA5 SA5 16b 16b
16c 16c B/CS_7 BA2 16c 16c 16c
17a 17a 17a 17a ENCODERSTARTR 17a B/CS_8 17a 17a 17a SA6 SA6 17a 17a LBACCA
17b 17b 17b 17b 17b 17b SPARE 17b 17b SA7 SA7 17b 17b LBACCR
17c 17c B/CS_8 L2CLK 17c L2CLK 17c 17c
18a MODSTART 18a 18a BATT.R. 18a RXA(TXD_A) 18a 18a /PRE START 18a 18a /PRE START 18a +5VA 18a
18b 18b 18b SBCCC BATT.R. 18b DCOM 18b 18b KEYSTART 18b 18b KEYSTART 18b +5VA 18b
/PRE START
18c 18c BA3 BA3 18c L2ACK 18c 18c +5VA
19a RADIO VIB OUT 19a 19a RADIO VIB OUT BATT.R. 19a T.B.A 19a 19a FREQ ADJ 19a EXTAS EXTAS 19a 19a 19a
19b 19b 19b BATT.R. 19b T.B.R 19b 19b /RES MAN 19b 19b FREQ ADJ 19b WL REF(WL REF1) 19b
19c 19c MAIN SN 19c 19c 19c
20a VIB OUT(WL REF2) 20a 20a WL REF(WL REF1) 20a DCOM 20a 20a 20a +30V 20a 20a VIB OUT(WL REF2) TREF.F 20a
20b 20b 20b VIB OUT(WL REF2) 20b B_/WR B_/WR 20b B_/WR B_/WR 20b 20b /EXTEN /EXTEN 20b 20b 20b
20c REC STA 20c SBCCC 20c SDT1 20c 20c
21a 21a 21a 21a REC STR 21a 21a 21a 21a S_/WR S_/WR 21a 21a
21b 21b 21b TREF(TREF1) 21b LIFTSW 21b 21b SDT0 21b 21b SDT0 21b TREF.F 21b
21c 21c RSTARTIRQ RSTARTIRQ 21c TSCLK1 21c 21c TREF(TREF1)
22a 22a 22a 22a /START 22a 22a SDR0 22a 22a SDR0 22a FLB ACC A 22a
22b 22b 22b T.B. 22b RMDR 22b 22b SCLK0 22b 22b SCLK0 22b FLM ACC A 22b
22c MODEMFLG T.B. 22c T.B. 22c TSFS1 22c 22c FSB ACC A
23a 23a 23a 23a 23a UART1IRQ UART1IRQ 23a 23a 23a 23a FSM ACC A 23a
23b PPS 23b /RES 23b 23b RMDA 23b /RES 23b /RES 23b DRV(TREF2) 23b /RES 23b 23b
23c RADTXSTART 23c UART2IRQ UART2IRQ 23c SDR1 23c 23c DRV(TREF2)
24a 24a /T0 24a RADIO REF 24a 24a 24a /T0 24a 24a /T0 /RES 24a 24a
24b 24b BCLK 24b 24b 24b BCLK BCLK 24b 24b 24b BCLK 24b 24b
24c 24c LINK0IRQ LINK0IRQ 24c RSCLK1 24c 24c
25a 25a 25a HUP 25a 25a L0CLK 25a PPS 25a 25a L0SCLK 25a 25a
25b SPKR R 25b /RES 25b HUP 25b 25b L0ACK 25b 25b 25b L0SACK 25b 25b
SPKR A 25c 25c 25c RSFS1 25c 25c
26a SPARE 26a 26a 26a 26a L0DAT3 26a RADTXSTART 26a CLK/4 26a L0DAT3 26a 26a
26b IRQ6(REQ2) 26b 26b 26b 26b L0DAT2 26b SIMFLG 26b 26b L0DAT2 26b 26b
PTT R 26c 26c 26c CLK/4 26c 26c
27a MIC R 27a 27a FUP 27a 27a L0DAT1 27a BATTCH 27a 27a L0DAT1 27a 27a
27b MIC A 27b 27b FUP 27b 27b L0DAT0 27b 27b 27b L0DAT0 27b SERVO M 27b
PTT A 27c 27c 27c 27c 27c
28a 28a ACOM 28a 28a ACOM 28a ACOM 28a ACOM 28a 28a 28a ACOM 28a
28b 28b ACOM 28b 28b ACOM 28b ACOM 28b ACOM 28b SERVO M 28b 28b ACOM 28b
28c ACOM 28c ACOM 28c ACOM 28c 28c ACOM
29a 29a -15V 29a ACOM 29a -15V 29a -15V 29a -15V 29a ACOM 29a 29a -15V 29a ACOM
29b 29b -15V 29b ACOM 29b -15V 29b -15V 29b -15V 29b ACOM 29b 29b -15V 29b ACOM
29c -15V 29c -15V 29c -15V 29c 29c -15V JCP
30a 30a +15V 30a -15V 30a +15V 30a +15V 30a +15V 30a -15V 30a 30a +15V 30a -15V -15V 8
TO POWER SUPPLY
30b 30b +15V 30b +15V 30b +15V 30b +15V 30b +15V 30b +15V 30b 30b +15V 30b +15V 7
30c +15V 30c +15V 30c +15V 30c 30c +15V DCOM 6
31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD 31a +5VD +15V 5
31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD 31b +5VD +5VD 4
31c +5VD 31c +5VD 31c +5VD 31c +5VD 31c +5VD BATT.R. 3
32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM 32a DCOM BATT+9-36V 2
J1
32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM 32b DCOM ACOM 1
32c DCOM 32c DCOM 32c DCOM 32c DCOM 32c DCOM 2 1
PC8-2
JP64S JP96S JP64S JP64S JP96S JP96S JP64S JP96S JP96S JP64S
BCLK
BATT+9-36V
BATT.R.
VIB OUT(WL REF2)
WL REF(WL REF1)
RADIO VIB OUT
JCL
TREF(TREF1)
DRV(TREF2)
/PRE START
/RES MAN R
RADIO REF
8 BATT+9-36V
/RES MAN
SERVO M
7 BATT+9-36V
LIFTSW
D_INHX
RMDA
RMDR
6
RXD2
TXD2
+30V
MFB
TXB
VFB
PPS
T.B.
5 BATT.R.
/T0
/T0
/T0
XD
TO JF
4 BATT.R. TO JCL-4,5 TO JCL-7,8
3 DN
TREF(TREF1)
T.B.
XD
VFB
TXB
PPS
TXD
RXD
+30V
+30V
MFB
DCOM
TXD2
T.B.A
T.B.R
RXD2
TREF2
RTSD
CTSD
RTSC
CTSC
DTRD
DTRC
RMD A
RMD R
DSRD
DSRC
DCDD
DCDC
LIFT SW
REC STA
REC STR
/RES MAN
RXC(TXD2)
TXC(RXD2)
FLB ACC A
FSB ACC A
FLM ACC A
RADIO REF
FSM ACC A
DRV(TREF2)
/PRE START
TREF(TREF1)
DRV(TREF2)
TREF(TREF1)
RADIO VIB OUT
WL REF(WL REF1)
ENCODERSTARTA
ENCODERSTARTR
VIB OUT(WL REF2)
VIB OUT(WL REF2)

W.L.REF(WL REF1)
W.L.REF(WL REF1)
2 HUP
CONTR
1 FUP
DCOM
PC8-2
TXD_A
TXD_B
RTS_B
CTS_B
RXD_A
RXD_B
TXC(RXD2)
RXC(TXD2)
W.L.REF(WL REF1)
VIB OUT(WL REF2)
VIB OUT(WL REF2)

ENCODERSTARTA
ENCODERSTARTR
WL REF(WL REF1)
RADIO VIB OUT PELTON COMPANY, INC.

1500 N. Waverly
TREF(TREF1)
TREF(TREF1)
PONCA CITY, OK 74601
DRV(TREF2)
/PRE START
DRV(TREF2)
FSM ACC A
FLM ACC A
RADIO REF
FSB ACC A
FLB ACC A
RXC(TXD2)
TXC(RXD2)
RTS1_CCC
CTS1_CCC
W/L REF 1
/RES MAN
MLVDTPA
MLVDTPR
MLVDTSA
MLVDTSR
RX1_CCC
VLVDTPA
VLVDTPR
VLVDTSA
VLVDTSR
TX1_CCC
SMACCA
REC STA
REC STR
SMACCA
LMACCA
LMACCA
LMACCR
SBACCA
SBACCA
LBACCA
LBACCA
LBACCR
TITLE:
LIFT SW
SPKR A
SPKR R
CONTR
TREF 1
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
RXD_A
RXD_B
TXD_A
TXD_B
RTS_B
CTS_B
RMD A
RMD R
TREF2
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
DCOM
VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2

DCDD
DCDC
PTT A
PTT R
DSRD
DSRC
MIC A
MIC R
DTRD
DTRC
RTSD
CTSD
RTSC
CTSC
RXD2
T.B.A
T.B.R
TXD2
+30V
+30V
COM
TMR
MFB
TMA
TMR
RXD
VFB
TXB
PPS
TXD
T.B.
XD
MAT'L:
NUMBER CARD REV
PH50PL-1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
PH16PL
PH34PL
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
ADDED TXB TO JCT TEST CONNECTOR QUAN: FCVPBP-2 2
JCE
JCV
JCT
ADDED TREF 1, W/L REF 1, AND CONTROL LINE TO JCE CONNECTOR

ADDED WIRING BETWEEN JC7 AND JC10 FOR CMACCA. 09/01/99
2 -07/23/99 SCALE: DATE 08/04/97 REV 09/01/99
PRODUCTION
PCB-DATE REVISION TO D-SUB CONNECTOR CARD TO JE TO JF DRAWN BY KJG APVD BY SHEET OF
DATE
Page 1.16c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPBP-2
VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2
.. 1. VIB PRO BACKPLANE-2 PCB...........GVPBP-2

.. 40. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 10. BACKPLANE POLARIZING COMB.........HPCOMB-1
.. 39. 2-56X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS238B
.. 1. 2-56 X 5/16 FLATHEAD SS SCREW.....HS2516F
IC1 .. 1. 256 BIT 1 WIRE EEPROM.............IC2430A
JC1 .. 5. SOCKET PCB CONNECTOR..............JP64S
JC3 SOCKET PCB CONNECTOR..............JP64S
JC2 .. 5. 96 SOCKET BACKPLANE CONNECTOR.....JP96S
JC5 96 SOCKET BACKPLANE CONNECTOR.....JP96S
JCL .. 2. MOLEX 8 PIN STRAIGHT PLUG.........PC8-2
JCP1 MOLEX 8 PIN STRAIGHT PLUG.........PC8-2
JCE .. 1. 16 PIN PCB HEADER.................PH16PL
JCD .. 2. 34 PIN PCB HEADER.................PH34PL
JCV 34 PIN PCB HEADER.................PH34PL
JCT .. 1. 50 PIN PCB HEADER.................PH50PL
RF1 .. 1. 10 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR...........RF10UBC
07/29/99 KJG
+5VD PC1
+5VA
IC1 18a
3 +5VA
VIN 2 +5VA 18b
VOUT +5VD +5VA
+15V 1 IC2 IC3 IC4 IC5 IC6 IC7 18c
.1F
RF1 ADJ 28 6 D15 28 6 D15 28 6 D15 28 6 D15 28 6 D15 20
CD3
2.7F
CE4
VDIG D15 VDIG D15 VDIG D15 VDIG D15 VDIG D15 VCC
LM317AT RF3 27 7 D14 27 7 D14 27 7 D14 27 7 D14 27 7 D14 D15 9 11 SD15
CD11
CD14
CD17
VANA D14 VANA D14 VANA D14 VANA D14 VANA D14 A7 Y7
CD5
.1F
CD8
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
27ohm .5W
.1F
10F
CE1
8 D13 8 D13 8 D13 8 D13 8 D13 D14 8 12 SD14
CD2
232 1 D13 1 D13 1 D13 1 D13 1 D13 A6 Y6
PC1 VIN 9 D12 VIN 9 D12 VIN 9 D12 VIN 9 D12 VIN 9 D12 D13 7 13 SD13
RF45
RF2
SEL
ACOM
715
D12 D12 D12 D12 D12 A5 Y5
+5VD
33.2K
33.2K
33.2K
33.2K
33.2K
10 D11 10 D11 10 D11 10 D11 10 D11 D12 6 14 SD12
RF11
RF13
ACOM
RF5
RF7
RF9
2a D11 D11 D11 D11 D11 A4 Y4
+5VD ACOM 11 D10 ACOM 11 D10 ACOM 11 D10 ACOM 11 D10 ACOM 11 D10 D11 5 15 SD11
2b 4 D10 RF6 4 D10 RF8 4 D10 RF10 4 D10 RF12 4 D10 A3 Y3
+5VD ACOM ACOM CAP 12 D9 CAP 12 D9 CAP 12 D9 CAP 12 D9 CAP 12 D9 D10 4 16 SD10
2c RF4 D9 D9 D9 D9 D9 A2 Y2
+5VD ACOM ACOM 23 13 D8 23 13 D8 23 13 D8 23 13 D8 23 13 D8 D9 3 17 SD9
+5VD 200 200 200 200
2.7F
2.7F
2.7F
2.7F
2.7F
BYTE D8 BYTE D8 BYTE D8 BYTE D8 BYTE D8 A1 Y1
CE12
CE15
CE18
CE6
CE9
31a IC7 IC8 IC10 IC10 IC10 IC10 IC11 IC12
+5VD 200 5 15 D7 5 15 D7 5 15 D7 5 15 D7 5 15 D7 D8 2 18 SD8
31b AGND2 D7 AGND2 D7 AGND2 D7 AGND2 D7 AGND2 D7 A0 Y0
+5VD 2 16 D6 2 16 D6 2 16 D6 2 16 D6 2 16 D6 1
CD41
CD42
CD43
CD44
CD45
CD46
CD47
CD48
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
10F
AGND1 D6 AGND1 D6 AGND1 D6 AGND1 D6 AGND1 D6 OE1
CE40
31c
17 D5 17 D5 17 D5 17 D5 17 D5 19 10
D5 D5 D5 D5 D5 OE2 GND
DCOM 18 D4 18 D4 18 D4 18 D4 18 D4
1a D4 D4 D4 D4 D4 74HC541N
DCOM ACOM 19 D3 ACOM 19 D3 ACOM 19 D3 ACOM 19 D3 ACOM 19 D3
1b 3 D3 3 D3 3 D3 3 D3 3 D3
DCOM REF 20 D2 REF 20 D2 REF 20 D2 REF 20 D2 REF 20 D2 DCOM
1c DCOM D2 D2 D2 D2 D2
DCOM 21 D1 21 D1 21 D1 21 D1 21 D1 +5VD
2.7F
2.7F
2.7F
2.7F
2.7F
CE7
D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
CE10
CE13
CE16
CE19
32a IC8
DCOM 22 D0 22 D0 22 D0 22 D0 22 D0 20
32b 24 D0 24 D0 24 D0 24 D0 24 D0 VCC
DCOM R//C 26 R//C 26 R//C 26 R//C 26 R//C 26 D7 9 11 SD7
J1
32c 25 BUSY 25 BUSY 25 BUSY 25 BUSY 25 BUSY A7 Y7
CS 14 CS 14 CS 14 CS 14 CS 14 D6 8 12 SD6
+15V DGND DGND DGND DGND DGND A6 Y6
30a +15V IC9 IC11 IC12 IC13 IC14 IC15 D5 7 13 SD5
+15V ACOM ADS7805PB ACOM ADS7805PB ACOM ADS7805PB ACOM ADS7805PB ACOM ADS7805PB A5 Y5
30b D4 6 14 SD4
+15V A4 Y4
DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM DCOM
CD51
CD53
CD55
CD57
CD59
CD61
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
30c D3 5 15 SD3
10F
A3 Y3
CE49
D2 4 16 SD2
ACOM A2 Y2
28a D1 3 17 SD1
ACOM A1 Y1
28b D0 2 18 SD0
ACOM A0 Y0
28c 1
10F
OE1
CE50
ACOM
CD52
CD54
CD56
CD58
CD60
CD62
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
.1F
19 10
-15V OE2 GND
29a
-15V 74HC541N
29b
-15V DCOM
29c -15V
FLB ACC A
22a DATA BUS
FLM ACC A
22b
FSB ACC A
22c
FSM ACC A
23a
+15V RF26 LMACCOUT LMACCOUT

13b
422K
4
2 RF24 BUSYTOT
CE20 - 1 6 11a
LMACCA 3 - 7
14c + 26.1K 5
+
+15V 2.7F
11
RF23
1.2M
+15V
24.3K
RF25
+5VD
IC11
RF16
-15V
15K
2 DECODER TREF
4
VDD 2
SD15 6 CM24 - 1 ENCODER TREF1
ACOM D7 3 21c
SD14 7 +
ACOM D6
+5VD RF33 RF34 .056F
11
4.99K
SD13 8 25
RF17
D5 VOA
+15V
.0033F
IC9 SD12 9 9
.033F
11.5K 11.5K
CM22
CM23
9 D4 RF35 - 8 -15V D/AC1.F OUT
S7 13 SD11 10 27 10 21b
10 V+ D3 SJ(A) +
S6 9 SD10 11 28 11.5K
CM25
+5VD
.01F
11 - 8 SERVO MUX IC10 D2 GA(A)
ACOM S5 8 10 SD9 12 17
SPARE 12 DRAIN + 18 34 D1 SJ(B) 6
12b S4 VCC CS1 SD8 13 18 ACOM - 7 D/AC2 OUT
TREF1.F 7 3 +5VD 52 33 D0 GA(B) 5 19c
12c S3 V- VCC CS2 SA0 4 +
SERV0MUX 6 2 32 A0 CM30
27b S2 EN 14 CS3 SA1 5 15 ACOM
VFB 5 15 BUSY6 31 A1 VOB
12a S1 A2 15 CS4 3 DECODER WL REF
MFB 4 16 BUSY5 30 A2 +15V .056F 6
13a S0 A1 16 CS5 23 RF36 RF37 RF38 - 7 ENCODER WL REF1
14 1 BUSY4 29 CS _A 5 19b
RA18 GND A0 20 CS6 20 21 +
.0033F
1 BUSY3 CS _B +VCC
.033F
11.5K 11.5K 11.5K
CM28
CM29
CM31
.01F
MUX08FP 21 12 24 22
2 BUSY2 RSVD WR _A -VCC
10F
CE27
ACOM 22 23 19
SD15 3 BUSY1 RSVD WR _B
CE26
10b
10F
ACOM RF14 24 +5VD 1 26
SD14 4 -15V A2MUX 42 RSVD CLR ACOM_A -15V
10a A2MUX 25 14 16 ACOM
SD13 5 15K A1MUX 68 RSVD DCOM ACOM_B
9b A1MUX ACOM
4.99K
24.3K
28
RF15
RF32
SD12 6 -15V RA29 RA30 A0MUX 43 RSVD DAC725KP
9a 1 1 A0MUX 36 ACOM
SD11 7 RSVD
8b 2 SD15 2 SD7 SD7 60 37 DCOM ACOM ACOM
SD10 8 SD7 RSVD 9
8a 3 SD14 3 SD6 SD6 59 62 - 8 D/AC3 OUT
SD9 9 ACOM SD6 RSVD 10 20c
10F
7b +
CE21
4 SD13 DCOM 4 SD5 DCOM SD5 58 63
SD8 10 SD5 RSVD
7a 5 SD12 5 SD4 SD4 13 CM34
SD7 SD4
6b 1M 6 SD11 6 SD3 SD3 57 26
SD6 SD3 R/ C DECODER VIB OUT
6a 7 SD10 7 SD2 SD2 46 27 .056F 13
SD5 SD2 OE RF39 RF40 RF41 - 14 ENCODER WL REF2
5b 8 SD9 8 SD1 SD1 61 8 DCOM 12 20a
SD4 SD1 BUSYTOT +5VD +
.0033F
5a 9 SD8 9 SD0 SD0 47 45 IC12
.033F
11.5K 11.5K 11.5K
CM32
CM33
CM35
.01F
SD3 +5VD SD0 RES 2
4b 10 10 4 VDD
SD2 /SWR 53 DAC_EN SD15 6
4a /SWR D7
SD1 100K 100K /SRD 51 67 SD14 7
RF27
RF28
100K
100K
3b /SRD CSADAC1 D6
SD0 /RES 44 65 SD13 8 25 ACOM DECODER DRV
3a XDEN CSBDAC1 D5 VOA
ACOM 13
DATA BUS 66 SD12 9 - 14 ENCODER TREF2
2 CSADAC2 D4 12 23c
RSVD 64 SD11 10 27 +
/SWR 3 CSBDAC2 D3 SJ(A)
21a RSVD SD10 11 28 CM38
10 7 D2 GA(A)
/SRD RSVD SPAREADR3 SD9 12 17 +15V
11b 11 6 D1 SJ(B)
RSVD SPAREADR4 SD8 13 18 .056F
/RES 5 D0 GA(B)
4
24a SA7 19 SPAREADR5 SA0 4 2
SA7 38 A0 RF42 RF43 RF44 - 1 D/AC4.F OUT
+5VD SA6 17 SPAREDATA3 SA1 5 15 3 23b
RA31 SA6 9 A1 VOB +
.0033F
1 SA5 48 SPAREDATA4 3
.033F
CM36
CM37
CM39
11.5K 11.5K 11.5K
.01F
11
SA5 41 A2
2 SA7 SA4 49 SPAREDATA5 23 +15V
SA4 40 CS _A
3 SA6 SA3 50 SPAREDATA6 20 21 -15V
SA3 39 CS _B +VCC
4 SA5 SA2 54 SPAREDATA7 24 22
SA2 WR _A -VCC
5 SA4 SA1 55 1 19 ACOM
SA1 GND WR _B ACOM
6 SA3 SA0 56 35 1 26 -15V
SA0 GND CLR ACOM_A
7 SA2 14 16
SA7 EP1810 DCOM ACOM_B
17b 8 SA1
SA6 DAC725KP
17a 9 SA0 DCOM
SA5 DCOM ACOM
16b 10
SA4
16a
SA3 100K ADDRESS BUS
15b
SA2
15a
SA1 SPARE
14b
SA0 13
14a - 14
1B - 05/12/98 CHANGED IC13-15 TO LF444 05/24/99 12
+
REVISION PRODUCTION
PCB - DATE
DATE ACOM
Page 2.1c
Page 1 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPADDAC-1
VIB PRO A/D D/A CARD-1
CD2,3 .. 27. 0.1 MFD DIP CAPACITOR.............CD.1SW

CD5,8 0.1 MFD DIP CAPACITOR.............CD.1SW
CD11 0.1 MFD DIP CAPACITOR.............CD.1SW
CD41-48 0.1 MFD DIP CAPACITOR.............CD.1SW
CE1 .. 7. 10MFD 35V TANTALUM CAPACITOR......CE10MCF-1
CE21 10MFD 35V TANTALUM CAPACITOR......CE10MCF-1
CE26-27 10MFD 35V TANTALUM CAPACITOR......CE10MCF-1
CE4,6 .. 12. 2.7 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE2.7MCF
CE7,9 2.7 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE2.7MCF
CE10 2.7 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE2.7MCF
CE12-13 2.7 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE2.7MCF
CM25 .. 4. .01 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR..........CM10NDE
CM31 .01 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR..........CM10NDE
CM23 .. 4. .0033 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR........CM3.3NDE
CM29 .0033 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR........CM3.3NDE
CM22 .. 4. .033 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR.........CM33NDE
CM28 .033 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR.........CM33NDE
DS1 .. 1. 200 VOLT 1 AMP. POWER DIODE......DS1N4004
.. 1. VIB PRO A/D D/A CARD-1B PCB.......GVPADDAC-1B
XPC1 .. 2. #2 INTERNAL LOCKWASHER............HILW2
XPC1 .. 2. #6 1/8 X1/4 OD NYLON SPACER.......HMPSP33
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
XIC1 .. 1. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
XPC1 .. 1. .5 MODULE POLARIZING COMB.........HPCOMB
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56X5/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS258B
09/08/97 05/11/2000 KJG

Page 2.1c
Page 2 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPADDAC-1
XIC1 .. 1. 4-40X1/4 BH SS SCREW.............HS414B

IC7,8 .. 2. OCTAL BUFFER/LINE DRIVER..........IC74HC541
IC10 .. 1. VIB PRO AD/DA PROGRAMMED PLD......IZVPADDA-PLD
PC1 .. 1. 96 PIN PCB CONNECTOR..............JP96P
XIC13-15 .. 3. 14-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS14D
XIC9 .. 1. 16-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS16D-1
XIC2-6 .. 5. 28 POSITION .3 DIP SOCKET.........JS28D-1
XIC10 .. 1. 68 PIN SOCKET, SQUARE.............JS68S
IC13-15 .. 3. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA444
IC11 .. 2. DUAL 16-BIT D/A CONVERTER.........OD725
IC12 DUAL 16-BIT D/A CONVERTER.........OD725
IC2-6 .. 5. 16 BIT 100 KHZ A/D CONVERTER......OD7805
IC9 .. 1. 8 CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER.............OMADG438F
IC1 .. 1. ADJUSTABLE VOLTAGE REGULATOR......OV317-1
RA29-31 .. 3. 100K SIP RESISTOR PACK 10 PIN.....RA100KSIP1
RA18 .. 1. 1 MEG SIP RESISTOR PACK 10 PIN....RA1MSIP
RF23 .. 1. 1.2 MEG 1/4W 5% RESISTOR..........RF1.2MBE
RF33-44 .. 12. 11.5K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR............RF11.5KBC
RF14 .. 2. 15K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..............RF15KBC
RF16 15K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..............RF15KBC
RF4 .. 5. 200 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..........RF200UBC
RF6 200 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..........RF200UBC
RF1 .. 1. 27 OHM 1/2W 5% RESISTOR...........RF27UCE
09/08/97 05/11/2000 KJG

Page 2.1c
Page 3 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPADDAC-1

RF45 .. 1. SELECT RESISTOR 1%................RSEL1%
09/08/97 05/11/2000 KJG

P3
PC15S-90
Page 2.2c
Page 1 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPCCC-3
VIB PRO COMP. COMM. CARD-3
CD1-5 .. 21. 0.1 MFD DIP CAPACITOR.............CD.1SW

CE23-26 .. 4. 10MFD 35V TANTALUM CAPACITOR......CE10MCF-1
CE27-28 .. 2. 2.7 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE2.7MCF
CM32-34 .. 3. 2.5 MFD POLYCARBONATE CAP 50V 1%..CM2.5MDC
PS1 .. 1. 5V TO +/-15V CONVERTER............EP5+/-15
.. 1. COMP COMMUNICATION CARD-3 PCB.....GCCC-3
HD1 .. 1. 14-PIN DIP HEADER.................HA14P
.. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 1. .5 MODULE POLARIZING COMB.........HPCOMB
.. 2. 2-56 X 9/16 BINDING HEAD SCREW....HS2916B
IC5 .. 1. MULTI-CHANNEL RS-232 DRVR/RCVR....IC233A
IC2 .. 1. 512Kx8 CMOS STATIC RAM............IR7M4048
IC1 .. 1. CCC PROGRAMMED H8.................IZCCC
IC6 .. 1. CCC PROGRAMMED PLD................IZCCC-PLD
.. 6. 14-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS14D
.. 1. 28 POSITION .3 DIP SOCKET.........JS28D-1
.. 1. 32 PIN STRIP CARRIER SOCKETS......JS32SC
.. 1. 68 PIN SOCKET, SQUARE.............JS68S
KD1 .. 1. 14.745 MHZ CRYSTAL................KDJXO-14
OA3 .. 3. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA347
OA7 QUAD OP AMP.......................OA347
OA13 QUAD OP AMP.......................OA347
OA14-15 .. 2. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA444
OD9 .. 1. 16 BIT 100 KHZ A/D CONVERTER......OD7805
OF8 .. 3. LP 8 POLE BUTTERWORTH 500Hz FLTR..OFD68LP
OF11-12 LP 8 POLE BUTTERWORTH 500Hz FLTR..OFD68LP
VR1-2 .. 2. CURRENT REGULATOR.................OLM334
OM10 .. 1. LATCHED 4/8 CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER...OM528A
P1 .. 1. 64-PIN DIN CONNECTOR..............PCBDINM
RF36-37 10K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..............RF10KBC
04/17/98 07/14/2000 KJG

Page 2.2c
Page 2 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPCCC-3
VIB PRO COMP. COMM. CARD-3

RF46 10 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR...........RF10UBC
RF1 .. 1. 1 MEG 1/4W 1% RESISTOR............RF1MBC
RF7-8 .. 6. 200K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.............RF200KBC
RF29-30 200K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.............RF200KBC
RF3-4 .. 8. SELECT RESISTOR 1%................RSEL1%
RF12 SELECT RESISTOR 1%................RSEL1%
RF22-23 SELECT RESISTOR 1%................RSEL1%
SD1 .. 1. 2PST DIP SWITCH...................SDS2
SD2 .. 1. 2PST SIDE TOGGLE DIP SWITCH.......SDS2-1
04/17/98 07/14/2000 KJG

Pelton Company, Inc. Page 2.3c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCEXT
EXTENDER CARD
.. 1. 64/96P EXTENDER PCB...............GEXT-1A

.. 4. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 4. 2-56X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS238B
.. 1. 64-SOCKET DIN EXT. CONNECTOR......JC64SE
.. 1. 64-PIN DIN CONNECTOR..............PCBDINM
04/11/85 04/22/98 KEG

Pelton Company, Inc. Page 2.3d
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCEXT-1
96 PIN EXTENDER CARD
.. 1. 64/96P EXTENDER PCB...............GEXT-1A

.. 4. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 4. 2-56X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS238B
.. 1. 96 PIN PCB CONNECTOR..............JP96P
.. 1. 96 SOCKET EXTENDER CONNECTOR......JP96SE
04/22/98 KJG
PS2
EPRS5-15
PS1
EPRS5-15
Page 2.4c
Page 1 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPHI/FC-1
VIB PRO HYDRAULIC I/F CARD-1
CD48-49 .. 2. 0.01 MFD DIP CAPACITOR............CD.01SW

CE50-51 .. 2. 100MFD 35V TANTALUM CAPACITOR....CE100MCF
CE52-55 .. 4. 10MFD 15V TANTALUM CAPACITOR.....CE10MBF
CS57 .. 1. 100 PFD. SILVER MICA CAPACITOR....CS100PGE
CS58-61 .. 4. 10 PFD. SILVER MICA CAPACITOR.....CS10PGE
CS62-63 .. 2. 1500 PFD. SILVER MICA CAPACITOR...CS1500PGE
CS65-66 .. 2. 22 PFD. SILVER MICA CAPACITOR.....CS22PGE
CS67 .. 1. 30 PFD. SILVER MICA CAPACITOR.....CS30PGE
DS3-4 .. 2. 50V 1A POWER DIODE................DS1N4001
DS1 .. 3. GEN. PURPOSE SIGNAL DIODE.........DS1N457A
DS5-6 GEN. PURPOSE SIGNAL DIODE.........DS1N457A
DZ2 .. 1. 8.2 VOLT 1 WATT ZENER DIODE......DZ1N4738A
DZ7 .. 1. 10 VOLT .5 WATT ZENER DIODE......DZ1N758A
PS1-2 .. 2. REGULATED 5V-15V CONVERTER........EPRS5-15
.. 1. VIB PRO HYD I/F CARD-1A PCB.......GVPHI/FC-1A
.. 4. .25 OD.X.115 ID. NYLON WASHER.....HMPNW0432
.. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 4. 4-40 NYLON HEX NUT................HN440N
.. 2. 2-56 X 9/16 BINDING HEAD SCREW...HS2916B
.. 4. 4-40X1/2 NYLON SCREW.............HS412N
IC5-6 .. 2. BIPOLAR OP AMP....................IC704
IC9 .. 2. RAIL TO RAIL OP AMP...............IC822AN
IC14 RAIL TO RAIL OP AMP...............IC822AN
.. 1. VIB PRO HYD I/F PROGRAMMED PLD....IZVPHI/F-PLD
.. 2. 16-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS16D-1
.. 1. 28 POSITION .3 DIP SOCKET.........JS28D-1
.. 7. 8 POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS8D
IC12-13 .. 2. PRECISION DIFFERENCE AMPLIFIER....OA117
IC21 .. 1. DUAL OPERATIONAL AMP..............OA2544
IC8 .. 1. OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER.............OA3580J
IC3-4 .. 2. DUAL LOGARITHMIC D/A CONVERTER....OAD7112
IC15-16 .. 2. COMPARATOR........................OC311-1
IC2 .. 1. 16 BIT D/A CONVERTER..............ODAC712
07/15/99 06/30/2000 KJG

Page 2.4c
Page 2 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPHI/FC-1
IC20 .. 1. UNIVERSAL ACTIVE FILTER...........OFUAF42

IC17-18 .. 2. SAMPLE HOLD AMPLIFIER.............OH5320
IC10-11 .. 2. 8 CHANNEL MULTIPLEXER.............OMADG438F
IC7 .. 1. MINI-DIP ANALOG SWITCH............OSADG419
PC1 .. 1. 64-PIN DIN CONNECTOR..............PCBDINM
Q19 .. 1. NPN GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSISTOR....Q2N3904
RA33 .. 1. 100K SIP RESISTOR PACK 10 PIN.....RA100KSIP1
RF43-44 .. 2. 100 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..........RF100UBC
RF16 .. 3. 1K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR...............RF1KBC
RF19 1K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR...............RF1KBC
RF29-30 .. 4. 1 MEG 1/4W 1% RESISTOR............RF1MBC
RF41-42 1 MEG 1/4W 1% RESISTOR............RF1MBC
RF39-40 30.1K 1/4W 1% RESISTOR............RF30.1KBC
07/15/99 06/30/2000 KJG

Page 2.4c
Page 3 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPHI/FC-1

RP18 .. 1. 100K PCB POT......................RP100K
RF65-66 .. 2. SELECT RESISTOR 1%................RSEL1%
RF34 .. 1. 56 OHM 3-1/4W 5% RESISTOR.........RW56UFE
07/15/99 06/30/2000 KJG

PS2
EPRS5-15
PS1
EPRS5-15
An Input/Output Inc. Company
Bill of Materials: Revision: 000

101-100403
Part Number Qty/Bill U/M Description Ref Designator
001-600069 1.00 EACH PROGMD VP HI/F-2 PLD EPM7032LC
101-000403 1.00 EACH VIB PRO HYDRAULIC I/F CARD-2
Print Date: 2/19/03 9:27:13AM Drawn By: MRG Approved By: Page: 1
An Input/Output Inc. Company
Bill of Materials: Revision: 000

101-000403
Part Number Qty/Bill U/M Description Ref Designator
001-000004 3.00 EACH OPA547F H.C. OP AMP SMT IC10, IC24-25
001-000009 1.00 EACH AD822AR RAIL 2 RAIL OP AMP SMT IC23
001-000013 2.00 EACH 1NA117KU DIFERENCE AMP SOIC IC13-14
001-000016 3.00 EACH LT1639CS R2R QUAD OP AMP SOIC IC6-8
001-200008 1.00 EACH DS1233DZ-15 5V RESET SOT223 IC17
001-200009 1.00 EACH LT1236AIS8-10 REF SOIC IC2
001-200015 1.00 EACH LT1460JCS3-2.5 REF SOT23 IC22
001-200016 1.00 EACH LTC1599BCG 16 BIT DAC SSOP IC3
001-200034 1.00 EACH AD753JN 10-BIT D/A CNVRT IC21
001-200045 2.00 EACH HA9P2425-5 S&H AMP SOIC IC18-19
001-200052 2.00 EACH ADG438FBN 8 CH MULTIPLEXER IC11-12
001-200054 1.00 EACH ADG419BN MINI-DIP ANALOG SW IC9
001-300024 2.00 EACH AD7112BR DUAL LOG D/A CNVRTR IC4-5
001-300061 3.00 EACH AT90S2313 8BIT MICROCNTROLR IC15-16, IC20
003-000007 10.00 EACH DIOD S1B/113 RECTIFIER 1A DS2-5, DS10-15
003-000014 4.00 EACH DIOD BAV99 DUAL SWITCHING DS6-9
003-100015 1.00 EACH DIOD DZ23C9V1-7 DUAL 9V ZENER DZ1
005-000001 2.00 EACH MTP107M035PIC ELE 100MF 35V CE39-40
005-000005 9.00 EACH 293D106X0035D2T TAN 10 MF 20% CE1-3, CE45-46, CE53-56
005-300001 3.00 EACH C0805C103M5RACTR CER.01 PF20% C28, C57-58
005-300004 11.00 EACH CAP C0805100J1GAC CER 10 PF 1% C29-34, C41-42, C49, C59-60
005-300006 1.00 EACH C0805C220J1GAC CER 22 PF 5% C35
005-300016 29.00 EACH CAP C0805C104KSRAC CER .1 MF C4-23, C25-27, C36-38, C43-44, C50
005-600001 2.00 EACH CD15FA102J03 CAP SM 1000 PF CS47-48
005-600002 2.00 EACH CD6FC101J03 CAP SM 100 PF CS51-52
006-500001 1.00 EACH CRCW120610R0FT 1/8 1% 10 OHM R14
006-600181 2.00 EACH RES 1/4W 1% 2K OHM RF28-29
006-700006 1.00 EACH CRCW08051002FT 1/10W 1% 10K OH R12
006-700011 4.00 EACH CRCW08051001FT 1/10W 1% 1K OHM R10, R13, R16-17
006-700012 7.00 EACH CRCW08051004FT 1/10W 1% 1M OHM R1, R8, R20, R22-23, R35-36
006-700017 3.00 EACH CRCW08052002FT 1/10W 1% 20K OH R3, R6-7
006-700019 1.00 EACH CRCW08052432FT 1/10W 1% 24.3K R2
006-700020 1.00 EACH CRCW08052613FT 1/10W 1% 261K O R11
006-700026 3.00 EACH CRCW08054991FT 1/10W 1% 4.99K R9, R26-27
006-700027 1.00 EACH CRCW08054022FT 1/10W 1% 40.2K R5
006-700038 2.00 EACH RES 1/10W 1% 86.6K OHM R33-34
006-700050 1.00 EACH RES 3-1/4W 5% 56 OHM RF15
006-900006 7.00 EACH SOMC1603-103GD02 RES NET 10K RA4, RA18-19, RA21, RA24-25, RA30
012-200109 1.00 EACH 100-V064-053 CONN 64P DIN PC1
012-300020 1.00 EACH 100-000-026 POLARIZING COMB .5 XPC1
012-300086 3.00 EACH 11093316 CONN 16P DIP XIC11--12, XIC21
012-300089 3.00 EACH 11093320 CONN 20P DIP XIC15-16, XIC20
012-300101 1.00 EACH ACCS44Z CONN 44P SOCKET XIC1
012-300107 1.00 EACH 11093308 CONN 8P DIP XIC9
016-000033 2.00 EACH BRS515 PS 5V-15V REGLATD CNVTR PS1-2
019-000144 8.00 EACH WASHER #2 INTERNAL LK XPC1
019-000220 2.00 EACH HEX NUT 2-56 XPC1
019-000469 2.00 EACH SCREW 2-56 X 9/16 PH XPC1
075-000247 1.00 EACH PCB VIB PRO HYDRAULIC I/F-2
Print Date: 2/19/03 9:36:47AM Drawn By: MRG Approved By: Page: 1
Page 1 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCFC-6
FILTER CARD-6
CD51-52 .. 8. 0.01 MFD DIP CAPACITOR............CD.01SW

CD55-56
CD59-60
CD63-64
CD57-58
CD61-62
CM12 .. 10. 0.1 MFD POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR..CM100NDC
CM15
CM20
CM23
CM30
CM33
CM37
CM40
CM44
CM47
CM11 .. 15. .15 MFD POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR...CM150NDC
CM14
CM17
CM19
CM22
CM25
CM31
CM34-35
CM38
CM41-43
CM46
CM49
CM18 .. 5. .015 MFD POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR..CM15NDC
CM26
CM32
CM39
CM50
CM10 .. 5. 1.0 MFD POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR...CM1MDC
CM27-29
CM36
.. 1. FILTER CARD-6 PCB.................GFC-6
.. 1. 16-PIN DIP HEADER.................HA16P
.. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
02/08/95 07/15/98 KJG

Page 2 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCFC-6
FILTER CARD-6

OA1-7 .. 7. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA444
P1 .. 1. 64-PIN DIN CONNECTOR..............PCBDINM
RF31-33
RF41
RF29
RF35
RF43
RF50
RF40
RF49
RF58
RF22
RF37
RF45
RF57
RF21
RF34
RF42
RF56
RF18
RF38
RF46
RF53
RF19
RF39
RF47
RF54
RF30
RF36
02/08/95 07/15/98 KJG

Page 3 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCFC-6
FILTER CARD-6

RF51
02/08/95 07/15/98 KJG

IC11
REF195
Page 2.6c
Page 1 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPH8SC-1
VIB PRO H8S CARD-1
CD1 .. 20. 0.1 MFD DIP CAPACITOR.............CD.1SW

CE25 .. 1. 1.0 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE1MCF
CM54 .. 1. .01 MFD. POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR..CM10NCC
.. 1. VIB PRO H8S CARD-1B PCB...........GVPH8SC-1B
.. 6. .25 OD x .115 ID NYLON WASHER.....HMPNW0432
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 2. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 2. 4-40 x 5/8 BH SS SCREW...........HS458B
PS1 .. 1. 5V DC/DC CHARGE PUMP..............IC1044
IC5 .. 1. 5V RESET CHIP.....................IC1233
IC15 .. 1. NON VOLATILE TIMEKEEPING RAM......IC1647
IC12 .. 1. QUAD 2-INPUT AND GATE.............IC74HC08
IC7 .. 1. OCTAL 3-STATE BUFFER..............IC74HC244
IC4 .. 1. QUAD 2-INPUT OR GATE..............IC74HC32
IC16 .. 1. 4096K NONVOLATILE SRAM............IR1250Y
IC6 .. 1. VIB PRO H8S PROGRAMMED PLD........IZH8S-PLD
.. 1. VIB PRO H8S PROGRAMMED H8S........IZVPH8S
XIC4 .. 2. 14-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS14D
XIC12 14-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS14D
XRA82 .. 2. 16-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS16D-1
XSD1 16-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS16D-1
XIC15-16 .. 2. 32 PIN LOW PROFILE DIP SOCKET.....JS32DL
08/01/97 07/14/2000 MRG

Page 2.6c
Page 2 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPH8SC-1
VIB PRO H8S CARD-1
XIC8-9 .. 5. 32 PIN STRIP CARRIER SOCKETS......JS32SC

XIC11 32 PIN STRIP CARRIER SOCKETS......JS32SC
XIC13-14 32 PIN STRIP CARRIER SOCKETS......JS32SC
XRA83 32 PIN STRIP CARRIER SOCKETS......JS32SC
XKO1 .. 1. 6-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS6D
XPS1 .. 1. 8 POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS8D
KO1 .. 1. OPTICALLY COUPLED RELAY...........KO8060
IC13 .. 1. ELECTRONIC DIGITAL RHEOSTAT-10K...OA1669-10
IC14 .. 1. HIGH PERFORMANCE OP AMP...........OA2134
IC9 .. 2. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA347
IC17 QUAD OP AMP.......................OA347
IC11 .. 1. PRECISION VOLTAGE REFERENCE 5V....OV195
JA, JB .. 2. 60 PIN 50/50 SMT HEADER .250 H....PP60-S
Q1-2 .. 2. NPN GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSISTOR....Q2N3904
RA84 100K SIP RESISTOR PACK 10 PIN.....RA100KSIP1
RA82 .. 2. RESISTOR NETWORK 10K..............RA10K
RA83 RESISTOR NETWORK 10K..............RA10K
08/01/97 07/14/2000 MRG

Page 2.6c
Page 3 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPH8SC-1
VIB PRO H8S CARD-1

RF45-48 .. 9. 39 OHM 1/4W 5% RESISTOR...........RF39UBE
RF51-55 39 OHM 1/4W 5% RESISTOR...........RF39UBE
RF42 .. 1. 510 OHM 1/4W 5% RESISTOR..........RF510UBE
SD1 .. 1. 8PST DIP-SWITCH...................SD8SA
08/01/97 07/14/2000 MRG

+5VD IC1 JB
PG1/CS3
+5VD 5 60
VCC 128 PG0/CAS/OE
JA 39 PG2/CS2 59
+5VD VCC 127 P10/PO8/TI0CA0/ DACK0
1 58 PG1/CS3 58
CD1
CD2
CD3
CD4
+5VD VCC 126 P11/PO9/TI0CB0/ DACK1
.1mF
.1mF
.1mF
.1mF
2 84 PG0/CAS/OE 57
DCOM VCC 125 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA
3 89 MD2 56
A0 VCC 124 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB
4 MD1 55
A1 A0 6 123 P14/PO12/TIOCA1
5 PC0/A0 MD0 54
A2 A1 7 122 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC
6 PC1/A1 P10/PO8/TI0CA0/ DACK0 53
A3 A2 8 121 P16/PO14/TI0CA2
7 PC2/A2 P11/PO9/TI0CB0/ DACK1 +5VD 52
A4 A3 9 120 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD
8 PC3/A3 P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA 51
A5 A4 11 119 P47/AN7/DA1
9 PC4/A4 P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB 1 1 1 50
A6 A5 12 118 P46/AN6/DA0
10 PC5/A5 P14/PO12/TIOCA1 J1 J2 J3 49
A7 A6 13 117 P45/AN5
11 PC6/A6 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC 48
A8 A7 14 116 P44/AN4
12 PC7/A7 P16/PO14/TIOCA2 2 2 2 47
A9 A8 15 115 P43/AN3
13 PB0/A8 P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD 46
A10 A9 16 113 P42/AN2
14 PB1/A9 AVSS 45
A11 A10 17 112 P41/AN1
15 PB2/A10 P47/AN7/DA1 44
A12 A11 18 111 P40/AN0
16 PB3/A11 P46/AN6/DA0 43
A13 A12 20 110 AVSS
17 PB4/A12 P45/AN5 42
A14 A13 21 109 VREF
18 PB5/A13 P44/AN4 41
A15 A14 22 108 AVCC
19 PB6/A14 P43/AN3 40
A16 A15 23 107 ADTRG
20 PB7/A15 P42/AN2 39
A17 A16 24 106 SCK2
21 PA0/A16 P41/AN1 38
A18 A17 25 105 +5VD DCOM
22 PA1/A17 P40/AN0 37
A19 A18 26 104 DCOM
23 PA2/A18 VREF 36
A20 A19 27 103 P51/RXD2
24 PA3/A19 AVCC 35
A21 A20 29 102 P50/TXD2
25 PA4/A20/IRQ4 ADTRG 34
A22 A21 30 101 PF0/BREQ
26 PA5/A21/IRQ5 SCK2 33
A23 A22 31 98 PF1/BACK
27 PA6/A22/IRQ6 P51/RXD2 32
DCOM A23 32 97 PF2/WAIT/BREQ0
28 PA7/A23/IRQ7 P50/TXD2 31
DCOM 1 96 PF3/LWR
29 PG3/CS1 PF0/BREQ 30
PG3/CS1 2 95 PF4/HWR
30 PG4/CS0 PF1/BACK 29
P67/CS7/IRQ3 33 94 PF5/RD
31 P67/CS7/IRQ3 PF2/WAIT/BREQ0 28
P66/CS6/IRQ2 34 93 PF6/AS
32 P66/CS6/IRQ2 PF3/LWR 27
P65/IRQ1 37 92 +5V
33 P65/IRQ1 PF4/HWR 26
P64/IRQ0 38 91 PF7/PHI
34 P64/IRQ0 PF5/RD 25
DCOM D0 40 90 DCOM
35 D0 PF6/AS 24
D0 D1 41 88 EXTAL
36 D1 PF7/PHI 23
D1 D2 42 86 DCOM
37 D2 EXTAL 22
D2 D3 43 85 +5V
38 D3 XTAL 21
D3 D4 45 83 STBY
39 D4 STBY 20
D4 D5 46 82 NMI
40 D5 NMI 19
D5 D6 47 81 RES
41 D6 RES 18
D6 D7 48 80 WDTOVF
42 D7 WDTOVF 17
D7 D8 49 79 P20/PO0/TIOCA3
43 D8 P20/P00/TIOCA3 16
D8 D9 50 78 J1 P21/PO1/TIOCB3
44 D9 P21/P01/TIOCB3 15
D9 D10 51 77 P22/PO2/TIOCC3/TMRI0
45 D10 P22/P02/TIOC3/TMRI0 14
D10 D11 52 76 P23/PO3/TIOCD3/TMCI0
46 D11 P23/P03/TIOCD3/TMCI0 13
D11 D12 54 75 P24/PO4/TIOCA4/TMRI1
47 D12 P24/P04/TIOCA4/TMRI1 12
D12 D13 55 74 P25/PO5/TIOCB4/TMCI1
48 D13 P25/P05/TIOCB4/TMCI1 11
D13 D14 56 73 P26/PO6/TIOCA5/TMO0
49 D14 P26/P06/TIOCA5/TMO0 10
D14 D15 57 72 P27/PO7/TIOCB5/TMO1
50 D15 P27/P07/TIOCB5/TMO1 9
D15 59 71 P63/TEND1
51 P30/TXD0 P63/TEND1 8
DCOM 60 70 P62/DREQ1
52 P31/TXD1 P62/DREQ1 7
DCOM 61 69 TEND0/CS5
53 P32/RXD0 P61/TEND0/CS5 6
P30/TXD0 62 66 P60/CS4
54 P33//RXD1 P60/CS4 5
P31/TXD1 63 DCOM
55 P34/SCK0 44 4
P32/RXD0 64 VSS DCOM
56 P35/SCK1 53 3
P33/RXD1 VSS +5V
57 3 65 2
P34/SCLK0 VSS VSS +5V
58 4 67 1
P35/SCK1 VSS VSS
59 10 68
+5V VSS VSS JP60-S
60 19 87
VSS VSS
JP60-S 28 99 PELTON COMPANY, INC.
VSS VSS
35 100 1500 N. Waverly
VSS VSS
36 114 PONCA CITY, OK 74601
VSS VSS
TITLE:
H8S MICROPROCESSOR CARD-1
MAT'L: NUMBER CARD REV

FCH8SMC-2
QUAN: 2B
2 - 05/25/99 ADDED J4 FOR FLASH PROCESSOR
SCALE: DATE 10/06/97 REV 10/10/01
PRODUCTION
PCB - DATE REVISION
DATE DRAWN BY KJG APVD BY SHEET OF
Page 2.7c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCH8SMC-2
H8S MICROPROCESSOR CARD-2
CD1-4 .. 4. .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM

.. 1. H8S MICROPROCESSOR CARD-2B PCB....GH8SC-2B
IC1 .. 1. H8S/2357 MICROCOMPUTER/FLASH......ICH8S-F
JA,JB .. 2. 60 SOCKET 50/50 SMT RECEPTACLE....JP60-S
06/02/99 10/10/2001 KJG

Page 2.8c
Page 1 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPI/FC-1
VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD-1

CM38 .. 2. .01 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR..........CM10NDE
DZ1-2 .. 2. 5.1 VOLT 1 WATT ZENER DIODE......DZ1N4733A
.. 1. VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD - 1B.......GVPI/FC-1B
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
J2-8 .. 7. SQUARE PIN SHORTING CLIP..........HX999
IC4 .. 1. ASYNCHRONOUS COMM. ELEMENT........IC16C554
IC3 .. 2. 4 CHANNEL RS232 LINE DRVR/RCVR....IC208E
IC12 4 CHANNEL RS232 LINE DRVR/RCVR....IC208E
IC13 .. 1. QUAD DIFFERENTIAL LINE RECEIVER...IC26C32
IC9 .. 1. QUAD 2 INPUT NAND.................IC74HC00
IC5 .. 1. VIB PRO I/F PROGRAMMED PLDB.......IZVPI/F-PLDB
IC11 .. 1. VIB PRO I/F PROGRAMMED PLDL.......IZVPI/F-PLDL
XIC13 .. 1. 16-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS16D-1
XIC3-12 .. 2. 24-PIN SOLDER .3 DIP SOCKET.......JS24D
XIC4-5 .. 3. 68 PIN SOCKET, SQUARE.............JS68S
XIC11 68 PIN SOCKET, SQUARE.............JS68S
XIC1 .. 3. 6-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS6D
XIC6 6-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS6D
XIC8 6-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS6D
IC1 .. 3. OPTICAL COUPLER...................KO4N32
IC6 OPTICAL COUPLER...................KO4N32
IC8 OPTICAL COUPLER...................KO4N32
09/19/97 07/17/2000 KJG P

Page 2.8c
Page 2 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPI/FC-1
VIB PRO INTERFACE CARD-1
IC10 .. 1. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA444

IC7 .. 1. DUAL 16-BIT D/A CONVERTER.........OD725
XJ2-4 .. 7. .025 SQ. 2 PIN TERMINAL STRIP.....PP36-2
XJ5-8 .. 4. .025 SQ.3 PIN TERMINAL STRIP......PP36-3
RA10 .. 1. 100K SIP RESISTOR PACK 10 PIN.....RA100KSIP1
RF6 .. 9. 39 OHM 1/4W 5% RESISTOR...........RF39UBE
RF26 39 OHM 1/4W 5% RESISTOR...........RF39UBE
09/19/97 07/17/2000 KJG P

8
10
7
1 6
5
2 5 3
6
3 4
12 + 5
6
5
1 6
3
4
8 + 3
4
8 8 +
10 1
7
5 1
3 1 6
6
1 6 2 5
12 +
2 5 3 4
3 4
1 6 1
5 2
4 3
5
6
3
4
8 +
6 1
1 6 1
5 2
2 5 6 1
4 3
3 4 5 2
4 3
1 6
2 5
3 4
25 3
1 16 XD VCCINT
2 15 45 11
3 14 FUP VCCIO 1 6
4 13 42 21
5 12 HALFUP VCCIO 6 1 2 5
6 11 29 31
7 10 DN VCCIO 5 2 3 4
8 9 27 35
RMDA VCCINT 1 16 4 3
46 43 2 15
SPARE3 VCCIO 3 14
47 53 4 13
SPARE2 VCCIO 5 12
30 63 6 11
SPARE1 VCCIO 7 10
8 9
55
UP_DN 44
56 PIN002 6 1
F_HUP 68 1 6
PIN001 5 2
61 2 5
D7 57 4 3
60 RSVD 3 4
D6
33 14
D5 INP5
51 5
D4 INP4
36 23
D3 INP3
37 20
D2 INP2 6 1
39 19
D1 INP1 5 2
40 41
D0 INP0 4 3 1 6
11
12 52 B1 20 2 5
CS0 OUT5 13 VCC
28 59 B2 3 4
RD OUT4 15 9
22 64 B3 YB1
WR OUT3 17 7
65 B4 YB2
13 OUT2 5
RSVD 62 2 YB3 6 1
24 OUT1 A1 3
RSVD 54 4 YB4 5 2
49 OUT0 A2
RSVD 6 18 4 3
50 1 A3 YA1
RSVD GND 8 16
2 A4 YA2 1 6
4 GND 14
SA0 6 YA3 2 5
7 GND 1 12
SA1 16 EN_A YA4 3 4
8 GND 19
SA2 26 EN_B 10
9 GND GND 6 1
RSVD 34
10 GND 5 2
SA4 38
32 GND 4 3
SA5 48
15 GND
SA6 58
18 GND
SA7 66
GND 1 6
17 67
SH_H8S GND 2 5
1 16
2 15 6 1 3 4
3 14
4 13 5 2
5 12
6 11 4 3
7 10
8 9
1 6
PS1
22 14 2 5
+VIN +VOUT
23 15 3 4
+VIN N/C
9
N/C
8
10 2
N/C -INA 1
2 11 3
-VIN N/C 6 +INA TITLE:
3 16 -INB 7
4
-VIN -VOUT 5
+INB MAT'L: NUMBER CARD REV
EP24-5-1 QUAN:
SCALE:
DATE REV
DRAWN BY KJG APVD BY SHEET OF

Page 2.9c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVP1XLC-1
VIB PRO 1X LIFT CARD-1

CE6 .. 1. 50MFD 50V ELECTRO. CAPACITOR......CE50MCF
DS7 50V 1A POWER DIODE................DS1N4001
DS5 .. 3. 200 VOLT 1 AMP. POWER DIODE......DS1N4004
DS9 200 VOLT 1 AMP. POWER DIODE......DS1N4004
DS11 200 VOLT 1 AMP. POWER DIODE......DS1N4004
DZ8 5.1 VOLT 1 WATT ZENER DIODE......DZ1N4733A
DZ10 5.1 VOLT 1 WATT ZENER DIODE......DZ1N4733A
PS1 .. 1. 9-36 IN +5 OUT 1.25x.8x.5H........EP24-5-1
.. 1. VIB PRO 3X LIFT CARD-1 PCB........GVP3XLC-1
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56 X 9/16 BINDING HEAD SCREW....HS2916B
IC4-5 .. 2. N-CHANNEL LOGIC LEVEL MOSFET......IC655AN
IC3 .. 1. RAIL TO RAIL OP AMP...............IC822AN
IC1 .. 1. VIB PRO 3X LIFT PROGRAMMED PLD....IZVP3XL-PLD
XKO6-11 .. 6. 6-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS6D
XIC3 .. 1. 8 POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS8D
KM3-5 .. 3. 5 VOLT MINIATURE POWER RELAY......KMDK1A1B-5
KO6-11 .. 6. OPTICALLY COUPLED RELAY...........KO8060
PC1 .. 1. 64-PIN DIN CONNECTOR..............PCBDINM
RA3 .. 2. 10K RESISTOR ARRAY SMT............RA10K-SM
RA18 10K RESISTOR ARRAY SMT............RA10K-SM
RF12-13 619 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR..........RF619UBC
04/18/2000 06/28/2000 KJG

IC11
REF195
Page 2.10c
Page 1 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPMC-1
VIB PRO MODEM CARD-1

CE25 .. 1. 1.0 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE1MCF
CE18 .. 1. 5.6 MFD ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR....CE5.6MCF
CM6 .. 1. .1 MFD. MYLAR CAPACITOR...........CM100NDE
CM3 .. 2. .01 MFD. POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR..CM10NCC
CM54 .01 MFD. POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR..CM10NCC
CS8 .. 1. 1500 PFD. SILVER MICA CAPACITOR...CS1500PGE
DH5-6 .. 2. 70V SCHOTTKY BARRIER DIODE........DHMBD701L
DZ1-2 .. 2. 10 VOLT .5 WATT ZENER DIODE......DZ1N758A
.. 1. VIB PRO MODEM CARD - 1A PCB.......GVPMC-1A
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 2. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 2. 4-40 x 5/8 BH SS SCREW...........HS458B
TP1 .. 1. TEST POINT PCB MINIATURE..........HTP-6
IC12 .. 1. QUAD 2-INPUT AND GATE.............IC74HC08
IC7 .. 1. OCTAL 3-STATE BUFFER..............IC74HC244
IC4 .. 1. QUAD 2-INPUT OR GATE..............IC74HC32
IC15-16 .. 2. 4096K NONVOLATILE SRAM............IR1250Y
.. 1. VIB PRO MODEM PROGRAMMED H8S......IZVPM
10/27/97 10/24/01 MRG

Page 2.10c
Page 2 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPMC-1

XRA82 .. 2. 16-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS16D-1
XSD1 16-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET.....JS16D-1
XIC2 .. 4. 32 PIN STRIP CARRIER SOCKETS......JS32SC
XIC8-9 32 PIN STRIP CARRIER SOCKETS......JS32SC
XKO1 .. 1. 6-POSITION SOLDER DIP SOCKET......JS6D
KO1 .. 1. OPTICALLY COUPLED RELAY...........KO8060
KS2 .. 1. 2 CHANNEL PHOTO COUPLE RELAY SM...KS224NA
IC9 .. 1. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA347
IC1 .. 2. QUAD HIGH SPEED PRECISION OP AMP..OA404
IC17 QUAD HIGH SPEED PRECISION OP AMP..OA404
IC2 .. 1. COMPARATOR........................OC311-1
IC11 .. 1. PRECISION VOLTAGE REFERENCE 5V....OV195
RA84 100K SIP RESISTOR PACK 10 PIN.....RA100KSIP1
RA82 .. 1. RESISTOR NETWORK 10K..............RA10K
10/27/97 10/24/01 MRG

Page 2.10c
Page 3 of 3
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPMC-1

RF45-48 .. 9. 39 OHM 1/4W 5% RESISTOR...........RF39UBE
RP81 .. 1. 10K MULTI TURN TRIM POT...........RP10K-4
TC2 .. 1. 50 TO 1000 OHM TRANSFORMER........TC33
TC1 .. 1. 10K TO 10K Z CT/CT TRANSFORMER....TC66
10/27/97 10/24/01 MRG

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPPSC-1
VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1
CE1-4 .. 4. 50MFD 50V ELECTRO. CAPACITOR......CE50MCF

DS1 .. 1. 50V 1A POWER DIODE................DS1N4001
PS2 .. 1. 9-36V INPUT +/-15 OUTPUT YFM......EP24-15Y
PS1 .. 1. 9-36V INPUT 5V OUTPUT YFM.........EP24-5Y
.. 1. VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1B PCB..GVPPSC-1B
.. 6. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 6. 1/16 SEMI HOLLOW RIVET............HR116
.. 2. 41 SERIES PCB MOUNT RETAINER......HR41
.. 6. 4-40X3/4 BH SS SCREW.............HS434B
.. 6. SPACER 1/4 RND .375 L 4-40THRD...HS8322
.. 1. 40-025 VIB PRO PWR SUPPLY PLATE...HVPPSMP
JCE .. 1. MOLEX #26-48-1086 8PIN PLUG.......PC8-1
10/14/97 06/23/98 MRG

KO1
KO6328
Page 2.12c
Page 1 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPSC-2
VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2
CD2-9 .. 10. .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM

CD16-17 .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM
CE1 .. 2. 10MFD 35V TANTALUM CAPACITOR......CE10MCF-1
.. 1. VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2A PCB.........GVPSC-2A
XPC1 .. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
CD1 .. 1. PCMCIA GUIDE RAIL LEFT............HPC68-L
CD1 .. 1. PCMCIA GUIDE RAIL RIGHT...........HPC68-R
TP1-7 .. 7. TEST POINT PCB MINIATURE..........HTP-6
J1 .. 1. SQUARE PIN SHORTING CLIP..........HX999
IC7 .. 1. 5V RESET CHIP.....................IC1233
IC5-6 .. 2. OCTAL BUFFER/LINE DRIVER..........IC74HCT245
.. 1. PCMCIA FLASH MEMORY CARD..........ICC008
IC1 .. 1. DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR..........ICDSP21060
IC3-4 .. 2. 4096K NONVOLATILE SRAM............IR1250Y
IC2 .. 1. VIB PRO SHARC PROGRAMMED EPROM....IZVPS
IC8 .. 1. VIB PRO SHARC PROGRAMMED PLD......IZVPS-PLD
KO1 .. 1. 29.492 Mhz OSCILLATOR.............KO6328
CD1 .. 1. PCMCIA TOP MOUNT CONNECTOR........PC68T
J1 .. 1. .025 SQ.3 PIN TERMINAL STRIP......PP36-3
P2 .. 2. .025 SQ.7 PIN TERMINAL STRIP......PP36-7
RA4 22K RESISTOR ARRAY SMT............RA22K-SM
RA2-3 .. 3. 39 OHM RESISTOR ARRAY SMT.........RA39U-SM
RA5 39 OHM RESISTOR ARRAY SMT.........RA39U-SM
RF1-3 .. 5. 20K 1/10W 1% RESISTOR 0805........RF20KC0805
RF10 20K 1/10W 1% RESISTOR 0805........RF20KC0805
01/22/01 01/03/02 KJG

Page 2.12c
Page 2 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPSC-2
VIB PRO SHARC CARD-2
RF8-9 .. 3. 22K 1/4W 5% RESISTOR..............RF22KBE

RF14 22K 1/4W 5% RESISTOR..............RF22KBE
RF4-7 .. 4. 33 OHM 1/10W 1% RESISTOR 0805.....RF33UC0805
RF13 .. 2. 39 OHM 1/4W 5% RESISTOR...........RF39UBE
01/22/01 01/03/02 KJG

Page 3.1
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPGPS
DUAL RADIO SUBMETER GPS SYSTEM
.. 1. GPS MANUAL........................AMGPS
.. 1. VIB PRO SUBMETER VIB GPS SYSTEM...FSVPSMGPS
WITH SEPARATE RTCM RADIO LINK
.. 1. VIB PRO SUBMETER REF STA SYSTEM...FSVPSRGPS
WITH SEPARATE RTCM RADIO LINK
.. 1. VIB PRO GPS TEST CABLE SET........WVPGPSTCS
.. 1. GPS ENCODER USER LICENSE..........YRGPS
04/22/98 10/13/2000 KJG

Pelton Company, Inc. Page 3.2
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSPSRGPS
PELTON SUBMETER REF STATION SYS

.. 1. GPS REF STATION INTERFACE.........FGREFGPSI
.. 1. SUB-METER GPS REF STATION SYSTEM..FSGPS-SMR
10/24/97 MRG
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPEGPS
VIB PRO ENCODER GPS SYSTEM
.. 1. GPS DOCUMENTATION.................AMGPS
.. 1. GPS SOFTWARE PACKAGE..............FGGPSSP
04/22/98 KJG
Page 3.4
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPSMGPS
VIB PRO SUB-METER VIB GPS SYSTEM
.. 1. GPS ANTENNA AND ANTENNA CABLE.....FGGPSANT

.. 1. PELTON RADIO MODEM................FGPRM
.. 1. VIB PRO SUB-METER GPS RECEIVER....FGVPGPS
.. 1. MALE-MALE 9D ONE WAY CABLE........W9DM-M-1
04/17/98 12/16/99 KJG

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPSK8
VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 GPS SYSTEM
.. 1. GPS L1 ANTENNA....................FGANTGPS
.. 1. VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 GPS RECEIVER...FGVPSK8
.. 1. N MALE TO N MALE RG8A 10M CABLE...WRG8A-10M
10/09/97 07/16/98 MRG

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPSK8
VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 GPS RECEIVER
.. 1. TRIMBLE SK-8 RECEIVER.............EFCTSK-8

.. 1. VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 MOUNTING CARD..FCVPSK8
.. 1. 6 INCH SMB TO N MALE CABLE........W33298
10/09/97 08/12/98 MRG

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPSK8
VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 MOUNTING CARD
B1 .. 1. LITHIUM 3.6 VOLT 1/2 AA...........BL3.6

.. 1. VIB PRO GPS MOUNTING CARD 1B PCB..GVPGPSMC-1B
.. 4. #4 3/16 X1/4 OD NYLON SPACER......HMPSP36
.. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 4. 4-40 HEX NUT......................HN440
.. 2. 3M 3435-0000 KEYING PLUG..........HPKEY
.. 4. 4-40X3/16 BH SS SCREW............HS4316B
.. 2. 10-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC10F
JC2 .. 1. 10 PIN 90 DEGREE PCB HEADER.......PP10-1
.. .500 16 CONDUCTOR COLOR FLAT CABLE.....W3302/16
08/12/98 KJG
Page 3.8
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPGPS
VIB PRO SUBMETER GPS RECEIVER
.. 1. TRIMBLE EUROCARD 12 CH DSM II.....EFCTEDSMII

.. 1. VIB PRO DSM MOUNTING PACKAGE......FGVPDSMMP
10/09/97 01/05/01 MRG

Page 3.9
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPDSM-2
VIB PRO DSM MOUNTING CARD - 2
.. 1. VIB PRO GPS MOUNTING CARD-2PCB....GVPGMC-2

.. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 4. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/2 FIL. HEAD SS SCREW....HS412F-1
.. 2. 34-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC34F-2
JC1 .. 1. 34 PIN 90 SHORT EJECTOR SOLDER....PP34-6
10/22/98 05/27/99 KJG

VIB PRO GPS MOUNTING CARD-2
Page 3.10c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPDSM-2
VIB PRO DSM MOUNTING CARD-2
.. 1. VIB PRO GPS MOUNTING CARD-2A PCB..GVPGMC-2A

.. 2. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 4. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/2 FIL. HEAD SS SCREW....HS412F-1
10/22/98 01/24/2000 KJG

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WGPSTCS
GPS TEST CABLE SET
.. 1. FEMALE-FEMALE 9D CABLE............W9DF-F
.. 2. MALE-FEMALE 9D CABLE..............W9DM-F
.. 1. RADIO BYPASS TEST CABLE...........WRBT
09/27/95 06/13/96 MRG

Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPEFMO
VIBPRO ENCODE FORCE METER OPTION
.. 3. FORCE METER ACC W/MAGNET & CABLE..FGFMA

.. 1. VIB PRO-E FORCE METER CABLE SET...WVPEFMCS
05/08/98 07/31/98 KJG

Page 3.13
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPS
VIB PRO SPARES
.. 1. EXTENDER CARD.....................FCEXT
.. 1. 96 PIN EXTENDER CARD..............FCEXT-1
.. 2. M5 ACCELEROMETER ASSEMBLY-5.......FGDACCA-5
.. 1. VIB PRO COMPONENT SPARES-3........FGVPCS-3
.. 1. VIB PRO TEST POINT SEL. SYSTEM....FSVPTPS
.. 1. 3/32 BALL HEX TOOL...............H332HEXT
.. 1. VIB PRO CARD PULLER...............HVPCP
09/12/00 08/15/2000 KJG

Page 3.14
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPGPS-SMR
VIB PRO SUBMETER REF STA & CBL

.. 1. GPS ANTENNA.......................HXAT575
.. 1. GPS ANTENNA CABLES................WGPSANT
07/14/98 01/05/01 KJG

Page 3.15
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPG
VIB PRO DIFF. GPS SYSTEM

.. 1. VIB PRO LASSEN SK8 GPS RECEIVER...FGVPSK8
.. 1. TRIMBLE MAG MOUNT SK8 ANTENNA.....HX28367
.. 1. N MALE TO SMB JACK ADAPTER........HXPE9313
10/02/98 KJG
Page 3.16a
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPZTA
VIB PRO ZERO TIME ADJUST
.. 1. FEMALE-FEMALE BNC ATTENUATOR......FGBA

.. 2. T-BNC CONNECTOR...................PRBNCT
.. 1. RG174 50 FOOT BNC CABLE W/REEL....WBNC174-50
09/11/98 KJG
Page 3.16c
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGBA
FEMALE-FEMALE BNC ATTENUATOR
.. .250 1/4 SHRINK TUBING.................ASHRINK14

.. 1. 2390 ENCLOSURE WITH 2 FEMALE BNC..HEBNCF-F
.. .250 22 GA. INSULATED BLACK WIRE.......W22GB
.. .250 22 GA. INSULATED BROWN WIRE.......W22GBR
09/11/98 KJG
Page 3.17a
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSDS
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY SYSTEM
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY MANUAL.....AMDS

.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY UNIT.......FGDS
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIM INPUT CABLE.......WDSI
.. 4. DISTRIBUTED SIM OUTPUT CABLE......WDSO
01/25/95 02/20/95 KJG

Page 3.17b
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGDS
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY UNIT
DL5 .. 1. SUPER BRIGHT LED LAMP RED.........DL50496R

.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY CARD-1.....FCDSC-1
.. 1. 39-051 DISTRIBUTED SIM ENCLOSURE..HEDS
.. 4. SHIELDED CONNECTOR GASKET.........HGASKET7
.. 1. LED HOLDER........................HLED-2
.. 4. 4-40 HEX NUT......................HN440
.. 8. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 12. 4-40 LOCK NUT/NYLON INSERT........HN440NL
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY FP LABEL...HODSFP
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIM. OUTPUT LABEL.....HODSO
.. 1. D TYPE CONNECTOR LATCH BLOCK......HRCSRDLB
.. 12. 4-40X1/2 BH SS SCREW.............HS412B
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/2 FH SS SCREW...........HS412F
.. 4. 4-40X5/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS458B
RP4 .. 2. 100K DIGITAL POT..................RP100K-3
RP8 100K DIGITAL POT..................RP100K-3
.. 1. DSU INTERNAL HARNESS, INPUT.......WDSUI
.. 1. DSU INTERNAL HARNESS, OUTPUT......WDSUO
01/25/95 11/19/97 KJG

Page 3.17e
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCDSC-1
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY CARD-1

CE8-9 .. 3. 10MFD 25V ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR..CE10MCH
CE14 10MFD 25V ELECTROLYTIC CAPACITOR..CE10MCH
CM3 1.0 MFD POLYCARBONATE CAPACITOR...CM1MDC
CS4 10 PFD. SILVER MICA CAPACITOR.....CS10PGE
PS1 .. 1. 9-36 IN +/-15 OUT 1.25x.8x.5H.....EP24-15-1
OA1-3 .. 3. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA444
RA24 .. 1. 100K SIP RESISTOR PACK............RA100KSIP
RA15 .. 1. RESISTOR NETWORK 2.2K.............RA2.2K
RA13-14 .. 2. RESISTOR NETWORK 22K.............RA22K-2
RF5 1.2 MEG 1/4W 5% RESISTOR..........RF1.2MBE
RP12 .. 1. 1.3 AMP POS TEMP COEF RESISTOR....RPTC1.3
01/25/95 05/05/2000 KJG

Page 3.17f
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSUO
DSU INTERNAL HARNESS, OUTPUT
.. 2. ACC EMI FILTER CARD IC SENSOR-5...FCAEMI-5

J1-4 .. 4. 2-SOCKET CHASSIS CONNECTOR........JM2E4S
OF1-8 .. 8. LOW PASS EMI PI SECTION FILTER....OF001
PB .. 1. 16-PIN DIP CABLE CONNECTOR........PC16F
01/25/95 KJG
Page 3.17g
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSUI
DSU INTERNAL HARNESS, INPUT
PA .. 1. 14-PIN DIP CABLE CONNECTOR........PC14F

J5 .. 1. FILTERED 9 PIN D CONNECTOR........PC9PF
.. .750 16 CONDUCTOR COLOR FLAT CABLE.....W3302/16
01/25/95 KJG
Page 3.17i
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSI
DISTRIBUTED SIM INPUT CABLE
.. 1. D CONN BACKSHELL GROMMET SET......HGD

.. 1. 9 D BACKSHELL WITH CLAMP..........HRCSR-9-1
.. 1. D TYPE CONNECTOR LATCH SPRING.....HRCSRDLS
.. 1. 12-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........PC12SR-2
P5 .. 1. 9 SOCKET D CONNECTOR..............PC9S
09/22/00 KJG
Page 3.17k
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSO
DISTRIBUTED SIM OUTPUT CABLE
01/25/95 KJG
Page 3.17l
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSDS-1
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY SYSTEM-1
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY MANUAL.....AMDS

.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY UNIT-1.....FGDS-1
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIM INPUT CABLE-1.....WDSI-1
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIM OUTPUT CABLE-1....WDSO-1
05/05/2000 KJG
Page 3.17m
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGDS-1
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY UNIT-1

.. 1. 5MM LED LENSE.....................HCMS322C
.. 1. 39-053 DISTRIBUTED SIM-1 ENCL.....HEDS-1
.. 4. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY LABEL......HODS
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY JA LABEL...HODSJA
.. 1. 5MM LED LENSE RETAINER RING.......HRNG268
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/2 FH SS SCREW...........HS412F
.. 4. SPACER 1/4 RND .25L 4-40THREAD...HS8321
05/05/2000 12/18/2000 KJG

J5
J1
Page 3.17p
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCDSC-1

PS1 .. 1. 9-36 IN +/-15 OUT 1.25x.8x.5H.....EP24-15-1
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY PCB-1A GDS-1A
.. 1. 14-PIN DIP HEADER HA14P
OA1-3 .. 3. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA444
01/25/95 05/05/2000 KJG

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
PELTON COMPANY,INC.
1500 N. Waverly
TITLE:

QUAN:
SCALE: DATE 05/15/2000 REV

DRAWN BYKJG APVD BY SHEET OF
Page 3.17r
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSI-1
DISTRIBUTED SIM INPUT CABLE-1

.. 1. 9 SOCKET D CONNECTOR..............PC9S
05/05/2000 02/05/01 KJG

PELTON COMPANY,INC.
1500 N. Waverly
TITLE:

QUAN:
SCALE: DATE 05/15/2000 REV 10/03/2000

Page 3.17t
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSO-1
DISTRIBUTED SIM OUTPUT CABLE-1

.. 1. 9 PIN D CONNECTOR.................PC9P
.. 1. DIST SIM OUTPUT CABLE.............WACA3054
09/22/00 02/05/01 KJG

Page 3.17u
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSDS-2
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY SYSTEM-2
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY UNIT-2.....FGDS-2

.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIM INPUT CABLE-2.....WDSI-2
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIM OUTPUT CABLE-2....WDSO-2
02/22/01 03/07/01 KJG

Page 3.17v
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGDS-2
DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY UNIT-2
.. 1. 1/8 SHRINK TUBING................ASHRINK18

DL5 .. 1. 5MM LED LENSE.....................HCMS322C
.. 1. 39-054 DISTRIBUTED SIM-2 ENCL.....HEDS-2
.. 12. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY-2 LABEL....HODS-2
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY JA LABEL...HODSJA
XDL5 .. 1. 5MM LED LENSE RETAINER RING.......HRNG268
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/2 FH SS SCREW...........HS412F
.. 8. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 4. SPACER 1/4 RND .25L 4-40THREAD...HS8321
JC5 .. 1. 6 SOCKET PANEL MOUNT..............JM2E6S
JC1 .. 1. 18-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR..........PP18
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED BLUE WIRE........W24GBL
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED GREEN WIRE.......W24GG
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED GRAY WIRE........W24GGR
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED ORANGE WIRE......W24GO
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED RED WIRE.........W24GR
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED VIOLET WIRE......W24GV
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED WHITE WIRE.......W24GW
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED WHT/BROWN........W24GW/BR
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED WHITE/ORNG WIRE..W24GW/O
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED WHITE/RED WIRE...W24GW/R
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED WHT/YELLOW WIRE..W24GW/Y
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED YELLOW WIRE......W24GY
02/22/01 06/27/2001 KJG

JC1
A
B
C
D
E
F
JC5
G
A
H
B
J
C
K
D
L
E
M
F
N
P
JM2E6S
R
S
T
U
PP18
Page 3.17y
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCDSC-2

DL5 .. 1. 3MM RED LED.......................DL4221
PS1 .. 1. 9-36 IN +/-15 OUT 1.25x.8x.5H.....EP24-15-1
.. 1. DISTRIBUTED SIMILARITY PCB-2......GDS-2
.. 1. 14-PIN DIP HEADER.................HA14P
OA1-3 .. 3. QUAD OP AMP.......................OA444
10/02/2000 02/22/01 MRG

1
2
3
4
5
6
7 A
8 B
9 C
10 D
11 E
12 F
PM6E6P
PELTON COMPANY,INC.
1500 N. Waverly
TITLE:

QUAN:
SCALE: DATE 02/22/01 REV

Page 3.17aa
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSI-2
DISTRIBUTED SIM INPUT CABLE-2

.. 1. 6 PIN CABLE CONNECTOR.............PM6E6P
02/22/01 KJG
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
N
P
R
S
T
U
PELTON COMPANY,INC.
1500 N. Waverly
TITLE:

QUAN:
SCALE: DATE 02/22/01 REV 03/07/01

Page 3.17ac
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WDSO-2
DISTRIBUTED SIM OUTPUT CABLE-2
.. 1. 18 SOCKET LONG BACKSHELL CONN.....JC18SJ

.. 1. DIST SIM OUTPUT CABLE.............WACA3054
02/22/01 03/07/01 KJG

Page 3.18a
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVSS
VIB VSS SYSTEM
.. 1. VIB VSS MANUAL....................AMVSS

.. 1. VIB VSS RECORDER SYSTEM...........FSVSSR
.. 1. VSS TRANSCRIBER...................FSVSST
05/24/99 05/26/99 MRG

Page 3.18b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVSSR
VIB VSS RECORDER SYSTEM
.. 1. VSS RECORDER ASSEMBLY.............FGVSSRA

.. 2. VSS PCMCIA FLASH MEMORY CARD......ICCVSSFLSH
.. 1. VIB VSS RECORDER Y-CABLE..........WVSSRY
.. 1. VSS USER LICENSE..................YRVSS
05/04/99 10/13/2000 MRG

Page 3.18c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVSSRA
VSS RECORDER ASSEMBLY
.. 1. VSS MOUNT ASSEMBLY................FGVSSM

.. 1. VIB VSS RECORDER UNIT.............FGVSSR
12/15/99 KJG
Page 3.18d
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVSSR
VIB VSS RECORDER UNIT
.. 8. 2 DIAM. BLACK CABLE TIE...........APAN-MO

.. 1. DUAL PCMCIA MODULE................ECVSSF
.. 1. VSS PCM PC104 COMPUTER............ECVSSM
.. 1. VIB VSS POWER SUPPLY CARD.........FCVSSPS
.. 1. 39-065 VSS RECORDER ENCLOSURE.....HEVSSR
.. 1. SHOT PRO COVER GASKET.............HGSP
.. 1. VSS RECORDER COVER GASKET.........HGVSSRC
.. 2. 10-32 NUT INSERT..................HN1032I
.. 8. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. PELCO PART # SERIAL # LABEL.......HOPELCO
.. 1. VSS FP LABEL......................HOVSS
.. 4. .3 INCH RUBBER PADS/ADHESIVE......HR5027BK
.. 10. 10-32X3/4 BH SS SCREW............HS1034B
.. 16. 4-40X1/4 BH SS SCREW.............HS414B
.. 4. 4-40 x 1/8 BH SCREW BLACK.........HS418BB
.. 6. 4-40 x 1 FH SS SCREW..............HS41F
.. 4. 4-40X3/4 FH SS SCREW.............HS434F
.. 1. 39-066 VSS REC ENCLOSURE COVER....HVSSC
.. 1. 39-067 VSS REC ENCLOSURE BASE.....HVSSEB
.. 1. 39-069 VSS REC ENCLOSURE HINGE....HVSSH
.. 1. 39-075 VSS REC CONNECTOR PANEL....HVSSRCP
.. 1. VSS 2 MEG DISK ON CHIP............ICVSSDOC
.. 1. VSS PCM 16MEG RAM.................ICVSSRAM
.. 1. VIB VSS RECORDER WIRING...........WVSS-R
.. 1. VSS INTERNAL DISPLAY CABLE........WVSSD
.. 1. VSS KEYBOARD WIRING...............WVSSK
05/04/99 01/24/2002 MRG

Page 3.18g
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVSSPS
VIB VSS POWER SUPPLY CARD
CE3-4 .. 2. 50MFD 50V ELECTRO. CAPACITOR......CE50MCF

PS1 .. 1. 9-36V INPUT 5V OUTPUT YFM.........EP24-5Y
.. 1. VIB PRO POWER SUPPLY CARD-1B PCB..GVPPSC-1B
.. 1. VSS POWER SUPPLY SWITCH ANGLE.....HVSSPSSA
.. 1. MOLEX #26-48-2086 8PIN PLUG.......PC8-1
ST1 .. 1. SPDT TOGGLE SWITCH................STSS
05/04/99 05/09/2001 MRG

Page 3.18h
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVSSM
VSS MOUNT ASSEMBLY
.. 3. 18 POUND SHOCK MOUNT..............HL150
.. 12. 10-32 KEP NUT 18-8................HN1032K
.. 12. 10-32X3/8 FLATHEAD SS SCREW.......HS1038F
.. 2. SOUTHCO LATCH HOOK................HS522-52
.. 4. 8-32 X 3/16 BH SS SCREW...........HS8316B
.. 1. 40-003 SHOT PRO MOUNTING PLATE....HSPMP
12/03/99 KJG
Page 3.18i
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVSSTB
VSS TEST BOX

.. 1. 2O. 10 SCREW MOUNT CABLE TIE......ANO.10
.. 1. VSS TEST BOX ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY...HEVSSA
.. 6. BELDEN 8524/1000 22GA GRAY........W22GGR
.. 12. BELDEN 8524/1000 22GA. VIOLET.....W22GV
09/22/00 KJG
Page 3.18j
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
HEVSSA
VSS TEST BOX ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY
.. 1.700 1/8 SHRINK TUBING................ASHRINK18

.. 1. VIB SOURCE SIGNATURE PCB..........GVSS
.. 1. 39-055 VSS TEST BOX ENCLOSURE.....HEVSS
.. 1. 1/8 BLACK AL. KNOB...............HKS5B8
.. 3. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. 4-40x3/8 HEX SPACER SS............HPH438
.. 1. 10-32 X 5/16 BINDING HEAD SCREW..HS10516B
.. 1. 15/16 RUBBER GROMMET..............HS2187
.. 2. 4-40X1/4 BH SS SCREW.............HS414B
.. 4. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 1. SPACER 3/16 HEX .875 L 4-40THRD..HS9157
JB .. 1. BNC CHASSIS CONNECTOR (ISOLATED)..JPBNC
JF .. 1. 41 PIN NON FILTERED CHASS CONN....PP41-NF
RF5 .. 2. 20.0 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.........RF20UBC
RF9 20.0 OHM 1/4W 1% RESISTOR.........RF20UBC
SR1 .. 1. 1P8T ROTORY SWITCH................SRS8T
ST2 .. 1. SPDT LOCKING TOGGLE SWITCH........STSSL
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED ORANGE WIRE......W24GO
.. .500 24 GA. INSULATED YELLOW WIRE......W24GY
02/24/99 12/14/99 KJG

Page 3.18m
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVSS-R
VIB VSS RECORDER WIRING

.. 1. 10-SOCKET STRAIN RELIEF...........JC10-2SR
.. 1. 10-SOCKET KEYED CABLE CONNECTOR...JC10F-2
.. 1. MOLEX #09-50-3081 8PIN C.SOCKET...JC8
.. 1. 25-PIN RECTANGULAR CONNECTOR......PC25P
.. 1. 4 PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR............PC4-2
.. 1.100 20 GA. INSULATED BLUE WIRE........W20GBL
.. 2.200 20 GA. INSULATED BROWN WIRE.......W20GBR
.. 1.100 20 GA. INSULATED GREEN WIRE.......W20GGN
.. 2.200 20 GA. INSULATED RED WIRE.........W20GR
.. 1.100 20 GA. INSULATED YELLOW WIRE......W20GY
.. 2.200 16 CONDUCTOR COLOR FLAT CABLE.....W3302/16
.. 1. 2 AMP BLADE TYPE M FUSE...........XBM2
.. 1. BLADE TYPE M INLINE FUSEHOLDER....XFBM
05/04/99 09/29/2000 MRG

Page 3.18o
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVSSRY
VIB VSS RECORDER Y-CABLE

.. 1. RND. CABLE STRAIN RELIEF PLASTIC..HRCSR-25
.. 2. 9 DIN CONNECTOR CLAMP.............HRCSR-9
.. 2. #10 INSULATED SPADE LUG...........HS270210
.. 2. ALLIGATOR CLIP SOLDER TYPE.......HS300
.. 1. ALLIGATOR CLIP BOOT BLACK........HS331B
.. 1. ALLIGATOR CLIP BOOT RED..........HS331R
.. 1. 25-SOCKET RECTANGULAR CONNECTOR...PC25S
.. 1. 5.54MM OD X 2.54MM ID POWER PLUG..PCPP-3
05/04/99 10/24/01 MRG

Page 3.18q
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVSSD
VSS INTERNAL DISPLAY CABLE
.. 1. 16 SOCKET KEYED CABLE CONNECTOR...JC16F-3

.. 1. 15PIN HI DENSITY D-SUB CONNECTOR..PC9-15HDS
02/22/2000 MRG
Page 3.18s
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVSSK
VSS KEYBOARD WIRING

.. 1. 6 PIN CRIMP CONNECTOR HOUSING.....JC6-3X2
.. 4. 22-24 AWG CRIMP SOCKET............JI1C
.. 1. FEMALE CIRCULAR 5 DIN CONNECTOR...JS5DIN
.. 1.670 16 CONDUCTOR COLOR FLAT CABLE.....W3302/16
09/27/2000 MRG
Page 3.19
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVSSN
VSS NAVIGATION OPTION
.. 1. VSS DISPLAY.......................ECVSSD
.. 1. VSS KEYBOARD......................ECVSSK
.. 1. PS/2 TO AT KEYBOARD ADAPTER.......HXPS/2-AT
.. 1. GPS NAVIGATION USER LICENSE.......YRGPSNAV
05/26/99 10/13/2000 MRG

Page 3.20b
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVPRIB
KENWOOD RADIO INTERFACE BOX

.. 1. NYLON INSULATOR 10 HOLE...........H7717-10N
.. 6. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 6. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. RADIO INTERCONNECT FP/OVERLAY.....HRIBFP/O-1
.. 1. 1/4 RUBBER GROMMET...............HS2170
.. 2. 4-40 X 1/2 FH SS SCREW...........HS412F
.. 1. 4-40X1/4 BH SS SCREW.............HS414B
.. 4. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 1. 4-40X5/16 FH SS SCREW............HS4516F
.. 1. SPACER 1/4 RND .5 L 4-40THREAD...HS8323
.. 1. 40-040 KENWOOD RADIO INTERFACE....HVPRIB
.. 10. MOUNTING PIN......................HVS1CMP
.. 1. 6 CONDUCTOR PHONE SURFACE JACK....JPHONE-2
.. 1. DPDT RELAY W/DRIVER (12VDC).......KM2TN
.. 1. 15 POSITION CONNECTOR SOCKET......PC15
.. 7. INSERTALE MALE CONNECTOR..........PI2103
.. 1. 5-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E5P
.. .250 24 GA. INSULATED VIOLET WIRE......W24GV
03/30/99 05/14/99 MRG

Page 3.20d
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVPRIB-1
KENWOOD RADIO INTERFACE BOX-1

.. 1. DUAL RADIO INTERFACE CARD-1.......GRCSW-1
.. 1. 40-045 VOICE RADIO I/F-KENWD ENC..HDRI/F-K
.. 8. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. 5/8 HOLE PLUG.....................HP5/8
.. 4. 4-40X5/16 FH SS SCREW............HS4516F
.. 4. SPACER 1/4 RND X 1/8 L #4 CLR.....HS8700
J1-J3 .. 3. SQUARE PIN SHORTING CLIP..........HX999
.. 3. 1-SOCKET CONNECTOR CONTACT........J18S
.. 2. NYLON 3 CIRCUIT RECEPTACLE........J3C
.. 2. 5 CONTACT CRIMP CONNECTOR.........JC5-1
KM1 .. 1. DPDT 12V RELAY....................KM412-12
.. 4. 1-PIN CONNECTOR CONTACT...........P18P
PC15 .. 1. 15 POSITION CONNECTOR SOCKET......PC15
.. 1. 3-POSITION RACK CONNECTOR.........PC3
.. 8. INSERTABLE MALE CONNECTOR.........PI2103
JP1 .. 1. 5-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR...........PM2E5P
J1-J3 .. 3. .025 SQ. 2 PIN TERMINAL STRIP.....PP36-2
.. 2. 5 PIN 90 DEGREE PCB MOUNT.........PP5
.. 4.500 24 GA. INSULATED GREEN WIRE.......W24GG
.. 4.500 24 GA. INSULATED GRAY WIRE........W24GGR
.. 4.500 24 GA. INSULATED ORANGE WIRE......W24GO
09/27/2000 01/22/2001 MRG

Page 3.21a
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPGPS-1
SINGLE RADIO SUBMETER GPS SYSTEM
.. 1. GPS MANUAL........................AMGPS
.. 1. VIB PRO SUBMETER VIB GPS SYSTEM...FSVPDGPS-1
USING VIB PRO RADIO FOR RTCM
.. 1. VIB PRO DSM REFERENCE STATION.....FSVPEGPS-1
.. 1. VIB PRO GPS TEST CABLE SET........WVPGPSTCS
.. 1. GPS ENCODER USER LICENSE..........YRGPS
05/28/99 10/13/2000 KJG

Page 3.21b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPDGPS-1
SINGLE RADIO FREQUENCY SUB METER

GPS SYSTEM FOR VIB PRO DECODER
.. 1. GPS ANTENNA AND ANTENNA CABLE.....FGGPSANT

.. 1. VIB PRO SUB-METER GPS RECEIVER....FGVPGPS
.. 1. VIB PRO DECODER SINGLE............WVPDSRF
RADIO FREQUENCY SHORTING PLUG
05/28/99 12/16/99 KJG

Page 3.21c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPEGPS-1
VIB PRO DSM REFERENCE STATION


.. 1. RADIO COMMUNICATION MODULE........FGRCC
AND CABLE
.. 1. RCC RADIO CONTROL SWITCH BOX......FGRCCRC
.. 1. GPS ANTENNA.......................HXAT575
.. 1. GPS ANTENNA CABLES................WGPSANT
05/28/99 01/05/01 KJG

Page 3.21d
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGRCC
RADIO COMMUNICATION MODULE

AND CABLE
.. 1. RADIO COMMUNICATION MODULE........FORCC

.. 1. RADIO COMMUNICATION MODULE CABLE..WRCC
05/28/99 KJG
Page 3.21g
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCRCC-1
RADIO COMMUNICATION CARD -1
C24 .. 1. .0018 MFD CERAMIC 5% 1206.........C1.8NE1206

C19 .. 1. .022 MFD CERAMIC 5% 1825..........C22NE1825
C21 .. 1. 22 PFD CERAMIC 5% 0805............C22PE0805
C23 .. 2. 680 PFD CERAMIC 5% 0805...........C680PE0805
C31 680 PFD CERAMIC 5% 0805...........C680PE0805
C3-7 .. 19. .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM
C10-15 .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM
C22 .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM
C25-30 .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM
C32 .1 MFD 0805 CAPACITOR S.M.........CD.1SM
CE1-2 .. 6. 10 MFD TANTALUM 20% 7343..........CE10MH7343
CE8-9 10 MFD TANTALUM 20% 7343..........CE10MH7343
CE16-17 10 MFD TANTALUM 20% 7343..........CE10MH7343
CE18 .. 1. 6.8 MFD TANTALUM 20% 7343.........CE6.8MH7343
DL3-5 .. 3. ORN/GRN DUAL LED SURFACE MOUNT....DL907HK
DS1 .. 1. 1 AMP SURFACE MOUNT BRIDGE........DS00FS
DS9 .. 2. 1A GLASS PASSIVATED RECTIFIER.....DS1B/BB
DS10 1A GLASS PASSIVATED RECTIFIER.....DS1B/BB
DZ2 .. 1. DUAL ZENER DIODES SOT-23..........DZ23C10
DZ7 .. 2. 350MW ZENER SOT-23................DZBZX84C5V6
DZ8 350MW ZENER SOT-23................DZBZX84C5V6
PS2 .. 1. 5V TO +/-15V CONVERTER SOIC.......EP0515TM
PS1 .. 1. 9-36 IN +5 OUT 1.25x.8x.5H........EP24-5-1
.. 1. RADIO COMMUNICATION CARD-1B PCB...GRCC-1B
.. 4. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 2. 4-40X1/2 BH SS SCREW.............HS412B
.. 2. 4-40X1/4 BH SS SCREW.............HS414B
IC3 .. 1. 5 VOLT RESET SOT-223..............IC1233DZ-15
IC4 .. 1. +5V RS-232 DRVRS/RCVRS SSOP.......IC208ARS
IC1 .. 1. 256 BIT 1 WIRE EEPROM TSOC........IC2430AP
IC6 .. 1. VOLTAGE COMPARATOR MO8A...........IC311M
IC5 .. 1. QUAD OP AMP SOIC..................IC404U
IC8 .. 1. HEX INVERTER WITH OPEN DRAIN SM...IC74AC05SC
IC2 .. 2. QUAD 2-INPUT OR GATE SM...........IC74HC32AD
IC9 QUAD 2-INPUT OR GATE SM...........IC74HC32AD
IC7 .. 1. UNIVERSAL ACTIVE FILTER SOL-16....ICUAF42U
.. 1. RCC PROGRAMMED H8S................IZRCC
KO4 .. 1. DUAL LOGIC GATE OPTOCOUPLER.......KO2232
05/21/99 04/04/01 KJG

Page 3.21g
Pelton Company
Page 2 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCRCC-1
RADIO COMMUNICATION CARD -1
KO5 .. 2. OPTICAL COUPLER...................KO4N32

KO6 OPTICAL COUPLER...................KO4N32
KO1 .. 1. 20 MHz OSCILLATOR.................KO740020
KO3 .. 1. OPTICAL SOLID STATE RELAY.........KOC60-10
KS2 .. 1. 2 CHANNEL PHOTO COUPLE RELAY SM...KS224NA
JC .. 1. FILTERED 25 PIN D-SUB 90 DEGREE...PC25PF-90
JDB .. 1. 4 PIN TERMINAL STRIP..............PP36-4
RA1-3 .. 3. 22K RESISTOR ARRAY SMT............RA22K-SM
RF23 .. 1. 100K 1/10W 1% RESISTOR 0805.......RF100KC0805
RF5 .. 2. 100 OHM 1/1OW 1% RESISTOR 0805....RF100UC0805
RF24 100 OHM 1/1OW 1% RESISTOR 0805....RF100UC0805
RF22 .. 4. 10K 1/10W 1% RESISTOR 0805........RF10KC0805
RF26 .. 3. 1K 1/8W 1% RESISTOR 1206..........RF1KC1206
RF42 1K 1/8W 1% RESISTOR 1206..........RF1KC1206
RF44 1K 1/8W 1% RESISTOR 1206..........RF1KC1206
RF20 .. 1. 2K 1/8W 1% RESISTOR 1206..........RF2KC1206
RF9 .. 5. 402 OHM 1/8W 1% RESISTOR 1206.....RF402UC1206
RF37-40 402 OHM 1/8W 1% RESISTOR 1206.....RF402UC1206
RF13-14 .. 2. 49.9K 1/10W 1% RESISTOR 0805......RF49.9KC0805
RF18 .. 1. 5.49K 1/10W 1% RESISTOR 0805......RF5.49KC0805
RF45 .. 2. 698K 1/8W 1% RESISTOR 1206........RF698KC1206
RP8 .. 1. 10K MULTI TURN TRIM POT...........RP10K-4
TC1 .. 1. 10K TO 10K Z CT/CT TRANSFORMER....TC66
TC2 .. 1. DUAL SECONDARY AUDIO XFMR.........TC69
05/21/99 04/04/01 KJG

Page 3.21i
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGRCCRC
RCC RADIO CONTROL
.. 1. RCC RADIO CONTROL ENCLOSURE.......HERCCRC

J1-2 .. 2. BNC CHASSIS CONNECTOR (ISOLATED)..JPBNC
ST1 .. 1. SPDT TOGGLE SWITCH................STSS
11/10/99 KJG
Page 3.21k
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WRCC
RADIO COMMUNICATION MODULE CABLE

.. 1. 25 DSUB CONNECTOR BACKSHELL.......HRCSR-25-1
.. 1. 5-PIN CABLE CONNECTOR.............PM1A5P
.. 1. CONNECTOR CABLE CLAMP.............PSR
.. .500 10 FOOT BNC TO BNC COAX CABLE.....WRBNC-10
F1 .. 1. 1 AMP AGC FUSE NORMAL BLOW........XAGC1
.. 1. FUSE HOLDER IN LINE WATERPROOF....XFHIL-W
.. 2. FUSE HOLDER FOR HFB...............ZBK/1A2294
12/21/99 07/10/01 KJG

Page 3.21l
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FORCC
RADIO COMMUNICATION MODULE
.. 1. RADIO COMMUNICATION CARD -1.......FCRCC-1

.. 1. 39-042 MODEM MOUNTING ANGLE.......HMMA
.. 1. 10-607 8 MODULE CONTAINER........HMODCAN
.. 1. 39-044 RCC CONNECTOR ANGLE........HRCCCA
.. 4. 10-32 X 1/2 SCKT. HEAD NYLON TIP..HS1012S
.. 4. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 4. 4-40X3/8 FH SS SCREW.............HS438F
.. 2. D CONNECTOR MOUNTING SCREW .5.....HSD20418-5
05/28/99 08/31/2001 KJG

Page 3.22a
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPTK
VIB PRO TEST KIT
.. 1. VIB PRO TEST MANUAL...............AMVPT

.. 2. H8S MICROPROCESSOR CARD-1.........FCH8SMC-1
.. 1. FEMALE-FEMALE 1 FOOT 9D CABLE.....W9DF-F-1
.. 1. MALE-FEMALE 1 FOOT 9D CABLE.......W9DM-F-1
.. 1. VIB PRO H8S TEST FIRMWARE.........YEVPH8ST
.. 1. VIB PRO MODEM TEST FIRMWARE.......YEVPMT
.. 1. VIB PRO SHARC TEST FIRMWARE.......YEVPST
07/31/98 10/19/99 KJG

Page 3.22c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
W9DF-F-1
FEMALE-FEMALE 1 FOOT 9D CABLE

10/15/99 KJG
Page 3.22e
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
W9DM-F-1
MALE-FEMALE 1 FOOT 9D CABLE

10/15/99 KJG
Page 3.23a
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVNO
VIBRATOR NETWORK OPTION
.. 1. VIB NET SOFTWARE PACKAGE..........FGMSP

.. 1. VIBNET COMPUTER & LABEL...........FGVPCECOMP
.. 1. VIB NET DATA MODULE...............FOVN
.. 1. VIBNET MOUNTING ASSEMBLY..........HVNMA
.. 1. 8M PCMCIA FLASH MEMORY CARD.......ICC008
05/03/2000 08/16/2000 KJG

Page 3.23b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FOVN
VIB NET DATA MODULE
.. 1. VIBRATOR NETWORK I/F CARD-1.......FCVNI/FC-1

.. 1. SPREAD SPECTRUM RADIO-900.........FGSSRADIO
.. 1. 010 ORING.........................HA010
.. 1. 39-081 VIBNET RADIO ENCLOSURE.....HEVN
.. 3. LED LITEPIPE......................HLSV040C
.. 3. 4-40 HEX NUT......................HN440
.. 1. VIB NET RADIO FCC LABEL...........HOVNRFCC
.. 1. VIB NET RADIO MODULE LABEL........HOVNRM
.. 2. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 3. 4-40X5/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS458B
.. 3. LED LENS PANEL MOUNT..............HSML190C
.. 1. SPREAD SPECTRUM ANTENNA CABLE.....HXAC
.. 1. SPREAD SPECTRUM ROOF MOUNT ANT....HXRMA
05/03/2000 08/24/2000 KJG

Page 3.23c
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVN-900
VIBRATOR NETWORK SYSTEM-900
.. 1. VIBNET COMPUTER & LABEL...........FGVPCECOMP

.. 1. VIBNET DATA MODULE-900............FOVN-900
.. 1. VIBNET MOUNTING ASSEMBLY..........HVNMA
.. 1. 8M PCMCIA FLASH MEMORY CARD.......ICC008
.. 1. VIBNET USER LICENSE...............YRVN
10/13/2000 KJG
Page 3.23d
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPCECOMP
VIBNET COMPUTER & LABEL
.. 1. TWO TECH COMPUTER.................ECTT

.. 1. VIBNET COMPUTER LABEL.............HOVNC
.. 1. TWO TECH DISPLAY COVER............HTTDC
10/12/2000 10/18/2000 KJG

Page 3.23e
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FOVN-900
VIBNET DATA MODULE-900
.. 1. VIBRATOR NETWORK I/F CARD-1.......FCVNI/FC-1

.. 1. SPREAD SPECTRUM RADIO-900.........FGSSRADIO
.. 1. 010 ORING.........................HA010
.. 1. 39-081 VIBNET RADIO ENCLOSURE.....HEVN
.. 3. LED LITEPIPE......................HLSV040C
.. 3. 4-40 HEX NUT......................HN440
.. 1. VIB NET RADIO FCC LABEL...........HOVNRFCC
.. 1. VIB NET RADIO MODULE LABEL........HOVNRM
.. 2. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 3. 4-40X5/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS458B
.. 3. LED LENS PANEL MOUNT..............HSML190C
.. 1. SPREAD SPECTRUM ANTENNA CABLE.....HXAC
.. 1. SPREAD SPECTRUM ROOF MOUNT ANT....HXRMA
10/10/2000 KJG
Page 3.23f
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
HVNMA
VIBNET MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
.. 1. 2 DIAM. BLACK CABLE TIE...........APAN-MO

.. 2. 10-32 KEP NUT 18-8................HN1032K
.. 4. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. 6-32 KEP NUT 18-8.................HN632K
.. 2. 10-32X1/2 BH SS SCREW............HS1012B
.. 4. 6-32X1/2 BH SS SCREW.............HS612B
.. 4. 6-32X3/4 BH SS SCREW.............HS634B
.. 1. 6 INCH SWIVEL MOUNT...............HS6SM
.. 1. 39-082 VIB NET MOUNTING BRACHET...HVNMB
.. 1. 39-084 VIB NET RADIO MOUNT........HVNRM
.. 1. VIB NET POWER/DATA CABLE..........WVNPD
10/10/00 MRG
JC2
1
2
3
4
PC1
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
07/31/2000
Page 3.23i
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVNI/FC-1
VIBRATOR NETWORK I/F CARD-1

CE1-2 .. 2. 100MFD 35V TANTALUM CAPACITOR....CE100MCF
DL4 .. 1. YELLOW LED........................DL5093YD
DL2-3 .. 2. LED LAMP GREEN....................DL521G
PS1 .. 1. 7-30 IN +5 OUT 1.5 AMP SUPPLY.....EP7/30-5
.. 1. VIBRATOR NETWORK I/F CARD-1 PCB...GVNI/FC-1
.. 3. 1/16 NYLON STANDOFF...............HMPS62
IC2 .. 1. HEX INVERTER......................IC74HC04
JC2 .. 1. 20 SOCKET 2MM CONNECTOR PCB.......JC20-2
.. 1. 14-PIN LOW PROFILE DIP SOCKET.....JS14DL
PC1 .. 1. FILTERED 9 PIN D-SUB PCB..........PC9PF-1
05/03/2000 07/28/2000 KJG

Page 3.23k
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNPD-2
VIB NET POWER/DATA CABLE

.. 1. 1/4 SHRINK TUBING.................ASHRINK14
.. 2. D-SUB SPRING LATCH PLATE KIT......HD110278
.. 1. 3 SOCKET SWITCHCRAFT CONNECTOR....PC3-2
.. 1. SPDT ON/ON PUSHBUTTON SWITCH......SPSD-3
05/11/01 07/10/01 KJG

Page 3.23l
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVNSRIF
VIB NET/SINGLE RADIO INTERFACE
.. 1. VIB NET ESG INTERFACE SYSTEM......FSVNEIF

.. 1. VIB NET DUAL RIF-KENWOOD W/CABLE..WVNDRI/F-KC
.. 1. VIB NET DUAL RADIO I/F W/CABLE....WVNDRI/FC
10/12/2000 KJG
Page 3.23m
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVNEIF
VIB NET ESG INTERFACE SYSTEM

.. 1. VIB NET/ESG I/F CABLE SET.........WVNEIFCS
10/10/2000 KJG
Page 3.23n
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNEIFCS
VIB NET/ESG I/F CABLE SET

.. 1. VIB NET/ESG I/F CABLE.............WVNEIF
10/10/2000 KJG
Page 3.23p
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNVPEI/F
VIBNET VPE I/F CABLE

.. 1. 25 DSUB CONNECTOR BACKSHELL.......HRCSR-25-1
F1 .. 1. 1 AMP AGC FUSE NORMAL BLOW........XAGC1
.. 1. FUSE HOLDER IN LINE WATERPROOF....XFHIL-W
.. 2. FUSE HOLDER FOR HFB...............ZBK/1A2294
10/18/2000 07/10/01 KJG

Page 3.23q
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNDRI/F-KC
VIB NET DUAL RIF-KENWOOD W/CABLE
.. 1. BNC TO BNC STRAIGHT COAX CABLE....WRBNC

.. 1. VIB NET DUAL RADIO I/F-KENWOOD....WVNDRI/F-K
10/12/2000 KJG
Page 3.23r
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNDRI/FC
VIB NET DUAL RADIO I/F W/CABLE

.. 1. VIB NET DUAL RADIO I/F............WVNDRI/F
10/12/2000 KJG
Page 3.23t
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNVPDVRI/F
VIBNET VPD VOICE RADIO I/F

.. 1. 40-046 VOICE RADIO I/F ENCLOSURE..HDRI/F
.. 1. 7/8 RUBBER GROMMET................HG78
.. 12. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/2 FH SS SCREW...........HS412F
JA .. 1. 2-SOCKET CHASSIS CONNECTOR........JM2E4S
JP1 .. 1. 5-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR..........JM6E5S
KM2 .. 1. DPDT 12V RELAY....................KM412-12
PC15 .. 1. 9 PIN D CONNECTOR.................PC9P
10/30/2000 06/05/01 KJG

Page 3.23v
Page 1 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNVPDVRI/F-K
VIBNET VPD VOICE RADIO I/F KENWD

DS2 50V 1A POWER DIODE................DS1N4001
.. 1. 40-045 VOICE RADIO I/F-KENWD ENC..HDRI/F-K
.. 12. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. 4-40X5/16 FH SS SCREW............HS4516F
.. 3. 1-SOCKET CONNECTOR CONTACT........J18S
.. 2. NYLON 3 CIRCUIT RECEPTACLE........J3C
JP2 .. 1. 6 CONDUCTOR PCB PHONE JACK........JPHONE-PCB
KM1 .. 2. DPDT 12V RELAY....................KM412-12
KM2 DPDT 12V RELAY....................KM412-12
.. 4. 1-PIN CONNECTOR CONTACT...........P18P
PC15 .. 1. 15 POSITION CONNECTOR SOCKET......PC15
.. 1. 3-POSITION RACK CONNECTOR.........PC3
.. 8. INSERTABLE MALE CONNECTOR.........PI2103
Q1-2 .. 2. NPN GENERAL PURPOSE TRANSISTOR....Q2N3904
10/30/2000 06/05/01 KJG

Page 3.23v
Page 2 of 2
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNVPDVRI/F-K
VIBNET VPD VOICE RADIO I/F KENWD

10/30/2000 06/05/01 KJG

Page 3.23x
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVNVPEI/F
VIBNET VPE VOICE RADIO I/F

.. 1. VIBNET VPE I/F CABLE SET..........WVNVPEI/FCS
10/18/2000 KJG
Page 3.23y
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNVPEI/FCS
VIBNET VPE I/F CABLE SET

.. 1. VIBNET VPE I/F CABLE..............WVNVPEI/F
10/18/2000 KJG
Page 3.23z2
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVPVNRD
VIB PRO VIBNET REMOTE DOWN CABLE

.. 1. #16 90 DEG. END BELL..............HM3182
10/19/2000 10/31/2000 KJG

Page 3.23ac
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVNVPDVRI/F-V
VIBNET VPD VOICE RADIO I/F VERTX

.. 1. 40-046 VOICE RADIO I/F ENCLOSURE..HDRI/F
.. 12. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. 4-40 X 1/2 FH SS SCREW...........HS412F
KM2 .. 1. DPDT 12V RELAY....................KM412-12
PC15 .. 1. 9 PIN D CONNECTOR.................PC9P
12/07/2000 06/05/01 MRG

Page 3.24a
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
HAVPG750
VIB PRO BD750 MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
.. 1. VIB PRO BD750 MOUNTING CARD.......FCVPG750

.. 1. SMA 90D MALE - SMA 90D MALE 6"....HX3876-6
06/21/01 KJG
Page 3.24d
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FCVPG750
VIB PRO BD750 MOUNTING CARD
.. 1. VIB PRO BD750 MOUNTING CARD PCB...GVPG750

.. 6. 2-56 HEX NUT......................HN256
.. 4. 2-56 x 1/2 HEX SPACER.............HPH212
06/01/01 KJG
Page 3.25b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGVPBOB
VIB PRO BREAKOUT BOX

.. .500 3/16 SHRINK TUBING...............ASHRINK316
.. 1. #16 90 DEG. END BELL..............HM3182
.. 4. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 1. 40-038 VIB PRO BREAKOUT BOX ENCL..HVPBOB
.. 1. 40-039 VIB PRO BREAKOUT BOX FP....HVPBOB/FP
JC1 .. 1. 18-SOCKET CABLE CONNECTOR.........JC18SR
JP2-6 .. 5. BNC CHASSIS CONNECTOR (ISOLATED)..JPBNC
.. 1. 18-PIN CHASSIS CONNECTOR..........PP18
.. 6.500 22 GA. INSULATED BLACK WIRE.......W22GB
.. .500 BELDEN 8524/1000 22GA GRAY........W22GGR
.. 6.500 22 GA. INSULATED YELLOW WIRE......W22GY
10/24/2001 MRG
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FSVPTPS
VIB PRO TEST POINT SEL. SYSTEM
.. 1. VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR BOX.......FGA2TEST

.. 1. VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR CABLE.....WM-TPS
04/22/98 KJG
Page 4.2b
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
FGA2TEST
VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR BOX
.. 1. A2 VIB. ELEC. T.P. SEL. BOX ENCL..HE35-010

.. 2. .82 DIA. 1/4 SHAFT KNOB..........HKB1/4S
.. 2. BLACK KNOB CAP....................HKB1/4S-1
.. 2. 4-40 HEX NUT......................HN440
.. 2. 4-40X1/2 BH SS SCREW.............HS412B
.. 1. 35-020 ADVII/ADVIII TEST POINT....HTPSFP/O-1
SELECTOR FRONT PANEL
.. 4. FUSEHOLDER ANTI ROTATION WASHER...HXLFARW
JA-D .. 4. BNC CHASSIS CONNECTOR (ISOLATED)..JPBNC
P1 .. 1. 50-PIN CABLE CONNECTOR............PP50F
.. 1. BLACK SINGLE LOCKING CONNECTOR....PW8224
.. 3. SINGLE LOCKING CONNECTOR CONTACT..PW8266
.. 2. RED SINGLE LOCKING CONNECTOR......PW8992
SWA-B .. 2. 24 POSITION ROTARY SWITCH.........SR24
11/04/87 05/17/2000 JAB

PC2
ADVIII
VIB PRO
PC1
PC25P
JC50F-1
PELTON COMPANY,INC.
1500 N. Waverly
TITLE:
VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR CABLE
MAT'L: NUMBER REVISION

QUAN: WM-TPS
SCALE: DATE 08/16/94 REV 08/20/98

DRAWN BY KJG APVD BY SHEET OF
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WM-TPS
VIB TEST POINT SELECTOR CABLE
.. 1. RND. CABLE STRAIN RELIEF PLASTIC..HRCSR-25

.. 1. 25-PIN RECTANGULAR CONNECTOR......PC25P
07/21/95 MRG
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
W9DF-F
FEMALE-FEMALE 9D CABLE

.. 8. 24 GA INSULATED GREEN WIRE........W24GG
06/08/93 JAB
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
W9DM-M-1
MALE-MALE 9D ONE WAY CABLE

.. .250 1/4 SHRINK TUBING.................ASHRINK14
07/14/98 KJG
Page 5.3b
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WVPESG
VIB PRO ADV II ESG ADAPTER CABLE

.. 1. VIB PRO ENCODER ADAPTER ASSEMBLY..HEVPEAA
.. 1. #16 90 DEG. END BELL..............HM3182
06/01/98 06/04/98 KJG

Page 5.3c
Pelton Company, Inc
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
HEVPEAA
VIB PRO ENCODER ADAPTER ASSEMBLY
.. 1.700 1/8 SHRINK TUBING................ASHRINK18

.. 1. 2-637 VIB PRO ENCODER ADAPTER.....HEVPEA
.. 4. 4-40 KEP NUT......................HN440K
.. 4. 6-32 KEP NUT 18-8.................HN632K
.. 1. VIB PRO-ADVII ESG ADAPTER LABEL...HOVPESGA
.. 1. 2-638 VIB PRO-ESG ADAP.SW/PLATE...HOVPESGASP
.. 4. 4-40X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS438B
.. 4. 6-32X1/2 FH SS SCREW.............HS612F
.. 8. 6-32X3/8 BH SS SCREW.............HS638B
TS1-2 .. 2. TERMINAL STRIP 6 TERMINAL........HS858
.. 4. 6-32 X 1.625 STANDOFF.............HS8761V
JA-B .. 2. BNC CHASSIS CONNECTOR (ISOLATED)..JPBNC
JF .. 1. 41 PIN NON FILTERED CHASS CONN....PP41-NF
RF3
RF5
RF4
RF6
ST1-3 .. 3. DPDT TOGGLE SWITCH................STDDM-2
ST4 .. 1. 4PDT TOGGLE SWITCH................STDDP-1
06/01/98 07/30/98 KJG

Page 5.4b
Pelton Company
Page 1 of 1
BILL OF MATERIALS
WRCSA
RECORDER COMMAND SEQ ADAPTER

.. 2. D CONNECTOR MOUNTING SCREW .5.....HSD20418-5
08/22/2000 KJG

Vibpro

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Vibpro

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Pelton Company, Inc.

The information contained herein is proprietary to

Access and download the latest Pelton information and upgrades:

Phone and Fax:

USA phone (580) 762-6341

BASIC SYSTEM OPERATION

POLARITY AND PHASE INFORMATION.................................. 3.1.1

SWEEP GENERATION & CONTROL

RADIO TELEMETRY (PSS AND START CODES)............................. 5.1.1

Typically there is a pair of accelerometers mounted on the vibrators

In each pair of accelerometers one is used for the feedback control

Version 2 September 15, 1998

Version 3 September 15, 1998

Version 3-B November 9, 1998

Version 3-C November 10, 1998

Version 4 October 02, 1998

Version 5 November 9, 1998

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Version 7 February 19, 1999

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Version 7A-2 April 20, 1999

Version 7A-3 May 18, 1999

Version 7B April 28, 1999

Main H8S Version 20

Time Break Active - High or Low

Recorder Start Active - High or Low

GPS PPS Active - High or Low

Version 7C May 11, 1999

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Version 7C-4 June 29, 1999

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Version 8 August 30, 1999

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Sharc Version 10.15

Sharc Version 10.16

Version 8A September 24, 1999

Sharc Version 10.17

Sharc Version 10.18

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Modem Version 0005

Version 9 March 27, 2000

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

Main H8S Version 0032

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

1. Added status display:

Internal operating voltages: +5VDC, +15VDC, -15VDC, +30VDC, -30VDC

Vibrator interface voltages:

Software version displayed:

2. Eliminated false sweep starts:

3. Added second radio select for ready button.

For full descriptions of revisions see Appendix D 08May02

To be compatible with Vib Pro versions prior to 10, 400msec must be

6. Auto Lift Message:

7. Version identification changed:

8. Improved high frequency sweeps:

Sharc algorithm changed to improve sweeping to high frequency. With this

7) 9 pin GPS serial control connector. This Serial port connects

G) Soft Keys - 8 soft keys are software programmable. The key

H) Main Keypad - Used to enter parameters.

I) Start / Stop - Start button allows to manually start a sweep. The

J) GPS Antenna - Used to connect an external GPS antenna to the